Home

CELFRAME OFFICE 2008 USER MANUAL

1. Radial Blur This effect is similar to Motion Blur except that the movement is spread through concentric circles instead of a straight line Unfocus This effect looks similar to Gaussian Blur at first but it gives a more dreamy or unfocused look to the image In mathematical terms it applies a more uniform weighting to the pixels within the requested radius Original Modified al Zoom Blur This effect gives the appearance of motion or blurring in the 3rd dimension coming out of the image Original Modified a i Distort Effects These are meant to distort or convolute the image often beyond recognition Last Filter Pencil Sketch Ctri F Artistic Blurs Bulge Moise Frosted Glass Photo Pixelate Pender Polar Inversion Stylize d Tile Reflection Twist Bulge This effect is used to make part of an image appear close or further away as if the image had been squeezed Original Modified D Frosted Glass This will make the image appears as though it were being viewed through a sheet of frosted glass D Pixelate This effect will reduce the detail in the image and give the effect that each pixel was much larger Original Modified a Ei Pola
2. 6 Line Count No Dropdown list open to reveal choices Click the Data tab a Type of list contents is a dropdown list Change it to Sql b Type the following exactly as it is in the List contents box SELECT Type Type FROM Genre Type You should be able to copy and paste SELECT Type Type FROM Genre from above directly into the List content box Just make sure you copy from the S in SELECT to the double quotation mark after the phrase Genre and no more than this 7 Close the Properties window lt AutoField gt Position of controls in main form Step 7 Change the Note field We want the Note control where it is located in Since it has a memo field type it needs a vertical scrollbar for additional text space if desired 1 Click the Note control 2 Control click the Note field The green handles should surround the Note field but not its label 3 Click the Control icon to open the Properties window 4 Scroll down to the Scrollbars setting Change the selection from None to Vertical in this dropdown list None Horizontal PAGS laxi o Petey URE ee eeeeee eee Scrollbar selections in Properties window Close the Properties window Lengthen the Note field Move the cursor over the middle green handle at the bottom of the Note field It becomes a vertical single arrow lt AutoField gt Step 8 Change labels and fields in a subform The
3. Pressing the address book button will also open a new window you will now be able to see which mail address you currently got you can also add new cards send a message to someone who is in your address book Reply The reply button will open and new window including the text from the mail highlighted in your inbox Reply all Will include all recipients of the email replied to i e everybody listed in the To or Copy field will receive the reply Forward The forward button opens a new window with the highlighted message either as an attachment or in lined included as text in the new message Delete The delete button will delete the highlighted mail message if you re a fan of the keyboard the delete button has the same function Junk The junk button will mark the highlighted message as junk AKA spam Print The print button will print the highlighted message Stop The stop button will abort the current action useful for example if you want to abort sending a big message or stop downloading thousands of messages from newsgroups Read an mail When opening your Celframe Office Mail client it will automatically connect to mail server and look for new mail These mails will then be downloaded to your inbox viewed as a subfolder of your email address on the left Click on the inbox and your m
4. _ Images om k h cots gt NINO No O co co o o O Lossless compression JPEG compression 122 Quality 90 si 122 LJ oe YSTEMAVEB 123 C Reduce image resolution 300 DPI 133 General I E en j M PROGRAMMER Export notes Export bookmarks M PROGRAMMER 7 Create PDF form EMENT CUM WEB DEVELOPER Submit format FDF Mj om a im Elso ola D g cT m Z O D m IE Z E D Mm als lal fal sleiale Eji T z gt z a m i m n D m par m D D in _ Ma MINIM MINN MONIT N hyn ISS OOo oa 30 Export automatically inserted blank pages 31 32 cancel Hep TEST ENGINEER 33 24 PORT OFFICER 34 25 AMATURAHMAN BIN AMRUN WEB MASTER 35 36 Cd a lt gt T Sheets Sheet2 Sheets 7 i gt l Sheet 1 3 PageStyle_Sheet1 100 Ism Ji L_ Sum 0 Export to PDF Email Backup Multi Format Backup Remote Backup Email Backup can be used to quickly send a backup copy of the currently opened document to a specified email address Multi format Backup macro saves the currently opened Celframe Write document in the Word RTF and TXT formats The backup files are stored in a separate folder with a date stamp On Linux the macro also archives the resulting folder using the tar utility On Windows there is an option to use the 7 zip compression tool Remote
5. Inserting Pictures Choose Insert Picture Choose from file or scanner Locate the picture you want to insert Select the Link check box to insert only a link to the picture If you want to see the picture before you insert it select Preview After you insert a linked picture do not change the name of the S source picture or move the source picture to another directory Click Open to insert the picture Insert picture AJ ancient actor al cat_man My Recent a dancer E Seale ol Folk dancer Al greengirl Al in_bathroom Desktop S pink_girl pirate T S sedan_chair Sl three people My Documents N uhlan biy Computer biy Hetwork File name folk dancer Places Files of type All formats bmp dsf emf eps gif jpg Cancel i Link If Preview Inserting Bitmaps Choose Insert Picture From File Select the file In the File type box you can restrict the selection to certain file types Click the Link box if you want a link to the original file If the Link box is marked whenever the document is updated and loaded the bitmap image is reloaded The editing steps that you have carried out in the local copy of the image in the document are re applied and the image is displayed If the Link box is not marked you are always working with the copy created when the graphic was first inserted To embed graphics that were first inserted as links go to Edit gt Express gt Links and cl
6. All bookmark levels visible bookmark levels User Interface page of PDF Options dialog box Window Options Section Resize window to initial page Causes the PDF viewer window to resize to fit the first page of the PDF e Center window on screen Causes the PDF viewer window to be centered on the computer screen Open in full screen mode Causes the PDF viewer to open full screen instead of in a smaller window Display document title Causes the PDF viewer to display the document s title in the title bar User interface options section Hide menubar Causes the PDF viewer to hide the menu bar Hide toolbar Causes the PDF viewer to hide the toolbar Hide window controls Causes the PDF viewer to hide other window controls Transitions Use Transition effects Not available in Celframe Office Write in Impress this option displays Slide transition effects as their respective PDF effects Bookmarks All bookmark levels All bookmarks will be displayed Visible bookmark levels From the drop down list you choose how many levels of bookmarks to display Security Page of PDF Options Dialog Box PDF export includes options to encrypt the PDF so it cannot be opened without a password and apply some digital rights management DRM features PDF Options General Initial view User Interface Encrypt the POF document Set open password empky Password Confirm Inserting deleting and
7. a st Pescros 1 Click the Add Tables icon The Add Tables window opens a There are two ways to add a table to the Relation design window Double click the name of the table Or click the name of the table and then click Add b Click Close when you have added the tables you want Add Tables DY D Collection Fuel Funny 2 Defining the relationship between the Car and Fuel tables a Two ways exist to do this e Click and drag the Date field in the Fuel table to the Date field in the Car table When you release the left mouse button a connecting line forms between the two date fields Car Fuel Car Quantity Fuel Cost Payment Type Fuel Quantity Car Type a Odometer CarID E Payment Type Mame I Fuel Car Cost Date Date W Or click the New Relation icon This opens the Relations window two tables are listed in the Tables involved section e In the Fields involved section click the dropdown list under the Car Table e Select Date from the Car table list e Click in the cell to the right of this dropdown list This opens a dropdown list for the Fuel table e Select Date from the Fuel table list 3 Modifying the Update options and Delete options section of the Relation window a Right click the line connecting the Date fields in the two table lists to open a context menu b Select Edit to open the Relation window c Select Update cascade d Select Delete cascade While these op
8. jeld Date FuelQuantity Odometer Odometer End Reading Alias Quanity Begin End Distance Table Fuel End Reading Fuel End Reading sort Visible EJ EJ EJ x EJ unction titerion gt 0 Appearance of query when opened for editing 1 Add the FuelCost field to the End Reading query a Right click the End Reading query and select Edit from the context menu b In the Fuel table list double click to add FuelCost to the bottom table c Save and close the query FuellD Odometer FuelQuantity FuelCost Fuel Fuel Fuel Fuel gt 0 2 Add the FuelCost field from the End Reading query to the Fuel Car query a Right click the Fuel Car query and select Edit from the context menu b Double click the FuelCost field in the End Reading query list to the table at the bottom 3 Add a calculation field to the right of the FuelCost field a Type the following in the Field cell End Reading FuelCost End Reading Odometer Fuel Odometer b Type the following in the Alias cell cost per mile N If you use the metric system cost per km is the appropriate alias 4 Save and close the query 5 Open a new report Right click the Fuel Car query and select Report Wizard 6 Select fields Move all the fields from the Available fields to the Fields in report list Use the gt gt to do so Click Next 7 Label fields Change FuelCost to Fuel Cost by placing a space between the words Click Next 8 Group fields Use gt to
9. 1 Open the Styles and Formatting window You can choose one of the following click the Styles and Formatting icon located at the left hand end of the object bar choose Format gt Styles and Formatting or press F11 2 On the Styles and Formatting window click on the Page Styles icon fourth from the left to display a list of page styles 3 Right click on First Page and select Modify from Styles and Formatting the pop up menu JTA OHE Defaut Endncke Modifying the First Page style Left Page Right age All 4 On the Organizer page of the Page Style dialog box look at the Next Style property This property defines what the page style for the next page will be It should be set to Default but if it is not you can change the next style by clicking on the dropdown button and choosing Default from the list of page styles 5 On the other pages of this dialog box you can turn on or off the header and footer for the first page and define other characteristics such as columns a page border ora page background 6 Click OK to save the changes Page Style First Page Background Footer Footnote Hame irst Page Next Style Default Linked with Category Custom Styles Contains width amp Sinch Fixed height 11 0inch From top 0 79inch From bottom 0 79inch Text direction left to right horizontal Page Description Arabic PortraitLeft Default Mot registe
10. 7 You can create a new menu by clicking on the New button 8 When you are done customizing menus click OK to save your changes Customizing toolbars Customize Keyboard Toolbars Events Celframe Office Power Presentation Toolbars abe a a Toolbar Toolbar Content Commands n Load URL J New J New eS Open A Save Al Save S zi r m m m m m m A Save In Celframe Office Power Presentation Description Loads a document specified by a URL You can type a new URL or select one that is already registered The Toolbars page of the Customize window 1 Open the Toolbars page of the Customize dialog in one of these ways On the toolbar click the arrow at the end of the toolbar and choose Customize Toolbar Choose View gt Toolbars gt Customize from the menu bar Choose Tools gt Customize gt Toolbars tab from the menu bar 2 In the Save In drop down list choose whether to save this changed toolbar for Celframe Office Power Presentation or for a selected document 3 In the Celframe Office Power Presentation Toolbars section choose the toolbar you want to modify or click on the New button to create a new toolbar 4 Click the Toolbar button on the right to display a drop down list of choices 5 To display or hide commands select or deselect the checkboxes in the Toolbar Content Commands section 6 To change the position of commands on a toolbar select a command and cli
11. Click to open a toolbar where you can click a background color for a paragraph The color is applied to the background of the current paragraph or the selected paragraphs 24 Font Color Click to apply the current font color to the selected characters You can also click here and then drag a selection to change the text color Click the arrow next to the icon to open the Font color toolbar Formula Bar Use this bar to enter formulas D3 wv E 2 3 4 Al v f Ih Ei 1 Name Box Displays the reference for the current cell the range of the selected cells or the name of the area You can also select a range of cells and then type a name for that range into the Name Box 2 Function Wizard Opens the Function Wizard which helps you to interactively create formulas 3 Sum Automatically adds the numbers in the cell range that you specify Click in a cell click this icon and then enter the cell range You can also drag to define a cell range in the spreadsheet 4 Function Adds a formula to the current cell Click this icon and then enter the formula in the Input line 5 Cancel Clears the contents of the Input line or cancels the changes that you made to an existing formula 6 Accept Accepts the contents of the Input line and then inserts the contents into the current cell 7 Input Line Enter the formula that you want to add to the current cell You can also click the Function Wizard ico
12. Fontwork The Fontwork toolbar opens when you select a Fontwork object gt Fontwork Gallery Fontwork Shape A Fontwork Same Letter Heights Fontwork Alignment f Fontwork Character Spacing Fontwork Gallery Opens the Fontwork Gallery where you can select another preview Click OK to apply the new set of properties to your Fontwork object Fontwork Shape Opens the Fontwork Shape toolbar Click a shape to apply the shape to all selected Fontwork objects Fontwork Same Letter Heights Switches the letter height of the selected Fontwork objects from normal to the same height for all object Fontwork Alignment Opens the Fontwork Alignment window Click to apply the alignment to the selected Fontwork objects Fontwork Character Spacing Opens the Fontwork Character Spacing window Click to apply the character spacing to the selected Fontwork objects Building a Presentation This process begins with the decision as to what basic characteristics you want all the slides to have These characteristics determine which slide master you will use for your slides and what modifications if any you will make to it Task Pane tants nN Layouts 2 Choosing the Layouts 3 Adding elements to the paqe Slide 1 4 rnsert anew slide Slide 2 Custom Animation p Slide Transition 1 Choosing a Slide Master A Slide Master is a slide with a specified set of characteristics which is used a
13. OAHHHH HA Connections Internet New Database New Databaseld New Database New Database New Databases New Database4 New Databaset New Databases New Databases New Databaseb New Dababased3 New Database New Databased C Documents and Settings Adminily Documents New Date C Documents and Settings Userihy Documents New Datab C Documents and Settings 4dminihly Documents New Date C Documents and Settings Userihy Documents New Datab C Documents and Settings Userihly Documents New Datab C Documents and Settings 4dminiMy Gocuments New Dake Documents and Settings Userihly Documents New Datab C Documents and Settings Userihy Documents New Datab C Documents and Settings Admini Documents New Datz C Documents and Settings Admini Documents New Datz C Documents and Settings Userihy Documents New Datab C Documents and Settings Userihy Documents New Datab C Documents and Settings Userihy Documents New Datab New Databaseds CDocuments and SettinasiUseriMy Documents iNew Datab lt tl gt Choose Databases Option Registered Databases Lists the registered name and database file of all registered databases Double click an entry to edit New Opens the Database Link dialog to create a new entry Delete Removes the selected entry from the list Edit Opens the Database Link dialog to edit the selected entry Chart Option Defines the general settings for charts Options
14. 1 Right click on the bottom area 2 Select Insert gt Sheet from the pop up menu X a Even if you have many sheets in your embedded spreadsheet only the sheet which is active when leaving the spreadsheet edit mode will be shown on the slide Each of the sheets is further organized in cells Cells are the elementary unit of the spreadsheet They are identified by a row number shown on the left hand side on gray background and a column letter shown in the upper part again on gray background Moving the cursor to a cell To move around the spreadsheet and select the cell which has the focus you can Use the arrow keys Left click with the mouse on the desired cell Use the combinations Enter and Shift Enter to move one cell down or one cell up respectively Tab key and Shift Tab key to move one cell to the right or to the left respectively Entering data in the selected cell Keyboard input is received by the active cell identified by a thick black border The cell reference or coordinates is also shown on the left hand end of the formula bar To insert data first select the cell to make it active then type in it Note that the input is also added to the main part of the formula bar where it may be easier to read Celframe Office Power Presentation will try to automatically recognize the type of contents text number date time and so on of acell and apply default formatting to it Note how the formula bar ico
15. 12 Basic Shapes Opens the Basic Shapes toolbar which you can use to insert graphics into your document 13 Symbol Shapes Opens the Symbol Shapes toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document 14 Block Arrows Opens the Block Arrows toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document 15 Flowcharts Opens the Flowcharts toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document 16 Callouts Opens the Callouts toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document 17 Stars Opens the Stars toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document 18 Points Enables you to edit points on your drawing 19 Glue Points Enables you to edit glue points on your drawing 20 Fontwork Gallery The icon opens the Fontwork Gallery from which you can insert graphical text art into your document 21 From File Inserts a picture into the current document 22 Gallery Opens the Gallery where you can select graphics 23 Rotate This tool is used to rotate the object 24 Alignment Modifies the alignment of selected objects 25 Arrange Changes the stacking order of a selected object 26 Extrusion On Off Switches the 3D effects on and off for the selected objects 27 Custom Animation Pane Assigns effects to selected objects 28 Interaction Defines how the selected object behaves when you click on it during a slide show 29 Animation Image Create the image you intend to animate using the dra
16. Ctrl ShiFk D Layer Properties Import From File Flip Horizontal Flip Vertical RotatelZoom Cbrl Shifk 2 Merge Layer Down Cbrl M Flatten Image Cbri Shift F Add New Layer This will add a new transparent layer to the image Delete Layer This will remove the active layer from the image You will be asked to confirm this is what you want to do before it is deleted Duplicate Layer This will make an exact copy of the active layer All properties of the layer along with the graphical pixel contents will be duplicated The new layer will also have the same name as the original Layer Properties This command brings up a dialog that allows you to define how the layer blends in with the layers that are before it in the Layers Window s list You may specify a name whether the layer is visible a blending mode and an opacity level There are fourteen 14 blending modes available Normal Multiply Additive Color Burn Color Dodge Reflect Glow Overlay Difference Negation Light Darken Screen and Xor The opacity slider controls how transparent the layer is overall Layer Properties General Hame mages Backgraun Visible Blending Opaciy Import From File This allows you to select one or more images that will be imported as one or more new layers Flip Horizonal and Flip Vertical These menu items allow you to flip just the active layer either horizontally or vertically Rotate Z
17. Display remainder of name as suggestion while typing Insert Close Mame example Shortcut eg E Business Cards Work 3 Ax 2 Elegant only Company Elegant with Marne Gutotext Y Elegant with Name without Slogan i Help Modern only Company Modern with Mame My AutoText Only For Templates Standard Save links relative to e File system Internet Show preview AutoText Dialog Line Numbering Adds or removes and formats line numbers in the current document To exclude a paragraph from line numbering click in the paragraph choose Format Paragraph click the Numbering tab and then clear the Include this paragraph in line numbering check box You can also exclude a paragraph style from line numbering Click Tools gt Express gt Line Numbering and select the Show numbering checkbox in the top left corner Then click OK Line Numbering E VIE Cancel Character Style Line numbering Format 1 2 aya Help Position Lett Spacing 0 50crm F Interval 5 gt lings Separator e tea Text Blank lines Lines in text Frames Every d Restart every new page The Line Numbering dialog box Undoing and Redoing Changes To undo the most recent change press Control Z click the Undo icon a on the Standard toolbar or select Edit gt Undo from the menu bar Click the small triangle to the right of the Undo icon to get a list of all the changes that can be undone You can sel
18. Express Organize Dialogs JavaScript 5 4 Add Ons 2 Click the Edit button You will now see the Basic IDE 3 Enter the function code In this example we define a VOL a b c function that calculates the volume of a rectangular solid with side lengths a b and c Function VOL a b c VOL a b c End Function 4 Close the Basic IDE window Your function is automatically saved in the default module and is now available If you apply the function in a Spreadsheet document that is to be used on another computer you can copy the function to the Spreadsheet document as described in the next section Copying a Function To a Document In stage 2 of Defining A Function Using Celframe Office Basic in the Macro dialog you clicked on Edit As the default in the Macro from field the My Macros Standard Modulel module is selected The Standard library resides locally in your user directory If you want to copy the user defined function to a Spreadsheet document 1 Choose Tools Macros Organize Macros Celframe Office Basic 2 In the Macro from field select My Macros Standard Module and click Edit O on A W Celframe Office Basic Macros Macro name Main Macro From Existing macros in Module i Cl E My Macros ae Calendrier ae cj dd ns assign CropOado HistoryManager Edit at MultiPages PhotoAlbum EHF Standard g irganizer 43 Starspert_Mulkibift ae WriterTools E Celf
19. FuelCost Change the Length to 5 and Decimal places to 2 Click the Format example button This opens the Field Format window e Use Currency as the Category and anything in the Format list with two decimal places Field Format Alignment Category Format Language All CEGE English U54 User defined E Fercent Currency Date Time Scientific 1254 57 Options Decimal places Negative numbers red Leading zeroes Thousands separator Format code General 4 Repeat these steps for each field in the table To access additional formatting options click the button to the right of the Format example panel Format example button 5 Description can be anything or can be left blank 6 To save and close the table select File gt Close Name the table Car Fuel Table Name Car Fuel Follow the same steps to create the Holiday Trip table Make sure you make Date field the primary key before closing naming the table Holiday Trip and saving it Fuel Celframe Office Data Access Table Design File Edit View Tools Author s Tools Window Help id fe dam Field Mame Field Type Fueli Integer INTEGER Date Date DATE Fuel Cost Decimal DECIMAL Fuel Quantity Number WUMERIC Odometer Decimal DECIMAL Payment Type Text VARCHAR by Cash Cheque or Credit Card Adding data to the list table List tables do not require a form Instead add their data directly to the table In
20. Naming the design E mailing a presentation Celframe Office provides several ways to quickly and easily send a document as an e mail attachment in one of three formats odt OpenDocument Presentation Celframe Office default format PPT Microsoft PowerPoint format or PDF To send the current document in odt format 1 Choose File gt Send gt Document as E mail Celframe Office opens a new e mail in your default e mail program The document is attached Export as PDF E mail as CelFrameDocument Presentation Web Page Preview E mail as Microsoft PowerPoint Presentation Page Setup E mail as PDF 2 In your e mail program enter the recipient subject and any text you want to add then send the e mail File gt Send gt E mail as Celframe Document Presentation has the same effect If you choose E mail as Microsoft PowerPoint Celframe Office first creates a PPT file and then opens your e mail program with the PPT file attached The PPT file is not saved on your computer Similarly if you choose E mail as PDF Celframe Office first creates a PDF using your default PDF Settings as when using the Export Directly as PDF toolbar button and then opens your email program with the PDF file attached The PDF file is not saved on your computer If you want to keep a copy of the PPT or PDF file as well as e mailing it to someone first save or export the presentation into the required format then attach
21. Remove blank paragraphs Replace Custom Styles 4 414 414 414 414 W e m m m e wv lw wt a e Iw a M Replace while modifying existing text T AuboFormatautoCorrect while typing Autoformat choices on the Options page If you notice unexpected formatting changes occurring in your document this is the Tip first place to look for the cause To turn autoformatting on or off go to Format gt AutoFormat and select or deselect the items on the submenu e While Typing automatically formats the document while you type If While Typing is deselected you can select Apply to automatically format the file Apply and Edit Changes automatically formats the file and then opens a dialog box where you can accept or reject the changes AutoFormat While Typing Styles and Formatting Fil Apply Reveal Formatting Ctrlt Shift Space Apply and Edit Changes Express Turning autoformatting on or off Using Footnotes and Endnotes Footnotes appear at the bottom of the page on which they are referenced Endnotes are collected at the end of a document To work effectively with footnotes and endnotes you need to Insert footnotes Define the format of footnotes Define the location of footnotes on the page Inserting footnotes endnotes To insert a footnote or an endnote put the cursor where you want the footnote endnote marker to appear Then select View gt Footnote from the menu bar or c
22. Sepia Mosaic Apply Apply Embo 55 Apply Painting Apply l Office Iframe vote Maker 200 Introduction to Celframe Office Note Maker Create edit and share notes of various formats text image web application clip digital ink Built in note search Google Desktop Search compatibility Features Auto import images from mobile phones and other devices Intuitive custom and automatic note categorization Dedicated web and application content clippers Note sharing via email and IM Templates for management of to dos expenses and more Password protection for notes and databases Notes management and editing in separate windows Basic image editing within note window Link directly to individual notes Synchronization of notes across multiple computers via USB Advanced text and image recognition Search for printed and handwritten text found within images Recognition and search of handwritten digital ink notes Correction of freely drawn shapes Install and run Ever Note directly from a USB drive Main Menu Standard Bar F Beetle price PHIOMOHeL 2900 ara a HARRE Og e fPIB IFINA CPS MeT Tools for Writing Note Note Maker Workspace E In uilt Introduction to Built in Features PDF Maker Celframe PDF Maker helps you to create high quality PDFs from any of Celframe Applications by one simple click It has built in security features that are used in h
23. These commands allow you to hide or show the floating utility windows to reset them to their Original locations and to toggle their translucent effect Help Provides quick access to this help documentation the ability to send feedback or a bug report and access to information about the authors File Menu The file menu provides an options behave similarly to other document authoring and image editing program New Ctrl M Open Ctrl Open Recent Acquire Close Ctrl gave Chrl 5 Save s Cbrl Shift 5 Ctrl P This allows you to create a new blank image The default size is 800 x 600 or the size of any image that has been copied to the clipboard The following dialog is displayed when you click on this menu item You may use the Maintain aspect ratio checkbox to enforce that the ratio between width and height remains the same The new size of the image is also displayed at the top of the dialog box this can be used to determine how much memory the image will use but may not reflect how large it will be when you save it to disk Hew size 163 3 KB Maintain aspect ratio Pixel size Width E gt Height E Resolution 3 00 Print size Height centimeters Open This allows you to open an image which will then be added to the image list Open Recent Open Recent menu allows you to quickly access the last images you have opened with Celframe Office Studio Acquire This submenu cont
24. To clear a print range drag a border of the range onto the opposite border of the range 3 To exit the Page Break Preview choose View Normal Printing Sheet Details When printing a sheet you can select which details are to be printed e Row and column headers e Sheet grid e Notes e Objects and graphics e Charts e Drawing objects e Formulas To choose the details proceed as follows 1 Select the sheet you want to print 2 Choose Format Page The command is not visible if the sheet was opened with write protection on In that case click the Edit File icon on the Standard Bar 3 Select the Sheet tab In the Print area mark the details to be printed and click OK 4 Print the document Defining Number of Pages for Printing If a sheet is too large for a single printed page Celframe Office Spreadsheet will print the current sheet evenly divided over several pages Since the automatic page break does not always take place in the optimal position you can define the page distribution yourself l 2 3 Go to the sheet to be printed Choose View Page Break Preview You will see the automatic distribution of the sheet across the print pages The automatically created print ranges are indicated by dark blue lines and the user defined ones by light blue lines The page breaks line breaks and column breaks are marked as black lines You can move the blue lines with the mouse You will find further options in the Co
25. When you combine objects holes appear where the objects overlap Constructing Shapes You can construct shapes by applying the Shapes gt Merge Subtract and Intersect commands to two or more drawing objects N Shape commands only work on 2D objects Constructed shapes take on the properties of the lowermost object in the stacking order To construct a shape Select two or more 2D objects Choose Modify gt Shapes and one of the following Merge Subtract Intersect Connecting Lines When you connect lines lines are drawn between neighboring endpoints To connect lines Select two or more lines Right click and choose Modify gt Connect To create a closed object right click a line and choose Close Object You can only use the Close Object command on connected lines Freeform Lines and unfilled Curves To combine 3D objects Insert a 3D object from the 3D Objects toolbar for example a cube Insert a second slightly larger 3D object for example a sphere Select the second 3D object sphere and choose Edit Cut Double click the first object cube to enter its group Choose Edit Paste Both objects are now part of the same group If you want you can edit the individual objects or change their position within the group Double click outside the group to exit the group N s You cannot intersect or subtract 3D objects Rotating Objects You can rotate an object around its default pivot
26. bb Lh LLU VvCGlFwrFan p 1 Selection Allows you to select objects in the current document 2 Line Draws a Straight line where you drag in the current document To constrain the line to 45 degrees hold down Shift while you drag 3 Line Ends with Arrow Draws a Straight line that ends with an arrow where you drag in the current document To constrain the line to 45 degrees hold down Shift while you drag 4 Rectangle Draws a filled rectangle where you drag in the current document Click where you want to place a corner of the rectangle and drag to the size you want To draw a square hold down Shift while you drag 5 Ellipse Draws a filled oval where you drag in the current document Click where you want to draw the oval and drag to the size you want To draw a circle hold down Shift while you drag 6 Text Draws a text box where you click or drag in the current document Click anywhere in the document and then type or paste your text 7 Curve The Curve icon on the Drawing bar opens the Lines toolbar where you can add lines and shapes to the current slide 8 Connectors Open the Connectors toolbar where you can add connectors to objects in the current slide A connector is a line that joins objects and remains attached when the objects are moved If you copy an object with a connector the connector is also copied There are four types of connector lines e Standard 90 degree angle bends e Line tw
27. opaque to 100 transparent are possible 5 Flip Vertically Flips the selected graphic vertically 6 Flip Horizontally Flips the selected graphic horizontally 7 Frames Formats the size position and other properties of the selected graphic Frame Bar When a frame is selected the Frame Bar provides the most important functions for formatting and positioning the frame Apply Style Wrap Off J Page Wrap P Optimal Page Wrap Borders Wrap Left fe Line Style Wrap Right Line Color of the border Wrap Through vil Background Color Align Left ca Frames Center Horizontal T Bring to Front Align Right aa Send to Back Align Top af Change Anchor Align Vertical Center link Frames a Unlink Frames 1 Apply Style Assigns a Style to the current paragraph selected paragraphs or to a selected object 2 Wrap Off Places the object on a separate line in the document The Text in the document appears above and below the object but not on the sides of the object You can also choose this setting on the Wrap tab page 3 Wrap On Wraps text on all four sides of the border frame of the object This icon represents the Page Wrap option on the Wrap tab page 4 Wrap Through Places the object in front of the text You can also define this setting on the Wrap tab page 5 Align Left Aligns the left edges of the selected objects If only one object is selected in Draw or Power Presentation the left e
28. 2 When choosing fonts on this page you are not limited to single fonts or to the ones shown in the drop down list You can specify a font family as a comma separated set of fonts that includes those suitable for Windows Macintosh Linux and other operating systems These choices are particularly important in HTML documents 3 If the document is viewed on a system that does not have the first font specified it will use one of the other fonts if that one is available Otherwise it will substitute a font that is available on the system 4 Type the list of fonts separated by commas in the boxes If you want these defaults to apply to the current document only select that checkbox The Default button resets the values on this page to the defaults installed with Celframe Office Options Celframe Office Write Basic Fonts Western Celframe Office l LoadiSave Basic Fonts Western Language Settings Font Celframe Office Write General View l Formatting Aids Heading Verdana Grid Basic Fonts western List Verdana Print Table Caption Verdana Changes Compatibility Index verdana AutoC aptior Celframe Office Write eb d Current document only Celframe Office Data Access Charts Internet Default Verdana H A 4 Default Choosing default fonts Print Options On the Celframe Office Celframe Office Write Print page you can choose which items are printed with the document by default These options are in addition to
29. Be Open Connect to an existing database 3 Click Browse and select the folder containing the database Click Next 4 Accept the default settings Register the database for me and Open the database for editing Click Finish Name and save the database in the location of your choice Accessing a Mozilla address book Accessing a Mozilla Address Book is very similar to accessing a dBase database 1 Select File gt New gt Database 2 Select Connect to an existing database Select Mozilla Address Book as the database type 3 Register this data source Connect to an existing database Mozilla Qddress Book Mozilla Address Book Thunderbird Address Book LDAP Address Book Microsoft Outlook Address Book Microsoft Windows Address Book Accessing Spreadsheets Accessing a spreadsheet is also very similar to accessing a dBase database 1 Select File gt New gt Database 2 Select Connect to an existing database Select Spreadsheet as the Database type 3 Click Browse to locate the spreadsheet you want to access If the spreadsheet is password protected check the Password required box Click Next 4 If the spreadsheet requires a user s name enter it If a password is also required check its box Click Next p Inport 4 This method of accessing a spreadsheet does not allow you to change anything in the spreadsheet All modifications must be made in the spreadsheet itself This method only allows you to
30. Celframe Office Spreadsheet Celframe Office Daka Access Charts Internet AAA Ae iili Unprotecting Cells 1 Click the sheet for which you want to cancel the protection 2 Select Tools Protect Document then choose Sheet or Document to remove the check mark indicating the protected status Sheet Protect Document Online Collaboration Document 3 If you have assigned a password enter it in this dialog and click OK The cells can now be edited the formulas can be viewed and all cells can be printed until you reactivate the protection for the sheet or document Freezing Rows or Columns as Headers If you have long rows or columns of data that extend beyond the viewable area of the spreadsheet you can freeze them which allows you to see the columns or rows as you scroll through the rest of the data 1 Select the row below or the column to the right of the row or column that you want to be in the frozen region All rows above or all columns to the left of the selection are frozen To freeze both horizontally and vertically select the cell that is below the row and to the right of the column that you want to freeze 2 Choose Window Freeze To deactivate choose Window Freeze again E New Window 9 Arrange 4ll Compare Side by Side Split B Freeze Express j If the area defined is to be scrollable apply the Window Split S command j an Ifyou want to print a certai
31. Charts CelFrame Office Load Save Language Settings Charts Cealframe Office Write Celframe Office Write Web Celframe Office Data Access This is where you specify general default settings For your CelFrame Office Charts Set the colors you want For all new charts i Internet Charts Option Default Colors Option Assigns colors to the data rows The settings only apply for all newly created charts Chart colors Displays all the colors available for the data series Select a data series to change its color Select the desired color from the adjacent color table Color table This table is used as a means of replacing the chart colors for the selected data rows For example if you selected data row 6 and then click on the color green 8 the old color of the data row is replaced by green 8 The name of the selected color is shown below the color table Default Restores the color settings that were defined when the program was installed Optio O E GG E ns Charts Default Colors Celframe Office Load Save Language Settings CelFrame Office Write Celframe Office Write Web Celframe Office Data Access Charts Default Colors Internet Internet Options Chart colors Color table E Data Series 1 MS Data Series 2 C Data Series 3 C Data Series 4 MS Data Series 5 E Data Series 6 MS Data Series 7 C Data Series 8 MB Data Series 9 E Cata Series 10 J Data Series 11 C Data Series 12 oe aS _
32. Document the hyperlink points to another document or to another place in the presentation New document the hyperlink creates a new document The top right part of the dialog changes according to the choice made for the hyperlink type A full description of all the choices and their interactions is beyond the scope of this chapter Here is a summary of the most common choices used in presentations For an Internet type hyperlink choose the type of hyperlink choose between Web FTP or Telnet and enter the required web address URL For a Mail and News type hyperlink specify whether it is a mail or news link the receiver address and for email also the subject For a Document type hyperlink specify the document path the Open File button opens a file browser leave this blank if you want to link to a target in the same presentation Optionally specify the target in the document Click on the Target icon to open the Navigator where you can select the target or if you know the name of the target you can type it into the box For a New Document type hyperlink specify whether to edit the newly created document immediately or just create it Edit later and the type of document to create text spreadsheet etc For a presentation Edit now is the more likely choice The Select path button opens a directory picker The Further settings section in the bottom right part of the dialog is common to all the hyperlink types although some choi
33. Group bry Date Calculate subtotals For Use Function _ Date Item Count I Average Max Min Product Count numbers only StDev Sample StDevP Population Var Sample VarP Populations 6 When the Enter key is pressed or OK is clicked the sheet will be grouped according to the subtotals For every group of entries with an identical date a subtotal is calculated The grand total is displayed at the bottom i 2 3 B L Date ltem Amount 4 12009 Shoes 10 00 O 3 9709 Sam 12 8 09 Sum 10 00 6 12 12 09 Dinner 35 00 12 12 09 Sum 35 00 a 12415709 Flowers 41 60 9 1712 75 09 Sum 41 60 io 12 19 09 Dress 435 00 12 19 09 Sum 43 00 12 1225 09 Handbag 49 90 12 25 09 Sum 49 90 i4 12 28 09 Lunch 157 00 12 28 09 Sum 157 00 16 120 09 Hand phone 854 00 12 30 09 Sum 54 00 18 Grand Total 1 190 50 m Notice the controls to the left of the row headers These enable the user to view which records rows have been summarized Clicking on a minus sign shows only the row with the results The easiest way to control the display is with the small digits above the group area When lis clicked only the grand total is displayed Clicking 2 reveals the subtotals while selecting 3 shows all elements Transferring Data From a Data Source to a Spreadsheet Individual tables of data from the data source browser are transferable into a Celframe Spreadsheet document There is a choice of
34. Layers Window Every image contains at least one layer and this window is your primary area for managing them 9 Color Window This is the primary area for selecting colors to draw with It consists of a color wheel anda brightness slider If you have expanded the window with the More button then it will also contain several controls for fine tuning and exactly specifying color values 10 Status Bar This area is divided into several sections The first on the left displays quick help and status information The next sections display rendering progress if pertinent image size and the cursor location within the image Menu Bar i New Image 53 Celframe Office Studio ater al dii ietmenks Filt ops Ln ee Help Lave Aqdwstments Filler iy wo H elp _ i ea File Provides access to open acquire and save images These options behave similarly to other document and image editing programs Edit Contains commands for easy manipulation of the image history the selected region of the image the selection itself and the clipboard Image Contains commands that alter the entire image including all layers Layers These commands alter only the currently active layer Adjustments Contains adjustments which may be used to edit the current layer Filter Contains effects which may be used to transform the current layer View These commands change the way that the image or workspace are presented to you Window
35. Next select Insert in the Category list and Duplicate Slide in the Function list 5 Now select the shortcut key nsert in the Shortcut keys list and click the Modify button at the upper right 6 Click OK to accept the change Now the nsert shortcut key will insert a duplicate slide immediately after the currently selected slide Customize Menus Keyboard Toolbars Events Shortcut keys Celframe Office Esc Barksnace 3 Power Presentation licate Slide Delete Delete Modify sShift F 1 shift F2 Shift F3 Duplicate Shift F4 Shift FS Restore Editing wie ShiFk F Shift F7 shift F amp Shift F 9 ShiFF Fin Delete Functions Category Function keys Templates Applet Insert Edit B Author Options Date Fixed Date Cyariable BASIC nserk File Marne Documents Floating Frame Formula From File Gallery titi ii gt Format Contrals Customizing keyboard shortcuts Saving changes to a file Changes to the shortcut key assignments and other configurations can be saved in a keyboard configuration file for use at a later time thus permitting you to create and apply different configurations as the need arises To save keyboard shortcuts to a file 1 After making your keyboard shortcut assignments click the Save button near the bottom right of the Customize dialog 2 In the Save Keyboard Configuration dialog select A files from the Save as Type list 3 Next enter a na
36. Run selected filter s on Inbox fa Run Now Newsgroups First go File gt New gt Account and you will get this window Account Wizard New Account Setup In order to receive messages you first need to set up a Mail or Newsgroup account This Wizard will collect the information necessary to set up a Mail or Newsgroup account If you do not know the information requested please contact your System Administrator or Internet Service Provider Select the type of account you would like to set up Email account f RSS News amp Blogs Web Mail Choose Newsgroup and press Next Fill in your e mail address and the name you want displayed When this is done press next Account Wirard Each account has an identity which is the information that identifies you to others when they receive your messages Enter the name you would like to appear in the From field of your outgoing messages for example John Smith Your Name Mortern W Petersen Enter your email address This is the address others will use to send email to you for example user example net Email Address morter nidelven it no Account Wizard Server Information Enter the name of your news server NNTP for example ews example net Newsgroup Server news mozilla org Name this newsgroup choose whatever you like for example news mozilla org Account Wizard a Account Name En
37. Some toolbars have icons that are not displayed by default but you can choose to display them You can also hide any icons that do appear on the toolbars by default To change the visible icons on any toolbar click the arrow at the right hand end of the toolbar and select Visible Buttons On the list of the available icons that appears select or deselect the icons you want to be visible Visible Buttons Customize Toolbar Dock Toolbar Dock All Toolbars Lock Toolbar Position Close Toolbar Menu The following is a description of all Celframe Office Draw menus submenus and their dialogs The menus are context sensitive This means that those menu items are available that are relevant to the work currently being carried out If the cursor is located in a text then all of those menu items are available that are needed to edit the text If you have selected graphics in a document then you will see all of the menu items that can be used to edit graphics The window containing the document you want to work on must be selected in order to use x the menu commands Similarly you must select an object in the document to use the menu commands associated with the object By default you see inactive menu items as gray items To hide the inactive menu items go to Tools gt Options gt Celframe Office gt View and disable the Inactive menu items box 1 File This menu contains general commands for working with Draw document
38. Synchronize Shadow style Position Distance Color oy oo mjm 0 07 EE c Removing the border from a frame Do not confuse a frame s border with the text boundaries that are made visible using the View menu by checking View gt Express gt Text Boundaries To Page The frame keeps the same position in relation to the page margins It does not move as you add or delete text This method is useful when the frame does not need to be visually associated with a particular piece of text It is often used when producing newsletters or other documents that are very layout intensive To Paragraph The frame is associated with a paragraph and moves with the paragraph It may be placed in the margin or another location This method is useful as an alternative to a table for placing icons beside paragraphs To Character The frame is associated with a character but is not in the text sequence It moves with the paragraph but may be placed in the margin or another location This method is similar to anchoring to a paragraph As Character The frame is placed in the document like any other character and therefore affects the height of the text line and the line break The frame moves with the paragraph as you add or delete text before the paragraph This method is useful for adding a small icon in sequence in a sentence It is also the best method for anchoring a graphic to an empty paragraph so it does not move around the page in une
39. Undo Colors Source color Tolerance Replace with en os LC Transparent C o 10 LC Transparent Tr 10 Oto Transparency EE lack LC Transparent C Transparent ka ka ba ka The dialog does not close automatically so you can carry out further color replacements Mark first the field for the Source color and choose again the color with the eyedropper Close the dialog with Ctrl F4 or the Close icon on the window border Draw uses an Alpha channel for transparency so that pixels of different colors can be made transparent It is also possible to carry out the operation in reverse to change a transparent area to a color For this process select nothing in the graphic but mark the Transparency checkbox at the lower left of the dialog and at lower right select the color to replace areas that are currently transparent The selection list for replacement colors shows all the available colors in the current color palette of the document You cannot define any new colors here but you can add colors to the available palette before using the eyedropper tool Color Depth To find the tools click on Tools gt Customize Toolbars and Add Command The commands are in the category Modify at the top of the list Reducing color depth Se al aT n E Le 1 OI E IEPeEW Lt DIC HITES IODO T DIL roe odr FOIL COO PSL T OL grar ges OF DIL CO AAECLLE 24 Bit True Color Original with a 24 bit
40. Using this tool you can scroll or pan through the image This functionality is also usable from any other tool at any time simply hold down the spacebar and then click and drag with the mouse Paint Bucket This tool is useful for filling in areas of similar color with a different color You can position the cursor on the area that you wish fill with color and then click the left mouse button to fill with the primary color or click the right mouse button to use the secondary color The region that gets filled is defined as the area surrounding where you clicked that has a uniform color The tolerance of this definition of uniformity is controlled with the tolerance slider in toolbar The paint bucket will also use the fill style that you have chosen in the Toolbar Gradient This tool can be used for drawing gradients and fading between images using the transparency mode Brush This tool is selected by default when you start Celframe Office Studio and is useful for many kinds of freeform drawing To draw using this tool simple left click and drag the mouse When using the Solid Brush fill style the primary color is used If you are using a different file style both the primary and secondary color will be used for the different parts of the pattern If you use the right mouse button to draw instead of the left mouse button the roles of the primary and secondary colors will be reversed Eraser You may use this tool to erase are
41. and if the selected file is in one of the many formats that Celframe Office recognizes a thumbnail of the selected image shows in a preview area on the right Select the Link checkbox to insert the picture as a link to the file rather than embedding the file itself In general it is preferable to embed images so that the presentation can be copied to other computers however on some occasions it makes sense to link the image rather than embed it e When the image file is quite large linking rather than embedding will dramatically reduce the size of the presentation file When the same image file is used in many presentations for example when using the Same background image for all the presentations created e When the linked file will be available when loading the presentation for example if the presentation is a slide show of holiday pictures Inserting a picture from a scanner To insert an image from the scanner 1 Prepare the image in the scanner and make sure that the scanner is ready 2 Select Insert gt Picture gt Scan gt Request 3 The rest of the procedure depends on the scanner driver and interface You will normally be required to specify the resolution a scan window and other parameters Consult the scanner s documentation for more information 4 When the image is ready Power Presentation places it in the slide At this point it can be edited as any other image Inserting a picture from the Gallery The Gallery
42. available If the Display warning checkbox is selected then when exporting to HTML a warning is shown that Celframe Office Basic macros will be lost Print layout Select this checkbox to export the print layout of the current document as well It can be read by Celframe Office and by Netscape Navigator and Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 0 and above The HTML filter supports CSS2 Cascading Style Sheets Level 2 for printing documents These capabilities are only effective if print layout export is activated Copy local graphics to Internet Select this checkbox to automatically upload the embedded pictures to the Internet server when uploading using FTP Character set Select the appropriate character set for the export Language Settings Defines the default languages and some other locale settings for documents Choose Tools gt Options gt Language Settings gt Languages Options Language Settings CelFrame Office Load fSave Language Settings CelFrame Office Write Celframe Office Write Web Celframe Office Data Access This is where you make settings concerning language and writing aids For your work with Charts Celframe Office Internet Language Setting Language Option User interface Select the language used for the user interface for example menus dialogs help files Locale setting Specifies the locale setting of the country setting This influences settings for numbering currency and units of measure The
43. documentation for details What slides to print how many copies to print and in what order to print them Pages prints the slide numbers you list in the box Use hyphens to indicate ranges and commas or semicolons to separate ranges for example 1 5 10 15 Selection prints selected objects This choice is available only when you have selected one or more objects on a slide in Normal view What items to print Click the Options button to display the Printer Options dialog Selecting printer options for a presentation Selections on the Printer Options dialog apply to this printing of this presentation only To specify default printing options for Celframe Power Presentation see Selecting default print options Printer Options Contents aly Drawing Default Handout Black whit ma iene Outline Print Page options _ Page name Default d Date Fit to page Time Tile pages Hidden pages Brochure Front Back d Paper tray From printer settings Selecting printer options for a presentation Some items of interest on the Printer Options dialog include Under Contents Drawing prints one slide per page full page in landscape Notes prints a single slide per page with any notes entered for that slide in Notes View Handouts prints the slides in reduced size on the page from a single slide up to six Slides per page To choose how many slides print on each page f
44. gt Header and Footer Header Footer Header and Footer Footnote Markup Similarly to insert a footer choose Footer Depending on which option you choose an area will appear at the top or bottom of the page where you can enter text This text will appear at the top or bottom of every page To insert the document title into the header 1 Select File gt Properties gt Description enter a title for your document in the Title area and click OK to close the dialog box 2 Add a header 3 Place the cursor in the header part of the page 4 Select Insert gt Fields gt Title The title should appear on a gray background which does not show when printed and can be turned off 5 To change the title for the whole document choose File gt Properties gt Description Page Style Default Organizer Page Background Header Footer Borders Columns Header Same content leftiright Left margin Right margin Spacing Use dynamic spacing Height GutoFit height More Inserting headers Portrait Headers on Landscape Pages To set up portrait headers and footers on landscape pages 1 Calculate the required margins so the text area of the landscape page is the same size as the text area on the portrait pages taking into account the space for headers and footers on the portrait pages 2 Create the landscape page style 3 Measure the distance from the upper and left edges of the pag
45. star comp sdbe dbase ODriver com sun star comp sdbe flak ODriver com sun star comp sdbex adabas ODriver com sun star sdbcs comp hsgldb Driver ord openoffice como drivers MySOL Driver HH Current driver com sun star comp sdbec ODBCDriver gt r Choose Connections Options Timeout seconds 60 Connection Pool Connection pooling enabled Specifies whether the chosen connections are pooled Drivers known in Celframe Office Displays a list of defined drivers and connection data Current driver The currently selected driver is displayed below the list Enable pooling for this driver Select a driver from the list and mark the Enable pooling for this driver checkbox in order to pool its connection Timeout seconds Defines the time in seconds after which a pooled connection is freed The time can be anywhere between 30 and 600 seconds Databases Option Add modify or remove entries to the list of registered databases You must register a database within Celframe Office in order to see it in the View Data sources window Options Celframe Office Data Access Databases Celframe Office Load Save Registered databases Language settings Registered name gt Celframe Office Write Bibliography Celframe Office Writes Web Book Celframe Office Data Access C Documents and Settings 4dmini4oplication Data CelFramir C Documents and Settings UseriMy Documents Book odb
46. 1 A1 A 1 in the input field es OOOO 7 Fis sia niece te Ctrl F7 Opens the Thesaurus if the current cell contains text Turns additional selection mode on or off In this mode you can use the arrow keys to extend the selection You can also click in another cell to extend the selection Highlights cells containing values Recalculates all of the formulas in the sheet Updates the selected chart Opens the Styles and Formatting window where you can apply a formatting style to the contents of the cell or to the current sheet Shift F1 1 Creates a document template Shift Ctrl F11 Updates the templates F2 Groups the selected data range Ctrl F12 Ungroups the selected data range Increases the height of current row Alt Up Arrow Decreases the height of current row Increases the width of the current column Decreases the width of the current column Optimizes the column width or row height based on the current cell Formatting Cells Using Shortcut Keys The following cell formats can be applied with the keyboard Ctril Shift 1 not on the number Two decimal places thousands separator Standard exponential format Standard currency format Ctrl Shift 5 not on the number Standard percentage format two decimal places pad Ctrl Shift 6 not on the number Standard format pad Using the DataPilot Changes the focus by moving forwards through the areas and buttons of the dialog Shift Tab Ch
47. 1 In the Options dialog box click Celframe Office gt User Data 2 Fill in the form or amend or delete any existing incorrect information Options Celframe Office User Data Ae A A TE Memory View Print Paths Colors Fonts Security Appearance Accessibility Java Load Sayve Language Settings Celframe Office Write Celframe Office Write wWweb Celframe Office Daka Access Charts Internet General Options 1 In the Options dialog box click Celframe Office gt General Options Celframe Office General E HAHAA Celframe Office User Data Memory View Print Paths Colors Fonts Security Appearance Accessibility Java Load Sayve Language Settings Celframe Office Write Celframe Office write eb Celframe Office Data Access Charts Internet Address Compan FirstiLast namesTnitials Street City Skate Zip Country Region Title Position Tel Homework Fax l E mail Filling in User Data Help Tips _ Extended tips Help Agent Reset Help Agent Help Formatting Default Open Save dialogs Use Celframe Office dialogs Document status Printing sets document modified status Year two digits Interpret as years between 1930 Setting General options ah r and 2029 Help Tips When Help Tips are active one or two words will appear when you hold the cursor over an icon or field on the main Celframe Office window without clicking This setting also affec
48. 100 totally black and 100 totally white The contrast can be adjusted between 100 minimum and 100 maximum The Gamma value affects the brightness of the middle color tones Values can range from 0 10 minimum to 10 maximum Try adjusting this value if changing brightness contrast does not quite give you the result you want Transparency Specifies the transparency in the graphic object Values from 0 opaque to 100 transparent are possible Line Set the formatting options for the selected line or the line that you want to draw You can also add arrowheads to a line Background Click to apply the current font color to the selected characters You can also click here and then drag a selection to change the text color Shadow Adds a shadow to the selected object If the object already has a shadow the shadow is removed If you click this icon when no object is selected the shadow is added to the next object that you draw Crop Opens a dialog to crop pixel graphics The function is available only if the pixel graphic is marked Cropping Keep image size Left 0 00 hal Top 0 00 Right 0 00 Wal Bottom 0 00 Scale Width Height Image size Width 11 11 3 33 Height Original Size a eE The Crop dialog The fields Left Right Top and Bottom establish the amount to be trimmed off the appropriate edge The new dimens
49. 9 02 be Chart Data area Entering data Enter data in the Chart Data window Insert buttons insert a row or column Delete buttons remove the information from a selected row or column Switch buttons exchange the contents of the selected row with the contents of the row below it or the contents of a column with those of the column to the right Sort buttons organize the content in ascending order You can sort data within a selected row or column or sort the rows or columns themselves Apply to Chart transfers the data from the table to the chart Input fields are where you insert data Enter information in the boxes within the desired rows and columns By dragging the Chart Data window so that your chart is visible you can immediately see the results after clicking the Apply to Chart button Formatting the chart Format menu The format menu has many options for formatting and fine tuning the look of your charts Double click the chart so that it is enclosed by a gray border Click Format in the main menu list Title j Legend Axis j arid Chart Vall Chart Floor Chart Area 2 Chart Type Al Table SutoFormat ON 30 Effects 3D VIEW Arrangement j Chart format menu Title formats the titles of the chart the x axis and y axis Legend formats the location borders background and type of the legend Axis formats the lines that create the chart as well as the
50. Automatically detect high contrast mode of operating system d seconds eB eB Be eB Be eB ee ee ee ee ee ee Re l ee Be ee ee ee Be eB ee Be ee ee eS Load Save Language Settings Celframe Office Write Celframe Office Write feb Celframe Office Data Access Charts Internet Use automatic font color for screen display Use system colors for page previews AAA eee a A E ME OD LLL es Showing Accessibility Options Java Options Specifies the support options for Java applications and applets in Celframe Office including which Java Runtime Environment JRE to use Choose Tools gt Options gt Celframe Office gt Java Options Celframe Office Java E Celframe Office User Data Java options General Use a Java runtime environment Memory View Java runtime environments JRE already installed Print o vendor Mersin Features add Paths Sun Microsystems Inc 1 6 0 16 S Sun Microsystems Inc 1 6 0 03 Security Appearance lass Path Accessibility Java Load Sayve Language Settings Celframe Office Write Celframe Office Write Web Celframe Office Daka Access Charts Internet HAAA lt im Location C Program Files Jayvaljrel 6 0_03 Java options Use a Java runtime environment Allows you to run Java applications and applets in Celframe Office When a Java application or applet attempts to access your hard drive a prompt opens Java runtime environments JRE alr
51. Black amp White This adjustment removes all color effectively making the layer black amp white Original image that has been desaturated Hue Saturation This operation may be used to change the saturation of colors as well as rotate the hue of the image Additionally it allows the adjustment of lightness which is similar but not the same as brightness Original image after the Hue and Saturation Invert Colors This adjustment is very similar to a negative of a photo Applying it a second time produces the Original image again Original image after it has been inverted Level This operation is used to adjust the color range and gamma of an image Sepia This adjustment turns the image black amp white and then adds a sepia tone This can be used to give your images a nostalgic look Original image after the Sepia adjustment Curves Transfer Map Luminosity f Tip Right click to remove control points The Curves adjustment can be used to adjust the colors of an image with a very high degree of control Curves allows you to fine tune the intensity of every shade in an image In particular it can be used to highlight or dim only certain ranges of intensity present in an image in a way that Levels and Brightness Contrast cannot Curves can be used to freely adjust the exactly how bright each shade of intensity in an image can be In fact the colors of an image can be completely
52. Bullets Vl A Gea E Homepage pe My Theme sah ia Mew Theme a Rulers j Sounds Inserting an image from the Gallery Adding an Image to The Gallery To add images to the Gallery proceed as follows 1 Open the Gallery 2 Select the theme where you want to add images or you can create a new theme Tocreate a new theme Click the New Theme button above the list box of Themes The Properties of New Theme dialog box opens Select the General tab and enter an appropriate name for the new theme in the text box Select the Files tab skip step 3 and continue with step 4 3 Right click on the desired theme and select Properties in the pop up menu This will display a window from which to select the files to be added Properties of My heme New theme Bg Backgrounds Delete File type lt All Files gt Rename lt No Files gt Mew The l Rulers Add All Ej Sounds Preview Gallery properties dialog box 4 On the Files page click the Find Files button The Select path dialog box opens 5 You can enter the path for the file s directory in the Path text box or you can navigate to locate the file s directory 6 Use the File type drop down list to help limit the search 7 Press the Select button to start the search 8 A list of graphic files will be displayed in the window You can use the File type filter again to further limit the search 9 Select th
53. Click OK to close the dialog box Clicking on the Insert Row icon on the Table toolbar inserts one row below the selected one Clicking on the Insert Column icon on the Table toolbar inserts a column after to the right of the selected one Regardless of how they are inserted new rows or columns have the same formatting as the row or column where the cursor was when the insert command was issued Insert Row Height Allow Row to Break Across Pages and Columns 1 Optimal Height Table Boundaries a Select Number Recognition Insert Edit Paragraph Style Delete Paste Merging and Splitting Cells To merge a group of cells into one cell 1 Select the cells to merge 2 Right click and select Cell gt Merge on the pop up menu or select Table gt Merge Cells from the menu bar To split a cell into multiple cells 1 Position the cursor inside the cell 2 Right click and select Cell gt Split on the pop up menu or select Table gt Split Cells from the menu bar 3 Select how to split the cell A cell can be split either horizontally create more rows or vertically create more columns and you can specify the number of new cells to create Choosing Table Spacing and Alignment Right click anywhere in the table and select Table from the pop up menu or select Table gt Table from the menu bar On the Table Format dialog box select the Table tab Table Format Text Flow Columns Background P
54. Date Acquired Motes Notes OFFiceLocation Genre PhoneNumber lt lt Photo E PostalCode wt 5 If a mistake is made in the order as listed above click on the field name that is in the wrong order to highlight it Use the arrow on the left side of the Selected Fields list to move the field name to the correct position Click Next Step 2 Set field types and formats In this step you give the fields their properties When you click a field the information on the right changes You can then make changes to meet your needs Click each field one ata time and make the changes listed below Table Wizard Set field types and formats Select Fields Selected Fields Field information CollectionID Movie Title Set primary key Actor Field Type Integer INTEGE DateAcquired Create table Motes Autowalue Mo Ww Genre Photo 2 Set types and Formats Field name CollectionIC Entry required No wt Length id O If any of these fields requires an entry set Entry required to Yes If Entry required is set to Yes this field must have something in it For example if FirstName has Entry required set to Yes having an entry with the first name missing will not be allowed In general only set Entry required to Yes if something must always be put in that field By default Entry required is set to No e CollectionID Change AutoValue from No to Yes e MovieTitle Entry required If all of your movie is in albums cha
55. Date Acquired column needs to be widened The label for MovieTitle column needs to be two words 1 Change the MovieTitle column Insert Column a Right click the label MovieTitle to open a context menu Replace with b Select Replace with and then select List box from the context menu Delete Column c Again right click the label Date Acquired to open a context menu Hide Columns d Select Column This opens the Properties window e In the Label box change MovieTitle to Movie Title Column f Click the Data tab g From the Type of list contents dropdown list select sql SELECT Type Type FROM Movie Title h Close the Properties window Step 9 Add headings to groups 1 Make sure the cursor in in the upper left corner If it is not click in that corner to move it there 2 Use the Enter key to move the cursor to the fifth line from the top 3 Change the Apply Styles dropdown list from Default to Heading 2 iJ Default 4 Use the spacebar to move the cursor to where you want the heading to start 5 Type the heading Actor 6 Use the spacebar to move the cursor to the center of Actor area ys 3 If you know how to use styles you can open the Styles and Formatting window using F11 Right clicking the Heading 2 paragraph style allows you to modify the appearance of all three headings Step 10 Change the background of a form The background for a form can be a color or a graphic picture You can us
56. E violet Default Choose Default Colors Specifies Internet settings This is where you configure Celframe Office for the Internet You can define search engines or save your proxy settings Options Internet GE GGG Celframe Office Load Saye Language Settings Celframe Office Write CelFrame Office Writelveb Celframe Office Data Access Charts Internet This is where you configure CelFrame Office For the Internet You can define search engines or save your proxy settings internet Option Proxy Option Proxy serversfor accessing the Internet can be set up manually as needed Options Internet Proxy CelFrame Office Load Save settings Language Settings Proxy server CelFrame Office Write Celframe Office Write Web HTTP proxy Celframe Office Data Access 7 l Charts FTF proxy Internet F ee Search Mozilla Plug in Ho proxy For Separator 5 Setting Proxy Option Settings Defines the settings for the proxy server Proxy server Specifies the type of proxy definition None Accesses the Internet without a proxy server Allows you to set up a connection directly on your computer to an Internet provider that does not use a proxy Manual Lets you enter the proxy server manually Specify the proxy servers in accordance with your Internet service Ask your system administrator for the proxies and ports to enter System On Windows or UNIX systems using GNOME or KDE this option tells C
57. E F Normal vision ee ee Pos Fos 208 492mm 492 mm Y Pos Pos 168 981 mm 163 981 mm By default Publisher uses black as the color for shapes Provided our shape is still selected we use the Properties again to assign a new color to it For that purpose we select the Colors tab From the list select White as the Fill Color Each shape and each frame in Publisher has a border In the case of shapes the default color is always black Since we don t want any color for our Frame border click on the symbol with the pen and select the color None which is always at the top of the list Celframe Office Publisher sii sa i A o OW s JA BBO SEA LAL ode ooh Properties vyz Shape Group Text Image Line Colours Shade C Display only used Colors Transparency Settings Opacity 100 Es Blend Mode Mormal w Overprinting Knockout Co Overprint 211 314 mm 116 670 mm Our page background is now finished To make sure it isn t changed unintentionally return to the X Y Z tab of the Properties and click on the lock symbol so that our background is protected from any further changes Lock FOC Inserting the Cover Picture Now that the background has been created you need to place the cover picture For images or more precisely for bitmap images create an image frame by clicking on the Image Frame icon in the toolbar Draw your image frame as you did with
58. E mailing Exporting and Saving Quick printing Controlling printing Selecting printer options for a presentation Selecting default print options Printing in black and white on a color printer Printing a brochure Quick export to PDF Controlling PDF content and quality Exporting as a Flash file Exporting as web pages HTML files E mailing a presentation Opening and saving a PowerPoint file Saving an Celframe Office Power Presentation file as a PowerPoint file Opening a PowerPoint file in Celframe Office Chapter 6 Miscellaneous Customizing toolbars Customizing keyboard shortcuts Saving changes to a file Loading a saved keyboard configuration Resetting the shortcut keys Shortcut Keys Adding a Header or a Footer to All Slides Zooming With The Keypad Selecting Underlying Objects Copying Formatting With the Format Paintbrush Celframe Office Data Access 2008 Chapter 1 Introduction to Celframe Office Data Access Creating a database Using the Wizard to create a table Creating a table by copying an existing table Creating tables in Design View Adding data to the list table Creating a View Defining relationships Chapter 2 Form Using the Wizard to create a form Modifying a form Chapter 3 Databases Accessing other data sources Accessing a dBase database Accessing Spreadsheets Registering databases created by Celframe Office Using data sources in Celframe Office Viewing data sources Editing data sou
59. Fie gt travel_0007 in9 Gd Eka_Dushku_in_Dolfhouse_Wallpaper_6_1280 ing Size 1600 x 1200 BD energy widescreen ipa 4 x fe DP lt a i a i File name abstract _ OOS pg Files of type Al Supported Formats eps EPS epsf EPSF epsi i EPSI eps 5 w fe Show Preview It seems obvious that the size of the image and the size of the image frame are not identical twins but fortunately the Properties will come to our rescue and force them to behave as if they were Before Celframe Office Publisher Document 1 File Edit Item Insert Page View Extras Windows Help rim 100 00 sja ye ve Ke P 1 gt Beacon v BB foma vse After File Edit Item Insert Page View Extras Windows Help O g el k a A l Properties Shape Group Text mene Free Scaling x Fos 0 000 mm 2 O 3 2 ae aA A 9 E ie Ta z j a Mig i Y Pos 0 000 mm Scale 35 62 Scale Actual DPI Actual DPI O Scale To Frame Size Proportional Image Effects Line Colours T E i A 214 20 E t z k P 46 a frm 100 0 N Ae S tM Sloat ER eranen een i a Ege ek LSet z sE z i Loo Pas 147 108 mm Y Pos 214 842 mm 1 A _ Ii IL Once again use the right mouse button to bring up the context menu This time to bring up the image effects dialog Celframe Office Publisher Document 1 x File Edi
60. Keyboard navigation in slideshows is also supported Save to Ci Documents and Settings User My Documents My Pictures yy E save cancer Smart Shifted Simple theme which can view the pictures in index slideshow a Save Os Themes Blue Shifted Classic FreshClassic Metallic Radiant Slick Sriart Shifted Screenshot 1 3 MAR I SHi irrro created by Daniel 2008 Save to C Documents and Settings User My Documentsi My Pictures Edit Photo Cram Gr EPROM POE Fie Photos Too Help YQOOBBs e Postcard 7 A ete ae Aspect Ratio Crop Organize your photo in album Frame Rotate clockwise Rotate the photo clockwise Rotate counterclockwise Rotate the photo counterclockwise VDDD Flip Horizontally Flip the picture horizontally Flip Vertically Flip the picture Vertically Phora 35x5 Photo 4 x 6 Photo 5 x 7 Photo 8 x 10 Postcard Wallet Crop Crop photo to selected region Desktop Correct Tilt Aspect Ratio Select region for cropping using a particular aspect ratio Enhance Color Enhance color balance Contrast Enhance Contrast Red Eye Remove Red Eye Levels Fine tune brightness contrast and color Grain Blur or sharpen image Manipulate Enhance 20 Color Contrast Red Eye x e Levels Grain Edit image using common aspect ratios or your display resolution E A p
61. Mew Document Hyperlink dialog showing details for Internet links On the left hand side select one of the four types of hyperlink Internet a web address normally starting with http Mail amp News for example an email address Document the hyperlink points to another document or to another place in the presentation New document the hyperlink creates a new document The top right part of the dialog changes according to the choice made for the hyperlink type A full description of all the choices and their interactions is beyond the scope of this chapter Here is a Summary of the most common choices used in presentations Telnet and enter the required web address URL For a Mail and News type hyperlink specify whether it is a mail or news link the receiver address and for email also the subject For a Document type hyperlink specify the document path the Open File button opens a file browser leave this blank if you want to link to a target in the same presentation Optionally specify the target in the document for example a specific slide Click on the Target icon to open the Navigator where you can select the target or if you know the name of the target you can type it into the box For a New Document type hyperlink specify whether to edit the newly created document immediately or just create it Edit later and the type of document to create text spreadsheet etc For a presentation Edit now is th
62. Numbering or by clicking on the Bullets and Numbering icon 4 on the text formatting toolbar Selecting the entries For the entire list 1 Select the entire list or click on the gray border of the text box so that just the green resizing handles are displayed 2 Select Format gt Bullets and Numbering or click on the Bullets and Numbering Icon 3 The Bullets and Numbering dialog contains five tabs Bullets Numbering type Graphics Position and Customize If a bulleted list is needed select the desired bullet style from the six default styles available on the Bullets page If a graphics style is needed select one from those available on the Graphics page If a numbered list is needed select one of the 6 default numbering styles on the Numbering type page Bullets and Numbering Numbering type Graphics Position Customize Selection The Bullets and Numbering dialog Bullets Numbering type and Graphics pages These three tabs contain predefined formatting for either the bullet type Bullets and Graphics tabs or for the numbering To apply a specific one it is sufficient to click on the image A thick border will indicate the selection Position Page Use the Position page to fine tune the indentation and spacing of the bullet point and its text This page is particularly effective when used in combination with the Customize page Bullets and Numbering Numbering type Graphics Customize Po
63. Office Write General Options View Options Formatting Aids Options Grid Options Print Options Table Options Change Tracking Options Compatibility Options AutoCaption options Celframe Office Write Web Option View Option Formatting Aids Option Grid Options Print Options Table Option Background Option Celframe Office Data Access Option Connections Option Databases Option Chart Option Default Colors Option Internet Options Proxy Option Search Option Chapter 3 Working with Text Cutting Copying and Pasting Tex Finding and Replacing Text Wildcards Inserting Special Symbol Setting tab stops and indents Auto formatting Using Footnotes and Endnotes Inserting footnotes endnotes Checking Spelling Using The Thesaurus Hyphenating Words Using AutoCorrect Using AutoText Line Numbering Undoing and Redoing Changes Tracking Changes to a Document Preparing a Document for Review Compare and Merge Documents Using Hyperlinks Working With Hyperlinks Editing Hyperlinks Counting The Words in a Selection Chapter 4 Formatting Pages Setting up Basic Page Layout Using Styles Inserting a Page Break Without Switching The Style Defining a Different First Page for a Document Changing Page Orientation Within a Document Setting Up a Landscape Page Style Inserting a Landscape Page into a Portrait Document Using Columns to Define the Page Layout Defining The Number of Columns on a Page Using a Predefi
64. S Local Folders Celframe Office Mail 2008 Kek a 4 at Pe mmm ATAT 2 Address Book A Reply Repw alr Forward gt i Lad 7 6 gs Delete Junk Cop Subject or Sender 7 All Folders Celframe Office Mail 2008 Mail Local Folders Accounts A View settings for this account gt Create a new account Advanced Features Q Search messages a Manage message filters Address Book o Personal 4ddress Book Search Far ontains Name Anirah Programmer Celframe Arun Pudor President CTO Celfr cass_melda Christopher Morris MIS Officer C La Eliena Raj P Operations Celframe ERE Mawarni Multimedia Developer C naz my w Caf Celframe Office Mail Email Toolbar Hopefully at this point you will have Celframe Office Mail up and running As the next step in the process you will need to get familiar with the program This part will evolve around basic buttons options and how to read mail B3 mairg 7 Tr i i iz i EEL i E A ad oo Bee Get Mail The get mail button will connect your Celframe Office Mail client to your mail server and look for new messages In the bottom right corner you will get a message if you have new email Write The write button opens a new window where you can compose a new email message add attachments and finally send it Address Book
65. SE eee 165 Jalan Ampang Kuala Lumpur WFP Kuala Lumpur 55000 Malaysia ale Menara Citibank O3 2383 0000 ZA citibank com my 165 Jalan Ampang Directions search nearby Save to moret 55000 Kuala Lumpur eee eo Se E Malaysia 44 lec pung ae E a 3 Datuk Keramat bm E En M Cpa 5 sKampung Berem bang a _ Holiday Villa oT Epi Searching an address Google Translate Machine translation between languages 1 Translate text webpages and documents GOOGLE TRANSLATE Enter text or a webpage URL or upload a document Select the desired language pair and mode th Welcome English Translate from English 8 Translate into French a i w ieman English to French translation Bienvenue Translating the word Lookup Tool Online Dictionary LOOKUP WORD Select the reference You went and press the La wikipedia Eni Wikipedia Eni Cambridge Dictionaries Online Google Define Online dictionary Tasks To manage to do task TASK VIEWER Task Due date Manage tasks Convert To Convert document to others format Start Stop Timer To record time spent working on the current document in a time tracking interface Session stats Q Elapsed time 4 minutels or 216 second s Started at 02 38 57 PM Ended at 02 42 33 PM Time tracking Notes Provide template to make some note Rulers To show or hide rulers choose Vie
66. Setup dialog which you can call with the Printer Settings menu command 9 Print Preview Displays a preview of the printed page or closes the preview 10 Spelling and Grammar Checks the document or the current selection for spelling errors 11 AutoSpellcheck Automatically checks spelling as you type and underlines errors 12 Cut Removes and copies the selection to the clipboard 13 Copy Copies the selection to the clipboard 14 Paste Inserts the contents of the clipboard at the location of the cursor and replaces any selected text or objects Click the arrow next to the icon to select the format 15 Format Painter Copies the formatting of the selected text or object and applies the formatting to another text selection or object 16 Undo Reverses the last command or the last entry you typed To select the command that you want to reverse click the arrow next to the Undo icon on the Standard bar 17 Redo Reverses the action of the last Undo command To select the Undo step that you want to reverse click the arrow next to the Redo icon on the Standard bar 18 Hyperlink Opens a dialog that enables you to create and edit hyperlinks 19 Sort Ascending Sort Descending Sorts the selection from the highest to the lowest value or from the lowest to the highest value using the column that contains the cursor 20 Insert Chart Creates a chart in the current document 21 Celframe Office Help Opens the main page
67. Text Formatting Characters Font Page Font Effects Page Position Page Formatting paragraphs Indents and Spacing Page Tabs Page Creating bulleted and numbered lists Creating lists in Layout text boxes Creating lists in other text boxes Creating a new outline level Changing the appearance of the list Selecting the entries Bullets Numbering type and Graphics pages Position Page Customize page Using hyperlinks Working with hyperlink buttons Fontwork For Graphical Text Art To create a Fontwork object To edit a Fontwork object To edit more Fontwork attributes Chapter 3 Adding and Formatting Pictures Inserting a picture from a scanner Inserting a picture from the Gallery Creating an Image Map Adding images to the Gallery Deleting images from the Gallery Adding a new theme to the Gallery Chapter 4 Inserting Spreadsheets Charts and Other Object Using spreadsheets in Celframe Office Power Presentation Inserting a spreadsheet Resizing and moving a spreadsheet How a Spreadsheet is organized Moving the cursor to a cell Entering data in the selected cell Formatting spreadsheet cells Inserting a chart Creating a chart in AutoLayout Creating a chart using the Insert chart feature Opening a chart data window Entering data Formatting the chart Format menu Resizing the chart Moving chart elements Changing the chart area background Inserting other objects Movies and sound Formulas Chapter 5 Printing
68. The available choices vary from one printer to another but you should find an option for Color 3 The choices for color may include black and white or grayscale Choose one of these Grayscale is best if you have any graphics in the document Click OK to confirm your choice and return to the Print dialog then click OK again to print the document To set up Celframe Office to print all color text and graphics as grayscale 1 Click Tools gt Options gt Celframe Office Power Presentation gt Print to display the dialog 2 Select the Convert colors to grayscale checkbox Click OK to save the change To set up Celframe Power Presentation to print all color text as black and all graphics as grayscale 1 Click Tools gt Options gt Celframe Office Power Presentation gt Print 2 Under Quality select the Grayscale or Black amp white checkbox Click OK to save the change Printing a brochure You can print a presentation with two slides on each side of a sheet of paper arranged so that when the printed pages are folded in half the slides are in the correct order to form a booklet or brochure To print a brochure on a single sided printer 1 Click File gt Print In the Print dialog click Properties and be sure the printer is set to the same orientation portrait or landscape as specified in the page setup for your document Usually the orientation does not matter but it does for brochures 2 Click Options In the Page
69. View Show Starts your slide show Slide Sorter Bar In Slide Sorter view the Slide Sorter bar can be used 1 Selection Allows you to select objects in the current document 2 Slide Show Starts your slide show Line and Filling Bar The Line and Filling Bar contains commands and options that you can apply in the current view 1 Styles and Formatting Specifies whether to show or hide the Styles and Formatting window which is where you can assign and organize Styles 2 Line Sets the formatting options for the selected line 3 Arrow Style Opens the Arrowheads toolbar Use the symbols shown to define the style for the end of the selected line 4 Line Style Select the line style that you want to use 5 Line Width Select the width for the line 6 Line Color Select a color for the line 7 Area Style Filling Select the type of fill that you want to apply to the selected drawing object 8 Shadow Adds a shadow to the selected object If the object already has a shadow the shadow is removed If you click this icon when no object is selected the shadow is added to the next object that you draw 9 Image Map An ImageMap allows you to attach URLs to specific areas called hotspots on a picture in your document Slide View Bar The Slide View bar opens with the Slide Sorter view Rehearse Timings Show Slide Hide Slide Slides Per Row Rehearse Timings Starts a slide show with a timer in the l
70. a corner 8 Smooth Transition Converts a corner point or symmetrical point into a smooth point Both control points of the corner point are aligned in parallel and can only be moved simultaneously The control points may differentiate in length allowing you to vary the degree of curvature 9 Symmetric Transition This icon converts a corner point or a smooth point into a symmetrical point Both control points of the corner point are aligned in parallel and have the same length They can only be moved simultaneously and the degree of curvature is the same in both directions 10 Close B zier Closes a line or a curve A line is closed by connecting the last point with the first point indicated by an enlarged square 11 Eliminate Points Marks the current point or the selected points for deletion This happens in the event that the point is located on a Straight line If you convert a curve or a polygon with the Convert to Curve icon into a Straight line or you change a curve with the mouse so that a point lies on the straight line it is removed Options Bar The Options bar can be displayed by choosing View gt Toolbars gt Options Options x 1 llela 5 7 8 9 ko k12 23 24 5 ae a7 28 29 20 1 Rotation Mode after Clicking Object Changes the mouse click behavior so that rotation handles appear after you click an object and then click it again Drag a handle to rotate the object in the direction you w
71. a crem a Templates o Documents w File 2 In the box on the left double click the folder containing the template that you want to set as the default then select the template 3 Click the Commands button Template Management J Presentation Backgrounds Celframe Office SBE 2008 Presentation Templates E CO Power Presentation doc E Black with green Bubbles Shortcut Keys For oFFicenarne F Black with Pink paint test odt E Black with Rainbow E testr ppt 3 Black lin Edit A Blue Pencils Delete Delete A Blue water painting Import Template Brownies a chocolate Computer Blocks Dark Green oer lt nT Export Template Printer Settings Update Templates Documents Set s Default Template Template Management window 4 From the drop down menu choose Set As Default Template The next time that you create a document by choosing File gt New the document will be created from this template Resetting the default to Celframe Office in built Default template To re enable Celframe Default presentation background template as the default 1 From the main menu choose File gt Templates gt Organize The Template Management window opens 2 In the box on the left click the Presentation Backgrounds folder 3 Click the Commands button 4 From the drop down menu choose Reset Default Template Creating your Own Templates To create a template from a
72. allows a different method to enter the data In most if not all cases more than one method can be used The first step to entering data in a form is to open it from the main database window e Click the Forms icon in the Database list Find the form s name in the Forms list Double click the form s name The quickest way to enter a date in the Date field is to click the arrow that opens the dropdown calendar Then click the date you want To move to another record when the form has a subform the directional arrows at the bottom must be use There are four of them from left to right First Record Previous Record Next Record and Last Record To the right of these arrows in the New Record icon To create a new record while in another record click the New Record icon And two choices exist for creating a new record following the present record e Click the Next Record icon Or click the New Record icon Record i oF 2 la 4 Le GIE Navigation arrows of a form Creating Queries Queries blur the differences between a database and a data source A database is only one type of data source However searching for usable information from a data source requires a query Since the query one part of a database does this the data source appears to become one part of that database its table or tables Query results themselves are special tables within the database Using the Wizard to create a query In the main database wi
73. an envelope or starts a new document with the envelope Insert inserts the envelope into your existing document as page 1 To not proceed with this envelope click Cancel or press the Esc key You can also click Reset to remove your changes and return to the original settings when the dialog box opened When the Envelope dialog box closes you are returned to your document which now has the envelope in the same file as the document Save this file before you do anything else To print the envelope 1 Choose File gt Print from the menu bar 2 On the Print dialog box under Print range choose Pages and type 1 in the box Click OK to print Digital Signing of Documents To sign a document digitally you need a personal key the certificate A personal key is stored on your computer as a combination of a private key which must be kept secret and a public key which you add to your documents when you sign them You can get a certificate from a certification authority which may be a private company or a governmental institution When you apply a digital signature to a document a kind of checksum is computed from the document s content plus your personal key The checksum and your public key are stored together with the document When someone later opens the document on any computer with a recent version of Celframe Office the program will compute the checksum again and compare it with the stored checksum If both are the same the progra
74. appears in which to enter a new name 4 Enter a new name for the sheet 5 Click OK Rename Sheet Name OK Help The name of a sheet may consist only of letters and numbers Spaces are also permitted The name of a sheet is independent of the name of the spreadsheet Enter the spreadsheet name when saving it for the first time as a file The document can contain up to 256 individual sheets each of which can have different names Selecting Multiple Sheets The sheet tab of the current sheet is always visible in white in front of the other sheet tabs The other sheet tabs are gray when they are not selected By clicking other sheet tabs while pressing Ctrl you can select multiple sheets You can use Shift Ctrl Page Up or Page Down to select multiple sheets using the keyboard Undoing a Selection To undo the selection of a sheet click its sheet tab again while pressing the Ctrl key The sheet that is currently visible cannot be removed from the selection Writing Values Simultaneously to Multiple Sheets If multiple sheets are selected all values entered into the active sheet are automatically inserted into the other selected sheets For example data entered in Sheet1 cell Al is automatically entered into the same cell in Sheet2 Calculating Across Multiple Sheets You can refer to a range of sheets in a formula by specifying the first and last sheet of the range for example SUM Sheet1 A1 Sheet3 Al sums up all A
75. arrow at each end A dotted outline of the object being rotated appears and the current angle of rotation is dynamically shown in the Status Bar Rotations are made about an axis which is displayed as a small symbol This is normally located at the midpoint of the object but you can move the axis of rotation with the mouse to any location you like Rotating an object Changing Inclination or Perspective To slant or shear objects use the red handles located at the midpoint of an edge of the selected objects The mouse pointer changes to a when the pointer hovers over one of these midpoint handles Not every object can be slanted basic shapes can be rotated but not slanted The slant axis is the point directly opposite the midpoint handle to be used for shearing the object This point stays fixed in location the other sides and edges move in relation to it as the mouse is dragged make sure that the handle icon is showing before dragging The circles represent the path of the vertices The inclination axis is the bottom vertex of the triangle the slanting handle used is the midpoint of the upper enclosing frame All points on the figure will move through the same angle irrespective of the final shape The actual angle is shown in the Status Bar Should you wonder where the triangle in the next figure comes from it was produced with the unfilled polygon tool and then Close Object selected from the context menu Shearing an obje
76. automatically inserted blank pages Celframe Office Data Access Create single print jabs Charts Internet Paper tray From printer settings Wee Fax Mone gt Choosing Print options You can override any of these defaults when printing a document Click File gt Print then click the Options button on the Print dialog box Table Options On the Celframe Office Celframe Office Write Table page you can specify the default table behavior Some considerations If most of your tables will require borders or headings select those checkboxes If most of your tables are used for page layout deselect borders and headings Number recognition can be very useful if most of your tables contain numerical data Celframe Office Write will recognize dates or currency for example and format the numbers appropriately However if you want the numbers to remain as ordinary text this feature can be quite irritating so you will want to deselect it The Keyboard handling section specifies the distances that cells move when you use keyboard shortcuts to move them and the size of rows and columns inserted using keyboard shortcuts The choices in the Behavior of rows columns section determine the effects that changes to rows or columns have on adjacent rows or columns and the entire table You might need to test these selections to fully understand the effects Options Celframe Office Write Table Celframe Office
77. by clicking on the Transparency icon To define a transparent gradient select an object choose a transparency fill from the Drawing toolbar The transparency icon is now active When you click on this icon a dashed line connecting two squares appears on the object Move the two Squares to modify the gradient You can define the direction of the gradient vertical horizontal or at any angle and the spot at which the transparency begins In the same manner to define a regular gradient select an object choose a gradient fill from the Drawing toolbar The Gradient icon is now active When you click on the gradient icon a dashed line connecting two squares appears on the object just as it does for a transparency gradient In both cases a dashed line connecting two small squares appears on top of the object Click outside the object to set the gradient If the transparency and gradient icons are not visible you can display them using View gt Toolbars gt Mode Moving the squares will have different effects depending on the type of gradient For example for a linear gradient the start and end squares of the gradient will always be situated to either side of the center point of the object A single color object and a transparency gradient covering part of the underlying object The gradient can be dynamically adjusted made more transparent by moving the white square or more opaque by moving the black square An object with a
78. can also choose to make a new folder during the setup of making a filter but it more easy to make the folder first Go Tools gt Message Filters and you will get this window To make a new filter press New As you see you can choose which account this filter will apply for Pressing New you will get this window Message Filters Run selected filter s on Inbox Bun Now First you want to give the new filter a name such as Sales Now the settings are the real limit for what you want here The best way is to explore a bit on your own for what settings you want Example Made a filter which filters mail will comes to the mail address sales nidelven it no and place them in the folder Sales and labels it as Important gives it a bright easy to spot color When you are done press OK and you ll get this window Filter Rules Filter name Sales For incoming messages that Match all of the following Match any of the following Match all messages Subject contains purchase leei Perform these actions Move Message to 7 Sales on Local Folders Set Friority to Highest You now have a new filter You can change the settings add remove disable enable filters as you like Message Filters Filters for motern nidelven t no T Filter Log Enabled filters are run automatically in the order shown below Delete Move Lip Move Down
79. changes choose File gt Save from the main menu The next time that you open a document that was created from the changed template the following message appears The Styles in this document do not match your current Styles Should your current Styles be applied to this document Yes Apply current styles message Click Yes to apply the template s changed styles to the document Click No if you never want to apply the template s changed styles to the document y incor 4 If you choose No in the message box shown in that message will not appear again the next time you open the document after changing the template it is based on You will not get another chance to update the styles from the template Chapter 2 Adding and Formatting Text Working with Text Boxes Text in slides is contained in text boxes There are two ways to add text boxes to a slide Choose a predefined layout from the Layouts section of the Tasks pane These text boxes are called Layout text boxes Create a text box using the text tool This chapter describes how to create modify use and delete text boxes discusses the various types of text that can be inserted and explains how to format the text how to insert a numbered or bulleted list and finally how and when to use fields Using text boxes created from the Layout pane In Normal view Click in the text box that reads Click to add text Click to add an outline or a similar notati
80. choose the active tool which may then be used to edit the image Rectangular Marquee Move Selected Pixels Lasso Mowe Elliptical Marquee Zoom Magic Wand Pan Paint Bucket Gradient Brush Eraser Pencil Color Picker Clone Stamp Recolor Text Line Curve Reckangle Rounded Rectangle Ellipse Freeform Shape Rectangular Marquee You may use this to define a rectangle or square selection region Move Selected Pixels You may use this to move pixels that are currently selected as a result of using the various Selection Tools Lasso You may use this to draw a freeform selection region Move You may use this to move the selection without affecting the pixels that are selected Elliptical Marquee You may use this to draw an ellipse or circle selection region Zoom This tool can be used to zoom in left click Zoom out right click or zoom the whole canvas around a particular region draw a rectangle Magic Wand The Magic Wand tool allows you to select areas of color similar to the way the other selection tools allow you to select a given shape Unlike the other selection tools however the Magic Wand tool takes into consideration factors such as the actual content of the image and the current tolerance setting In many cases all that needs to be done to select a given area of the image is to simply click on it You may use this to select areas of the active layer that are similar in color Pan
81. click on the respective layer and then open its Properties via the Layers menu or by double clicking the layer The following dialog will be shown E Layer Properties General Hame house Wallpaper 6 1260 Background Visible Blending Mode MHormal wt Normal Opacity Multiply J Additive Color Burn Color Dodge Reflect Glow Overlap Difference Negation Lighter Darken Screen karali Each blend mode is described below along with an image composed of the two layers With the respective blend mode selected and the opacity set to 255 Each blend mode is described below Normal This is the default and standard blend mode Each pixel in the layer is blended with the composition depending on its alpha value Multiply Each pixel component s intensity is multiplied with the pixel value in the composition The result of using this blend mode is always pixels that are darker than the original White pixels have no effect and are thus effectively transparent Additive Each pixel s color intensity is added to the intensity of the pixel values in the composition This will always brighten pixels in the composition except for pixels that are completely black which will be effectively transparent Color Burn This blend mode has the effect such that dark pixels are made darker Lighter pixels must be blended with other lighter pixels in order to remain bright Color Dodge Thi
82. close the report Double click the report Car Fuel Expenses Author Danish Date Friday December 25 2009 Date 12 25 09 Distance Fuel Cost Cost per Mile Quantity Begin End Date 12 26 09 Quantity Begin End Distance Fuel Cost Cost per Mile 17 150 1232 3 1439 4 307 1 18 00 0 100 Celframe Office Draw 2008 Chapter 1 Introduction to Celframe Office Draw Celframe Office Draw lets you create simple and complex drawings and export them in a number of common image formats You can also insert tables charts formulas and other items created in Celframe Office programs into your drawings Features Vector Graphics Celframe Office Draw creates vector graphics using lines and curves defined by mathematical vectors Vectors describe lines ellipses and polygons according to their geometry Creating 3D Objects You can create simple 3D objects such as cubes spheres and cylinders in Celframe Office Draw and even modify the light source of the objects Grids and Guides Grids and guides provide a visual cue to help you align objects in your drawing You can also choose to snap an object to a grid line guide or to the edge of another object Connecting Objects to Show Relationships You can connect objects in Celframe Office Draw with special lines called connectors to show the relationship between objects Connectors attach to glue points on drawing objects and remain attached wh
83. color gradient completely covering another object The gradient is adjusted dynamically by moving the Squares the color of the square relating to the increase or decrease in that color An object with both color and transparency gradients partly covering the underlying object Dynamic gradients The Picture editing Toolbar If you have enabled the Picture toolbar View gt Toolbars the toolbar will automatically appear on the screen whenever you select a bitmap picture It appears either directly under the menu bar in place of the formatting toolbar or as a floating toolbar on the screen Graphic Filter Bar This icon on the Picture bar opens the Graphic Filter bar where you can use various filters on the selected picture Graphic Mode Lists view attributes for the selected graphic object The embedded or linked graphic object in the current file will not be changed only the view of the object The graphic is displayed unaltered in color The graphic is displayed in a grayscale 256 shades of gray The graphic is displayed in black and white The brightness and contrast of the graphic are reduced to the extent that the graphic can be used as a watermark background Color With the Color toolbar you can edit some properties of the selected object You can select values from between 100 no color to 100 full intensity 0 indicates the original value of the property The brightness can be adjusted between
84. cyan L Light red E Light magenta C Yellow C white B cray 80 3 Enter a name for the new scenario and leave the other fields unchanged with their default values Close the dialog with OK Your new scenario is automatically activated 4 Change the values in the frames to the values you want to apply to your new scenario If you want to know which values in the scenario affect other values choose Tools Detective Trace Dependents You will see arrows to the cells that are directly dependent on the current cell Changing Your Work Directory When you start a dialog to open or save a document Celframe Office initially displays your work directory To change this directory 1 Choose Tools Options Celframe Office Paths 2 Click My Documents and click the Edit button or double click on My Documents 3 In the Select Path dialog choose the work directory you want and click OK 1 You also use this procedure to change the directory displayed by Celframe Office when you want to insert a graphic Choose Tools Options Celframe Office Paths Graphics then follow step 3 Options Celframe Office Paths Select Path Al Celframe Office User Data General Paths used by CelFrame Office Please select a folder Type 5 Memory SuboClorrect i AutoTest P Backups Gallery Colors Graphics Fonts My Documents Security Templates Appearance Temporary Files Accessibility Java Load Save Language Settings
85. data sources in Celframe Office Having registered the data source whether a spreadsheet text document external database or other accepted data source you can use it in other Celframe Office components including Write and Spreadsheet Viewing data sources Open a document in Write or Spreadsheet To view the data sources available press F4 or select View gt Express gt Data Sources from the pull down menu This brings up a list of registered databases which will include Bibliography and any other database registered ibliograph y 3B Book 3B New Database 3B New Database10 2 New Database Record of nla E a i O T eae ee EA A a ETE To view each database click on the to the left of the database s name This brings up Tables and Queries Click on the next toTables to view the individual tables created Now double click on a table to see all the records held in it Z Bibliography 1a Queries Tables JE Book Editing data sources Some data sources can be edited in the View Data Sources dialog A spreadsheet can not A record can be edited added or deleted The data is displayed on the right side of the screen Click in a field to edit the value Beneath the records are five tiny buttons The first four move backwards or forwards through the records or to the beginning or end The fifth button with a small star inserts a new record Record hi of 1 1 apone View Data Sources navigation butto
86. data sources that can be registered with Celframe Office These data sources can be accessed similarly to a dBase database as explained in the next section Once a data source has been registered it can be used in any other Celframe Office component for example Write or Spreadsheet by selecting View gt Data Sources or pressing the F4 key Mozilla Address Books and dBase databases among others can be accessed and entries can be added or changed y Inrort 4 Spreadsheets can be accessed but no changes can be made in the spreadsheet entries All changes in a spreadsheet sheet must be made in the spreadsheet itself Update the database afterwards to see the changes made in the spreadsheet Accessing a dBase database 1 File gt New gt Database opens the Database Wizard window Clicking the New icon and Database in the drop down menu also open the Database Wizard window 2 Select Connect to an existing database Pressing the TAB key highlights the Database type drop down list Typing D selects dBase Click Next Clicking the arrows opens a menu from which you can select dBase Welcome to the Celframe Office Database Wizard Use the Database Wizard to create a new database open an existing database File or connect ko a database stored on a server Seb up dBASE connection 3 Save and proceed what do vou want to do C Create a new database gt Open an existing database File Recently used WriterOB
87. default entry applies to the locale setting that was selected for the operating system A change in this field is immediately applicable However some formats that were formatted by default change only if the document is newly loaded Decimal separator key Same as locale setting Specifies to use the decimal separator key that is set in your system when you press the respective key on the number pad If this checkbox is activated the character shown after Same as locale setting is inserted when you press the key on the number pad If this checkbox is not activated the character that your keyboard driver software provides is inserted Default currency Specifies the default currency that is used for the currency format and the currency fields If you change the locale setting the default currency changes automatically The default entry applies to the currency format that is assigned to the selected locale setting A change in Default currency field will be transmitted to all open documents and will lead to corresponding changes in the dialogs and icons that control the currency format in these documents Default languages for documents Specifies the languages for spellchecking thesaurus and hyphenation The spellcheck for the selected language only functions when you have installed the corresponding language module A language entry has a check mark in front of it if the spellcheck is activated for this language Western Specifies
88. different numbers and drag the remaining cells are filled with the arithmetic pattern that is recognized in the numbers The AutoFill function also recognizes customized lists that are defined under Tools Options Celframe Office Spreadsheet Sort Lists Options Celframe Office Spreadsheet Sort Lists Celframe Office l Load Save Entries Language Settings Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Celframe Office Spreadsheet Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesda Mon General Jan Feb Mar 4pr May Jun Jul 4ug 5 Tue Wie Wed Add January February March April May J G Adi SEE Ae Monday Thu Jes Sal Grid Print Celframe Office Data Access Charts Internet Copy list From sheetl C 11 You can double click the fill handle to automatically fill all empty columns of the current data block For example first enter Jan into Al and drag the fill handle down to A12 to get the twelve months in the first column Now enter some values into B1 and C1 Select those two cells and double click the fill handle This fills automatically the data block B1 C12 Using a Defined Series 1 Select the cell range in the sheet that you want to fill 2 Choose Edit Fill Series 3 Select the parameters for the series If you select a linear series the increment that you enter is added to each consecutive number in the series to create the next value If you select a growth series the increment that you enter is multiplied by each consecuti
89. engine list under Search in Close the dialog with the OK button Add Click this button to add a new configuration to the list Modify Click this button to apply the modifications made to an existing configuration Delete Click this button to delete the selected search engine from the list There will be no security response Options Internet Search OHHH Celframe Office Load Save Language Settings CelFrame Office Write Celframe Office Writes Web Celframe Office Data Access Charts Internet Prox Mozilla Plug in Search in Altavista Euroseek Excite Google Hotbot Lycos Yahoo Mame Altavista Type And or Exact Prefix http fhea altavista corm websresults gbriode t Suffix Raqp ago hagn ekgs 0eks 1 Ravkw aapt Separator ase match Setting Search Option Chapter 3 Working with Text Selecting Text Before you can do anything with text you need to select it In addition to selecting blocks of text you can select items that are not consecutive Selecting items that are not consecutive To select nonconsecutive items using the mouse 1 Select the first piece of text 2 Hold down the Control Ctrl key and use the mouse to select the next piece of text 3 Repeat as often as needed 4 Now you can work with the selected text copy it delete it change the style or whatever ae Macintosh users substitute the Command key when instructions in this chapter say to use the Cont
90. ett l a Wa We U 0040 64 Characters B Yo The Special Characters dialog box where you can insert special characters 3 Select the characters from any font or mixture of fonts you wish to insert in order then click OK The selected characters are shown in the lower left of the dialog box As you select each character it is shown on the lower right along with the numerical code for that character P Notice that the characters selected appear in the bottom left corner of the dialog box J Different fonts include different special characters If you do not find a particularspecial A character you want try changing the Font selection Setting tab stops and indents You can also set or change the measurement unit by right clicking on the ruler to open a list of units Double click on a part of the ruler that is not between the left and right indent icons to open the Indents amp Spacing page of the Paragraph dialog box Double click anywhere between the left and right indent icons on the ruler itself to open the Tabs page of the Paragraph dialog box To fine tune tab stop settings use the Tabs page of the Paragraph dialog box Paragraph Background Indents amp Spacing Alignment Text Flow Numbering Position ooo p 78 Left TO CO ioh Delete all a Decimal Character Fill character Character Specifying tab stops and fill characters Autoformatting Celframe Office Write can be
91. even pages Vertical Top Entire page Follow text Flow Defining the size and position of the footer frame 7 If your footer has a line above the text as in this book on the Borders page select a right border and specify the line width and spacing to the frame s contents Type Options wrap Hyperlink Borders Background Columns Macro Spacing to contents Left 0 0g Line arrangement Default DIECIE ZENU Right 0 00 User defined Top 0 00 Bottom 0 00 Synchronize Color E black Shadow style Position Distance Color mE m m m 0 07 E r Specifying the border position line width and spacing to contents 8 Click OK to save these settings The footer should now appear in the required position and orientation Numbering Pages To automatically number pages 1 Insert a header or footer 2 Place the cursor in the header or footer where you want the page number to appear and choose Insert gt Fields gt Page Number To include the total number of pages as in page 1 of 5 3 Type the word page and a Space then insert the page number as above 4 Press the spacebar once type the word of and add a space then choose Insert gt Fields gt Page Count Fields ri i E P Ti Comment Reference web Component Pictures ae 4uthor The Page Count field inserts the total number of pages in the document as shown on the S Statistics page of the document
92. font of the text that appears on both the X and Y axes Grid formats the lines that create a grid for the chart Chart Wall Chart Floor and Chart Area are described in the following sections Chart Type changes what kind of chart is displayed and whether it is two or three dimensional Auto Format takes you through the AutoLayout feature 3D Effects formats various elements of a 3D chart 3D View formats the various viewing angles of 3D chart Chart Floor 3D Effects and 3D View options are only available for a 3D chart These options are unavailable grayed out if a two dimensional chart is selected The two main areas of the chart control different settings and attributes for the chart e Chart wall contains the graphic of the chart displaying the data Chart area is the area surrounding the chart graphic The main title and the key are in the chart area Chart Floor from the Format menu is only available for 3D charts and has the Same formatting options as Chart Area and Chart Wall Resizing the chart 1 Click on the chart to select it Green sizing handles appear around the chart 2 To increase or decrease the size of the chart click and drag one of the markers in one of the four corners of the chart To maintain the correct ratio of the sides hold the Shift key down while you click and drag Moving chart elements 1 Double click the chart so that is enclosed by a gray border 2 Click any of the elemen
93. functions on the Bezier curve toolbar Arranging Objects Each object that you place in your document is successively stacked on the preceding object To re arrange the stacking order of a selected object proceed as follows e Click the object that you want to re arrange e Choose Modify Arrange to bring up the context menu and choose one of the arrange options h Bring to Front Ctrl Shifk 4 Bring Forward Ctrl J Send Backward Ctrl 4 Sendta Back Ctrlt Shift 4 In Front of Object Behind Object fy Reverse Bring to Front places the object on top of all other objects Bring Forward places the object one place forward in the stack of objects Send Backward places the object one place back in the stack of objects Send to Back places the object behind all other objects In Front of Object places the object in front of all other objects Behind Object places the object behind another object that you select Arranging an Object Behind Another Object Click the object that you want to re arrange Choose Modify Arrange to open the context menu and choose Behind Object The mouse pointer changes to a hand Click the object behind which you want to arrange the selected object Reversing The Stacking Order of Two Objects Shift click both objects to select them Choose Modify Arrange to open the context menu and choose Reverse Aligning Objects The Alignment function enables you to align objects relative to
94. gt Options n M mAn EO Fi 7 me 2lla lla s Le 7 8 9 16 17 18 19 20 1 Rotation Mode after Clicking Object Changes the mouse click behavior so that rotation handles appear after you click an object and then click it again Drag a handle to rotate the object in the direction you want 2 Display Grid Specifies whether to display the grid 3 Show Snap Lines Shows or hides snap lines so can you align objects on your slide To remove a snap line drag it off the slide 4 Guides When Moving Specifies whether to display guides when moving an object 5 Snap to Grid Specifies whether to move frames drawing elements and controls only between grid points To change the status of the snap grip for only the current action drag an object while holding down the Ctrl key 6 Snap to Guides Snaps the edge of a dragged object to the nearest snap line when you release the mouse 7 Snap to Page Margins Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the nearest page margin 8 Snap to Object Border Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the border of the nearest graphic object 9 Snap to Object Points Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the points of the nearest graphic object 10 Allow Quick Editing Specifies whether to immediately switch to the text editing mode when clicking a text object 11 Select Text Area Only Specifies whethe
95. in other sheets Fortunately Celframe Office does this work for you After having inserted a new column A the formula SUM A1 B2 will be automatically updated to SUM B1 C2 Row numbers will also be automatically adjusted when a new row 1 is inserted Absolute and relative references are always adjusted in Celframe Office Spreadsheet whenever the referenced area is moved But be careful if you are copying a formula since in that case only the relative references will be adjusted not the absolute references Absolute references are used when a calculation refers to one specific cell in your sheet If a formula that refers to exactly this cell is copied relatively to a cell below the original cell the reference will also be moved down if you did not define the cell coordinates as absolute Aside from when new rows and columns are inserted references can also change when an existing formula referring to particular cells is copied to another area of the sheet Assume you entered the formula SUM A1 AQ9 in row 10 If you want to calculate the sum for the adjacent column to the right simply copy this formula to the cell to the right The copy of the formula in column B will be automatically adjusted to SUM B1 B9 Referencing URLs or example if you found an Internet page containing current stock exchange information in Spreadsheet cells you can load this page in Celframe Office Spreadsheet by using the following procedure 1 In a Celframe
96. in the database range and choose Data gt Sort In the dialogue that appears select the column to be sorted fro example Amount as the sort criterion and click OK Up to two additional criteria can be specified one to follow the other for the sort function For instance sort the expenditures first by date then by item if they have the same date and then by amount if they have the same date and item Sort Criteria Options Sort by Ascending To Descending Then by Ascending Undefined Descending Then by Ascending Undefined Descending Sort dialog box Filtering Database Ranges To filter out only certain records so that they can be modified use the spreadsheet filtering function Choose between using a dialog to specify the criteria exactly in that case range definitions are also possible or creating an AutoFilter that will help filter according to specific values or text Imagine that the output list is already 8000 records long With this number of records it is no longer possible to get an overview Now only those records that occurred after 1 2 2000 and which apart from this involve an amount in excess of 100 currency units must be shown Here is one way 1 Set the cursor in the database range 2 Choose Data gt Filter gt Standard Filter to open the dialog 3 Enter the following Date gt 12 1 2009 AND Amount gt 6 In the dialogue the existing contents of the data
97. including its transition effect is previewed in the workspace area Changes that can be made to Slide transitions 1 Apply to selected slides has a list of slide transitions a Make sure Automatically after how many second is choose You can set the timing for the next Slide to appear b Click one of the members of the Apply to selected slides list c Watch the effects of this slide transition d Select the slide transition you want 2 Modify transition has two drop down lists Select the Speed slow medium and fast Select a Sound from the list if you want one 3 Once you have made your selections if any click Apply to all slides to give all slides the same transition 4 Play and Slide Show are used to play one or more slides in the presentation e Clicking Play has the same effect as having Automatic Preview checked ticked a single slide is shown along with its slide transition Slide Show begins the slide show at the selected slide and continues until the end If you want to use this button to play the entire slide show click the top slide in the Slides pane Then click Slide Show in the Slides transitions section of the Task pane Using Templates Supplied with Celframe Office Celframe Office comes with three presentation templates The difference between them is that Presentation templates include a series of slides with sample titles and topics while Presentation background templates h
98. inverted using curves Chapter 2 Working With Picture Filter This menu contains many commands that can be used for applying special effects to your image Artistic Blurs Distort Moise Fhoto Render Stylize Artistic These are meant to give the result of something drawn with traditional artistic means such as ink pencil and oil GH Ink Sketch Oil Painting Pencil Sketch Ink Sketch This effect is used for making an image appears like it may have been drawn using an ink pen Original Modified Oil Painting This effect is used for making an image appear as though it is an oil painting Original Modified a anal Pencil Sketch This effect is used for making an image appear as though it were sketched with a pencil Original Modified a Blurs These are meant to blur the image in various ways Last Filter Pencil Sketch Ctrl F Artistic Gaussian Blur Distort D Motion Blur Noise dk Radial Blur Fhoto Eo Unfocus Fender zoom Blur Stylize Gaussian Blur This applies a standard blur to the image which uses the Gaussian blur formula Original Modified Motion Blur This effect is useful for adding the illusion of straight motion to an image as if the picture had been taken with a longer exposure time Original Modified
99. is covered by other objects hold down Alt and click through the objects until you reach the underlying object To cycle through the objects in reverse order hold down Alt Shift when you click e To select an object that is covered by another object using the keyboard press Tab to cycle through the objects on the slide To cycle through the objects in reverse order press Shift Tab Copying Formatting With the Format Paintbrush You can use the Format Paintbrush tool to copy formatting from a text selection or object and apply the formatting to another text selection or object 5 Select the text or object whose formatting you want to copy 7 On the Standard Bar click the Format Paintbrush icon The cursor changes to a paint bucket If you want to apply the formatting to more than one selection double click the Format Paintbrush icon After you apply all the formatting click the icon again 8 Select or click the text or object that you want to apply the formatting to X To exclude paragraph formatting hold down Ctrl when you click To exclude character formatting hold down Ctrl Shift when you click The following table describes the formatting attributes that the Format Paintbrush can copy adalat Nothing selected but cursor is inside a text passage Text is selected Frame is selected Object is selected Form control is selected Drawing object is selected Copies the formatting of the current paragraph and
100. is created O Portrait nl as If you feel adventurous try selecting some of the other layout choices After selecting a choice drag and drop the Report Wizard window so that you can see what you have selected Move the cursor over the Heading of this window and then drag and drop 7 Create report a Label the report Car Fuel Expenses b Select Static report c Click Finished Report Wizard Decide how you want to proceed Field selection Title of report Labeling Fields Car Fuel Expences Grouping What kind of report do you want bo create Static report Dynamic report Sort options Choose layout l How do you want to proceed after creating the report Modify report layout Create report now Car Fuel report 1 Create a query containing only fuel bought on the days of the vacation a Open a query in Design View b Follow the steps for adding tables in Add tables Add the Car Fuel table c Double click these fields in the Car Fuel table listing Date and Fuel Cost to enter them in the table at the bottom of the query d In the Criterion cell of the Date field type the following BETWEEN 12 25 2009 AND 1 2 26 2009 Date ow Fuel Field Alias Table Sort visible Function Criterion Car Fuel Car Fuel BETWEEN 12 25 2009 AND 12 26 20094 e Save name and close the query When using dates in a query enter them in numerical form MM DDYYYY or DD MM Y
101. left number pair shows the X Y coordinates of the upper left corner and the right number pair displays the size of the object These numbers do not relate to the solid object but to the rectangle forming the selection outline The percentage shown in the Zoom field gives information about the current zoom factor A double click or right click on this field opens the Zoom dialog where you can quickly change the zoom factor In the Indicator field an asterisk is shown whenever any change is made to the document but not yet saved to disk If you wish to digitally sign the document a double click or right click in the Signature field brings up the signature box Note that a document must be saved at least once before it can be signed After it is signed an indicator is present in this field The Slide field shows the page sequence number for the current drawing page in addition to the total number of pages that you created so far This is useful when your drawing has a number of pages If you select an object the field enclosed by parentheses shows the layer in which the object resides within the drawing The Page Pane use for Switches the Page Pane on and off Menu and Toolbars You can display or hide the various Draw toolbars according to your needs To display or hide a toolbar click View gt Toolbars On the menu that appears choose which toolbars you want to display You can also select the icons that you wish to appear on the toolbars
102. line click the Rotate icon and set the distance to the line you wish Fontwork Rotating Text The Fontwork dialog opens up many other possibilities to manipulate the text You can for example turn the text around 180 degrees with the Orientation icon or place the text under the line by assigning a negative value to the spacing between text and line In addition you can use the Fontwork dialog to generate curved text that follows the shape of a curved line It pays to experiment a little to investigate some of the possibilities Chapter 5 Miscellaneous Shortcut Keys for Drawing Objects The following is a list of shortcut keys specific to Drawing documents Some of the shortcut keys may be assigned to your desktop system Keys that are assigned to the desktop system are not available to Celframe Office Try to assign different keys either for Celframe Office in Tools gt Customize gt Keyboard or in your desktop system Function Keys for Drawings Fe eee tin di Fs ooemenwvawor Shortcut Keys for Drawings Multiple x Key number Zooms to fit entire page in screen pad Ctrl Shift Bring to front Ctrl Shift Send to back Shortcut Keys Specific to Drawings arrow key Moves the page view in the direction of the arrow key The movement of the selected object is constrained by multiples of 45 degrees Ctrl Click while dragging an object Note you must first Creates a copy of the dra
103. lines text and callouts to the current document Load URL Loads a document specified by an entered URL You can type a new URL or select one that is already registered Celframe Office automatically converts file paths into URL notation Enable this icon by Visible Buttons command click the arrow at the toolbar end Formatting Bar The Formatting bar contains several text formatting functions wo Heating 2 Eitstream Vera SonsjAriat j4 Dd ddl 1 Styles and Formatting Specifies whether to show or hide the Styles and Formatting window which is where you can assign and organize Styles 2 Apply Style Assigns a Style to the current paragraph selected paragraphs or to a selected object 3 Font Name Allows you to select a font name from the list or enter a font name directly You can enter several fonts separated by semicolons Celframe Office uses each named font in succession if the previous fonts are not available 4 Font Size Allows you to choose between different font sizes from the list or to enter a size manually 5 Bold Makes the selected text bold If the cursor is in a word the entire word is made bold If the selection or word is already bold the formatting is removed 6 Italic Makes the selected text italic If the cursor is in a word the entire word is made italic If the selection or word is already italic the formatting is removed 7 Underline Underlines or removes underlining from the
104. matrix select the sheet ranges to be filtered Open the Advanced Filter dialog by choosing Data Filter Advanced Filter and define the filter conditions 3 Then click OK and you will see that only the rows from the original sheet whose contents have met the search criteria are still visible All other rows are temporarily hidden and can be made to reappear with the Format Row Show command Example Load a spreadsheet with a large number of records We are using a fictional Turnover document but you Can just as easily use any other document The document has the following layout fh p p ppo 7 porn pnd sess ferar fe 125600 200500 240000 170000 3 February 160000 180300 362000 220000 Copy row 1 with the row headers field names to row 20 for example Enter the filter conditions linked with OR in rows 21 22 and so on Pp pepe pp apan S Specify that only rows which either have the value January in the Month cells OR a value of under 160000 in the Standard cells will be displayed Choose Data Filter Advanced Filter and then select the range A20 E22 After you click OK only the filtered rows will be displayed The other rows will be hidden from view When you select filtered rows and then either apply formatting or delete the selected rows this action then applies only to the filtered rows The hidden rows are not affected This is the opposite to rows that you have hidden manually by the For
105. message headers to download For this newsgroup Download all headers Download 500 headers Mark remaining headers as read Download Cancel Celframe Office PhotoAlbum 2008 Introduction to Celframe Office PhotoAlbum Celframe PhotoAlbum lets you easily create and manage albums of your digital pictures A perfect Image organiser that lets you store organise and easily locate all your digital photos So never miss a photo from your birthday vacation or office function ever again It is a user friendly image organiser that lets users store and easily locate their digital photos and other images supporting all the common formats This new application features a multi window interface displaying a clear outline of folders albums and favourites file lists with property pages and choices of full screen or thumbnail views of all pictures in a selected folder or album Single click access to much of the photo editing power of Celframe Studio Features Annotating Photos Celframe Photoalbum 2008 provides possibly the easiest way to annotate your photos To adda photo description simply click the info button and watch your photo grow in place and provide a place to enter or short or long description When you re done just click off the photo Power users will enjoy driving this entire process using Home Esc o m n and p keys Framing Celframe Photoalbum 2008 enable you to select regions of the image using common as
106. modifications since the last save will be lost Cancel Nothing will happen and you will return to the document If all the documents have been saved Write will close immediately If any documents have been modified but not saved a warning dialog box will appear gt inp d Not saving your document could result in the loss of recently made changes or worse for your entire file Chapter 2 Variable Option for Setting Celframe Office Write Choosing options 1 Click Tools gt Options The list in the left hand box varies depending on which component of Celframe Office is open 2 Click the sign by Celframe Office in the left hand section of the Options Celframe Office dialog box A list of subsections drops down Options Celframe Office elframe Office Load Sayve ic Language Settings Celframe Office Celframe Office Write Celframe Office Write Web Celframe Office Data Access This dialog is used to define general settings when working with Celframe Office Enter Charts vour personal data the defaults to be used when saving documents and paths to Internet important files These settings will be saved automatically and used in later sessions as well HA Eg Es ll Go Celframe Office Options User Data options Because Write revision features mark your changes and comments with the name or initials stored in the User Data page you will want to ensure that your name and initials appear there To do this
107. move the Date field to the Groupings list Click Next 9 Sort options the wizard skipped this one 10 Choose layout Accept the default Click Next 11 Create the report a Change the report name to Fuel Statistics b The default setting is Dynamic report so no change is necessary c Select Modify report layout Click Finish Modifying a report At the end of the last section we left the Fuel Statistics report open in the edit mode We will be working on that report These same steps can be used with any report that you open for editing Author Danish Car Fuel Expences Date 12 25 09 Quantity Begin End Distance Fuel Cost Cost per Mile f8 b 2 070 2 670 2 7870 54 7670 9 7670 9 Car Fuel Expenses Report The date is not correct The title report is wrong spelling The columns need to be moved to the left to give a better appearance None of the numbers are correct but their only purpose is to show the number of decimal places Step 1 Change the date 1 Click to the right of the date 25 12 20 so that the cursor is next to the field Use the Backspace key to erase the date 2 Insert gt Fields gt Date This places today s date where the original date was 3 Changing the date formating a Double click the date field you just inserted b Since this is a dynamic report change the Select field from Date fixed to Date c Change the Format to what you desire I use the Friday December
108. multimedia and a variety of other items If you want you can even import and modify Microsoft Power Point presentations For on screen slide shows animation slide transitions and multimedia are a few of the techniques you can use to make your presentation more exciting Features Creating Vector Graphics Many of the tools for creating vector graphics in Celframe Office Draw are available in Celframe Office Power Presentation Creating Slides Celframe Office Power Presentation provides you with templates to create professional looking Slides You can also assign a number of dynamic effects to your slides including animation and transition effects Creating Presentations Several views or pages are available when you design a slide show For example the Slide Sorter displays an overview of your slides in thumbnail form while the Handout page contains both the Slide and the text you want to distribute to the audience Celframe Office Power Presentation also lets you rehearse the timing of your slide show Publishing Presentations You can publish your slides on screen as handouts or as HTML documents Giving Presentations Celframe Office Power Presentation gives you the choice of running a slide show automatically or manually Finding and Opening Power Presentation All computers with Celframe Office Write Spreadsheet etc should have Power Presentation already installed For Windows XP users click on Start then on
109. n J E Pa Mone DYD Collection iat T aian S hi Pa Once tables have been created using the wizard editing them is limited The Primary key can not be changed in any way It is possible to add new fields and remove fields It is possible to change the field type when creating the field as well as later as long as it is not the primary key Once data has been added to the database deleting a field will also delete any data contained in that field When creating a new table it pays to create the fields with the correct names length and format before data is added Tables can be deleted in a very simple way But doing so removes all of the data contained in every field of the table Unless you are sure do not delete a table To delete a table right click it in the list of tables Select Delete from the context menu A pop up window asks if you are sure you want to delete the table Once you click Yes the table and its data are gone forever unless you have a backup Creating tables in Design View Design View is a more advanced method for creating a new table It allows you to directly enter information about each field in the table We will use this method for the tables of our database Note While the Field type and formatting are different in Design View the concepts are the same as in the Wizard The first table to be created is Car Its fields are CarlD Date Car Cost Car Quantity and Payment
110. not allow modification of existing data Get joined fields _ Do not allow deletion of existing data Srrange controls Do not allow addition of new data Set data entry Apply styles Seb name Step 7 Apply styles 1 Select the color you want in the Apply Styles list 2 Select the Field border you want 3 Click Next Apply the style of your form Field selection Apply styles Field border No border Set up a subform violet l Bright Blue 3D look Add subform Fields Light Gray Flat Get joined Fields Dark OF Orange Arrange controls Ice Blue Grey Set data entry Waker Red Seb name Step 8 Set name 1 Enter the name for the form 2 Click the circle in from of Modify the form This circle is called a radio button 3 Click Next The form opens in Edit mode Form Wizard Set the name of the form Field selection Name of the Form CVO Collection Set up a subform Add subform Fields How do you want to proceed after creating the Form Get joined Fields s Work with the Form Arrange controls Set data entry Apply styles Set name cota woven ater osttcated motes come lt AutoField gt TT i ee ee ee eao DVD Collection Form Modifying a form We will be moving the controls to different places in the form and changing the background to a picture First we must decide what we want to change and to what The discussion will foll
111. not be affected 9 Move UP Positions the selected paragraph before the one above it 10 Move Down Positions the selected paragraph after the one below it 11 Move Up with Subpoints Moves a paragraph with subpoints to above the previous paragraph This is only visible when the cursor is positioned within numbered or bulleted text 12 Move Down with Subpoints Moves a paragraph with all its subpoints below the following paragraph This is only visible when the cursor is positioned within numbered or bulleted text 13 Restart Numbering Restarts the text numbering This is only visible when the cursor is positioned within numbered or bulleted text 14 Bullets and Numbering Adds numbering or bullets to the current paragraph and lets you edit format of the numbering or bullets Status Bar The Status Bar contains information about the current document and offers various buttons with Special functions selection Document 900M Mode Modification Cg Sf OI Oe RT SD Je ewes Homie Page Number Insert Edit or Active Combined Display Current Page Style Mode Hyperlinks 1 Page Number The current page number is displayed in this field of the status bar A double click opens the Navigator with which you can navigate in the document A right click shows all bookmarks in the document Click a bookmark to position the text cursor at the bookmark location 2 Current Page Style Displays the current Page Style Doubl
112. of the layouts will suit your purposes for your first slide It is good practice to keep it rather simple Some suitable layouts are Title Slide also contains a section for a subtitle or Title Only slide The rest of the layouts seem to be better suited for later slides in the presentation or for more complex presentations a For very simple presentations you may not need a title for example if the presentation is N simply a group of pictures put together for someone to see But in most cases you will need to use the title as the first slide Adding elements to the Title Page All the suggested layouts contain a title section at their top To create the title click the phrase Click to add title Type the title Adjustments to the formating of the title can be done by using the F11 key right clicking the Title style and selecting Modify from the pop up menu If you are using the Title Slide layout slide click the phrase Click to add text to add a subtitle Make any adjustments in the formating you desire Do this the same way as if you are changing the title formating use the F11 key right click the Subtitle style select Modify from the pop up menu and make your changes Click OK to apply your changes to the subtitle The Title Object layout slide can also be used To do this requires knowledge of how to move and resize graphic images objects Insert the object as an OLE Object To do so 1 Double click the graphic 2 Select Crea
113. of web pages to create Standard HTML one page for each slide with navigation links to move from slide to slide Standard HTML with frames one page with a navigation bar on the left hand side uses slide title as navigation links Click on links to display pages in right hand side Automatic one page for each slide with each page set with the Refresh meta tag so a browser automatically cycles from one page to the next WebCast generates an ASP or Perl application to display the slides Unfortunately Celframe Office has no direct support for PHP as yet HTML Export Publication type Options Standard HTML format Create title page O Standard HTML with frames Show notes O Automatic WebCast ee 5 p l HTML Export Choosing publication type 5 Decide how the images will be saved GIF or JPG and what resolution to use When choosing a resolution consider what the majority of your viewers might have If you use a high resolution then a viewer with a medium resolution monitor will have to scroll sideways to see the entire slide probably not desirable HTML Export Save graphics as i Monitor resolution GIF Low resolution 640x480 pixels IPG O Medium resolution 500x600 pixels 75 Quality O High resolution 1024x768 pixels Effects E Export sounds when slide advances Choosing graphics type 6 If Create title page was chosen in step 4 supply the inf
114. on current selection number pad Shift Ctrl G Group selected objects Shift Ctrl Alt A Shift Ctrl Alt A Ungroup selected group Ctrl click Enter a group so that you can edit the individual objects of the group Click outside the group to return to the normal view Shift Ctri K Combine selected objects selected Combine selected objects created by combining two or more objects Shortcut Keys for Celframe Office Power Presentation Ctrl drag with Copy Hold down Ctrl and drag an object to create a copy of the object when moving option Hold down Alt to draw or resize objects by dragging from the center of the object outward Alt key click Select the object behind the currently selected object Alt Shift click Select the Select the object in front of the currently selected object in Select the object in front of the currently selected object of the currently selected object E Select adjacent items or a text passage Click at the start of a selection move to the end of the selection and then hold down Shift while you click Shift drag when Hold down Shift while dragging to resize an object to maintain the resizing proportions of the object Tabkey Tabkey Select objects in the order in which they were created 00 Select objects in the order in which they were created 00 in the order in which they were created Shift Tab Select objects in the reverse order in which they were created Enter Activat
115. point 3 Select a fill character which will be drawn from the tab insertion point up to the tab stop You can choose any character to act as fill character 4 Click the New button to apply the new tab stop This page is also available in the Format gt Paragraph dialog Paragraph Indents amp Spacing Od 0 00 Left Right gt Centered L Delete Decimal Character Fill character O Character Dialog to set tab stops in a paragraph or a style Creating bulleted and numbered lists The procedure to create a bulleted or numbered list is quite different depending on the type of text box used although the tools to manage the list and customize the appearance are the same In text boxes created automatically by Power Presentation called Layout the outline styles available are by default bulleted lists while for normal text boxes an additional step is required to create a bulleted list Creating lists in Layout text boxes Every text box included in the available layouts is already formatted as a bulleted list therefore to create a bulleted list the only necessary steps are 1 From the Layout pane choose a slide design that contains a text box Those are easily recognizable from the thumbnail 2 Click in the text box that reads Click to add an outline 3 Type the text then press Enter to start a new bulleted line 4 The default list type is a bulleted list The mechanisms to change the list from bu
116. presentation 1 Open the presentation that you want to use for a template 2 From the main menu choose File gt Express gt Templates gt Save The Templates window opens Templates New template Cancel Templates Categories Templates Help My Templates Book_template all_templates Generic _article_template Edit Business Correspondence myAgendaTemplate Calendrier myFaxTemplate Organizer Education myLetterTemplate Miscellaneous Other Business Documents z Perconal Correcnoandence and Darii Saving a new template 4 In the New template field type a name for the new template 5 In the Categories list click the folder in which you want to store the template This is usually the My Templates folder unless you have created other folders 6 Click OK Celframe Office saves the new template and the Templates window closes Modifying a Template You can edit a template s styles and content and then if you wish you can reapply the NS template s styles to documents that were created from that template You can only reapply styles You cannot reapply content To edit a template 1 From the main menu choose File gt Express gt Templates gt Edit A standard file browser window opens 2 Find and select the template that you want to edit and then click Open The selected template opens in Celframe Office Power Presentation 3 Edit the template just as you would any other presentation To save your
117. pressing F2 or select a blank cell and press the key 2 Click and hold the Formula f x icon In our example this gives the result 50 in the top left cell 1 Type an equals sign in an empty cell 2 Type sum or select it from the function list f x 3 Select the cells to be added together The formula should be something like sum lt A1 BI1 gt 4 Press the Enter key or click the green tick checkmark on the Formula Bar 5 The answer appears in the cell you have selected Chapter 7 Miscellaneous Using Shortcut Keys Celframe Office Write Accessibility Some of the shortcut keys may be assigned to your desktop system Keys that are assigned to the desktop system are not available to Celframe Office Try to assign different keys either for Celframe Office in Tools gt Customize gt Keyboard or in your desktop system Press the keys Alt lt underlined character gt to open a menu In an open menu press the underlined character to run a command For example press Alt l to open the Insert menu and then T to insert a table To open a context menu press Shift F10 To close a context menu press Escape Inserting Sections Choose View Toolbars Insert to open the Insert toolbar Press F6 until the focus is on the Insert toolbar Press the right arrow key until the Section icon is selected Press the down arrow key and then press the right arrow key to set the width of the section that you want to insert Press E
118. recommended to use the other values unless absolutely necessary Adding images to the Gallery You can add new images to existing themes which you created or that can be edited There are two ways to add an image to an existing theme Method 1 selecting a file 1 Right click on the theme name in the list of themes and choose Properties from the pop up menu 2 Click the Files tab if necessary 3 Click Add 4 Select a file and click Open The image is added to the theme Fre Ba fy Backgro Update Rename Properties im Rulers im Sounds Method 2 drag and drop 1 Open the document containing an image you want to add to the Gallery and display the Gallery theme to which you want to add it 2 Position the mouse pointer above the image without clicking 3 If the mouse pointer changes to a hand symbol the image refers to a hyperlink In this case press the A t key while you click the image to select it without executing the respective link If the mouse pointer does not change to a hand symbol you can simply click the image to select it 4 Once the image is selected evident from the green selection handles around it release the mouse button Click again on the image keeping the mouse button pressed for more than two seconds Without releasing the mouse button drag the image into the document 5 Release the mouse button Deleting images from the Gallery To delete an image from a the
119. replaced by the graphic from the Gallery but the position and size of the replaced draw object are retained Inserting Objects from the Gallery You can insert an object in a document either as a copy or as a link A copy of an object is independent of the original object Changes to the original object have no effect on the copy A link remains dependent on the original object Changes to the original object are also reflected in the link Inserting an object as a copy e Open the Gallery by clicking the Gallery icon on the Standard bar or by selecting Tools gt Express gt Gallery e Select a theme e Select an object using a single click e Drag the object into the document or right click to open the context menu and select Insert and Copy __New Themen Backgrounds rings orange C Program Files Celframe Celframe Office 2008 Professional share ee Backgrounds Bullets i Homepage My Theme f Mew Theme Rulers Sounds Inserting an object as a link Open the Gallery by clicking the Gallery icon on the Standard bar or by selecting Tools gt Express gt Gallery Select a theme Select an object by a single click Drag the object into the document while pressing the Shift and Ctrl keys or right click to open the context menu and select Insert and Hyperlink Inserting an object as a background graphic e Open the Gallery by clicking the Gallery icon on the Standar
120. resulting image as well Original Modified a Red Eye Removal If you have a photo where a subject has red eyes then this effect is useful for eliminate that effect You should make sure to use a selection tool to highlight the subject s eyes before starting this effect Original Modified Sharpen If an image has an appearance that is too soft then this effect can be used to sharpen the edges Original Modified Soften Portrait This is useful for adding a glowing and glamorous or dreamy effect to a photo Original Modified P Render Effects These usually overwrite any image that already exists on the canvas Last Filter Red Eye Removal Ctrl F Artistic Blurs Distort Moise Fhoto Clouds Julia Fractal 2 Mandelbrot Fractal Sky lize Clouds This render a randomized cloud effect on to a layer You can also choose how to blend it into any image that is already on the layer Julia Fractal This effect renders a Julia fractal on to the layer Mandelbrot Fractal This effect renders a Mandelbrot fractal on to the layer Stylize Effects These produce stylized looks useful in finding edges for tracing or producing specialized textures for game development e g bump maps Last Filter Red Eye Removal Ctrl F Artistic Blurs D
121. selected text using the mouse drag it to the new location and release it To copy selected text hold down the Control key while dragging The text retains the formatting it had before dragging After selecting text you can use the mouse or the keyboard for these operations Cut Use Edit gt Cut or the keyboard shortcut Control X or the Cut icon on the toolbar a Copy Use Edit gt Copy or the keyboard shortcut Control C or the Copy icon Ea Paste Use Edit gt Paste or the keyboard shortcut Control V or the Paste icon A The result of a paste operation depends on the source of the text to be pasted If you simply click on the Paste icon any formatting the text has such as bold or italics is retained Text pasted from Web sites and other sources may also be placed into frames or tables If you do not like the results click the Undo icon and try again To make the pasted text take on the formatting of the surrounding text where it is to be pasted choose either e Edit gt Paste Special e or click the triangle to the right of the Paste icon or click the Paste icon without releasing the left mouse button Then select Unformatted text from the resulting menu The range of choices on the Paste Special menu varies depending upon the origin and formatting of the text or other object to be pasted See Figure 61 for an example with text on the clipboard Formatted text RTF Unformatted text Paste menu Finding and Replacing
122. sheet click in the cell that contains the value to be changed in this example it is the cell with the capital value C 4 Enter the expected result of the formula in the Target Value text box In this example the value is 15 000 Click OK 5 A dialog appears informing you that the Goal Seek was successful Click Yes to enter the result in the cell with the variable value Multiple Operations in Columns or Rows If the data of a data range is arranged in columns or arranged in rows select the data range together with the cell or cell range next to or below it as the target range In the Column Row field enter the cell reference to the first cell in the data range In the Formula field enter the cell reference to the cell with the formula that applies to the data range Examples You produce toys which you sell for 10 each Each toy costs 2 to make in addition to which you have fixed costs of 10 000 per year How much profit will you make in a year if you sell a particular number of toys Consider the following table 1 Selling price 10 Annual Annual sales profit Calculating With One Formula and One Variable 1 To calculate the profit first enter any number as the quantity items sold in this example 2000 The profit is found from the formula Profit Quantity Selling price Direct costs Fixed costs Enter this formula in B5 2 In column D enter certain annual sales one under the other for example in steps
123. text color Click the arrow next to the icon to open the Font color toolbar 20 Highlighting Applies the current highlight color to the background of a text selection If no text is selected click the Highlighting icon select the text that you want to highlight and then click the Highlighting icon again To change the highlight color click the arrow next to the Highlighting icon and then click the color that you want 21 Background Color Click to open a toolbar where you can click a background color for a paragraph The color is applied to the background of the current paragraph or the selected paragraphs Paragraph Background or Background Color when in a table in text frames and inserted graphics 22 Font Set the font options for the selected text 23 Paragraph Modifies the format of the current paragraph such as indents and alignment Picture Bar The Picture Bar contains functions for formatting and positioning selected bitmap graphics 1 Graphic Filter Bar This icon on the Picture bar opens the Graphic Filter bar where you can use various filters on the selected picture 2 Graphics Mode Lists view attributes for the selected graphic object The embedded or linked graphic object in the current file will not be changed only the view of the object 3 Color With the Color toolbar you can edit some properties of the selected object 4 Transparency Specifies the transparency in the graphic object Values from 0
124. text or other graphics This method is useful when the graphic does not need to be visually associated with a particular piece of text It is often used when producing newsletters or other documents that are very layout intensive gt inp A If you plan to use a document within a master document do not anchor graphics To Page because the graphics will disappear from the master document To Paragraph The graphic is associated with a paragraph and moves with the paragraph It may be placed in the margin or another location This method is useful as an alternative to a table for placing icons beside paragraphs To Character The graphic is associated with a character but is not in the text sequence It moves with the paragraph but may be placed in the margin or another location This method is similar to anchoring to a paragraph but cannot be used with drawing objects As Character The graphic is placed in the document like any other character and therefore affects the height of the text line and the line break The graphic moves with the paragraph as you add or delete text before the paragraph This method is useful for keeping screenshots in sequence in a procedure or for adding a small icon in sequence in a sentence To Frame If the graphic has been placed in a frame you can anchor the graphic in a fixed position inside the frame The frame can then be anchored to the page a paragraph or a character as required Adding Captions Au
125. the Contents will display as O Objects but the chosen files will be inserted into the new theme Remember you can always add or delete image files later Chapter 4 Inserting Spreadsheets Charts and Other Object Using spreadsheets in Celframe Office Power Presentation A spreadsheet embedded in Celframe Office Power Presentation includes most of the functionality and is therefore capable of performing extremely complex calculations and data analysis However in most cases people limit the use of spreadsheets in Celframe Office Power Presentation to creating complex tables or presenting data in a tabular format If you need to analyse your data or apply formulas these operations are best performed in a spreadsheet and the results displayed in an embedded Celframe Office Power Presentation spreadsheet Inserting a spreadsheet To add a spreadsheet to a slide select the corresponding layout in the list of predefined layouts in the Tasks pane as shown in Figure This inserts a placeholder for a spreadsheet in the center of a slide To insert data and modify the formatting of the spreadsheet it is necessary to activate it and enter the edit mode To do so double click inside the frame with the green handles Alternatively select Insert gt Spreadsheet from the main menu bar This opens a small spreadsheet in the middle of the slide When a spreadsheet is inserted using this method it is already in edit mode Click to add titl
126. the Navigator and can be accessed directly from there with a single mouse click In HTML documents bookmarks are converted to anchors that you can jump to by hyperlink Working With Hyperlinks When you type text that can be used as a hyperlink Celframe Office formats it automatically creating the hyperlink and applying to the text a color and underlining If this does not happen you can enable this feature using Tools gt AutoCorrect gt Options and selecting the URL Recognition checkbox If you do not want Celframe Office to convert a specific URL to a hyperlink select Edit gt Undo Typing from the menu bar or press Control Z immediately after the formatting has been applied To change the color of hyperlinks go to Tools gt Options gt Celframe Office gt Appearance scroll to Unvisited links and or Visited links select the checkboxes pick the new colors and click OK This will change the color for all hyperlinks in all components of Celframe Office this may not be what you want important You can also insert and modify links using the Hyperlink dialog To display the dialog click the Hyperlink icon on the Standard toolbar or select Insert gt Hyperlink from the menu bar To turn existing text into a link highlight it before opening the Hyperlink dialog Hyperlink Ps Hyperlink type Gp Web Telnet Internet Target Mail amp News h Further settings Frame Document Text ae D Mame
127. the cell that contains the cursor is empty the cursor moves to the next column to the left that contains data Moves the cursor to the right edge of the current data range If the column to the right of the cell that contains the cursor is empty the cursor moves to the next column to the right that contains data Moves the cursor to the top edge of the current data range If the row above the cell that contains the cursor is empty the cursor moves up to the next row that contains data Ctrl Down Moves the cursor to the bottom edge of the current data range If the row below Arrow the cell that contains the cursor is empty the cursor moves down to the next row that contains data Ctrl Shift Selects all cells containing data from the current cell to the end of the continuous Arrow range of data cells in the direction of the arrow pressed If used to select rows and columns together a rectangular cell range is selected Ctrl Page Up Moves one sheet to the left In the page preview Moves to the previous print page Ctrl Page Moves one sheet to the right Down In the page preview Moves to the next print page Alt Page Up Moves one screen to the left Alt Page Down Moves one screen page to the right Shift Ctrl Adds the previous sheet to the current selection of sheets If all the sheets ina spreadsheet are selected this shortcut key combination only selects the previous sheet Makes the previous shee
128. the character formatting of the next character in the text flow direction Copies the formatting of the last selected character and of the paragraph that contains the character Copies the frame attributes that are defined in Format Frame dialog The contents size position linking hyperlinks and macros in the frame are not copied Copies the object formatting that is defined in the Format Graphics or Format Object dialogs The contents size position hyperlinks and macros in the object are not copied Not supported Copies all formatting attributes In Power Presentation and Draw the text contents of the object is also copied Text within drawing object or Not supported within Spreadsheet cells is selected Write table or cells are selected Copies the formatting that is specified in Table Text Flow Borders and Background tab pages in the Format Table dialog The paragraph and character formatting are also copied Spreadsheet table or cells are Copies the formatting that is specified in the Format Cells dialog as well as the formatting of the cell contents Celframe Office Data Access 2008 Chapter 1 Introduction to Celframe Office Data Access A database consists of a number of fields that contain the individual pieces of data Each table of the database is a group of fields When creating a table you also determine the characteristics of each field in the table Forms are for data entry
129. the effects applied to the area When resizing or moving a spreadsheet ignore the first row and the first column easily recognizable because of their light gray background and the horizontal and vertical scroll bars They are only used for editing purposes and will not be included in the visible area of the spreadsheet on the slide Click to add title E E B C D E F G H I J Al l 2 5 4 5 m 6 a 5 5 10 11 w 44 HA Sheeti IES M gt i m E A spreadsheet in edit mode The position of the spreadsheet within the slide can be changed both when in edit mode and when not in edit mode In both cases 1 Move the mouse over the border until the cursor changes shape typically a four headed arrow 2 Click the left mouse button and drag the spreadsheet to the desired position 3 Release the mouse button Therefore resizing it results in changing the scale rather than the spreadsheet area This is not recommended as it may produce distortion of the fonts and picture shapes How a Spreadsheet is organized A spreadsheet consists normally of multiple tables which in turn contain cells However in Celframe Power Presentation only one of these tables can be shown at any given time on a slide The default for a spreadsheet embedded in Celframe Power Presentation is one single table called Sheet 1 The name of the table is shown at the bottom of the spreadsheet area If required it is possible to add other sheets To do that
130. the properties of the spellcheck thesaurus and hyphenation Choose Tools gt Options gt Language Settings gt Writing Aids Options Language Settings Writing Aids Celframe Office Load Save Language Settings Oyailable language modules Languages Writing aids Pal CelFrame Office Hunspell SpellChecker i ALTLinux LibHnj Hyphenator Celframe Office Write i Celframe Office New Thesaurus Celframe Office Write eb Celframe Office Data Access l l Charts User defined dictionaries HAH Internet W IqnoreallList all Edit Delete Check s z i Check uppercase words Z Check words with numbers Check capitalization Check special regions Cherk in all lanoqiianes Edit Writing Aids Available Language Modules Contains the installed language modules A language module can contain one two or three submodules Spellcheck hyphenation and thesaurus Each sub module can be available in one or more languages If you click in front of the name of the module you activate all the available sub modules simultaneously If you remove a set mark you deactivate all the available sub modules simultaneously If you wish to activate or deactivate individual sub modules click the Edit button to open the Edit Modules dialog Edit To edit a language module select it and click Edit TheEdit Modules dialog appears User defined dictionaries Lists the available user dictionaries Mark the user dictionaries that you wan
131. the rectangle and go to the X Y Z tab of the Properties again Rename this image frame and for width and height enter the values Our cover picture needs to be placed exactly in the lower right of our page We know the X and Y coordinates of our page Namely 210 002 mm and 297 000 mm So you can enter these values in X Pos and Y Pos but wait Before you do that first change the Basepoint of our object When you set 0 000 values for our background shape the values were for the upper left of the page But our image will have to align to our lower right page margins so we change the Basepoint to lower right before we enter the X and Y values Also fix the size of our image frame by locking it Properties ee Celframe1 hel Geometry Rotation Oo Basepaint O 3 ee ua Shape Croup Text Image Line Colours e qr 4h ar 4 Level To load our cover picture right click on the Frame and click on Get Image Info b H Undo Lock Chrl z2 Get Image Ctrl D Preview Settings d Attributes POF Options d W Is Locked Ctrl L Size is Locked Cbrl ShiFk L Send to Scrapbook Send to Patterns By Copy Chrl C Properties Fz This will open a file that offers a preview in its file dialog for images Look in sacl Feslings_widescree G abstract 0009 ipg BD vere widescreen GD uer E abstract _0012 p9 a Trareforners _ Rev Ga Transformers
132. this example use the names of the two people with a bank card and cash for cash purchases 1 In the main database window click on the Tables icon Right click on Payment Type and select Open from the context menu The CarlD field contains lt AutoField gt until you use the Enter key to move to the second row Then it becomes a 0 As you add the entries to each row the rows of the CarlD field change to consecutive whole numbers For example the first three numbers in this field are 0 1 2 TF k g 71 400 00 lt futoField gt 11 11 09 Anas lt futoField gt Creating a View A View is a query Because of this the details of how to create and use a View are in the Creating queries section A View is also a table Its fields come from the fields of one or more tables of the database It provides a way to look at a number of fields without regard to the table to which any of the fields belong A View can consists of some of the fields on one table Or it can consist of fields from more than one field pincers 4 Data can not be entered into a View like it can be added to a table It is strictly for viewing data which has already been added Defining relationships As you create your own databases you need to also determine where tables are related and how We begin defining relationships by Tools gt Relationships Chatabisese Ukities Sour
133. those on the Celframe Office Print page Some considerations When you are working on drafts and you want to save printer ink or toner you might want to deselect some of the items in the Contents section The Print black selection causes color text but not graphics to print as black on a color printer on a black and white printer this option causes color text to print as solid black instead of shades of grey dithered Contrast Print black with Convert colors to greyscale on the Options Celframe Office Print page which prints all graphics as greyscale on color printers On black and white printers color in graphics normally prints as greyscale If you are printing double sided on a non duplexing printer you might choose to print only left or right pages then turn the stack over and print the other pages Depending on how your printer ejects pages face up or face down you might need to print the pages in reverse order so they stack in the correct order as they are printed Options Celframe Office Write Print Celframe Office Load Sayve contents Peas rs Language Settings Graphics Left pages Mone Celframe Office Write General Tables Right pages Notes only VIEW l Drawings _ Reversed C End of document Formatting Aids Grid Controls _ Brochure End of page Basic Fonts Western Background Table _ Print black Changes Compatibility Other Autocaption l Celframe Office Writejweb Print
134. to open the Filter toolbar Draw offers eleven filter effects Filters work on the current view of an object and they can be combined Filters always apply to the entire graphic it is not possible to use filters to edit only a part of the object FORE or fae Invert rj The colors of an image will be inverted reversed so that it appears as a color negative of the image Smooth reduces the contrast between neighboring pixels and produces a slight lack of sharpness If you use the filter several times in a row the effect will be strengthened A Sharpen increases the contrast between neighboring pixels emphasizing the brightness difference This will accentuate the outlines The effect will be strengthened if you apply the filter several times in a row Remove noise fi The filter reduces noise in which every pixel is compared with its neighbors and the extreme values those that deviate in color by a large amount from a mean value are replaced by a pixel with a mean color value The amount of picture information does not increase but because there are not SO many contrast changes our brains can better recognize the resulting graphic This filter tends to make the picture also a little more smooth Solarization at was originally a photochemical effect If the location of the photograph is extremely highly lit you can experience a reversal of color and brightness Similarly entry of light during t
135. to the ending point and release the mouse button By holding down the shift key before you release the mouse button you may constrain the line to an angle that is a multiple of 15 degrees At this point you will see four handles or nubs appear on the line If you only want to draw a line you may press the Enter key at this point to finish the line You may also simply draw elsewhere to begin a new line Rectangle This can be used to draw rectangles and squares Rounded Rectangle This can be used to draw rounded rectangles and rounded squares Ellipse This can be used to draw ellipses and circles Freedorm Shape This can be used to draw a shape with a freedorm outline Colors Window This window has two modes of operation Less and More By default Celframe Office Studio Starts up with the Colors Window in Less mode In this mode you may easily select a base color using either the color wheel or the palette Celframe Office Studio allows you to have two colors selected a primary color and a secondary color and you may use the drop down box at the top of the Colors Window to choose which one the Colors Window is currently being displayed and configured This mode lets you choose from the colors shown in the color wheel or the first 32 colors in the current palette If you right click on a color in the palette it will set the secondary color If you click
136. two different methods for transferring the data One the desired database file in dBase or text forma t can be loaded directly via the File gt Open dialogue in which case the whole database table is imported into a Celframe Spreadsheet document Or two by dragging and dropping what is selected Opening a Database File in Celframe Spreadsheet Open a dBase or text format document 1 Choose File gt Open 2 In the dialogue go to the folder where the database file is located 3 Enter the name of the file or go to the File type list box select dBase for example 4 Select the name 5 Click Open MICKOSOM WOM Jy UUAN 1 EMpAtE Or A Open Microsoft Word 6 0 95 doc 7 Microsoft Word 95 Template dot i eo Arch Test Format rtt Look im Ej Desktop Text txt Test Encoded txt ap Documents HTML Document Celftame Office writer htm 4 My Computer AportisD oc Palm pdb biu Recent i DocBook sml ete airy Mee worisiieeee Microsoft Word 2007 Document docs Microsott Winword 5 doc E Pocket Word psw WordPerfect Document wpd Desktop Ichitaro 8797 10711 Ftd E Ichitaro 8 9 1071 Template itt Hangul wF 97 hap WPS 2000 O fice 1 0 wpe CelframeDocument Spreadsheet ods CelframeDocument Spreadsheet Template ot Celframe Office 1 0 Spreadsheet sxc Celframe Office 1 0 Spreadsheet Template ste Data Interchange Format dit dBASE d
137. type of the selected objects shown at the left of the status bar There may be some variation in the use of the A t key on different operating systems In Ni general the A t key on a Windows computer functions as described above but on a Linux system it usually does not If the A t key on your system does not operate as described above use the Tab key method described below To select an object that is covered by another object using the keyboard use the Tab key to cycle through the objects stopping at the object you wish to select To cycle through the objects in reverse order press Shift Tab This is a very quick way to reach the object you want but it may not be practical if you have a large number of objects in your drawing When you click on the selected object its outline will appear briefly through the objects on top of the selected object In the illustration below the square located beneath the circle was selected in this way the circle was made semi transparent in order to see the square Selecting a covered object Arranging objects In a complex drawing you may have objects stacked up one on top of the other with the result that a particular object is hidden by one or more other objects above it You can rearrange the Stacking order of objects move an object to the front or to the back of the stack by selecting the object clicking Modify gt Arrange and selecting the appropriate Bring Forward or Send Backward opti
138. vhite D Radial green black Rectangular red white Square vellowswhite B Linear magenta green J Linear yvellowsbrown Fp Radial rediyelow Ellipsoid blue gray light blue E Axial light rediwhite kall Filling with a gradient Fill with a line pattern The Celframe Office term for line patterns is Hatching Select the object you wish to edit On the Line and Filling toolbar select Hatching and then choose an option from the menu w Dey Hatching SEER E Black 0 degrees Black 45 degrees Pee Black 45 degrees UI Black 90 degrees at aie See Red crossed 45 degrees arr HEH ects HHA Red crossed 0 degrees ire HHH He m EH Blue triple 90 degrees Ge aes OZ Black 45 degrees wide Filling with a line pattern Fill with an image You can fill an object with a bitmap image as opposed to a vector graphic image Select the object you wish to edit On the Line and Filling toolbar select Bitmap and then choose an option from the menu Filling with an image Adding a shadow In Draw shadows are considered an area property Click on the Filling icon on the Line and Filling toolbar next to the area fill functions Adding a shadow to the image Defining Custom Colors If you want you can mix a custom color and add it to a color table To define a custom color e Choose Format gt Background and click the Colors tab A tabl
139. view the contents of the spreadsheet run queries and create reports based upon the data already entered into the spreadsheet Connect to an existing database Mozilla Address Book Thunderbird Address Book LEAF Address Book Microsoft Outlook Address Book Microsoft Windows Address Book Registering databases created by Celframe Office This is a simple procedure Tools gt Options gt Celframe Office Spreadsheet gt Databases Under Registered databases there is a list of these databases Below this list are three buttons New Delete Edit To register a database created by Celframe Office 1 Click New 2 Browse to where the database is located 3 Make sure the registered name is correct 4 Click OK Options Celframe Office Data Access Databases El Celframe Office l User Data Registered databases General Registered name Database file Memory New Database4z C Documents and Settings User Mly Documents New Datab view Retail CA Documents and Settings User My Documents Retail adb Print Retailer CA Documents and Settings User My Documents Retailer od Paths Retailer CADocuments and Settings User Desktop Retailer odb Colors test C Documents and Settings User Mly Documentsitest odb Fonts WiriterDB CAWINDOW S systen32iwriterDB WriterDB odb Security Appearance Accessibility Java Load Save Language Settings Celframe Office Data Access Connections Internet lt ii gt Using
140. want the file dialogs to show another format by default choose Tools Options Load Save General and select the format for Default File Format Options Load Save General GE Celfrarmne Office User Data Load General Load user specific settings with the document Memory Miele Save Print _ Edit document properties before saving Paths Colors Fonts Save SutoRecovery information every Minutes security Size optimization For XML Format Appearance Accessibility Java Load Save Save URLs relative to File system Internet VBA Properties ad a a m T Microsoft Office Default File Format dlways create backup copy Warn when not saving in OpenDocument or default Format Document type GIWays save as HTML Compatibility Language Settings Celframe Office Spreadsheet Spreadsheet Microsoft Excel 97 2000 P CelFrame Office Data Access Microsoft Excel 95 Charts Internet AAA Converting All Documents of a Folder Open the wizard which guides you through the operation to copy and convert all documents from Microsoft Word Microsoft Excel or Microsoft PowerPoint into OpenDocument file format documents You can select a source and target directory specify whether to convert documents and or templates and more besides Choose File Express Wizards Document Converter Document Converter This wizard converts documents in Celframe Office Format and Microsoft Office documents bo the new OpenDocument Format Se
141. you choose View gt Zoom the following dialog box appears Zoom factor O Entire Page Page Width Optimal 200 Variable 100 Selecting a zoom factor Entire Page Displays the entire page on the screen text may be too small to read Page Width Displays the complete width of the document page The top and bottom edges of the page may not be visible Optimal Resizes the display to fit the width of the text in the document 200 Displays the document at two times its actual size 150 Displays the document at one and a half times its actual size 100 Displays the document at its actual size 75 Displays the document at 75 of its actual size 50 Displays the document at half of its actual size Variable Enter the zoom factor percentage at which you want to display the document Using Dockable Floating Windows You can dock undock and resize most Celframe Office program windows such as the Navigator or the Styles and Formatting window e To dock or undock the Navigator or the Styles and Formatting window hold down the Ctrl key and double click on a gray area in the window Alternatively press Ctrl Shift F10 To resize the window drag a corner or an edge of the window First ine indent Hangng ndent Docking a window Using The Navigator You can also use the Navigator to insert elements from the current document or other open documents and to organize master documents To edit an ite
142. you enter within a word by pressing Ctrl Hyphen Words with user defined delimiters are only separated at the end of a line at the point where a user defined delimiter has been inserted irrespective of whether the automatic hyphenation is activated or deactivated Spaces Specifies whether to represent every space in the text with a dot Non breaking spaces Specifies that non breaking spaces are shown as gray boxes Non breaking spaces are not broken at the end of a line and are entered with the Ctrl Spacebar shortcut keys Breaks Displays all line breaks inserted with the Shift Enter shortcut These breaks create a new line but do not start a new paragraph Grid Options Specifying snap to grid can be very helpful when you are trying to align several objects such as graphics or tables If the grid intervals subdivisions are too large you may find that you do not have enough control in placing the objects On the Celframe Office Write Web Grid page you can choose whether to enable this feature and what grid intervals to use Options Celframe Office Write Web Grid Celframe Office l Load Save Grid Language Settings Snap to grid Celframe Office Write 7 l Celframe Office WritefyWeb _ Visible grid VIEW Formatting Aids Resolution Subdivision O HA 4 Horizontal Horizontal point s Table vertical Vertical points Background Celframe Office Data Access _ Synchronize axes Charts Internet Ch
143. you have not done so If you have many images that have unsaved changes you will be asked for confirmation first Edit Menu The Edit Operations allow for easy manipulation of the image history the selected region of the image the selection itself and the clipboard An important thing to note about selected regions is that all drawing operations are clipped to remain within them For example if you use the Ellipse Select tool to select a circular region in the middle of the image you will be unable to draw anything outside of that circle while the selection is active Chri z2 Ctrl Chri Copy Chrl C Paste Ctrl Paste in to New Layer Ctrl Shifk y Paste into New Image Ctri 4lk 2 Erase Selection Del Fill Selection Backspace Invert Selection Ctrl I Select All Ctrl 4 Deselect Ctrl D Undo This undoes the most recent action that you ve taken that affects the image if any Redo This redoes the most recent action that you ve undone if any Cut You may use this to remove a selected portion of the active layer You can select a portion of the layer by using the Rectangle Select Lasso Select Ellipse Select or Magic Wand tools Once you perform the cut operation that area of the layer is moved to the clipboard and replaced with transparent pixels The current selection outline is also removed Copy This is similar to the Cut command except that the selected region remains on the active layer and the select
144. 2000 Celframe Office Write Load Basic code to edit Celframe Office Write Wweb Celframe Office Data Access Save original Basic code again Charts Internet Microsoft PowerPoint 97 2000 Load Basic code to edit Save original Basic code again Choosing Load Save VBA Properties Microsoft Office Load Save options 1 Choose Load Save gt Microsoft Office 2 On the Options Load Save Microsoft Office You can choose what to do when importing and exporting Microsoft Office OLE objects linked or embedded objects or documents such as Spreadsheets or equations Select the L checkboxes to convert Microsoft OLE objects into the corresponding Celframe Office OLE objects when a Microsoft document is loaded into Celframe Office mnemonic L for load Select the S checkboxes to convert Celframe Office OLE objects into the corresponding Microsoft OLE objects when a document is saved in a Microsoft format mnemonic S for save Options Load Save Microsoft Office Celframe Office fas ia OA ee oo Winkword to Celframe Office Write Celframe Office Write to Winvord Se CORE E E M Excel to Celframe Office Spreadsheet Celframe Office Spreadsheet to Excel HTML Compatibility m Language Settings Celframe Office write Celframe Office Write Web Celframe Office Data Access Charts Internet PowerPoint to Celframe Office Power Presentation Celframe Office Power Prese L Load and convert the objec
145. 2007 Document slex Save as type Microsoft Excel 2007 Document xlsx Cancel Iw Automatic file name extension Save with password n r l pal A ge A Wee eb Edit filter settings Chapter 7 Miscellaneous Shortcut Keys for Spreadsheets To fill a selected cell range with the formula that you entered on the Input line press Alt Enter Hold down Alt Enter Shift to apply the cell format of the input cell to the entire cell range To create a matrix in which all the cells contain the same information as what you entered on the Input line press Shift Ctrl Enter You cannot edit the components of the matrix To select multiple cells in different areas of a sheet hold down Ctrl and drag in the different areas To select multiple sheets in a spreadsheet hold down Ctrl and then click the name tabs at the lower edge of the workspace To select only one sheet in a selection hold down Shift and then click the name tab of the sheet To insert a manual line break in a cell click in the cell and then press Ctrl Enter To delete the contents of selected cells press Delete This opens the Delete Contents dialog where you choose which contents of the cell you want to delete To delete the contents of selected cells without a dialog press the Backspace key Navigating in Spreadsheets Moves the cursor to the left edge of the current data range If the column to the left of
146. 25 2009 choice Click OK Step 2 Change the column widths The column widths can be changed by moving the cursor over the right border of each column so that it becomes a double headed arrow Then drag and drop it where you want it This has to be done for each column in each table in the report This can also be done with the last column on the right even though there is no black border Step 3 Change the number formating in the cells The fuel quantity should have three decimal places The Begin End and Distance should have one decimal place Fuel Cost should be currency and have two decimal places and Cost per mile should have three decimal places 1 Right click the cell below Quantity to open the context menu 2 Select Number format 3 In the Options section change the number of Decimal places to 3 Click the green checkmark Click OK Option section of the Number Formating window Options Decimal places E a Leading zeroes Format code Negative numbers red Thousands separator 4 Change the Fuel Cost field a Right click in the cell below Fuel Cost b Select Number Format c In the Category list select Currency Click OK 5 Change the Cost per mile field a Right click in the cell below Cost per mile b Select Number Format c In the Category list select Currency d In the Option section Set the number of decimal places to 3 Click the green checkmark e Click OK Step 4 Save and
147. Add AutoFormat x Black 2 eS seamen coe T AutoFormat dialog box Using Spreadsheet Functions in a Table In a table in a Celframe Office Write document you can use some of the mathematical functions that are normally implemented by Celframe Office Calc For many simpler functions Celframe Office Write tables can be used as a basic spreadsheet Just as in a spreadsheet each table cell is identified by a letter for the column and a number for the row When the cursor is in a cell this cell reference is displayed on the status bar in its default position at the bottom right corner of the screen ci fix y lt Al gt lt B1 gt r M Eza H DJ j lt gt E 1 gt Do the following 1 Click in cell lt Al gt and press the key The Formula bar appears automatically near the top of the screen In the leftmost side of the bar you can see the coordinates of the selected cell 2 Click in cell lt B1 gt The identifiers of this cell are automatically displayed in the Formula bar and inserted into cell lt Al gt 3 Press the key 4 Click on cell lt C2 gt You can see the final formula lt Al gt lt B1 gt displayed both in the selected cell and in the Object bar 5 Press the Enter key or click the green tick checkmark on the Formula Bar To display the list of the mathematical functions that you can use in a table 1 Display the Formula toolbar by
148. Advanced DataPilot technology similar to MS Excel Pivot Table makes it easy to pull in raw data from corporate databases cross tabulate summarize and convert it into meaningful information Natural language formulas let you create formulas using words in Celframe Spreadsheet 2008 The Intelligent Sum Button in Celframe Spreadsheet 2008 inserts a sum function or a subtotal automatically depending on context Features Calculations Celframe Office Spreadsheet provides you with functions including statistical and banking functions that you can use to create formulas to perform complex calculations on your data You can also use the Function Wizard to help you create your formulas What If Calculations An interesting feature is to be able to immediately view the results of changes made to one factor of calculations that are composed of several factors For instance you can see how changing the time period in a loan calculation affects the interest rates or repayment amounts Furthermore you can manage larger tables by using different predefined scenarios Database Functions Use spreadsheets to arrange store and filter your data Celframe Office Spreadsheet lets you drag and drop tables from databases or lets you use a spreadsheet as a data source for creating form letters in Celframe Office Write Arranging Data With a few mouse clicks you can reorganize your spreadsheet to show or hide certain data ranges or to format range
149. Attributes If this icon on the Options bar is activated objects are shown with their attributes while you draw them If this icon is not activated only a contour is shown while drawing and the object is shown with all attributes when you release the mouse button 16 Picture Placeholders Specifies whether to display only the contour of inserted graphics 17 Contour Mode Specifies whether to display only the contour of filled drawings without the filling 18 Text Placeholders Specifies whether to display a text window without its text contents 19 Line Contour Only Specifies whether to always display lines and contours as fine lines This display does not depend on the currently used line width 20 Exit all Groups Exits all groups and returns to normal view Color Bar To display the Color bar use View gt Toolbars gt Color Bar The toolbar then appears at the bottom of the workspace and displays the current color palette This toolbar lets you rapidly choose the color of the various objects lines areas and 3D effects in your drawing The first box in the panel corresponds to transparency no color allal Fl Layout f Controls Dimension Lines Ls ul H A le lee T Sma O a e E Click the color that you want to use To change the fill color of an object in the current file select the object and then click a color To change the line color of the selected object right click a color To change the colo
150. Backup allows you to quickly save a backup copy of the current document on an FTP server XML Maker Celframe XML Maker is an XML Editor that uses a synchronized table tree and text display to show you both the hierarchal and the tabular nature of your XML data It automatically produces a tabular display of any selected tag by collecting repeating attribute and tag names and then arranging them into columns The result is a clutter free and informative tabular display XML Marker is the perfect tool to work with plain text debugging output and log files You can dramatically increase their usefulness by modifying your programs to produce them in XML format After that you can use the graphical features of XML Marker to spot hidden trends and to solve your bugs faster Image Editor Pictures with different formats can be inserted into a text document including graphics with a JPG or GIF format The most common formats can be edited directly in a text document with the image editor In addition the Gallery provides a collection of clipart graphics organized by theme In general image editors is different than paint programs Image Editor are specialized for modifying bit mapped images such as scanned photographs whereas paint programs are specialized for creating images
151. Calculations DataPilot Creating DataPilot Tables Editing DataPilot Tables Filtering DataPilot Tables Updating DataPilot Tables Deleting DataPilot Tables Selecting DataPilot Output Ranges Consolidating Data Additional Settings Applying Goal Seek Goal Seek Example Multiple Operations in Columns or Rows Calculating With One Formula and One Variable Calculating with Several Formulas Simultaneously Multiple Operations Across Rows and Columns Calculating with Two Variables Validity of Cell Contents Using Cell Contents Validity Chapter 6 Printing Importing and Exporting Document To Add Cells to a Print Range To Define a Print Range To Clear a Print Range Using the Page Break Preview to Edit Print Ranges To View and Edit Print Ranges Printing Sheet Details Defining Number of Pages for Printing Printing Sheets in Landscape Format Saving Sheets in HTML Opening Sheets in HTML Sending Documents as E mail Opening Documents Saved in other Formats Converting All Documents of a Folder Saving Documents in Other Formats Chapter 7 Miscellaneous Shortcut Keys for Spreadsheets Using Scenarios Using Ready Made Scenarios Creating Your Own Scenarios Changing Your Work Directory Unprotecting Cells Freezing Rows or Columns as Headers Rotating Tables Transposing User Defined Functions Defining A Function Using Celframe Office Basic Copying a Function To a Document Applying a User defined Function in Celframe Off
152. Celframe Office Write Web Table page you can specify the default table behavior Contents Graphics Tables Controls Background Print black Other Pages Reversed Brochure Prink automatically inserted blank pages Create single print jabs d Paper tray From printer settings Fax Mone gt Motes Mone Motes only End of document End of page Setting Print Option Options Celframe Office Write Web Table OS ES CelFrame Office Load Save Language Settings Celframe Office write Celframe Office WritefwWweb VIEW Formatting Aids rid Print Background CelFrame Office Data Access Charts Internet Default Heading Repeat on each page Border keyboard handling Move cells Row Column Behavior of rows columns Fixed O Fixed proportional Variable 0 20 Input in tables Number recognition Number Format recognition Alignment Insert cell 0 20 Row Column Changes affect the adjacent area only Changes affect the entire table Changes affect the table size Choosing default Table options Some considerations If most of your tables will require borders or headings select those checkboxes If most of your tables are used for page layout deselect borders and headings Number recognition can be very useful if most of your tables contain numerical d
153. DBC The second step has two questions with two choices each The default choice for the first question is Yes register the database for me and the default choice for the second question is Open the database for editing Make sure these choices are selected and click Finish Database Wizard Steps Decide how to proceed after saving the database Select database Do you want the wizard to register the database in Celframe Office and proceed Yes register the database for me No do not register the database fter the database file has been saved what do you want to do Open the database For editing Create tables using the table wizard Click Finish to save the database Save the new database with the name Retailer This opens the Retailer Data Access window pieres 4 As you create a database you should save your work regularly This means more than just Saving what you have just created You must save the whole database as well For example when you create your first table you must save it before you can close it If you look at the Save icon in the Standard toolbar at the top after closing the table it will be active Click the Save icon and this icon will be grayed out again Not only the table has been saved but it also been made a part of the database Using the Wizard to create a table In a database a table stores information for a group of things we call fields For example a table might
154. Effects Underlining Color Position Rotating scaling Hyperlink Background and more In Paragraph you can choose Indents amp Spacing Alignment Text Flow Tabs Drop Caps Borders and Backgrounds 4 In the lower left of this page choose the envelope format from the drop down list The width and height of the selected envelope then show in the boxes below the selected format If you chose a pre existing format just verify these sizes If you chose User defined in the Format list then you can edit the sizes Envelope Envelope Addressee Position From left ee Format Ei 7 From top Sender Position From top Size Format Width Height Choosing positioning and size of elements for an envelope 5 After formatting go to the Printer page to choose printer options such as envelope orientation and shifting You may need to experiment a bit to see what works best for your printer You can also choose a different printer or alter printer setup for example specify the tray that holds envelopes for this print job Envelope Envelope Format Envelope orientation AKE t t t t Print From top Print From bottom Shift right 0 00 Shift down 0 00 Current printer 1192 168 1 200EPSON Stylus Cx3500 Series Choosing printer options for an envelope 6 When you have finished formatting and are ready to print click either the New Doc or Insert button to finish New Doc makes only
155. F Windows Metafile wmf Sean XPM X PixMap 29m ia PVP PlaceWare pwp File format HTML xhtml Save All Ctrl g Reload Versions e Export To Templates Printer Settings W Automatic file name extension Selection Exporting as web pages HTML files You can export presentations as a series of web pages that can be viewed in any browser pincer 4 Saving as web pages HTML format does not retain animation and slide transitions 1 Select File gt Express gt Export to and choose HTML Document as the file type 2 Create a folder for the files supply a name for the resulting HTML file and click Save The HTML Export Wizard opens Depending on the size of your presentation and the number of graphics it contains the Ms HTML export function creates many HTML JPG and GIF files If you simply save to your desktop not in a specific folder these separate HTML and graphics files will be all over your desktop So be sure to create a folder to hold all the files 3 Choose the design for all of the pages either from an existing design or by creating a new one If you have not previously saved a design the Existing Design choice is not available HTML Export UnA E Assign design Mew design Existing Design Delete Selected Design Select an existing design or create a new one HTML Export 4 Click Next to select the type
156. Fields DataPilot Column Fields Remove Options Row Fields Data Fields Drag the Fields From the right into the desired position 4 Drag the desired buttons into one of the four areas Drag a button to the Page Fields area to create a button and a listbox on top of the generated datapilot table The listbox can be used to filter the DataPilot table by the contents of the selected item You can use drag and drop within the generated DataPilot table to use another page field as a filter If the button is dropped in the Data Fields area it will be given a caption that also shows the formula that will be used to calculate the data e By double clicking on one of the fields in the Data Fields area you can call up the Data Field dialog Data Field Function Average Max Min Product Count Nurmbers only StDev Samples ShiawO fOoarnwilskian Mame 1234 Use the Data Field dialog to select the calculations to be used for the data To make a multiple selection press the Ctrl key while clicking the desired calculation e The order of the buttons can be changed at any time by moving them to a different position in the area with the mouse e Remove a button by dragging it back to the area of the other buttons at the right of the dialog e To open the Data Field dialog double click one of the buttons in the Row or Column area Use the dialog to select if and to what extent Celframe Office calculates displ
157. Kir ioe wae Address 0 00 7000 The dialog to create image maps The top part of the dialog contains the following tools Apply button click this button to apply the changes Load Save and Select icons Tools for drawing a hotspot shape these tools work in exactly the same way as the corresponding tools in the Drawing toolbar Edit Move Insert Delete Points advanced editing tools to manipulate the shape of a polygon hotspot Select the Edit Points tool to activate the other tools Active icon toggles the status of the hotspot activating a deactive the selected hotspot or deactivating it if active Macro associates a macro with the hotspot instead of just associating an hyperlink Properties sets the hyperlink properties and adds the Name attribute to the hyperlink Below the toolbar specify for the selected hotspot Address the address pointed by the hyperlink You can also point to an anchor ina document such as a specific slide number to do this write the address in this format file lt path gt document_name anchor_name Text enter the text that will be displayed when the mouse is moved over the hotspot Frame where the target of the hyperlink will open pick among _blank opens in a new browser window _self opens in the active browser window _top or _parent The value _self for the target frame will work just fine in the vast majority of the occasions It is therefore not
158. Load Saye Language Settings Celframe Office Write General VIEW Formatting Aids Grid Basic Fonts Western Print Changes Compatibility Autot aption Celframe Office write web Celframe Office Data Access Charts Internet HHA Default Heading Repeat on each page Do not split Border Input in tables Keyboard handling Move cells Insert cell Row 0 20 Row Column 0 20 Column Behavior of rowstcolumns O Fixed O Fixed proportional Changes affect the entire table Variable Changes affect the table size Table option Change Tracking Options Options Celframe Office Write Changes Ae Celframe Office Load Save Language Settings CelFrame Office rite General VIEW Formatting Aids Grid Basic Fonts Western E Compatibility AutoCaption Celframe Office Write Web Ce lFrame Office Data Access Charts Internet Text display Insertions Attributes Underlined Color By author Deletions Attributes Strikethrough Color By author Changed attributes Attributes Bold Color By author Lines changed Mark Left margin BB Slack Color Choosing options for tracking changes Number recognition Number Format recognition Alignment Changes affect the adjacent area only __Insert__ _Attributes_ and how attribute changes are marked and whether and how change bars are marked in the margins Compatibility Options If you want to select some or all of t
159. Office Soreadsheet document position the cursor in the cell into which you want to insert the external data 2 Choose Insert Express Link to External Data The External Data dialog appears 3 Enter the URL of the document or Web page in the dialog The URL must be in the format http www my celf com table html Celframe Office loads the Web page or file in the background that is without displaying it In the large list box of the External Data dialog you can see the name of all the sheets or named ranges you can choose from 4 Select one or more sheets or named ranges You can also activate the automatic update function every n minutes and click OK External Data URL of external data source OK http iie my bank comitable htral a Enter the URL of the source document in the local File system or Internet Cancel here Available tablestranges HTML all HTML tables Update every seconds The contents will be inserted as a link in the Celframe Office Spreadsheet document 5 Save your spreadsheet When you open it again later Celframe Office Spreadsheet will update the linked cells following an inquiry 6 Under Tools Options Celframe Office Spreadsheet General you can choose to have the update when opened automatically carried out either always upon request or never The update can be started manually in the dialog under Edit Links Options Celframe Office Spreadsheet General CelFra
160. Printer Name h e ee Status Default printer Ready Type Canon MP 140 series Printer Location USBO002 Comment _ Print to file Print range A _ Copies All Number of copies i a Pages 33 lt op a sei Ss i colet Selection The Print dialog box On the Print dialog box you can choose Which printer to use if more than one are installed on your system and the properties of the printer example orientation portrait or landscape which paper tray to use and what paper size to print on The properties available depend on the selected printer consult the printer s documentation for details e Which pages to print how many copies to print and in what order to print them Use dashes to specify page ranges and commas or semicolons to separate ranges for example 1 2 10 20 Selection is the highlighted part of a page or pages e Which items to print Click the Options button to display the Printer Options dialog box Previewing Pages Before Printing The normal page view in Write shows what each page will look like when printed but it shows only one page at atime If you are designing a document to be printed double sided you may want to see what facing pages look like 1 Click File gt Print Preview or click the Print Preview button is 2 Click the Book Preview icon 44 to display left and right pages in their correct orientation facing pages 7 3 To print the document in this pa
161. Programs or All Programs Click on the icon 49 Celframe Office Power Presentation 2008 If you don t see it it may be hidden in the Celframe Office 2008 folder Now you should see a screen like this one Standard Bar Line and Filling Bar Menu Bar Ble Edit Yew set Fermat Tools GhdeShow eVoice Sluetocth Men Author s Tools window Hele View Buttons Tasks Pane Slides Pane Workspace El Available for Use Drawing ee m A o a r M a a I ad M s Booey EE E lo i a a Watt pei me Ens ea T a sae eS LASS Ge ated Se Bar 6 04 28 Hooo f mee il Seara oeeFematt i a Starting the Presentation Wizard You can start Celframe Office Power Presentation in either of two ways Click the triangle to the right of the New Icon and select Presentation from the drop down menu Choose File gt New gt Presentation from the menu bar When you start Power Presentation the Presentation Wizard appears Select Empty Presentation under Type It creates a presentation from scratch Presentation Wizard Type Empty presentation From template O Open existing presentation Preview Do not show this wizard again Using the Presentation Wizard to choose the type of presentation If you do not want the wizard to start every time you launch Celframe Office Power Presentation select the Do not show this wizard again checkbox Leave the Preview checkb
162. Quotes Word Completion Accessibility accidental d Append space accordance _ Show as tip additional g 4ddressbook Addresses Company Collect words Addressbook addresses firstname administered administering administrator Alphabetical alphabetically alphanumeric alerative Enter Alternating alternative Alternatively id 4 alternatives Annotations iy When closing a document save the list For later use in other documents Accept with Min word length Max entries F Delete Entry Customizing word completion Automatic word completion only occurs after you type a word for the second time ina document Using AutoText AutoText allows you to assign text tables graphics and other items to a key combination To insert AutoText type the shortcut and press F3 To assign some text to an AutoText shortcut 1 Type the text into your document 2 Select the text 3 Go to Insert gt AutoText or press Control F3 4 Enter a name for your shortcut Celframe Office Write will suggest a one letter shortcut which you can change 5 Click the AutoText button on the right of the AutoText dialog box and select New text only from the menu 6 Click Close to return to your document If the only option under the AutoText button is Import either you have not entered a name for your AutoText or there is no text selected in the document AutoText is especially powerful when assigned to fields Auto ext
163. SQL Oracle or almost any other database type The Report Builder uses the Pentaho Reporting Flow Engine It is possible to select multi line text block column block which can be Cut Copied Pasted from dialog or Alt shortcut keys Creating a database To create a new database file in the drop down menu select Database This opens the Database Wizard Templates and Documents New Document un g Business Cards Database Drawing L HTML Document Labels L Master Document Templates 4 Presentation Spreadsheet Text Document A i XML Form Document My Documents es Samples Open Database mek The database in Celframe Office requires Java Runtime Environment JRE If you do not have it on your computer you can download it from www java com and install it following the instructions on the site It should be Java 5 0 or higher The first step of the Database Wizard has one question with two choices Create a new database or Connect to an existing database For this example select Create a new database and then click Next x Database Wizard Welcome to the Celframe Office Database Wizard Use the Database Wizard to create a new database open an existing database File or connect to a database stored on 4 server 2 Save and proceed what do vou want to do Create a new database Open an existing database File Recently usei Be Open O Connect to an existing database J
164. Table Text Flow Columns Borders Background sr aphic Color Graphic C Program Files Celframne Celframe Office 2008 Professir Type CO Position Ares Tile Preview Table Format dialog box Background page AutoFormatting Tables You can use AutoFormat to make your table formats consistent You can also create and add your own table autoformats Here is how 1 Create a table and manually format it as you wish including borders spacing of text from the top and bottom borders fonts to be used in the table heading and data cells and background colors To use background colors in a new format color the cells rather than the table That is select the cell or cells you wish to color select Table gt Table Properties gt Background or right click Table gt Background choose a color and specify As Color For Cell 2 Position the cursor anywhere in the table and then click Table gt Table AutoFormat 3 On the AutoFormat dialog box click Add and give the table format a name in the AddAutoFormat dialog box and click OK 4 The newly named autoformat now appears as an available format Click OK to close the AutoFormat dialog box Tip This technique does not include table and column widths in the table format To insert a table with predefined full formatting save it as AutoText AutoFormat Format Ce Hoth Lavender Yellow Mid Gray Green South Red Black 1
165. Table Heading paragraph style is applied to the heading rows and thus makes the text centered bold and italic The Celframe Office predefined Table Heading paragraph style may be modified in the Styles and Formatting window if desired Repeat heading Repeats the heading row s of the table at the top of subsequent pages if the table spans more than one page The first rows Specifies the number of rows to be repeated Default is 1 Don t split table Prevents the table from spanning more than one page This can be useful if the table starts near the end of a page and would look better if it were completely located on the following page If the table becomes longer than would fit on one page you will need to either de select this check box or manually split the table Border Surrounds each cell of the table with a border This border can be modified or deleted The AutoFormat button opens a dialog from where it is possible to select one of the many predefined table layouts After making your choices click OK Celframe Office Write creates a table as wide as the page margins with all columns the same width and all rows the same height You can then adjust the columns and rows later to suit your needs To directly insert a table with the default properties click on the little arrow next to the Table icon on the Standard toolbar A graphic appears where you can choose the table s size rows and columns To create th
166. Text In addition to finding and replacing words and phrases you can Use wildcards and regular expressions to fine tune a search Find and replace specific formatting Find and replace paragraph styles To display the Find amp Replace dialog box use the keyboard shortcut Control F or select Edit gt Find amp Replace 1 Type the text you want to find in the Search for box 2 To replace the text with different text type the new text in the Replace with box 3 You can select various options such as matching the case matching whole words only or doing a search for similar words 4 When you have set up your search click Find To replace text click Replace instead If you click Find All Celframe Office Write selects all instances of the search text in the document Similarly if you click Replace All button Celframe Office Write will replace all matches Use Replace All with caution otherwise you may end up with some hilarious and p Important highly embarrassing mistakes A mistake with Replace All might require a manual word by word search to fix Find amp Replace Search For Find Airframe Find Al Replace with B Replace Celframel Replace All Match case Whole words only Mare Options The Find amp Replace dialog box Wildcards Wildcards are combinations of characters that instruct Celframe Office how to search for something Regular expressions are very powe
167. The extended tips option in cannot be accessed from the Help menu The Tips and extended tips can be turned on or off from Tools gt Options gt Celframe Office gt General Help Memory or View _ Extended tips ene Help Agent Paths Colors Reset Help Agent Fonts Security Help formatting Default Appearance Accessibility Open Save dialogs Java Use Celframe Office dialogs Load Save General Document status VBA Properties _ Printing sets document modified status Microsoft Office HTML Compatibility Year two digits Language Settings eee too ma E Celframe Office Write Interpret as years between 1930 ea and 2029 Celframe Office Write Web Celframe Office Data Access Charts Internet H H A A e Setting Tips o Closing a Document To close a document click File gt Close You can also close a document by clicking on the Close icon on the document window Notice the small black X below the large red X Clicking the small X closes the document but leaves Celframe Office open Clicking the large red X closes Celframe Office completely Weed x Close Document If the document has not been saved since the last change a message box is displayed Choose whether to save or discard your changes The document CO Write doc has been modified Do you want to save your changes Warning about unsaved changes on close Yes The document will be saved and then closed No The document will be closed and all
168. Type 1 Click Create Table in Design View 2 CARID entries a Enter CarlD as the first Field Name b Select Integer INTEGER as the Field Type from the dropdown list The default setting is Text VARCHAR c Change the Field Properties in the bottom section Change AutoValue from No to Yes Gubovalue Yes na Auto increment statement IDENTITY Length 10 Format example 0 Lad d Set CarlID as the Primary key e Right click on the green triangle to the left of CarlD e Click Primary Key in the context menu This places a key icon in front of CarlD Field Mame Field Type CarID Integer INTEGER The primary key serves only one purpose Any name can be used for this field It is not necessary to use CarlD as the name of the primary key field We have used it so we know to which table it belong by its name 3 All other entries a Enter the next field name in the first column Field Name column b Select the Field Type for each field For Date use Date DATE Use the D key once to select it e PaymentType uses Text VARCHAR the default setting All other fields use Number NUMERIC Field Name Field Type Carld Integer INTEGER Date Date DATE Fuel Cost Number NUMERIC Fuel Quantity Number WUMERIC Payment Type Text VARCHAR c Select the Field Properties FuelCost and FuelQuantity need changes in the Field Properties section FuelQuantity Change Length to 6 and Decimal places to 3
169. YET You can select the Blend Mode or select text colors that resemble those you see on screen After what you ve learned so far this should already be easy Tip Notice how pleasing this looks even though we are using different colors and sizes when we use the same font for all these text elements Celframe Office Publisher C Documents and Settings User My Documents celf sla File Edt Item Insert Page View Extras Windows Help i DSeGlaBeiae DOSS ENERET TTET EFFET Properties ROTE Shape Group Text Image Line Colours Shade a Black A M Blue E E Cyan C Display only used Colors Transparency Settings Opacity 100 send Mode Overprinting Knockout O Overprint x aons SCO MSO mecccans a BA orae Ne S rt we a B Pos 144 00 pt Posi 231 00 pt To add our company name create a Text Frame somewhere call it Celframe Office Publisher in the X Y Z tab of the Properties and enter the text CELFRAME OFFICE PUBLISHER Set the font font size and the font color Finally rotate the text frame 90 degrees The X Y Z tab of the Properties Palette is the right place to do this Just change the value for Rotation to 90 Then insert small Image Frame at the bottom our page between the page border and the cover image Import the icon via
170. YYY depending upon your language s default setting for dates my default setting is MM DD YYYY All dates must have a before and after it Hence December 25 2009 is written 12 25 2009 2 Open a new report a Right click the Car Fuel Expences query b Select Report Wizard from the context menu When a new report is opened in this way the query used to open it is automatically selected in the Tables or Queries dropdown list 3 Create the report Use gt gt to move both fields from the Available Fields to the Fields in Report list Click Next 4 Label fields Add a space to FuelCost to make it Fuel Cost two words Click Next 5 Group fields a Click Date to highlight it b Use gt to move the Date field to the Groupings list Click Next 6 Choose layout We will be making no changes in the layout Click Next 7 Create report final settings a Use the suggested name which is the same as the query b Select Static report Click Finish Creating a Dynamic Report We will create a report with some statistics on our car fuel consumption To do this we have to modify two queries End Reading and Car Fuel We will be adding the FuelCost field to the End Reading query If you move your cursor over the black line circled in red it becomes a double headed arrow Drag and drop it to a lower position Fuel Enrd Reading ir A ir Carib Carl Date Date FuelCost en FuelQuantity
171. a background graphic Inserting an object as a texture pattern for another object Applying Line Styles Using the Toolbar Special Effects Rotating an object Flip an object Distorting an Image Distort an object Set in circle perspective Set to circle slant Dynamic Gradients The Picture editing Toolbar Graphic Filter Bar Graphic Mode Color Cropping The graphic filter toolbar Eyedropper Color Depth Celframe Office Studio 2008 Chapter 1 Introduction to Celframe Office Studio Features Layers Blend Modes Main Window Menu Bar File Menu Edit Menu View Menu Grid Rulers Pixels Inches and Centimeters Image Menu Crop to Selection Resize Canvas Size Rotate Layers Menu Adjustments Menu Chapter 2 Working With Picture Chapter 3 Miscellaneous Window Menu Help Menu Tools Window Colors Window Celframe Office Publisher 2008 Introduction to Celframe Office Publisher Celframe Office Mail 2008 Introduction to Celframe Mail Celframe Office PhotoAlbum 2008 Introduction to Celframe Office PhotoAlbum Celframe Office Note Maker 2008 Introduction to Celframe Office Note Maker Inbuilt Celframe Office 2008 is amazing productivity suite for Windows an incredible sense of style powerful yet simple compelling spreadsheets made easy HD quality presentations incredible graphics tools reminiscence of your photos PDF XML makers and more for everyone Get better results faster and creat
172. aces that are inserted by the direct cursor If you want to use the direct cursor then disable the AutoCorrect tool Grid Options Specifying snap to grid can be very helpful when you are trying to align several objects such as graphics or tables If the grid intervals subdivisions are too large you may find that you do not have enough control in placing the objects On the Celframe Office Celframe Office Write Grid page you can choose whether to enable this feature and what grid intervals to use Options Celframe Office Write Grid Celframe Office l Load Save Grid Language Settings d Snap to grid Celframe Office Write o l General visible grid VIEW Formatting Aids Resolution Subdivision Horizontal Horizontal pointis Basic Fonts Western Print vertical vertical points Table Changes _ Synchronize axes Compatibility AutoC aption Celframe Office Write Web Celframe Office Data Access Charts Internet H E Choosing Grid options Basic Fonts Western Option The default fonts specified on the Celframe Office Celframe Office Write Basic Fonts Western page apply to both Celframe Office Write documents and HTML Web documents 1 If you want to change the defaults do so on the Celframe Office Celframe Office Write Basic Fonts Western page You can choose other fonts for use in specific documents either by applying direct formatting or by defining and applying styles in those documents
173. ach a file to your email message By now you should be able to navigate fairly well in the Celframe Office Mail user interface Below is a short explanation on the address book and it s toolbar El Address Book Address Books a Colected Addresses New card This button will allow you to create a new card in your address book a new card can be a friend a business relation and so on New list This button will open a window where you can create a mailing list These lists are handy if you want to send emails to a group of people for example friends at the golf club Properties Lets you edit the highlighted card in your address book Write Will open a new window for writing a message to the person highlighted in the address book Delete The delete button will delete the highlighted card from your address book Hope you have enjoyed this part as much as enjoyed writing it Importing mail Go to Tools gt Import and you will get this window Here you have 3 choices which is importing email address books and settings To import mail from other account select Mail then press next This wizard will import mail messages address book entries and or preferences from other mail programs and common address boak formats into Celframe Office Mail 2008 Mail Once they have been imported you will be able to access them from within C
174. ackground 21 Sort Sorts the selected paragraphs or table rows alphabetically or numerically You can define up to three sort keys as well as combine alphanumeric and numeric sort keys 22 Sum Activates the sum function Note that the cursor must be in the cell where you want the sum to appear Drawing Object Properties Bar The Drawing Object Properties Bar that appears when a drawing object is selected contains functions for editing and positioning the drawing objects ey Line a Arrow Style ey Line Style a Line Width To Foreground D Line Color EAEN Eh Bring to Front Dy Background a Send to Back Al area Style Filing Alignment U Rotate ala Change Anchor Line Sets the formatting options for the selected line 2 Arrow Style Opens the Arrowheads toolbar Use the symbols shown to define the style for the end of the selected line 3 Line Style Select the line style that you want to use 4 Line Width Select the width for the line 5 Line Color Select a color for the line 6 Background Sets the fill properties of the selected drawing object 7 Area Style Filling Select the type of fill that you want to apply to the selected drawing object 8 Rotate Rotates the selected object 9 To Foreground Moves the selected object in front of text 10 To Background Moves the selected object behind text 11 Bring to Front Moves the selected object to the top of the stacking order s
175. ail messages will show to the right Having Celframe Office Mail up and idle you need to press the Get mail button to make the client check for new messages unless Celframe Office Mail is configured to check for messages automatically it is possible to configure this under Tools gt Account settings Make a signature P signature bct Notepad File Edit Format View Help Morten W Petersen Project Manager Nidelven IT Email morten nidelven it no Phone 47 45 44 00 69 Blog http www blogologue com Open your notepad or any text editing program Just remember to save the file as plain text It s up to you what you want in your signature However it s better to add your name and how you can be reached A link to your personal or business webpage can also be added Save your signature as a text file wherever you like Attach a signature Open your Celframe Office Mail go to Tools gt Account Settings Account Settings Account Settings lt motern nidelven it no gt Server Settings Copies amp Folders Account Name matern nidelvenit no Composition amp Addressin AER AEE es 5 Default Identity Offline amp Disc Space Each account has an identity which is the information that other people see a settings when they read your messages Return Receipts ees Your Name Morten W Petersen Local Folders Email Address motern Gnidelven it no Disc Space Reply to Address Junk Settings Organisati
176. ains one item From Scanner or Camera These allow you to create a new image that is acquired from either a scanner or camera attached to your computer The scanner or camera must support Windows Image Acquisition 2 0 WIA Close This closes the current image If you have made changes that have not been saved you will be asked for confirmation before closing Save This command saves the image with the current filename If you have not saved the image before and if the file type you are saving as requires configuration GIF TGA and JPEG then you will be presented with the Save Configuration dialog For JPEG images you will be presented with the ability to configure the quality of the image For GIF images you may configure how transparency and dithering are handled Lastly TGA images may be configured to save at 24 or 32 bit and with or without RLE compression enabled Save Co nfiguration Settings Preeti fle sze 995 4 KE Transparency threshold Pinels with an alpha value less than the threshold will be Fully transparent Dithering level Multiply by alpha channel Save As Normally when you use the standard Save command it will reuse the filename and settings that were given before The Save As command allows you to specify a new name and if applicable new settings Print This allows you to print your image Exit Use this to exit Celframe Office Studio You will be asked to save your changes if
177. al The default value is 15 minutes Enter the value you want by typing it or by pressing the up or down arrow keys E Celframe Office User Data Load General Load user specific settings with the document Memory View Print _ Edit document properties before saving _ Always create backup copy Colors a Fonts Save AutoRecovery information every hs La Minutes Security Size optimization for XML format Appearance Accessibility Java Load Save_ Save URLs relative to General File system Internet VBA Propertes d a a 7 Microsoft Office Default file format HTML Compatibility Document type Always save as Language Settings _ Celframe Office Write Text document Microsoft Word 97 2000 AXP Celframe Office Write AVeb Celframe Office Data Access Mote Not using OpenDocument as the default format may cause formatting or content to be lost Charts Internet Save _ Warn when not saving in OpenDocument or default format AAA ee AutoRecovery information Saving as a Microsoft Word Document You may need to share your documents with other people who do not use Celframe Office but use Microsoft Word instead Fortunately Celframe Office can read and write Word files To save a document as a Microsoft Word file 1 First save your document in Celframe Office format odt If you do not any changes you made since the last time you saved will only appear in the Microsoft Word version of the document 2 Then click File gt Save As T
178. ally centers the contents of the cell 9 Align Right Aligns the contents of the cell to the right 10 Justify Aligns the contents of the cell to the left and to the right cell borders 11 Align Top Aligns the contents of the cell to the upper edge of the cell 12 Align Center Vertically Vertically centers the contents of the cell 13 Align Bottom Aligns the contents of the cell to the lower edge of the cell 14 Number Format Currency Applies the default currency format to the selected cells 15 Number Format Percent Applies the percentage format to the selected cells 16 Number Format Date Applies the date format to the selected cells 17 Number Format Exponential Applies the exponential format to the selected cells 18 Number Format Standard Applies the default number format to the selected cells 19 Number Format Add Decimal Place Adds one decimal place to the numbers in the selected cells 20 Number Format Delete Decimal Place Removes one decimal place from the numbers in the selected cells 21 Decrease Indent Click the Decrease Indent icon to reduce the left indent of the current paragraph or cell content and set it to the previous tab position Increase Indent Click the Increase Indent icon to increase the indentation of the cell content of the selected cells 22 Borders Click the Borders icon to open the Borders toolbar where you can modify the border of a sheet area or an object 23 Background Color
179. ame Office AutoCaption options You may not always want captions for every table for example if you use tables forlayout as well as for tables of data You can always add captions to individual tables graphics or other objects right click gt Caption If you do want automatic captions on one or more object types 1 Choose Celframe Office Celframe Office Write gt AutoCaption on the Options dialog box 2 On the Celframe Office Celframe Office Write AutoCaption page select the checkbox next to an object you want to be automatically captioned 3 With the item highlighted specify the characteristics of the caption The supplied categories for captions are Drawing Illustration Table and Text However you are not limited to the supplied categories If you want to use another name for the caption label type the required term in the box Options Celframe Office Write AutoCaption Celframe Office l Load Save 4dd captions automatically camer Language Settings when inserting Category Celframe Office write A General _ Celframe Office Write Table Numbering View Celframe Office Write Frame tia EA Formatting Aids aecelFrame Office Write Picture Separator Illustration Grid Celframe Office Chart Basic Fonts Western Celframe Office Drawing Position Text Print I Celframe Office Presentation l Table Celframe Office Spreadsheet Numbering captions by chapter Changes Other OLE Objects Level 1 Conpatibilit Separator Celfra
180. ame Office choose File gt Open from the menu bar 2 Under File type choose All files or Presentations or Microsoft PowerPoint 97 2000 XP from the drop down list 3 Navigate to the PowerPoint file select it and click Open The PowerPoint file can now be edited and saved as an Celframe Office Power Presentation file or a PowerPoint file To save the file as an Celframe Office Power Presentation file choose OpenDocument Presentation odt as the File Type Chapter 6 Miscellaneous Customizing menu content You can customize menus in Celframe Office 1 Choose Tools gt Customize 2 On the Customize dialog pick the Menus page Customize Keyboard Toolbars Events CelFrame Office Power Presentation Menus Menu Menu Content Entries J Per eS Open Al Save AS Save as Webpage Export as PDF Web Page Preview Save In Celframe Office Power Presentation Description IF you wank to create a document From a template choose Mew Templates and Documents The Menus page of the Customize dialog 3 In the Save In drop down list choose whether to save this changed menu for Celframe Office Power Presentation or for a selected document 4 In Celframe Office Power Presentation Menus select the menu you want to customize in the Menu drop down list 5 You can customize each menu by clicking on the Menu or Modify buttons 6 You can add commands in a menu by clicking on the Add button
181. ame behavior occurs when you export the Excel formatted spreadsheet to a PDF file To Define a Print Range 1 Select the cells that you want to print 2 Choose Format Express Print Area Define Merge Cells Define Add Express B Change Case Sy Remove Anchor 4 edit Alignment I To Add Cells to a Print Range 1 Select the cells that you want to add to the existing print range 2 Choose Format Express Print Area Add To Clear a Print Range e Choose Format Express Print Area Remove Using the Page Break Preview to Edit Print Ranges In the Page Break Preview print ranges as well as page break regions are outlined by a blue border and contain a centered page number in gray Nonprinting areas have a gray background To define a new page break region drag the border to a new location When you define a new page break region an automatic page break is replaced by a manual page break To View and Edit Print Ranges 1 Choose View Page Break Preview To change the default zoom factor of the Page Break Preview double click the percentage value on the Status bar and select a new zoom factor 2 Edit the print range To change the size of a print range drag a border of the range to a new location au To delete a manual page break that is contained in a print range drag S the border of the page break outside of the print range
182. ample a nested list with numbering followed by bullets Using hyperlinks When inserting text such as a website addresses or URL that can be used as a hyperlink Impress formats it automatically creating the hyperlink and applying to the text a color and underlining If you do not want Celframe Office to do that select Edit gt Undo Insert from the menu bar or press Control Z immediately after the formatting has been applied You can also insert hyperlinks manually To prevent Celframe Office from automatically turning website addresses URLS into hyperlinks go to Tools gt AutoCorrect gt Options and deselect the URL Recognition checkbox To change the color of hyperlinks go to Tools gt Options gt Celframe Office gt Appearance scroll to Unvisited links and or Visited links select the checkboxes pick the new colors and click OK Caution this will change the color for all hyperlinks in all components of Celframe Office this may not be what you want To insert a hyperlink or to customize the appearance of a hyperlink select Insert gt Hyperlinks from the menu bar Hyperlink Document Path Target in document Target Mail amp News URL i S Further settings Frame Text Mame Mew Document Dialog to edit hyperlinks On the left hand side select one of the four types of hyperlinks Internet a web address normally starting with http Mail amp News for example an email address
183. and height fields to get it to stop We can do a lot more here For now close the properties box Celframe Office Publisher Document 1 4 H x E Geometry amp Pos Pos Width Height Rotation Basepoint Level aE 20 Ph Now let s get our image Right click inside the image frame and you ll get a menu Choose get image and it s browsing time Select your image and there we go e Celframe Office Publisher Document 1 File Edit Item Insert Page View Extras Windows Help E X Oe T OA E Aa o Oi E OA O44 BA Fee A A EA Ps 288 27 mm Y Pos 112 183 mm m mions RR A Slt ve Creating a Page Background Click on the white rectangle in the menu bar Your mouse pointer now turns into a rectangle with a on its upper left corner Click and hold the mouse button then drag the across the page and let up You have just created a shape Size position and color don t matter here as we will change them immediately Rectangle e Celframe Office Publisher Document 2 f File Edit Item Insert Page view Extras Windows Help SHO eA Xe POO s SBRABO O 434 BaQ Ae 100 0 100 00 300 400 500 600 700 800 t D D e ooh omni om G c oon w w w io0 00 SEY Fa ioe B Eackoround v E A Normal vision l z If you haven t clicked somewhere else on screen your new rectangle is s
184. and the previous cell contents are retained Select Warning or Information to display a dialog in which the entry can either be canceled or accepted If you select Macro then by using the Browse button you can specify a macro to be run in the event of an error Validity Input Help Show error message when invalid values are entered Contents Action nformation Title Error message Co Wea oe oe To display the error message select Show error message when invalid values are entered Sample macro Function ExampleValidity CellValue as String TableCell as String Dim msg as string msg Invalid value amp amp CellValue amp msg msg amp in table amp amp TableCell amp MsgBox msg 16 Error message End Function _ After changing the action for a cell on the Error Alert tab page and closing the dialog with OK you must first select another cell before the change takes effect Chapter 6 Printing Importing and Exporting Document Defining Print Ranges on a Sheet You can define which range of cells on a spreadsheet to print The cells on the sheet that are not part of the defined print range are not printed or exported Sheets without a defined print range are not printed and not exported to a PDF file unless the document uses the Excel file format For files opened in Excel format all sheets that do not contain a defined print range are printed The s
185. anges the focus by moving backwards through the areas and buttons of the dialog up arrow Moves the focus up one item in the current dialog area down arrow Moves the focus down one item in the current dialog area left arrow Moves the focus one item to the left in the current dialog area right arrow Moves the focus one item to the right in the current dialog area Home Selects the first item in the current dialog area md Selects the last item in the current dialog area Alt and the underlined character in Copies or moves the current field into the Row area the word Row Alt and the underlined character in Copies or moves the current field into the Column area the word Column Alt and the underlined character in Copies or moves the current field into the Data area the word Data Using Scenarios Celframe Office Spreadsheet Scenarios are important aids for making numbers that are dependent upon each other and their resulting calculations visible Scenarios allow you create a list of values to select from for a given cell or group of cells The contents of these cells change when you select different items from the list Modify specific basic requirements in the table and you will see the new result You can give a name to the scenario created in this manner and compare it with other scenarios Using Ready Made Scenarios We have provided a ready made example of scenarios for you to work with 1 Choose File Ne
186. ant 2 Display Grid Specifies whether to display the grid 3 Show Snap Lines Shows or hides snap lines so can you align objects on your slide To remove a snap line drag it off the slide 4 Guides When Moving Specifies whether to display guides when moving an object 5 Snap to Grid Specifies whether to move frames drawing elements and controls only between grid points To change the status of the snap grip for only the current action drag an object while holding down the Ctrl key 6 Snap to Guides Snaps the edge of a dragged object to the nearest snap line when you release the mouse 7 Snap to Page Margins Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the nearest page margin 8 Snap to Object Border Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the border of the nearest graphic object 9 Snap to Object Points Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the points of the nearest graphic object 10 Allow Quick Editing Specifies whether to immediately switch to the text editing mode when clicking a text object 11 Select Text Area Only Specifies whether to select a text frame by clicking the text 12 Double Click to add Text Changes the mouse click behavior so that you can double click an object to add or edit text 13 13 Simple Handles Turns off 3 D highlighting on selection handles 14 Large Handles Displays large selection handles 15 Create Object with
187. ant the callout to start Drag to draw the callout Double click the callout and type or paste your text You can add text to any graphic after double clicking the graphic Copying Text Select the text in your Write document Copy the text to the clipboard Edit Copy Click the page or slide where you want to paste the text Paste the text using Edit Paste or Edit gt Express gt Paste special Using Paste special you can choose the text format to be pasted Depending on formats you can copy different text attributes To create a Fontwork object On the Drawing toolbar click the Fontwork Gallery icon In the Fontwork Gallery dialog select a Fontwork style and click OK The Fontwork object is inserted into your document Fontwork Gallery Select a Fontwork style i Pontos we Double click the object to enter text edit mode Replace the default Fontwork text with your own text Press Esc to exit text edit mode To edit a Fontwork object Click the Fontwork object The Fontwork toolbar is displayed If you do not see the Fontwork toolbar choose View gt Toolbars gt Fontwork Click an icon in the Fontwork toolbar The following icons are available Fontwork Gallery adds another Fontwork object Fontwork Shape edits the shape Fontwork Same Letter Heights changes the height of characters Fontwork Alignment aligns the text Fontwork Character Spacing changes the character spa
188. aragraph formatting dialog Indents and Spacing Page The ndents and Spacing page has three sections Indent modifies the indentation of the text before and after as well as the indentation of the first line Spacing defines the space before and after each paragraph formatted with the style Line spacing determines the spacing between two lines formatted with the style Note that selecting Proportional spacing requires specifying the percentage of a line to be used as spacing 100 corresponds to a single line 200 to a double line 50 to half a line If Leading is selected specify the amount of line spacing in your default unit of measurement Setting the line spacing to less than 100 is a good method to cram a lot of text into a TIP text box however care must be taken as too small a value will make the text hard to read You can change the default unit of measurement for example from inches to centimetres from Tools gt Options gt Celframe Office Power Presentation gt General Tabs Page Use the Tabs page shown in the style modification dialog to set tab stops To delete one existing tab stop select it in the list and click the Delete button To delete all the tab stops click the Delete All button To create a new tab stop 1 Set the size of the tab stop in the edit box on the left 2 Select the type If you set the type to Decimal specify in the box below the character to be considered the decimal
189. ars tab and select the toolbar you want to change and then select the desired buttons for that toolbar Each toolbar has a different list of buttons Customize Menus Keyboard Toolbars Events Celframe Office Draw Toolbars Toolbar Standard i Mew More Controls Toolbar z Toolbar Content Commands Standard Viewing Mode Stars and Banners Text Box Formatting Text Formatting Zoom Iw Iw M L Edit File mj Save In Celframe Office Draw Description Loads a document specified by a URL You can type a new URL or select one that is already registered Chapter 2 Working with Objects and Object Points This chapter looks at the tools and functions that let you modify existing drawings All of the functions apply to the selected object or group of objects The selected object or group can be distinguished from others by small colored squares or circles located around the object this is also true when several objects are selected simultaneously These points are called handles The handles form a rectangular frame that is just big enough to contain the object Where several objects are selected the frame around them corresponds to the smallest rectangle that can contain all of the objects This frame is called the selection rectangle If the Options bar is displayed select View gt Toolbars gt Options to turn it on if it is not displayed you can change the size of the handles using two buttons Simple Hand
190. art appears that has been created using sample data Main title Row 1 Row 2 Row 3 Row 4 Chart made with sample data Creating a chart using the Insert chart feature 1 Select Insert gt Chart or click the Insert Chart icon on the Standard toolbar A chart appears that has been created using sample data Choosing a chart type 1 Double click the chart It should now have a gray border The main toolbar has now changed to show tools specifically for charts Tauke tt es aji fants 2 Click the Chart Type icon or select Format gt Chart Type The Chart Type dialog appears Chart Type OK Cancel it x Help Columns Variants iil BE EE K yt Normal Chart Type dialog showing 2 dimensional charts 3 In the section Chart category select either 2D or 3D to see the different types of charts 4 In the section Chart type click one of the icons to select it and see the different variants of the selected chart type in the Variants section 5 Choose a chart variant 6 Click OK The chart in the presentation reflects the new type selected Opening a chart data window 1 Double click the chart It should now have a gray border The main toolbar has now changed to show tools specifically for charts 2 Click the Chart Data icon or select Edit gt Chart Data The Chart Data window appears Chart Data PS RS BBS Gg 1G el CY Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 3 1 ae 4 54 et id 9 65 oul 1 5 out 4 3
191. as of the image it sets the transparency to 0 This tool is useful for erasing parts of the image Note however that it works by marking areas of a layer as being transparent This may result in a checkerboard pattern This pattern is simply used to indicate areas of the image that are transparent and it is not actually part of the image This tool is also useful while working with multiple layers If you have portions of a layer that you want to show through to the top layers you can use the eraser tool on those top layers Pencil This allows you to edit the active layer pixel by pixel The pencil can be used for drawing 1 pixel at at time or what is essentially a non antialiased freeform brush This is similar but not the same as using the Paintbrush with a brush setting of 1 and without antialiasing It can be useful to use the pencil tool with the grid mode enabled while you are zoomed in on an image to do per pixel editing Color Picker You can use this tool to pick up a color from the active layer and set it as the current primary or secondary color Clone Stamp This tool is useful for copying regions of pixels between layers or within the same layer In order to use the clone stamp you must first choose an area to copy from by clicking an area of the image while pressing the Ctrl key You may choose a new source area at any time by doing this again You may also set the size of the clone stamp brush by adjusting the Brush Si
192. ata Celframe Office Write will recognize dates or currency for example and format the numbers appropriately However if you want the numbers to remain as ordinary text this feature can be quite irritating so you will want to deselect it e The Keyboard handling section specifies the distances that cells move when you use keyboard shortcuts to move them and the size of rows and columns inserted using keyboard shortcuts The choices in the Behavior of rows columns section determine the effects that changes to rows or columns have on adjacent rows or columns and the entire table You might need to test these selections to fully understand the effects Background Option Specifies the background for HTML documents The background is valid for both new HTML documents and for those that you load as long as these have not defined their own background Options Celframe Office Write Web Background CelFrame Office Load Save Language Settings Celf Office writ Celframe Office Write Web EEEEEEe E ate Aids aa EL ES Grid Prnt Ter Hackground EEEEHETA FD a Office Data Access SPREE i 5 one Bane we EEEREREEED a No Fill 0 Ge GG WF Backgroud Option Celframe Office Data Access Option In Celframe Office Data Access you can access data that is stored in a wide variety of database file formats Celframe Office Data Access natively supports some flat file database formats such as the dBase format You can also use Celfram
193. ategories check box is marked the categories will be identified by their headings and assignec accordingly when the DataPilot table is created Consolidating Data During consolidation the contents of the cells from several sheets will be combined in one place l 2 Open the document that contains the cell ranges to be consolidated Choose Data Consolidate to open the Consolidate dialog From the Source data area box select a source cell range to consolidate with other areas If the range is not named click in the field next to the Source data area A blinking text cursor appears Type a reference for the first source data range or select the range with the mouse Click Add to insert the selected range in the Consolidation areas field 5 Select additional ranges and click Add after each selection Specify where you want to display the result by selecting a target range from the Copy results to box If the target range is not named click in the field next to Copy results to and enter the reference of the target range Alternatively you can select the range using the mouse or position the cursor in the top left cell of the target range Select a function from the Function box The function specifies how the values of the consolidation ranges are linked The Sum function is the default setting Click OK to consolidate the ranges Consolidate Function OK Average Cancel Consolidation ranges Shee
194. ategory 1 Click the first control you want to move A border appears around the control with eight green handles 2 Move the cursor over the label or field of the control It becomes a double arrow 3 Drag and drop the control to where you want it uex Do not use Control click when moving a field It moves either the field or the label but not both To move both use a mouse click and drag to the desired spot 4 Use the same steps to move the rest of the controls to where they belong ji aua The only way to learn to do these two steps well is to practice them Another way exists which will place controls where you want them Step 4 Change the label wording Field names need to be single words However the labels for the fields can be more than one word So we will change them To do so we will be editing the text in the label Control click the DateAcquired label Do one of the following Right click the DateAcquired label Select Control from the context menu a The window that opens is labeled Properties Label field It contains all of the properties of the selected label In the Label selection click between the e and Ain DateAcquired Use the spacebar to make DateAcquired into two words Close the Properties window Or click the Control icon in the Form Control toolbar The Properties window opens The rest of the steps are the same Use the same procedure to change these labels as well All of the listings in th
195. ation effects Many of the other sections in this chapter describe how to create and edit slides in Normal view Annotations Presentation Overview T C iframe A E Celtrame Office Power Presentation 2006 WG 2 Celframe Office Spreadsheet 2008 Synopsis view shows topic titles bulleted lists and numbered lists for each slide in outline format Use this view to rearrange the order of slides edit titles and headings rearrange the order of items in a list and add new slides Slide Mixer Celtrame Office Write 2008 Celtrame Ottice Power Presentation 2008 Celtrame Office Spreadsheet 2008 Celtrame Office Draw 2008 Celtrame Office Mail 7008 Annotations view lets you add notes to each slide that are not seen when the presentation is shown Just click on the words Click to add notes and begin typing You can resize the notes text box using the green resizing handles and move it by placing the pointer on the border then clicking and dragging Changes can also be made in the text style using the F11 key Synopis Annotations Loatick Slidc Mixcr Leaflet view lets you print your slides for a handout You may choose one two three four or six slides per page from Task pane gt Layouts This choice determines how many thumbnails are visible You can rearrange the thumbnails in this view by simply dragging and dropping them Standard Synopsis Annotations Leaflet slide Mixer heade
196. ave only backgrounds and background objects Both types have predefined presentation and graphics styles You can create a new presentation from a previously saved presentation template by choosing File gt New gt Templates from the menu bar This opens the Templates window To open a new presentation based on a template double click that template s name in the list Templates and Documents Templates Gil g Title Pe all_templates Business Correspondence New Document Calendrier Education Miscellaneous My Templates Other Business Documents Personal Correspondence and Documents z Presentation Backgrounds Presentation Templates My Documents Presentations Spreadsheet Templates Write Template Setting a Custom Template as The Default You can set any template to be the default as long as it is in one of the folders displayed in the Template Management window To set a custom template as the default 1 From the main menu choose File gt Templates gt Organize The Template Management window opens Template Management 7 Presentation Backgrounds aA J Celframe Office SBE 2008 Presentation Templates CO Power Presentation doc me i Black with green Bubbles Shortcut Keys For Lofficename F A Black with Pink paint best odk A Black with Rainbow i bestr ppt Block lin Blue Pencils Blue water painting Brownies Chocolate E Computer Blocks
197. ay subtotals Exit the DataPilot dialog by pressing OK A Filter button will now be inserted or a page button for every data field that you dropped in the Page Fields area The DataPilot table is inserted further down Editing DataPilot Tables Click one of the buttons in the table that the DataPilot has created and hold the mouse button down A special symbol will appear next to the mouse pointer By dragging the button to a different position in the same row you can alter the order of the columns If you drag a button to the left edge of the table into the row headings area you can change a column into a row In the DataPilot dialog you can drag a button to the Page Fields area to create a button anda listbox on top of the generated DataPilot table The listbox can be used to filter the DataPilot table by the contents of the selected item You can use drag and drop within the generated DataPilot table to use another page field as a filter To remove a button from the table just drag it out of the DataPilot table Release the mouse button when the mouse pointer positioned within the sheet has become a not allowed icon The button is deleted To edit the DataPilot table click a cell inside the DataPilot table and open the context menu In the context menu you find the command Start which displays the DataPilot dialog for the current DataPilot table By double clicking on some buttons inside the DataPilot table you can hide the
198. bf Microsoft Excel 97720007F Pele sly Microsott Excel 97 20004P Template lt Microsoft Excel 4 x 5 07 95 eles hy Microsoft Excel de 5 0495 Templates nt My Network Rich Test Format Celframe Office Calc rth biy Documents My Computer fo Places Fil STYLE slk Upen Pega HTML Document Celframe Office Calc htrl 5 Files of type All files Cancel Wersior Read only Opening Database Chapter 5 Advanced Calculations DataPilot The DataPilot Sometimes known as Pivot Table allows you to combine compare and analyze large amounts of data You can view different summaries of the source data you can display the details of areas of interest and you can create reports A table that has been created with the DataPilot is an interactive table Data can be arranged rearranged or summarized according to different points of view Creating DataPilot Tables 1 Position the cursor within a range of cells containing values row and column headings 2 Choose Data DataPilot Start The Select Source dialog appears Choose Current selection and confirm with OK Select Source Selection OK O Data source registered in Celframe Office Cancel External sourcesinterface i Help 3 The table headings are shown as buttons in the DataPilot dialog Drag these buttons as required and drop them into the layout areas Page Fields Column Fields Row Fields and Data
199. ble enter a name in the Name text box and click Add Replacing Colors You can replace colors in bitmaps with the Eyedropper tool Up to four colors can be replaced at once You can also use the Transparency option to replace the transparent areas of an image with a color Similarly you can use the Eyedropper to make a color on your image transparent To replace colors with the Eyedropper tool Ensure that the image you are using is a bitmap for example BMP GIF JPG or PNG or a metafile for example WMF Choose Tools gt Express gt Eyedropper Eyedropper Ea Replace Colors Source color Tolerance Replace with 10 LJ Transparent d 10 C Transparent 10 L Transparent 10 LI Transparency E Black ah r A r A r A r LC Transparent Click the Eyedropper icon and position the mouse pointer over the color you want to replace in the image The color appears in the box next to the eyedropper icon Click the color in the image The color appears in the first Source color box and the check box next to the color is selected In the Replace with box select the new color Ni This replaces all occurrences of the Source color in the image If you want to replace another color while the dialog is open select the check box in front of Source color in the next row Click Replace If you want to expand or contract the color selection area increase or decrease the tolerance of the Eye
200. ble Fields Fields in the Form Actor Genre arrange controls DateAcquired CollectionID o Set data entry MovieTitle Review Get joined fields Apply styles Seb name Binary Fields are always listed and selectable From the left list IF possible they are interpreted as images Finish Step 2 Set up a subform If no relationship had been defined this would be done in step 4 1 Click the box labeled Add Subform 2 Click the radio button labeled Subform based upon existing relation 3 Funny is listed as a relation we want to add So click Funny to highlight it Click Next Form Wizard Decide if you want to set up a subform Field selection dd Subform 2 Set up a subform Subform based on existing relation _ Add subform Fields Which relation do you want to add Get joined fields 5 Arrange controls erdia enri subform based on manual selection of fields r Apply styles iJ amp subform is a form that is inserted in another Form Use subforms to show data From tables or queries with a one to many Set name relationship Finish Step 3 Add subform fields This step is exactly the same as step 1 The only difference is that not all of the fields will be used in the subform 1 Select Funny under Tables or queries 2 Use the gt gt button to move all the fields to the right 3 Click the CollectionID field to highlight it 4 Use the lt button to move the Coll
201. ble the optimization in case of graphical errors of 3D output Use dithering The Use dithering option uses dithering to display additional colorswhen the computer s graphics system offers less than the optimal 16 million 24 bit colours Dithering creates the illusion of new colors and shades by varying the pattern of color pixels Varying the patterns of black and white dots for instance produces different shades of grey w Internally 3 D graphics are always created with 16 million colors 24 bit color depth and dithering can be used to compensate when fewer actual colors are available Without dithering several bits of color information would be omitted leading to significantly reduced image quality Object refresh during interaction Specifies that if you rotate or move a 3 D object the full display is rotated or moved and not a grid frame Press Shift Control R to restore or refresh the view of the current document Mouse Mouse positioning Specifies if and how the mouse pointer will be positioned in newly opened dialog boxes Middle mouse button Defines the function of the middle mouse button Automatic scrolling dragging while pressing the middle mouse button shifts the view e Paste clipboard pressing the middle mouse button inserts the contents of the Selection clipboard at the cursor position The Selection clipboard is independent of the normal clipboard that you use by Edit gt Copy Cut Paste o
202. can also use Row One for the cell range B3 to D3 or Row Two for the cell range B4 to D4 The result of a formula that uses a cell name for example SUM Column One is 600 This function is active by default To turn this function off choose Tools Options Celframe Office Spreadsheet Calculate and clear the Automatically find column and row labels check box If you want a name to be automatically recognized by Spreadsheet the name must start with a letter and be composed of alphanumeric characters If you enter the name in the formula yourself enclose the name in single quotation marks If a single quotation mark appears in a name you must enter a backslash in front of the quotation mark for example Lay s Bar Addresses and References Absolute and Relative Relative Addressing The cell in column A row 1 is addressed as Al You can address a range of adjacent cells by first entering the coordinates of the upper left cell of the area then a colon followed by the coordinates of the lower right cell For example the square formed by the first four cells in the upper left corner is addressed as A1 B2 By addressing an area in this way you are making a relative reference to Al B2 Relative here means that the reference to this area will be adjusted automatically when you copy the formulas Absolute Addressing Absolute references are the opposite of relative addressing A dollar sign is placed before each l
203. ce Write because you can find the changes if you compare documents Sometimes multiple reviewers all return edited versions of a document at the same time In this case it may be quicker to review all of these changes at once rather than one review at a time For this purpose you can merge documents in Celframe Office Write Choose Tools gt Compare and Merge Documents Using Hyperlinks To insert a cross reference as a hyperlink in your document use the Navigator 1 Open the documents containing the items you want to cross reference 2 Open the Navigator by pressing F5 3 Click the arrow next to the Drag Mode icon and select Insert as Hyperlink 4 In the list at the bottom of the Navigator select the document containing the item that you want to cross reference 5 In the Navigator list select the item that you want to insert as a hyperlink 6 Drag the item to where you want to insert the hyperlink in the document The name of the item is inserted in the document as an active hyperlink Navigator O EHHH 113 la 2 eee Insert as Hyperlink Insert as Link Insert as Copy Graphics OLE objects Bookmarks Sections fas Hyperlinks gt References E Inde ec kz CO write doc tactive Navigator Option Using cross references To ensure that references update if you reword a heading caption or other linked item use automatic cross references Using bookmarks Bookmarks are listed in
204. cerned about layout This layout can be customized to your needs For now we ll stick with the standard The blue lines mark our margins and the red lines mark our physical page Celframe Office Publisher Document 1 File Edit Item Insert Page View Extras Windows Help O Shila Gd A YO Os S RAPO O 4 344 BQ aw we A A mm eliog oos Ao ty a fe 1 we Wi sackgqround E Aa Normal Vision a ry Fe We ll start with an image which we want in the upper left corner The thing that looks like a picture of mountains is the picture tool Click it and you ll get an icon to draw in the frame with Click where you want one corner to be and drag it to the opposite corner Don t worry about placing it we ll get to that just draw some sort of rectangle You can reposition the frame by dragging it or resize it by grabbing one of the red squares and dragging the frame out or in Image Frame Celframe Office Publisher bDocument 1 ba File Edit Item Insert Page View Extras Windows Help D nDNA A SCEO ARMmAN0 O DenRA AHAA m t00 00 A N AE OO S rn v E formaven With the frame selected red dotted line highlight click Windows gt Properties or press F12 The properties window allows you to set all of your objects not just images so we ll be back here a lot Change the Name to something usable in this case Logo Then set the X Pos and Y Pos Change the Width and the Height Click the little chain link next to the width
205. ces are more relevant to some types of links Set the value of Frame to determine how the hyperlink will open This applies to documents that open in a Web browser Form specifies if the link is to be presented as text or as a button See Working with hyperlink buttons for more information Text specifies the text that will be visible to the user Name is applicable to HTML documents It specifies text that will be added as a NAME attribute in the HTML code behind the hyperlink Event button this button will be activated to allow Celframe Office to react to events for which the user has written some code macro Working with hyperlink buttons A hyperlink button is inserted in the center of the current slide In most cases that is not where you want it to appear To edit the text or size of a hyperlink button or to move it to another place on the slide first display the Form Controls toolbar View gt Toolbars gt Form Controls Select the Design Mode On Off icon Now you can click on the button and drag it to another position or right click to open a dialog where you can change the text on the button the size of the button and other properties When you have finished editing the button click the Design On Off icon again to make the button active again Fontwork For Graphical Text Art You can use Fontwork to create graphical text art objects To create a Fontwork object 3 On the Drawing toolbar click the Fontw
206. chart If you want to exchange the horizontal and the vertical axes of a chart double click the chart and then click Data in Columns or Data in Rows icon on the Formatting bar Suppose you placed the chart in your Celframe Office Spreadsheet spreadsheet in the background and now you are wondering how to select it for further editing Open the Drawing toolbar and click the Select arrow Now you can click on the chart to select it In a Spreadsheet chart you can move a data series forward or backward You can arrange the series in such a way that the lowest 3D bars are placed in the foreground and the higher ones in the background To change the arrangement in the chart use a command in the context menu of a data series or choose Format Arrangement The corresponding cell ranges in the Celframe Office Spreadsheet spreadsheet will not be rearranged In Celframe Office Write documents you can insert a chart obtained from the data of a Write table If you have not selected any data in a Write table choosing Insert Object Chart inserts a chart containing sample data You can change the sample data values by double clicking on the chart and then choosing Edit Chart Data If you want to change the values of a chart obtained from selected cells you have to change the values in the table cells An easy method to change the numbers in a chart is drag and drop select any table cell range then drag and drop them at the chart The c
207. cing a New Product and Recommendation of a Strategy have their own prepackaged slide designs Each design appears in the Preview window when its name is clicked j 3 Introducing a New Product and Recommendation of a Strategy are prepackaged presentation templates They can be used to create a presentation by choosing From template in the first step Select how the presentation will be used under Select an output medium Most often presentations are created for computer screen display Select Screen Click Next The Presentation Wizard step 3 appears Presentation Wizard Select a slide transition Effect Mo Effect Speed Medium Select the presentation type Default Automatic Duration of page 00 00 10 Duration of pause 00 00 10 Preview Show logo Next gt gt Selecting a slide transition effect and speed The Effect option creates transitions between all the slides in the presentation Select No Effect for no transition effect Transitions can be added and changed later For more information see Working with slides later in this chapter Choose the desired option from the Effect drop down menu You might want to accept the default values for both Effect and Speed unless you are iP skilled at doing this Both of these values can be changed later while working with Slide transitions and animations Select the desired speed for the transition between the different slides in the presentation from the S
208. cing and kerning To edit more Fontwork attributes e Click the Fontwork object to select it e Select the properties from the Drawing Object Properties toolbar You can change the line width line color fill color fill style and more cELFRAME Drawing an Organization Chart Draw offers no special toolbar for creating organization charts where individual fields appear as rectangles Drawing these charts presents no special problems The use of different fill colors clearly represents organizational linkages and by drawing rectangles with different heights you can see the various hierarchies With a color progression from dark tones to bright this effect can be reinforced Watch that the color choices maintain a good contrast between text color and background so that you can easily read the printed diagram At the beginning it is useful to prepare a setup page or draft with snap lines to assist in drawing the various hierarchies and responsibility paths and typical boxes that you will use in drawing the chart i i f f f f i i f i f l f f l f A i f rinra ee DT Te ee eee ee m e E E ASS H oe ae ee ee See eee ea eee ea Sig ee Sie ee ee ee i i i i i s 1 i i i 1 l Individual boxes are placed and dimensioned according to feel The exact size particularly width position and color will be fi
209. ck 7 About Celframe Office Photoalbum Celframe Office Photoalbum Help Online Help Support Airframe Office Support Registration How to activate Celframe Product via online activation Celframe Office Photoalbum Online Celframe Office online Contact Us Contact Celframe Check for Updates Check for application updates Customer Feedback Customer Feedback on Celframe Office About Celframe Office Photoalbum About Celframe Photoalbum Celframe Photoalbum 7008 Copyright 27000 27007 Celframe Inc This product has been created by Celframe Warning This computer program is producted by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction of distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in servere civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law ef Close Themes Available for Album Blue Shifted A dark theme High contrast Blue and black dominate most windows but with white and grey accents for readability Themes _ BlueShifted Classic FreshClassic Metallic Radiant Slick SmartShifted Theme Preview henry letteron 2003 Screenshot 33 Save to Ci Documents and Settings User My Documents My Pictures aa Save pa Cancel Classic This classic theme provides contact sheets of thumbnails as well as javascript based slideshows for each sub album in your album Results mimic the original f
210. ck OK Cross fading Settings OK Increments 16 Cross fade attributes Same orientation Help A group containing the two original objects and the specified number increments of cross faded objects is displayed Duplicating Objects You can create duplicate or multiple copies of an object The copies can be identical or can differ in size color orientation and location The following example creates a stack of coins by making multiple copies of a single ellipse Use the Ellipse tool to draw a solid yellow ellipse Select the ellipse and choose Edit Duplicate Enter 12 as Number of copies Enter a negative value for the Width and Height so that the coins decrease in size as you go up the Stack To define a color transition for the coins select different colors in the Start and End boxes The Start color is applied to the object that you are duplicating Click OK to create the duplicates Duplicate Humber of copies E Placement Cancel a axis Help axis Default 4 4 4 Angle 0 degrees Enlargement Width 0 04 Height 0 04 Colors Stark C Yellow 1 End E velos 6 Grouping Objects You can combine several objects into a group so that they act as a single object You can move and transform all objects in a group as a single unit You can also change the properties for example line size fill color of all objects in a group as a whole or for individual objects in a g
211. ck and hold the left mouse button to establish the first point and then drag the mouse cursor left button still pressed to the other glue point and release the mouse button The ends of the line are now docked and the connection is established Gluing a connector to a shape As with all other objects connectors have one or more control points to simplify the construction of the drawing You can use these points to change the shape length and proportions of the connector line Control points of a connector To remove a connector from an object either move the end of the connector from the glue point of the object or simply delete the connector entirely Editing Glue Points Glue points can be edited using a separate toolbar This toolbar appears when you click on the Glue Points icon or select Edit gt Express gt Glue Points from the main menu Insert or modify the properties of a glue point A glue point is a custom connection point where you can attach a connector line By default Celframe Office automatically places a connection point at the center of each side of the bounding rectangle for every object you create Insert Glue points points After adding a connector between the two Adding text to connectors To add text to a connector double click the connector The end and control points become active and the familiar flashing text cursor appears the cursor position is determined by the last used setting The Text Fo
212. ck the big up and down arrows to the right of the lists 7 To add commands to a toolbar click the Add button on the right The Add Commands dialog opens Follow the instructions on this dialog and then click Add to return to the Customize dialog 8 When you are done customizing menus click OK to save your changes Customizing keyboard shortcuts As an example suppose you wish to assign a shortcut key to easily insert a duplicate slide in your presentation You could assign the nsert key as a logical shortcut for this purpose as described below 1 Choose Tools gt Customize 2 On the Customize dialog pick the Keyboard page Customize Menus Keyboard Toolbars Events Shortcut keys te E a A Text G Fower Presentation O Celframe Office Enter Group Position and Size View Show Spelling and Grarnor Points view Showy Styles and Formatl we gt Functions Category Function Juno Online Activa Wie About Celframe Orr Templates AutoPilot Address Edit AutoPilot Presenta Options Bibliography Datab BASIC Celframe Office Hel Insert Celframe Office On Documents Check For Updates Format Contact Ls Controls Customer Feedback m gt i gt Customizing keyboard shortcuts 3 As the shortcut key assignment is only relevant with Celframe Office Power Presentation and not Celframe Office in general select the Power Presentation button at the upper right corner of the Keyboard tab 4
213. click within the object s border and hold down the left mouse button while moving the mouse During movement the shape of the object appears as dotted lines to help with repositioning Moving an object To drop the object at its new location release the mouse button The new position appears immediately in the Status Bar Dynamic size modification of objects To change the size of a selected object or a group of selected objects with the mouse you need to move one of the handles located around the selection As shown in the following illustration the outline of the resulting new object appears as a dotted line while the mouse button is pressed Changing the size of a selected object The results will differ depending on which handle you use If you choose a corner handle as shown in the figure above you will resize the object along two axes at the same time If you use a side handle the objects will only be resized along one axis The new size will appear immediately in the Status Bar X on If you press the Shift key at the same time as you carry out the resizing operation the increase or decrease in size will be carried out symmetrically with respect to the two axes which enables you to keep the same height length aspect ratio of the object Dynamic Size Modification of Objects with the Help of the Status Bar If you select an object and modify it using the mouse the changes are immediately reflected in the Informat
214. contains a collection of images that you can use in a presentation You can also add your own images to the Gallery making it an essential tool for creating presentations quickly and with a consistent look Click the Gallery icon a on the Drawing toolbar To expand the Gallery position the pointer over the line that divides it from the top of the workspace When the pointer changes to parallel lines with arrows click and drag downward The workspace will resize in response To expand the Gallery without affecting the Power Presentation workspace undock it so it floats over the workspace To do so hold down the Contro key and double click on the upper part of the Gallery next to the View icons Double click in the same area to dock it again restore it to its position over the workspace When the Gallery is docked to hide it and view the full Impress workspace click the Hide Show button in the middle of the thin bar separating the Gallery from the workspace The Hide Show button lets you keep the Gallery open for quick access while you create your slide show yet out of the way when you need it to be Once you are satisfied with the Gallery display select a theme from the left pane and then scroll as necessary through the right pane to find a suitable image Click on the image and drag it onto the workspace Hide Show button Pik te Bat le lak A aa a Pp Ri Rie M Aa Mi el Pm tn af let Slide Mixer Hide Presentation C
215. ct This tool can be used to produce perspective drawings The series of pictures in shows the method of constructing a cuboid or rectangular prism To shorten the edges leading from front to back reduce the length before you distort the height or width of the surface Chapter 3 Working with Object Setting Size and Position Exactly You can position and resize objects with the mouse but this method is not very exact If you need accurate positioning of objects use Format gt Position and Size from the menu bar or right click the object and select Position and Size from the context menu or press F4 Position and Size Open the Position and Size dialog and click on the first tab to set the appropriate values Position and Size Position and Size Rotation Slant amp Corner Radius Position Base point i i cdl Position p i l Size Position amp Base point Width J S i 9 e Protec Adapt Position Fit width to text Size Fit height to text Position and size of an object Position is defined as an X Y coordinate relative to a fixed point the base point typically located at the upper left of the drawing area If desired you can temporarily change this base point to make positioning or dimensioning simpler click on the radio button corresponding to the location of the base point in either of the two selection windows on the right side of the dialog upper for posi
216. ct If the object already has a shadow the shadow is removed If you click this icon when no object is selected the shadow is added to the next object that you draw Crop Opens a dialog to crop pixel graphics The function is available only if the pixel graphic is marked Edit Points Bar The Edit Points Bar appears when you select a polygon object and click Edit Points The functions provided allow you to edit the points of a curve or an object converted to a curve The following icons are available Edit Points x EE sc zi 4 ay i gt I x gt i gt ia E ajele 1 Edit Points The Edit Points icon allows you to activate or deactivate the edit mode for B zier objects In the edit mode individual points of the drawing object can be selected 2 Move Points Activates a mode in which you can move points The mouse pointer displays a small empty square when resting on a point Drag that point to another location The curve on both sides of the point follows the movement the section of the curve between the next points changes shape Point at the curve between two points or within a closed curve and drag the mouse to shift the entire curve without distorting the form 3 Insert Points Activates the insert mode This mode allows you to insert points You can also move points just as in the move mode If however you click at the curve between two points and move the mouse a little while holding
217. d bar or by selecting Tools gt Express gt Gallery e Select a theme e Select an object by a single click e Open the context menu and choose Insert Background Page or Paragraph Inserting an object as a texture pattern for another object Open the Gallery by clicking the Gallery icon on the Standard bar or by selecting Tools gt Express gt Gallery Select a theme Select an object by a single click Drag the object on to the other object in the document while pressing Ctrl Applying Line Styles Using the Toolbar The Drawing Object Properties toolbar contains icons and combo boxes to define various line attributes Click the Line icon to open the Line dialog Click the Arrow Styles icon to select an arrow style for the right and left ends of a line Select a style from the Line Style box and specify the width in the Line Width box A width of 0 corresponds to 1 pixel Select the line and arrow color in the Line Color box Special Effects First make sure that the Drawing toolbar is selected View gt Toolbars gt Drawing On the Drawing toolbar locate the Effects icon Click on the arrow next to that icon j Mode tear off submenu 1 Rotate 2 Flip 3 In 3D Rotation Object 4 Set in Circle perspective 5 Set to Circle slant 6 Distort 7 Transparency 8 Gradient Rotating an object Click on the Effects icon to select the Rotate tool Then select an object The selected object wi
218. d for this feature HTML export to the web from Celframe Office 2008 applications Exporting HTML Hyper Text Markup Language now produces valid XHTML extensible Hyper Text Markup Language 1 0 Strict output Digital signatures and encryption enhancement in Celframe Office 2008 Digital signatures offer secure protection of document content The new XML eXtensible Markup Language encryption algorithm offers additional security Features Writing Celframe Office Write lets you create both basic documents such as memos faxes letters resumes and merge documents as well as long and complex or multi part documents complete with bibliographies reference tables and indexes Celframe Office Write also includes such useful features as a spellchecker a thesaurus AutoCorrect and hyphenation as well as a variety of templates for almost every purpose You can also create your own templates using the wizards Designing and Structuring Celframe Office offers a wide variety of options to design documents Use the Styles and Fomatting window to create assign and modify styles for paragraphs individual characters frames and pages In addition the Navigator helps you to quickly move around inside your documents lets you look at your document in an outline view and keeps track of the objects that you have inserted into your document You can also create various indexes and tables in text documents You can define the structure and appearance
219. d the right page margins If you want you can also specify the alignment options for the last line of a paragraph by choosing Format gt Express gt Paragraph gt Alignment 11 Single Line Applies single line spacing to the current paragraph This is the default setting 12 1 5 Lines Sets the line spacing of the current paragraph to one and half lines 13 Double Line Sets the line spacing of the current paragraph to two lines 14 Bullets On Off Assigns bullet points to the selected paragraphs or removes them from bulleted paragraphs 15 Decrease Indent To reduce the left indent of the current paragraph or cell content and set it to the previous tab position 16 Increase Indent 1 7 Font Changes the font and the font formatting for the selected characters 18 Paragraph Modifies the format of the current paragraph such as indents and alignment 19 Symbol Inserts special characters from the installed fonts Only the special characters of the current font are available 20 Font Color Click to apply the current font color to the selected characters You can also click here and then drag a selection to change the text color Click the arrow next to the icon to open the Font color toolbar 21 New Slide Insert new slide in presentation 22 Slide Layout Opens the Slide Layout panel on the Task pane 23 Slide Design Displays the slide designs you can apply to your slide Select a design and click OK to apply it to t
220. der Shadow style on the dialog box Table Format Table Text Flaw Columns Borders Background Line arrangement Ling Spacing to contents Default Style Left 0 04 Mone zE i 0 50 pt A Top 0 04 1 00 pt 2 50 pk Bottom 0 04 ee 00 pt Synchronize es n Color P Salmon yt ir 47 d Shadow style Position Distance Color m m m m m 0 07 E sray Properties Merge adjacent line styles Table Format dialog box Borders page If Merge adjacent line styles is checked two cells sharing a common border will have their borders merged rather than being side by side To reset everything if you are having problems with borders right click in the table and select Table gt Borders or select Table gt Table Properties gt Borders and then select the Set no borders icon under Line arrangement Default the box on theleft Selecting Background Colors and Graphics The background of a table a cell or a group of cells can be set to a color or a background graphic If you select an image you can position it in the cell or group of cells stretch it to fill the space or tile the image across the cells You can set the background for the whole table in the same way To set the background for a cell row or table 1 Select the cells you wish to work with If you are changing the background for a row or table just place the cursor anywhere inside the row or table to be changed 2 Right clic
221. dge of the object is aligned to the left page margin 6 Center Horizontal Horizontally centers the selected objects If only one object is selected in Draw or Power Presentation the center of the object is aligned to the horizontal center of the page 7 Align Right Aligns the right edges of the selected objects 8 Align Top Horizontally aligns the top edges of the selected objects If only one object is selected in Draw or Power Presentation the top edge of the object is aligned to the upper page margin 9 Align Vertical Center Vertically centers the selected objects If only one object is selected in Draw or Power Presentation the center of the object is aligned to the vertical center of the page 10 Align Bottom Horizontally aligns the bottom edges of the selected objects If only one object is selected in Draw or Power Presentation the bottom edge of the object is aligned to the lower page margin 11 Borders Click the Borders icon to open the Borders toolbar where you can modify the border of a sheet area or an object 12 Line Style Click this icon to open the Line Style toolbar where you can modify the border line style 13 Border Color Click the Line Color of the border icon to open the Border Color toolbar which enables you to change the border color of an object 14 Background Color Click to open a toolbar where you can click a background color for a paragraph The color is applied to the background of t
222. document Do you want to unlink it The tool can be used on all raster graphic formats and with many Metafile formats i au Contrary to the statement in the Help the eyedropper does not currently work on some Metafile formats Eyedropper If you receive such a picture you can recreate the transparency with the eyedropper tool Open the Eyedropper dialog with Tools gt Express gt Eyedropper and click on the picture to be edited Replace Source color Tolerance Replace with _ 10 LC Transparent 10 LC Transparent a 10 d LC Transparent a gt 4 dh 4 10 C Transparent Transparency MM black Now click on the eyedropper icon to change to the color selection mode Outside the dialog the cursor changes to a hand The field next to the icon shows the color immediately under the hand cursor Replace Colors Source color Tolerance Replace with A C 10 LC Transparent 1 10 CI 10 a 10 Transparency MM Black LC Transparent LC Transparent C Transparent ir 47 dh 4 Click on the color to be changed The first Source Color box is now marked and the color selected appears in the left box In the Replace with selection list the option Transparent is already selected You can then click on the Replace button at the top right of the box to carry out the changes to the picture There is no preview of the effect If the result is not what you wanted choose Edit gt
223. down the mouse button you insert a new point The point is a smooth point and the lines to the control points are parallel and remain so when moved If you wish to create a corner point you must first insert either a smooth or a symmetrical point which is then converted to a corner point by using Corner Point 4 Delete Points Use the Delete Points icon to delete one or several selected points If you wish to select several points click the appropriate points while holding down the Shift key First select the points to be deleted and then click this icon or press Del 5 Split Curve The Split Curve icon splits a curve Select the point or points where you want to split the curve then click the icon 6 Convert To Curve Converts a curve into a Straight line or converts a straight line into a curve If you select a single point the curve before the point will be converted If two points are selected the curve between both points will be converted If you select more than two points each time you click this icon a different portion of the curve will be converted If necessary round points are converted into corner points and corner points are converted into round points If a certain section of the curve is straight the end points of the line have a maximum of one control point each They cannot be modified to round points unless the straight line is converted back to a curve 7 Corner Point Converts the selected point or points
224. dragging the separating line to the new position A similar procedure can be used to modify the height of a cell or group of cells To insert rows and columns in a spreadsheet use the Format menu or right click on the row and column headers and select the appropriate option from the pop up menu To merge multiple cells select the cells to be merged and select Format gt Express gt Merge cells from the main menu bar To de merge a group of cells select the group and again Format gt Merge Cells which will now have a checkmark next to it When you are satisfied with the formatting and the appearance of the table exit the edit mode by clicking outside the spreadsheet area Note that Celframe Power Presentation will display exactly the section of the spreadsheet which was on the screen before leaving the edit mode This allows you to hide additional data from the view but it may cause the apparent loss of rows and columns Therefore take care that the desired part of the spreadsheet is showing on the screen before leaving the edit mode Inserting a chart To add a chart to a slide select the corresponding layout in the list of predefined layouts in the task pane or use the Insert Chart feature Creating a chart in AutoLayout 1 In the Tasks pane choose a layout that contains a chart look for the vertical bars Examples of AutoLayout templates with charts 2 Double click the chart icon in the center of the chart area A full sized ch
225. dropper tool and repeat your selection Creating Gradient Fills A gradient fill is an incremental blend of two different colors or shades of the same color that you can apply to a drawing object To apply a gradient e Select a drawing object e Choose Format Background and select Gradient as the Fill type e Select a gradient style from the list and click OK Area Shadow Transparency Colors Hatching Bitmaps Properties Type Radial w LIE Gradient 4 sradient 5 Center S0 BEI cradient 6 P Linear blue white Center Y 50 GR Radial green black gt Rectangular red white Angle 0 degrees C Square vellowswhite PG Linear magenta green Delete Border 0o C Linear yellow brown Radial red vellow From E Red 4 E ellipsoid blue gray light E xia light rediwhite JE 100 LJ ellow i LOU Creating Custom Gradients You can define your own gradients and modify existing gradients as well as save and load a list of gradient files To create a custom gradient e Choose Format Background and click the Gradients tab e Select a gradient from the list to use as the basis for your new gradient and click Add e Type a name for the gradient in the text box and click OK The name appears at the end of the gradient list and is selected for editing e Set the gradient properties and click Modify to save the gradient e Click OK Usin
226. e Double click to add a spreadsheet When editing a spreadsheet some of the contents of the main menu bar change as does the Formatting toolbar to show entries and tools that support working with the spreadsheet Main Menu Bar Standard Toolbar E Presentation Celframe Office Power Presentation Bie Edt pew Inset Format Tools Data Author s Tools Window teb Id ide F yda FF Aan OO Morg v B U FESR SSIs rnunana E Af Formula Bar Formatting Toolbar The menu bar and the formatting toolbar in spreadsheet editing mode One of the most important changes is the presence of the Formula toolbar just below the Formatting toolbar The Formula toolbar contains from left to right The active cell reference or the name of the selected range The Formula Wizard button The Sum and Formula buttons or the Cancel and Accept buttons depending on the contents of the cell A long edit box to enter or review the contents of a cell Resizing and moving a spreadsheet To resize the area occupied by the spreadsheet or change its position enter the edit mode and use the black handles found in the gray border surrounding the spreadsheet Move the mouse over the handles to resize the spreadsheet area The corner handles resize the two sides forming the corner simultaneously while the handles in the middle of the sides modify one dimension at a time When moved over each handle the cursor changes shape to give a visual representation of
227. e As Ctrl Shift 5 Revert to Saved Export Images For Printing Small web Gallery Ctrl g Open Recent Displays a list of album that you have opened recently Save Save the album file that you create Save As Can save the album in variety themes Revert to Saved Back to the normal stage before saved Export Export to small web gallery and images for printing Photos Remove Description Revert to Original Remove Description Remove the description on the album Revert to Original Revert to original picture Settings Album Statistics Show the statistics of the album A Abim stanses Album Statistics Collections Photos Sein Wature Size 304 87 Kb Created December 4th 2009 Modified December 4th 2009 Close Settings Appearance Selecrion for animation tooltips and window placement and size Load save Load or save the album Alerts selection for alert to destructive actions and software update Settings Ci Appearance MS Load Save Alerts General ra Use animation Show tooltips Window Placement and Size wW Restore window placement and size wo of Screen _ _ 41 Placement Center Help Menu Help a CelFrame Office Photoalbum Help Support Registration Celframe Office Photoalbum Online Contact Us Check For Updates a Customer Feedba
228. e Chapter Promote Level ais Tat Headings Writing Designing and Structuring Demote Chapter Desktop Publishing with Celframe Office 4 Calculations Creating Drawings Inserting Graphics Flexible Application Interface Meant Mirar li CO Write active Reorganizing with the Navigator Creating a New Document You can create a new blank document in Write in a number of ways Use File gt New gt Text Document e Click the New button onthe main toolbar Templates and Documents New Document u g Title pe j Business Cards k HTML Document Labels Master Document J Presentation 3 Spreadsheet Sen en eee Or Templates Peer errr rere rr rrr rire r rrr reir rrr retry ere rrr errr etre rrere rr terr irr rrr rrr rrr rrr ry u XML Form Document a My Documents D Samples Open new document Creating a Document from a Template You can use templates to create new documents in Write Templates serve as the foundation of a set of documents to make sure they all have a similar layout File gt New gt Templates This opens a window where you can choose the template you want to use for your document Select it then click the Open button A new document is created based on the formats defined in the template Templates and Documents Templates x New Document iy My Documents Samples Organize Cu g Title all_templates Business Co
229. e Office Data Access to connect to external relational databases such as databases from MySQL or Oracle Options Celframe Office Data Access Celframe Office Load Save Language settings wile Celframe Office Data Access Celframe Office Write Celframe Office Write Web Celframe Office Data A This is where you define general settings for accessing external data sources Connections Databases Charts Internet OHA Ceca Jip T Celframe Office Data Access Connections Option Defines how the connections to data sources are pooled The Connections facility allows you to stipulate that connections that are no longer needed are not deleted immediately but are kept free for a certain period of time If a new connection to the data source is needed in that period the free connection can be used for this purpose Choose Tools gt Options gt Celframe Office Data Access gt Connections Options Celframe Office Data Access Connections Celframe Office l Load Save Connection pool Language Settings Connection pooling enabled Celframe Office Write l Celframe Office Write Wweb Drivers known in Celframe Office OHA CelFrame Office Data Access Driver name Timeout Connections Databases Charts Internet com sun star comp sdbe ODBCDriver com sun star comp sdbe JDBCDriver com sun star comp sdbe MozabDriver com sun star comp sde ado ODriver com sun star comp sdbe calc ODriver com sun
230. e Preview Displays a preview of the printed page or closes the preview 10 Spellcheck Checks the document or the current selection for spelling errors 11 AutoSpellchek On Off Automatically checks spelling as you type and underlines errors 12 Cut Removes and copies the selection to the clipboard 13 Copy Copies the selection to the clipboard 14 Paste Inserts the contents of the clipboard at the location of the cursor and replaces any selected text or objects Click the arrow next to the icon to select the format 15 Format Paintbrush Copies the formatting of the selected text or object and applies the formatting to another text selection or object 16 Undo Reverses the last command or the last entry you typed To select the command that you want to reverse click the arrow next to the Undo icon on the Standard bar 17 Redo Reverses the action of the last Undo command To select the Undo step that you want to reverse click the arrow next to the Redo icon on the Standard bar 18 Hyperlink Opens a dialog that enables you to create and edit hyperlinks 19 Table Inserts a table into the document You can also click the arrow drag to select the number of rows and columns to include in the table and then click in the last cell 20 Columns Specifies the number of columns and the column layout for a page style frame or section 21 Show Draw Functions Click to open or close the Drawing bar where you can add shapes
231. e Properties window can be modified by you For example by changing the Alignment from Left to Center the word or words in the label are centered within the Label When you have some time you might want to experiment with different settings just to see the results you get Step 5 Change the widths of the labels and fields 1 Click Date Acquired The border around it appears with eight green handles 2 Move the cursor over the middle green handle on the right The cursor changes into a single arrow 3 Drag and drop the cursor to the left to shorten the control or to the right to lengthen the control Use the guide lines to determine the width 4 Repeat for the other listed controls Step 6 Replace fields with other fields We want to replace the Genre field with a List Box Then we can choose the type of Genre table rather than having to manually enter the type Control click the Genre field The green handles appear around the field but not around the Label Selecting a field of a control Right click within the green handles and select Replace with gt List Box EE List Box Click the Control icon in the Form Controls toolbar to open the Properties window On the General tab scroll down to the Dropdown selection Change the No to Yes in this dropdown list General Data Events FALIUITIGINT 0 cece ce ee ees Background color _ oxooppDppD_ si BRS leech ete niet eect Border color E a Dropdown
232. e a placeholder object in a new presentation only if the frame is selected Ctrl Enter Moves to the next text object on the slide If there are no text objects on the slide or if you reached the last text object a new Slide is inserted after the current slide The new slide uses the same layout as the current slide Navigating with the Keyboard in Slide Sorter Moves the focus to the first slide Moves the focus to the next slide Makes the slide with the focus the current slide Adding a Header or a Footer to All Slides You can add a text object to the master page for your slides to act as a header or a footer 8 Choose View gt Master gt Slide Master 9 On the Drawing bar select the Text icon 10 Drag in the master page to draw a text object and then type or paste your text You can also add fields such as the date or page number to a header or footer by choosing Insert gt Express gt Fields You can hide the header or footer on the current slide by choosing Format gt Slide Layout and clearing the Objects on background check box Zooming With The Keypad You can use the keypad to quickly enlarge or reduce the view on your slide 1 To zoom in press the Plus Sign 2 TO zoom out press the Minus Sign 3 To fit the page in the current view press the Multiplication Sign 4 To fit the selected object in the current view press the Division Sign Selecting Underlying Objects e To select an object that
233. e any of the colors in the Color Table at Tools gt Options gt Celframe Office gt Colors If you know how to create custom colors you can use them You can also use a picture graphic file as the background Options Celframe Office Colors El Celframe Office l User Data Properties General Memory ulin Color Blue 8 Print Paths Color table Colors Mame Blue amp gt Fonts Security Appearance Accessibility Java Load Save Language Settings Celframe Office Write Celframe Office Write Web Celframe Office Data Access Charts Internet _ C I C Ge EEHHHH EET HE San O88 DEH E Omm B HHA Step 11 Change the tab order The Tab key moves the cursor from field to field This is much easier to do than to click each field to enter data into it It also permits us to group our expenses into areas before we begin entering data Control click the Date Acquired field Click the Form Design icon in the Form Controls toolbar to open the Form Design toolbar Click the Activation Order icon Ki em Base en kdr o fejs Form Design toolbar with Activation Order icon circled Rearrange the order of the fields in the Tab Order window Click OK Save and close the form Save the database Chapter 3 Databases Accessing other data sources To register a data source choose File gt New gt Database to open the Database Wizard Select Connect to an existing database This allows access to the list of
234. e click to edit the style right click to select another style 3 Zoom Specifies the current page display zoom factor 4 Insert Mode Displays the current insert mode You can toggle between INSRT insert and OVER overwrite 5 Selection Mode Displays the current selection mode You can toggle between STD Standard EXT Extend and ADD Add 6 Edit or Activate Hyperlinks Clicking this field on the Status Bar switches the hyperlinks from active HYP to edit SEL and back 7 Document Modification Wel aw If changes to the document have not yet been saved on the hard drive a is displayed in this field on the Status Bar This also applies to new not yet saved documents 8 Combined Display Displays current information about the active document Hyperlink Bar Use the Hyperlink Bar to create and edit the hyperlinks in your documents and to enter criteria for searches using the available Internet search engines ae URL O KH lt a s5 1 URL Name Assigns a name to an Internet URL or file You can also enter search criteria for an Internet search site 2 Internet URLs Allows you to either type a URL or insert a URL from a document using drag and drop 3 Target Frame frames Specifies the target frame type for the specified URL A submenu opens with predefined 4 Hyperlink Inserts a hyperlink from the current URL into your document The URL ddress is taken from the entry in the Internet URLs combo box a
235. e end of the document Ctrl Tab Inserts a tab stop only in tables Depending on the Window Manager in use Alt Tab may be used instead Ctrl Shift Arrow ump to start of table Up Ctrl Shift Arrow ump to end of table Down Alt Arrow Keys Increases decreases the size of the column row on the right bottom cell edge Alt Shift Arrow Increase decrease the size of the column row on the left top cell edge Keys Alt Ctrl Arrow Like Alt but only the active cell is modified Ctrl Alt Shift Arro Like Alt but only the active cell is modified Alt Insert 3 seconds in Insert mode Arrow Key inserts row column Ctri Arrow Key inserts cell Alt Del 3 seconds in Delete mode Arrow key deletes row column Ctrl Arrow key merges cell with neighboring cell Ctrl Shift T Removes cell protection from all selected tables If no table is selected then cell protection is removed from all of the tables in the document Shift Ctrl Del If nothing is selected the contents of the next cell are deleted If cells are selected the whole line of the selection will be deleted If all rows are selected completely or partially the entire table is deleted Shortcut Keys for Moving and Resizing Frames Graphics and Objects Cursor is inside a text frame and no text is selected Escape selects the text frame Text frame is selected Escape clears the cursor from the text frame F2 or Enter or any key that produces If a text frame is sel
236. e files to add To select more than one file hold the Control key down while you click on each file 10 Finally click Add 11 When you have finished working with the Gallery you can click on its icon to close it w This procedure assumes that the graphic files for the themes already exist You may need to import some graphics or to create your own onto your computer if the existing files are insufficient au Similar to the file search function on various operating systems Find Files searches for N graphic files in any subfolders of the directory selected in step 5 Arranging and Aligning Graphics You can arrange and align graphics using commands from The main menu Format gt Alignment or Arrange Wrap Anchor Flip By right clicking on the picture then Format gt Express gt Alignment or Arrange Wrap or Anchor Frame with the Graphics frame style applied toolbar Picture dialog box Wrapping Text Around Graphics On the main menu click Format gt Express gt Wrap or Right click gt Wrap The Wrap menu options provide several possibilities Alternate paragraphs and graphics maintaining a separation between them Wrap Off Wrap text around the graphics Page Wrap or Optimal Page Wrap Put a semi transparent graphic over the text Wrap Through Add a graphic in the background In Background To set the position of an image to the Wrap Off format follow these steps 1 Select a graph
237. e high quality documents you can be proud of Celframe Office is extremely suitable for Governments and Public Administrations Not for Profit Organisations Charities Voluntary Organisations Non Governmental Organisations Small Medium Enterprises SMEs Own Equipment Manufacturers PC Manufacturers Builders Educational Sector Schools Colleges Universities Technical Info Windows computer with an Intel Pentium III or AMD 500 MHz or faster processor Windows 98 2000 XP Vista 2003 2008 512MB of RAM 1GB recommended 32MB min of video memory Adobe Acrobat 8 0 or equivalent software Celframe Voyager 08 Internet Explorer 7 0 with flash plug in needed 500 MB of available disk space CD drive required for installation Internet access required for Registration updates of the product Celframe Mail and certain other features fees may apply Celframe Installation To Install Celframe Office First Click on the Installation menu and choose Celframe Office 2008 A welcome window will appear Click Next Choose the shortcuts that you wanted to be on your desktop then click Next Select the I accept the terms in the License Agreement Then Click Next Choose the option you want to install You can choose either Typical custom and complete Installation Then click on Next Click Next to continue The Installation will start and just wait until process is finish and then click Finish
238. e more likely choice The Select path button opens a directory picker The Further settings section in the bottom right part of the dialog is common to all the hyperlink types although some choices are more relevant to some types of links Set the value of Frame to determine how the hyperlink will open This applies to documents that open in a Web browser Form specifies if the link is to be presented as text or as a button Text specifies the text that will be visible to the user Name is applicable to HTML documents It specifies text that will be added as a NAME attribute in the HTML code behind the hyperlink Event button this button will be activated to allow Celframe Office to react to events for which the user has written some code macro This function is not covered in this book Editing Hyperlinks To edit a hyperlink you can either click anywhere in the link text or position the cursor in the link text using the arrow keys and then open the Hyperlink dialog by clicking the Hyperlink icon on the Standard toolbar or selecting Edit gt Links from the menu bar To activate a hyperlink it is now necessary to hold down the Ctrl key while clicking on the link If you need to edit several hyperlinks you can leave the Hyperlink dialog open until you have edited all of them Be sure to click Apply after each one When you arefinished click Close Counting The Words in a Selection Select a block of text and choose To
239. e of the object is aligned to the left page margin 3 Center Horizontal Horizontally centers the selected objects If only one object is selected in Draw or Power Presentation the center of the object is aligned to the horizontal center of the page 4 Align Right Aligns the right edges of the selected objects 5 Align Top Horizontally aligns the top edges of the selected objects If only one object is selected in Draw or Power Presentation the top edge of the object is aligned to the upper page margin 6 Align Vertical Center Vertically centers the selected objects If only one object is selected in Draw or Power Presentation the center of the object is aligned to the vertical center of the page 7 Align Bottom Horizontally aligns the bottom edges of the selected objects If only one object is selected in Draw or Power Presentation the bottom edge of the object is aligned to the lower page margin 8 Wrap Off Places the object on a separate line in the document The Text in the document appears above and below the object but not on the sides of the object You can also choose this setting on the Wrap tab page 9 Page Wrap Wraps text on all four sides of the border frame of the object This icon corresponds to the Page Wrap option on the Wrap tab page 10 Wrap Through Places the object in front of the text You can also achieve the same effect through the Wrap tab page 11 Frames Opens a dialog where you can modify th
240. e of the predefined colors is displayed Changes made to the standard color table are permanent and are saved Important automatically e Click a color in the table that is similar to the one you want to mix The color appears in the upper preview box to the right of the table e Select the RGB or CMYK color model in the box below the preview boxes The RGB color model mixes red green and blue light to create colors on a computer screen In the RGB model the three color components are additive and can have values ranging from O black to 255 white The CMYK color model combines Cyan C Magenta M Yellow Y and black K also used for Key to create colors for printing The four colors of the CMYK models are subtractive and are defined as percentages Black corresponds to 100 and white to 0 e Enter a numeric value in the boxes next to the color components The new color appears in the preview box directly above the color model box You can also create a color using a color spectrum Click the Edit button to open the Color dialog Click a color and click OK Use the Hue Saturation and Brightness boxes to adjust your color selection Cyan Magenta F Hue Yellouy Saturation 4 47 4 key Brightness e Do one of the following If you want to replace the color in the standard color table that your custom color is based on click Modify If you want to add your custom color to the standard color ta
241. e pasted text the same look and feel of the rest of the presentation apply the appropriate outline style to the text To do so 1 Paste the text in the desired position Do not worry if it does not look right it will in a minute 2 Select the text you have just pasted 3 Select Format gt Default formatting from the menu bar 4 Use the four arrow buttons in the Text Formatting toolbar to move the text to the appropriate position and give it the appropriate outline level The button with the arrow pointing left promotes the list entry by one level Promote Demote Move Up Move Down 5 Apply manual formatting as required to sections of the text to change font attributes tabs and so on If you are pasting text in a text box you can still use styles to quickly format the text Note that one and only one graphic style can be applied to the copied text To do that 1 Paste the text in the desired position 2 Select the text you have just pasted 3 Select the desired graphic style 4 Apply manual formatting as required to sections of the text Presentation styles are very different from Write styles and are applied in quite a different way Inserting special characters To insert special characters such as copyright math geometric or monetary symbols or characters from another language 1 Click in the place in the text where you want to insert the character 2 Choose Insert gt Symbol The Special Character
242. e properties of the selected object for example its size and name 12 Bring to Front Moves the selected object to the top of the stacking order so that it is in front of other objects 13 Send to Back Moves the selected object to the bottom of the stacking order so that it is behind the other objects 14 Change Anchor Allows you to switch between anchoring options 15 Borders Click the Borders icon to open the Borders toolbar where you can modify the border of a sheet area or an object 16 Line Style Click this icon to open the Line Style toolbar where you can modify the border line style 1 7 Line Color Click the Line Color of the border icon to open the Border Color toolbar which enables you to change the border color of an object Table Bar The Table Bar contains functions you need when working with tables It appears when you move the cursor into a table TTL 1 Table Inserts a new table 2 Line Style Click this icon to open the Line Style toolbar where you can modify the border line style 3 Line Color Select a color for the line 4 Borders Click the Borders icon to open the Borders toolbar where you can modify the border of a sheet area or an object 5 Background Color 6 Merge Cells Combines the contents of the selected table cells into a single cell 7 Split Cells Splits the cell or group of cells horizontally or vertically into the number of cells that you enter 8 Optimize Opens a too
243. e report If you want to use fields from different tables you must first combine these fields in a single query Then you can create a report on this query Important Creating a static report 1 Create a new report a Click the Reports icon in the Database list b In the Tasks list click Use Wizard to Create Report The Report Wizard window opens 2 Select the fields a Select Table in the dropdown list Use the gt to move these fields from the Available fields list to the Fields in report list and Click Next Report Wizard Which fields do you want to have in your report Tables or queries Labeling Fields Table Car Fuel Grouping vailable Fields Fields in report Card Date Fuel Cost Fuel Quantity Create report Payment Type Sort options Choose lawout Binary Fields cannot be displayed in the report Adding fields to a report 3 Label the fields Click Next Report Wizard How do you want to label the fields Field Label Labeling Fields Carid Carid Grouping Date eke Sore options Fuel Cost Fuel Cost Choose layout redere Fuel Quantity Fuel Quantity Payment Type Payment Type 4 Group fields Since we are grouping by the date use the gt button to move the Date field to the Grouping list Click Next Report Wizard Do you want to add grouping levels Field selection Fields Groupings Carld Date Fuel Cost Fuel Quantity Payment Type Labeli
244. e table click on the cell that you want to be on the last row of the last column Holding down the mouse button over the Table icon will also display the graphic Creating Nested Tables To achieve this simply click in a cell of an existing table and use any of the methods mentioned in Inserting a new table above The shaded table is nested in a cell of the larger table You can also create a table by typing a series of hyphens or tabs separated by plus signs For Using AutoCorrect to Create a Table example type and then press Enter Plus signs indicate column dividers while hyphens and tabs indicate the width of a column ponte Bator mam This function can be disabled or enabled in Tools gt AutoCorrect On the Options tab deselect or select the Create table check box This function does not operate when creating nested tables pincer 4 Always be careful when using tabs that you a know how wide they are set and b make sure that the tabs are set to the same values if used with other documents or by other users Default Parameters If you create a table using the Insert Table dialog box or the Table icon on the Standard toolbar the following defaults are set The cells in the first row use the Table Heading paragraph style In the default template the text is centered and set with a bold and italic font The remaining cells use the Table Contents paragraph style which in the default temp
245. e that template the default template Inserting a Page Break Without Switching The Style In many documents you may want the text to flow from one page to the next as you add or delete information Celframe Office Write does this automatically unless you override the text flow using one of the techniques described earlier If you do want a page break in a particular place for example to put a heading at the top of a new page here is how to do it 1 Position the cursor in the paragraph you want to be at the start of the next page Rightclick and choose Paragraph in the pop up menu 2 On the Text Flow page of the Paragraph dialog box in the Breaks section check Insert Do not check With Page Style 3 Click OK to position the paragraph at the start of the next page Paragraph Indents amp Spacing Numbering Tabs Drop Caps Borders Hyphenation Automatically Characters at line end 2 Characters at line begin Waximurn number of consecutive hyphens Type Page Position Before _ with Page Style Page number Options Do not split paragraph Keep with next paragraph Orphan control Widow control Inserting a manual page break Defining a Different First Page for a Document Many documents such as letters and reports have a first page that is different from the other pages in the document To set up this sequence
246. e to the upper left hand corner of the space where you want the footer to appear 4 In a blank paragraph in the text type the footer text or insert fields such as the page number or the chapter number and name to match the footer text and fields on the portrait pages Assign the Footer style to this paragraph so the typeface font size and tab settings match those of the footers on the portrait pages 5 Select the text including the fields you just entered Right click on the document gt Character On the Character dialog box choose the Position tab and set Rotation Scaling to 270 degrees counterclockwise Click OK Character Font Effects Hyperlink Background Position Superscript Raiseflower by Automatic Normal Relative Font size Subscript Rotation scaling 0 degrees 90 degrees _ Fit to line Scale width 100 2 r Spacing Default y 0 0pt Pair kerning Celframe Jf cance J e _Reset_ Rotating the footer text 270 degrees counterclockwise 6 With the text still selected choose Insert gt Frame In the Frame dialog box choose the Type tab and enter the width height and horizontal and vertical position for the footer Options wrap Hyperlink Borders Background Columns Size Anchor Width Relative Automatic To character Height fat least As character Relative Aubosize F keep ratio Position Horizontal Center Entire page F Mirror on
247. each other or relative to the page Select an object to align it to the page or select multiple objects to align them relative to each other Choose Modify Alignment and select one of the alignment options Left Centered Right Top Center Bottom Distributing Objects If you select three or more objects in Draw you can also use the Distribution command to distribute the vertical and horizontal spacing evenly between the objects Select three or more objects to be distributed Choose Modify Distribution Select the horizontal and vertical distribution option and click OK Selected objects are distributed evenly along the horizontal or vertical axis The two outermost objects are used as reference points and do not move when the Distribution command is applied Distribution Horizontal T dk O Center Spacing Right vertical Mone al nt O Center CO Spacing b Bottom Cross Fading Two Objects Cross fading creates shapes and distributes them by uniform increments between two drawing objects X uh The cross fading command is only available in Celframe Office Draw However you can copy and paste cross faded objects into Celframe Office Power Presentation To cross fade two objects Hold down Shift and click each object Choose Edit gt Express gt Cross fading Enter a value to specify the number of objects between the start and end of the cross fade in the Increments box Cli
248. eadsheet you can perform calculations with current date and time values As an example to find out exactly how old you are in seconds or hours follow the following steps 1 In a spreadsheet enter your birthday in cell Al 2 Enter the following formula in cell A3 NOW Q Al 3 After pressing the Enter key you will see the result in date format Since the result should show the difference between two dates as a number of days you must format cell A3 as a number 4 Place the cursor in cell A3 right click to open a context menu and choose Format Cells 5 The Format Cells dialog appears On the Numbers tab the Number category will appear already highlighted The format is set to General which causes the result of a calculation containing date entries to be displayed as a date To display the result as a number set the number format to 1 234 and close the dialog with the OK button 6 The number of days between today s date and the specified date is displayed in cell A3 A3 ia E NOw Al c 12932130 49 7 Experiment with some additional formulas in A4 enter A3 24 to calculate the hours in A5 enter A4 60 for the minutes and in A6 enter A5 60 for seconds Press the Enter key after each formula The time since your date of birth will be calculated and displayed in the various units The values are calculated as of the exact moment when you entered the last formula and pressed the Enter key This value is not automa
249. eady installed Select the JRE that you want to use The path to the JRE is displayed beneath the list box Add Add a path to the root folder of aJRE on your computer The path is set in the following dialog Parameters Opens the Java Start Parameters dialog Class Path Opens the Class Path dialog Options for Load Save You can set the Load Save options to suit the way you work Options Load Save Celframe Office Lanquage Settings Load Save Celframe Office Write Celframe Office Write Web Celframe Office Data Access This is where you define general settings for opening and saving documents in external Charts Formats You can control the behavior of macros or OLE objects in Microsoft Office Internet documents or define settings for HTML documents Load Save options General Load Save Options 1 If the Options dialog is not already open click Tools gt Options Click the sign to the left of Load Save 2 Choose Load Save gt General Most of the choices on the Options Load Save General dialog are familiar to users of other office Suites Some items of interest are described below Options Load Save General Celframe Office Load Save Load Load user specific settings with the document VBS Properties Microsoft Office save HTML Compatibility _ Edit document properties before saving Language Settings Celframe Office Write x Celframe Office Write Web Save QuboRecovery information every HO
250. eak override settings in paragraph styles for characters at line end and characters at line begin This is a bug To enter a conditional hyphen inside a word press Control minus sign The word is hyphenated at this position when it is at the end of the line even if automatic hyphenation for this paragraph is switched off Using AutoCorrect Celframe Office Write s AutoCorrect function has a long list of common misspellings and typing errors which it corrects automatically Select Tools gt AutoCorrect to open the AutoCorrect dialog box There you can define what strings of text are corrected and how In most cases the defaults are fine While Typing AutoCorrect is automatically turned on To turn it off uncheck Format gt AutoFormat gt To stop Celframe Office Write replacing a specific spelling use Tools gt AutoCorrect gt Replace highlight the word pair and click Delete To add a new Spelling to correct type it into the Rep ace and With boxes and click New e See the different pages of the dialog box for the wide variety of other options available to fine tune AutoCorrect AutoCorrect AutoCorrect can be used as a quick way to insert special characters For example c will be autocorrected to c You can add your own special characters Replacements and exceptions For language English 54 Replace C Ry abotu abouta aboutit abscence accesories accidant accomodate acc
251. ect multiple changes and undo them at the same time Change style graphics125 Actions to undo 1 List of actions that can be undone After changes have been undone Redo becomes active To redo a change select Edit gt Redo or press Control Y or click on the Redo icon As with Undo click on the triangle to the right of the arrow to get a list of the changes that can be reapplied To modify the number of changes Celframe Office remembers select Tools gt Options gt Celframe Office gt Memory and change Undo Number of steps Be aware that asking Celframe Office to remember more changes makes it consume more memory Tracking Changes to a Document You can use several methods to keep track of changes made to a document Make your changes to a copy of the document stored in a different folder under a different name or both then use Celframe Office Write to combine the two files and show the changes you made Click Tools gt Track Changes This technique is particularly useful if you are the only person working on the document as it avoids the increase infile size and complexity caused by the other methods Save versions that are stored as part of the original file However this method cancause problems with documents of nontrivial size or complexity especially if you save a lot of versions Avoid this method if you can e Use Celframe Office Write s change marks often called redlines or revision marks t
252. ected positions the cursor to the end of the text in the text a character on screen frame If you press any key that produces a character on screen and the document is in edit mode the character is appended to the text Keyboard shortcuts for fields Here are some handy keyboard shortcuts to use when working with fields Ctri F2 Open the Fields dialog box Ctrl F8 Field shadings on off Ctrl F9 Show hide field names F9 Update fields Counting Words To get some more Statistics about the document choose File gt Properties gt Statistics 1 If you want to count only some text of your document select the text 2 Choose Tools Word Count Recording a Macro 1 Open the document for which you want to record a macro 2 Choose Tools gt Macros gt Record Macro You see the small Recording dialog with just one button called Stop Recording 3 Perform the actions you want to be recorded in the document Press the Escape key to deselect an object as the macro recorder currently does not record this action by mouse click 4 Click Stop Recording The Macro dialog appears in which you can save and run the macro If you want to abort the recording without saving a macro click the Close button of the Recording dialog 5 To save the macro first select the object where you want the macro to be saved in the Save macro in list box 6 If you want the macro to be saved into a new library or module click the New Library
253. ectionID to the left 5 Click Next Form Wizard Select the fields of your subform 1 Field selection Tables or queries Set up a subform Table Funny I Add subform Fields Oy ailable Fields Fields in the Form Actor enre DateAcquired CollectionIo Set data entry MovieTitle o Review Apply styles Price Geb joined Fields Arrange controls Sek name Binary Fields are always listed and selectable From the left list TF possible they are interpreted as images Step 4 Get joined fields This step is for tables or queries for which no relationship has been defined Since we want to list all expenses by the day they occur in both the form and subform we will joint the Date fields of these two tables Form Wizard Select the joins between your forms Field selection First joined subform Field First joined main Form Field Add subform Fields ee Second joined subform Field Second joined main Form Field undefined undefined Arrange controls Set data entry Third joined subform Field Third joined main Form Field Apply styles undefined undefined Seb name Fourth joined subform Field Fourth joined main Form Field Undefined Undefined m4 It is possible to create a relationship between two tables that is based upon more than one pair of fields Rex When selecting a pair of fields from two tables to use as a relationship they have to E have the same field ty
254. ed Our Cat TTE PL oe ced Screenshot 1 3 Theme Metallic Description A modern theme using frames vistors may use the navigation bar for fast svvitching between collections Author Celtrame Photoalbum 2008 Save to C Documents and Settings User My Documents Radiant Highly inspired by the default WordPress theme Uses strict HTML standard Save fis Themes Theme Preview BlueSshifted Classic FreshClassic Metallic Radiant Slick Smart Shifted z i e akir EH Screenshot 2 3 Theme Fadiant Description Highly inspired by the defaut WordPress theme Uses strict HTML standard Author Celframe Photoalbum 2008 Save to C Documents and Settings User My Documents My Pictures E save Slick Simple but slick Rounded borders help distinguish your photos from the on screen controls Slick has been updated to support exporting small web galleries Clicking a photo in the thumbnail view now takes you to that photo within a slideshow Keyboard navigation in slideshows is also Supported a Saye Os Themes Theme Preview Blue Shifted Classic FreshClassic Metallic Radiant Slick SmartShifted Screenshot 2 3 Slick Celframe Photoalbum 2008 Simple but slick Rounded borders help distinguish your photos fram the on screen controls Slick has been Updated to support exporting small web galleries Clicking a photo in the thumbnail views now takes you to that photo within a slideshow
255. eet Features Starting New Spreadsheet Spreadsheet Workspace The Title Bar The Menu Bar The Toolbars Standard Bar Formatting Bar Formula Bar Status Bar Sheet Bar Spreadsheet Sheets and Cells Rows and Columns Navigating Through Sheets Tabs Multiple Sheets in a Document Inserting Sheets Renaming Sheets Selecting Multiple Sheets Undoing a Selection Writing Values Simultaneously to Multiple Sheets Calculating Across Multiple Sheets Chapter 2 Work with Calculation and Filter Calculating with Formulas Entering Formulas in The Formula Bar Calculating with Dates and Times Calculating Time Difference Entering Fractions Automatically Filling in Data Based on Adjacent Cells Using AutoFill Using a Defined Series Applying Filters To Apply a Standard Filter to a Cell Range To Remove a Filter From a Cell Range Entering Matrix Formulas Chapter 3 Entering Reference Naming Cells Recognizing Names as Addressing Addresses and References Absolute and Relative Relative Addressing Absolute Addressing When to Use Relative and Absolute References Referencing URLs Referencing Other Sheets Chapter 4 Database Function Creating Records in a Spreadsheet Defining Database Ranges Sorting Database Ranges Filtering Database Ranges Grouping Database Ranges and Calculating Subtotals Transferring Data From a Data Source to a Spreadsheet Opening a Database File in Celframe Spreadsheet Chapter 5 Advanced
256. eets belonging to your document Clicking the button on the far left or the far right displays respectively the first or last sheet tab The middle buttons allow the user to scroll forward and backward through all sheet tabs To display the sheet itself click on the sheet tab If there is insufficient space to display all the sheet tabs you can increase it by pointing to the separator between the scrollbar and the sheet tabs pressing the mouse button and keeping the mouse button pressed dragging to the right In doing so you will be sharing the available space between the sheet tabs and horizontal scrollbar Multiple Sheets in a Document By default Celframe Office displays three sheets Sheet1 to Sheet3 in each new spreadsheet You can switch between sheets in a spreadsheet using the sheet tabs at the bottom of the screen Inserting Sheets 1 Using the mouse put the pointer in one of the sheet tabs at the bottom of the window e Right click to open the Context menu for editing sheets Insert Sheet Delete Sheet Rename Sheet MovelCopy Sheet Select All Sheets Sheet Right To Lett Sheet 3 i 3 Default 3 Choosing the Insert Sheet command opens the Insert sheet dialogue 4 Select the position and quantity of sheets to be inserted 5 Click OK Renaming Sheets 1 Right click the tab of the sheet for renaming e g Sheet1 2 Open the context menu and choose the Rename Sheet command 3 A dialogue box
257. eiving e mails Celframe Mail 2008 is a true messaging experience with built in support for Web Mails Eg Yahoo GMail Hotmail RSS Junk filter Phishing amp Privacy protections Allowing you to do all functions of a scheduling agendas and to do lists ready to replace your Microsoft Outlook Features Advanced Folder Views Celframe Mail 2008 offers a variety of ways for you to organize and display your folders whether by favorites recently viewed or folders containing unread messages As always you can also set up RSS and newsgroup folders to stay on top of news and your interests Celframe Mail 2008 also allows you to maximize your message view pane by opting for a folder drop down menu instead of the traditional sidebar Message Tagging Celframe Mail 2008 allows you to tag messages with descriptors such as To Do or Done or even create your own tags that are specific to your needs Tags can be combined with saved searches and mail views to make it easier to organize email Message History Navigation Celframe Mail 2008 offers message history navigation that allows you to click forward and back much like in your Web browser You can now quickly toggle between messages and folder views Improved Search Celframe Mail 2008 features a find as you type pane that speeds up searches within displayed messages Celframe Mail 2008 also offers quick search which starts showing search results as soon as you s
258. elational database are unique The primary key insures this uniqueness That is there are no two elements which are exactly alike This allows us to select specific elements to place into our queries Without the elements of the relational database being unique from all other elements we could not perform these procedures Step 1 Open the first query in Design View Click Create Query in Design View Step 2 Add tables Add Table or Query b QUeres Cartoon DY D Zollection Add Tables or Query window 1 Click Car Fuel to highlight it 2 Click Add 3 Click Close Move the cursor over the bottom edge of the car fuel table The cursor become a single arrow with two heads Drag the bottom of the table to make it longer and easier to see all of the fields in the table Car Fuel T Card Date Fuel Cost Fuel Quantity Payment Type Step 3 Add fields to the table at the bottom 1 Double click the CarlD field in the Fuel table 2 Double click the Fuel Cost field 3 Double click the FuelQuantity field The table at the bottom of the query window should now have three columns Field Carld Fuel Cost Fuel Quantity Alias Table Car Fuel Car Fuel Car Fuel Sark Query table Step 4 Set the criterion for the query We want to the query s CarlD to begin with the numeral 1 1 Type gt 0 in the Criterion cell under CarlD in the query table 2 Click the Run Query icon in the Query Design toolbar Thi
259. election and opens the Spellcheck dialog box if any misspelled words are found Here are some more features of the spelling checker e You can right click on a word with a wavy underline to open a powerful context menu If you select from the suggested words on the menu the selection will replace the misspelled word in your text Other menu options are discussed below You can change the dictionary language for example Spanish French or German on the Spellcheck dialog box You can add a word to a dictionary Click Add in the Spellcheck dialog box and pick the dictionary to add it to The Options dialog box of the Spellcheck tool has a number of different options such as whether to check uppercase words and words with numbers It also allows you to manage custom dictionaries that is add or delete dictionaries and add or delete words in a dictionary Spellcheck English USA Mok in dictionary Click Add in the Spelicheck dialog box and pick the dictionary to add it to Suggestions Spell check Dictionary language ASP English USA Selecting a word from dictionary using the Spellcheck dialog box Using The Thesaurus The thesaurus offers alternative words and phrases Select the word or phrase you want to find alternatives for and select Tools gt Language gt Thesaurus or press Control F7 Click on a meaning to show alternative words and phrases for that meaning of the word N If the current language does not have a t
260. elframe Office Mail 2008 Mail and or Address Book Select the type of material to import Do a selection depending on which program you used before switching to Celframe Mail Office Example use Outlook Express then press next Please select the program from which you would like to import Communicator 4 x Eudora Outlook Qutlook Express Outlook PST Outlook Express mail and address books As you see you will get a notification of what Celframe Mail Office has imported from your other mail The last step to finish the import is to press the Finish button Import i x Mail was successfully imported from Outlook Express No mailboxes were found to import As you see Celframe Mail Office will make a sub folder in your local folders so your mail doesn t get mixed up with other mail To import mail from another program simply repeat the procedure ities a ane 2 Wig 4 Ti Import se cw from Outlook Express Mail Importing Address Book To import your address book select for Address Books and press next This wizard will import mail messages address book entries and or preferences from other mail programs and common address book formats into Celframe Office Mail 2008 Mail Once they have been imported you will be able to access them from within Celframe Office Mail 2008 Mail and or Address Book Select the type of material to import Choose which program you want to im
261. elframe Office Power Presentation FF E Backgrounds Veena of yr T N A p Master Pages i Hones DS Ee BAGS E Homepage A Gare a ol My Theme F x h e Mew Theme F Rulers ol Sounds Slide 1 Standard Synopsis Annotations Leaflet Slide Mixer Click to add title Double click to add graphics LEU I fe il Click to add an outline p Custom Animation a Dor oe Fe Dv hee E cm N 0S bel gt Gh Bo AE ii E Inserting an image from the Gallery Creating an Image Map An image map defines areas of the image called hotspots with a URI a web address or a file on the computer Hotspots are the graphic equivalent of text hyperlinks Clicking on a hotspot causes Impress to open the linked page in the appropriate program for example the default browser for an HTML page Celframe Office Write for a ODT file a PDF viewer for a PDF file You can create hotspots of various shapes and include several hotspots in the same image To use the image map tool 1 Select the picture where the hotspots will be defined 2 Choose Edit gt Express gt ImageMap from the menu bar The ImageMap Editor dialog opens 3 Use the tools and fields in the dialog to define the hotspots and links necessary 4 Click the Apply icon to apply the settings 5 When done click the Save icon to save the imagemap to a file then click the X in the upper right corner to close the dialog ImageMap Editor Ved hum oe ta
262. elframe Office Writes Web Celframe Office Daka Access Charts Internet Remove From memory after Number of objects Load Celframe Office during system start up H A eA A Memory Options View Options The choices of View options affect the way the document window looks and behaves 1 In the Options dialog box click Celframe Office gt View On the Celframe Office View page set the options to suit your personalpreferences Some options are described below Options Celframe Office El Celframe Office l User Data User Interface lt 0 vie General Scaling E _ Use penGL Optimized output Use dithering _ Object refresh during interaction Icon size and style Small Automatic Use system Font For user interface Security Appearance Accessibility Show icons in menus Java Load Save GT Ue Mouse Language Settings Show preview of Fonts Celframe Office Write Show Font histor Celframe Office Write wWeb m Bo Mo automatic positioning Menu Mouse positioning Celframe Office Data Access l Charts Middle mouse button HHA Internet Automatic scrolling Choosing View options User Interface Scaling If the text in the help files or on the menus of the Celframe Office user interface is too small or too large you can change it by specifying a scaling factor Sometimes a change here can have unexpected results depending on the screen fonts available on your system However it does not affect the actual font
263. elframe Office to use the system settings You must restart Celframe Office to initiate this setting HTTP proxy Type the name of the proxy server for HTTP Type the port in the right hand field FTP proxy Type the name of the proxy server for FTP Type the port in the right hand field No proxy for Specifies the names of the servers that do not require any proxy servers separated by semicolons These are servers addressed in your local network and servers used for video and audio streaming Port Type the port for the corresponding proxy server The maximum value of a port number is fixed at 65535 Search Option Use this tab page to define the settings for searching in the Internet Search in Specifies the search engine and its corresponding configuration Search engines Displays the available search engines Select a search engine to display its configuration in the adjacent text and option boxes Name Displays the name of the selected search engine This is the name that will be shown in the sub menu of the Search icon on the Hyperlink bar Type Sets the advanced search preferences and or exact as well as the way the results are defined and displayed The links And Or and Exactly are available Prefix This text box displays the URL and the first part of the query command for a search machine A URL can also be typed directly Suffix The search terms are passed between the prefix and the suffix The
264. ely Microsoft Excel 4 x 5 0 7 95 Templates lt Rich Test Format Celframe Office Calc rth alk HTML Document Celframe Office Calc html Lotus 1 2 3 wk wks 123 Microsoft Excel 2003 ML srl Pocket Excel pl Quattro Pro 6 0 whe Microsoft Excel 2007 Document xlsx Web Page Query Celframe Office Calc html CelframeDocument Presentation odp CelframeDocument Presentation Template ote Celframe Office 1 0 Presentation Template sti Microsoft PowerPoint 97720007F ppt pps Microsoft PowerPomt 97200074F Template Celframe Office 1 0 Drawing Celfrane Office Ir LOM Computer Graphics Metafile cgm Microsott PowerPoint 2007 Document py Spreadsheets Read only Working in Celframe Office you can send the current document as an e mail attachment 1 Choose File Send Document as E mail Celframe Office opens your default e mail program 2 In your e mail program enter the recipient subject and any text you want to add then send the e mail E mail Bi Properties E mail as CelframeDocument Spreadsheet E mail as Microsoft Excel Download Template E mail as POF Express j Opening Documents Saved in other Formats You can open a document saved in another format by using the following procedure 1 Choose File Open 2 Select a format from the Files of type list 3 Select a file name and click Open If you always
265. em Options Celframe Office Write Celframe Office Load Save ai l eoue IL Celframe Office Write a elframe Office Write Celframe Office write Web Celframe Office Data Access This is where you specify various settings For text documents These settings determine Charts how your text documents are handled in Celframe Office and are valid For all new Internet Celframe Office Write documents You can also define a few settings For the active text document if you save it afterwards H A Ge i Celframe Office Write General Options The choices on the Celframe Office Write General page affect the updating of links and fields the units used for rulers and other measurements whether captions are automatically added to selected objects such as tables or figures paragraph spacing and tab stop behavior 1 Choose Celframe Office Write gt General on the Options dialog box 2 Keep in mind the following considerations when selecting options on this page Options Celframe Office Write General Celframe Office Load Save Update Language Settings Update links when loading Automatically pa write C always Fields On request Charts Formatting Aids Grid Never Basic Fonts Western Print Table Measurement unit Changes Compatibility Tab stops AutoCaption E Celframe Office Write eb Celframe Office Data Access Charts Internet Settings Gee Choosing general options Update links when loading D
266. en the connected objects are moved Connectors are useful for creating organization charts and technical diagrams Displaying Dimensions Technical diagrams often show the dimensions of objects in the drawing In Celframe Office Draw you can use dimension lines to calculate and display linear dimensions Gallery The Gallery contains images animations sounds and other items that you can insert and use in your drawings as well as other Celframe Office programs Graphic File Formats Celframe Office Draw can export to many common graphic file formats such as BMP GIF JPG and PNG Workplace The large area in the center of the window is where you make the drawings You can surround the drawing area with toolbars and information areas The number and position of the visible tools vary as a function of the task at hand or user preferences You can split drawings in Draw over several pages Multipage drawings are used mainly for presentations The Pages pane on the left side of the Draw window in Figure gives an overview of the pages that you create If the Pages pane is not visible on your setup you can enable it from the View menu View gt Express gt Page Pane To easily make changes to the page order drag and drop one or more pages Document Mame Ee brasi Cclinanna UfAce lira Menu Bar Standard Bar Line and Filling Bar Drawing Bar pase Pan Workspace Area J tale De Lanremit J Conen E 1 37 74 So Ax
267. en the context menu of the cell and choose Format cells Select Fraction from the Category field and then select 1234 10 81 You can then enter fractions such as 12 31 or 12 32 the fractions are however automatically reduced so that in the last example you would see 3 8 Format Cells Font Effects Alignment Borders Background Cell Protection Category Format Language Percent A 1254 m Default Currency E Date Time Scientific Fraction Boolean Yalue Text options Decimal places Negative numbers red Leading zeroes Thousands separator Format code HPP Change the cell format to the multi digit fraction view Automatically Filling in Data Based on Adjacent Cells You can automatically fill cells with data with the AutoFill command or the Series command Using AutoFill AutoFill automatically generates a data series based on a defined pattern 1 0n a sheet click in cell and type a number 2 Click in another cell and then click back in the cell where you typed the number 3 Drag the fill handle in the bottom right corner of the cell across the cells that you want to fill and release the mouse button The cells are filled with ascending numbers To quickly create a list of consecutive days enter Monday in a cell and drag the fill handle Hold down Ctrl if you do not want to fill the cells with different values If you select two or more adjacent cells that contain
268. enu commands Similarly you must select an object in the document to use the menu commands associated with the object The menus are context sensitive This means that those menu items are available that are relevant to the work currently being carried out If the cursor is located in a text then all of those menu items are available that are needed to edit the text If you have selected graphics in a document then you will see all of the menu items that can be used to edit graphics 1 File Contains commands for working with spreadsheets such as open close save and print 2 Edit Use the commands in this menu to edit Spreadsheet sheets for example copying pasting and deleting cell contents 3 View The View menu contains commands for controlling the display of the spreadsheet window and toolbars 4 Insert The Insert menu contains commands for inserting new elements such as cells rows sheets and cell names into the current sheet 5 Format The Format menu contains commands for formatting selected cells objects and cell contents in your document 6 Tools The Tools menu contains commands to check spelling to trace sheet references to find mistakes and to define scenarios 7 Data Use the Data menu commands to edit the data in the current sheet You can define ranges sort and filter the data calculate results outline data and open the DatapPilot 8 Author s Tools Is a set of utilities designed to help Ope
269. epending on your work patterns you may not want links to be updated when you load a document Update fields and charts automatically You may not want fields or charts to update automatically when you are working because that slows down performance Settings Tab stops The Tab stops setting is also used for the indent distance applied by the Increase Indent and Decrease Indent buttons on the Formatting Bar View Options Two pages of options set the defaults for viewing Celframe Office Write documents View and Formatting Aids Choose Celframe Office Celframe Office Write gt View on the Options dialog box If the items on this page are not self explanatory you can easily test their effects in a blank document This is a good page to check if for example you cannot see graphics on the screen or you see field codes instead of the text or numbers you are expecting Options Celframe Office Write View Celframe Office l LoadiSave guides Language Settings Guides while moving Horizontal scrollbar Celframe Office Write General Simple handles Vertical scrollbar aaa aa _ Large handles Ruler ormatting Aids Display Horizontal ruler Inch Grid A Frint Graphics and objects Vertical ruler Inch Basic Fonts Western Table Tables Smooth scroll Changes Compatibility Drawings and controls AuboCaption Celframe Office Write Web _ Field codes Celframe Office Data Access Motes Charts Internet HA Choosing Vie
270. er View Master View toolbar The following Presentation styles are available 1 Background styles None means all slide backgrounds will be white Color allows you to select your own background color Gradient show The increments between one color and the other is automatically set by default but you can set it manually if you desire New gradients can be created using Format gt Area gt Gradient tab Hatching has 10 prepackaged patterns More can be created using Format gt Area gt Hatching tab A background color can be added to the hatching Bitmap has 20 prepackaged patterns Use Format gt Area gt Bitmaps Use the Import button to locate the bitmap and give it a name Using F11 and selecting Bitmaps from Background styles you should see your imported bitmap at the bottom of the list 2 Background objects style Use this to set the characteristics of all objects you add to the slide master Make any changes you need Remember to use F5 after making a change to make sure that is what you want Using the Esc key afterwards will return you to your work Just like Paragraph and Character styles in Write Background objects styles can be overridden by applying manual formating So it is possible to have two background objects with different formating 3 If you want to have notes attached to your slides right click the Notes style select Modify and set the formating you want your notes to have Make sure yo
271. ernal data 19xx 20xx Years The year in a date entry is often entered as two digits Internally the year is managed by Celframe Office as four digits so that in the calculation of the difference from 1 1 99 to 1 1 01 the result will correctly be two years e Under Tools Options Celframe Office General you can define the century that is used when you enter a year with only two digits The default is 1930 to 2029 This means that if you enter a date of 1 1 30 or higher it will be treated internally as 1 1 1930 or higher All lower two digit years apply to the 20xx century So for example 1 1 20 is converted into 1 1 2020 Instructions for Charts Data from spreadsheets can be represented graphically in a chart A wide variety of charts and diagrams suited for illustrating the structure of the data can be selected and created from a Spreadsheet Inserting Charts 1 Open a spreadsheet and enter some data with row and column headings 2 Select the cells that contain the data that you want to present in your chart 3 Click the Insert Chart icon on the Standard toolbar The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair symbol with a small chart symbol AutoFormat Chart Choose a chart type ee Columns Show text elements in preview Data series in A Columns 4 Click in the spreadsheet and drag open a rectangle where you want to display the chart 5 Follow the instructions in the dialog that opens to create the
272. ers will be interpreted as for the English USA locale Import unknown HTML tags as fields Select this checkbox if you want tags that are not recognized by Celframe Office to be imported as fields For an opening tag an HTML_ON field will be created with the value of the tag name For a closing tag an HTML_OFF will be created These fields will be converted to tags in the HTML export Ignore font settings Select this checkbox to have Celframe Office ignore all font settings when importing The fonts that were defined in the HTML Page Style will be used Export To optimize the HTML export select a browser or HTML standard from the Export box If Celframe Office Celframe Office Write is selected specific Celframe Office Celframe Office Write instructions are exported Celframe Office Basic Select this checkbox to include Celframe Office Basic macros scripts when exporting to HTML format You must activate this option before you create the Celframe Office Basic macro otherwise the script will not be inserted Celframe Office Basic macros must be located in the header of the HTML document Once you have created the macro in the Celframe Office Basic IDE it appears in the source text of the HTML document in the header If you want the macro to run automatically when the HTML document is opened choose Tools gt Customize gt Events Display warning When the Celframe Office Basic checkbox is not selected the Display warning checkbox becomes
273. es slide masters b Layout Twenty prepackaged layouts are shown You can choose the one you want use it as it is or modify it to your own requirements At present it is not possible to create custom layouts c Custom Animation A variety of animations for selected elements of a slide are listed Animation can be added to a Slide and it can also be changed or removed later d Slide Transition You can select the transition type speed slow medium fast You can also choose between an automatic or manual transition and how long you want the selected slide to be shown automatic transition only Menus The menus are context sensitive This means that those menu items are available that are relevant to the work currently being carried out If the cursor is located in a text then all of those menu items are available that are needed to edit the text If you have selected graphics in a document then you will see all of the menu items that can be used to edit graphics File Edit View Insert Format Tools SlideShow eVoice Bluetooth Menu Author s Tools Window Help Hao db T 1 File This menu contains commands that apply to the whole document 2 Edit This menu contains commands for editing the contents of a document 3 View This menu contains commands for controlling the on screen display of the document 4 Insert This menu contains the commands that are used to insert new elements into the document for example graphics
274. es Work Arranging Objects Arranging an Object Behind Another Object Reversing The Stacking Order of Two Objects Aligning Objects Distributing Objects Cross Fading Two Objects Duplicating Objects Grouping Objects Selecting Objects in a Group Combining Objects and Constructing Shapes To combine 2D objects Constructing Shapes Connecting Lines To combine 3D objects Rotating Objects Editing the inside fill of an object Common fill properties Fill with a uniform color Fill with a gradient Fill with a line pattern Fill with an image Adding a shadow Defining Custom Colors To define a custom color Replacing Colors To replace colors with the Eyedropper tool Creating Gradient Fills Creating Custom Gradients Using Gradients and Transparency Chapter 4 Editing Text Adding Text Adding a Text Frame Text Tied to a Graphic Copying Text To create a Fontwork object To edit a Fontwork object To edit more Fontwork attributes Drawing an Organization Chart Drawing a flow diagram Glue points and connectors Drawing Connectors Basics Editing Glue Points Adding text to connectors Adjusting text to suit the connecting line Chapter 5 Miscellaneous Shortcut Keys for Drawing Objects Inserting Pictures Inserting Bitmaps Editing Bitmaps Saving Bitmaps Copying Graphics from the Gallery Inserting Objects from the Gallery Inserting an object as a copy Inserting an object as a link Inserting an object as
275. etter and number in an absolute reference for example A 1 B 2 Celframe Office can convert the current reference in which the cursor is positioned in the input line from relative to absolute and vice versa by pressing Shift F4 If you start with a relative address such as Al the first time you press this key combination both row and column are set to absolute references A 1 The second time only the row A 1 and the third time only the column A1 f you press the key combination once more both column and row references are switched back to relative A1 Celframe Office Spreadsheet shows the references to a formula If for example you click the formula SUM A1 C5 D15 D24 in a cell the two referenced areas in the sheet will be highlighted in color For example the formula component A1 C5 may be in blue and the cell range in question border in the same shade of blue The next formula component D15 D24 can be marked in red in the same way When to Use Relative and Absolute References What distinguishes a relative reference Assume you want to calculate in cell E1 the sum of the cells in range A1 B2 The formula to enter into El would be SUM A1 B2 If you later decide to insert a new column in front of column A the elements you want to add would then be in B1 C2 and the formula would be in F1 not in El After inserting the new column you would therefore have to check and correct all formulas in the sheet and possibly
276. eview If not selected the first page is displayed on the left side of the preview 8 Zoom In Zooms in to get a close up view of the document 9 Preview Zoom Determines the zoom level of the page preview 10 Zoom Out Zooms out to see more of the document at a reduced size 11 Full Screen Shows or hides the menus and toolbars in Write or Spreadsheet To exit the full screen mode click the Full Screen On Off button 12 Print page view Opens the Print dialog to print the page preview Use the Print options page view icon to set the printing scale and other printing properties 13 Print options page view Opens a dialog where settings for the printout of your document can be made The pages are proportionally reduced in size When printing multiple document pages on one printed page the whole sheet of paper may not be printed on and a margin may remain 14 Close Preview Closes the current window Press Ctrl F4 In the page preview of Celframe Office Write and Spreadsheet you can close the current window by clicking the Close Preview button Author s Tools Is a set of utilities designed to help Celframe Office users perform a wide range of tasks Using Celframe Office Write s Tools you can back up documents look up and translate words and phrases Wikify Word Turn a word into a wiki link to another document Show on the map Display places address on google map Menara Citibank review more into
277. eye ae User interface options C Fit widti i Fit visib _ Hide menubar Set permission password _ Hide toolbar Zoom fi eee Printing fide window cor a in Not permitted bie aa Transitions Low resolution 150 dpi Default G Use transition e High resolution 9 singep marks Changes Continu All bookmark lev Not permitted O Continu iishie boolmart Inserting deleting and rotating pages Firs rata ec ccaa Filling in form fields Commenting filling in form fields Any except extracting pages v Enable copying of content Enable text access for accessibility tools PDF Options dialog box General Page of PDF Options Dialog Box On the General page you can choose which pages to include in the PDF the type of compression to use for images which affects the quality of images in the PDF and other options PDF Options Initial View User InterFace Security Range Oat Pages Selection Images CO Lossless compression JPEG compression Quality 90 Reduce image resolution S00 DPI General Tagged POF d Export notes Export bookmarks Create PDF Form Submit format FEF Export automatically inserted blank pages General page of PDF Options dialog box Range section All Exports the entire document Pages To export a range of pages use the format 1 5 pages 1 to 5 To export single pages use the format 2 4 16 pages 2 4 and 6 You can als
278. fields in the pull down listes can be selected or an amount say100 can be entered directly Standard Filter Filter criteria D Operator Field name Condition Value Date gt o 12012009 Cancel Amount w Help none More If OK is clicked at this time only those records that meet all criteria are shown Select Data gt Filter gt Remove Filter to reset the view Displaying only records with a specific content is easily done with the aid of the AutoFilter 1 Place the cursor in the database range 2 Click on the AutoFilter icon on the main toolbar The column headers of the database range have now been given small buttons 3 Click on the button next to the Date field and select for example 1 2 00 Only records that contain this date will be shown On the main toolbar reset the view with the AutoFilter icon Grouping Database Ranges and Calculating Subtotals Assuming there is sample data that can be expanded and actually used for a budget the date should be summarized and printed in totals and subtotals This can be done in just a few steps 1 Place the cursor in the database range 2 Choose Data gt Subtotals The Subtotals dialogue appears 3 Specify the desired options for calculating the subtotals 4 Group subtotals according to Date i e calculates a new subtotal for each date 5 Use the function Sum adds the subtotals to calculate Amount Subtotals 2nd Group 3rd Group Options
279. floating windows anywhere on the screen You can also dock some windows to the edge of the workspace Drag amp Drop The drag and drop feature enables you to work quickly and efficiently with text documents in Celframe Office For example you can drag and drop objects such as graphics from the Gallery from one location to another in the same document or between open Celframe Office documents Help Functions You can use the Help system as a complete reference for Celframe Office applications including instructions for simple and complex tasks The Write Interface The most commonly used view of the main Write workspace Print Layout is shown below standard Toolbar Formatting Toolbar Menu Bar A Document Celframe Office Write Drawing Toolbar status Bar The main Write workspace Menu The following is a description of all Celframe Office Write menus submenus and their dialogs The menus are context sensitive This means that those menu items are available that are relevant to the work currently being carried out If the cursor is located in a text then all of those menu items are available that are needed to edit the text If you have selected graphics in a document then you will see all of the menu items that can be used to edit graphics o The window containing the document you want to work on must be selected in order to use S the menu commands Similarly you must select an object in the document to use the men
280. g Gradients and Transparency You can adjust the properties of a gradient as well as the transparency of a drawing object with your mouse To adjust the gradient of a drawing object Select a drawing object with the gradient that you want to modify Choose Format Background and click the Gradients tab Adjust the values for the gradient to suit your needs and click Ok To adjust the transparency of an object select the object choose Format gt Background and click the Transparency tab Chapter 4 Editing Text Adding Text There are several types of text you can add to a drawing or presentation e Textina text frame e Text that changes character size to fill the frame size e Text that is added to any drawing object by double clicking the object e Text that is copied from a Write document e Text that is inserted from a text or HTML document Adding a Text Frame e Click the Font icon and move the mouse pointer to where you want to enter the text e Drag a text frame to the size you want in your document e Type or paste your text in the text frame Double click the text to edit it or to format text properties such as font size or font color Click the border of the text object to edit the object properties such as border color or arranging in front or behind other objects Text Tied to a Graphic Click the arrow next to the Callouts icon to open the Callouts toolbar Select a callout and move the mouse pointer to where you w
281. g handles 4 Press Delete ee eee a a E CELFRAME OFFICE POWER PRESENTATION EEE E COD ESO EE OEE Sometimes it is faster to to delete a text box by dragging a selection rectangle around the text box and then hitting the Delete key Take care to avoid selecting and accidentally deleting other text boxes or shapes Pasting text Text may be inserted into the text box by copying it from another document and pasting it into Impress However the pasted text will probably not match the formatting of the surrounding text or that of the other slides in the presentation This may be what you want on some occasions however in most cases you want to make sure that the presentation does not become a patchwork of different paragraph styles font types bullet points and so on There are several ways to ensure consistency these methods are explained below Pasting unformatted text It is normally good practice to paste text without formatting and apply the formatting later To paste without formatting either press Contro Shift V and then select Unformatted text from the dialog that appears or click on the small black triangle next to the paste symbol in the standard toolba i and select Unformatted text The unformatted text will be formatted with the outline style at the cursor position in an AutoLayout text box or with the default graphic style in a normal text box Formatting pasted text If pasting the text into an Layout area then to give th
282. ge view click the Print page view icon 4 To choose margins and other options for the printout click the Print options page view icon to display the Print Options dialog box Exporting to PDF Celframe Office can export documents to PDF Portable Document Format This industry standard file format for file viewing is ideal for sending the file to someone else to view using Acrobat Reader or other PDF viewers Click the File Export Directly as PDF icon w to export the entire document using the default PDF settings You are asked to enter the file name and location for the PDF file but you do not get a chance to choose a page range the image compression or other options For more control over the content and quality of the resulting PDF use File gt Export as PDF The PDF Options dialog box opens This dialog box has four pages General Initial View User Interface and Security Make your selections and then click Export Then you are asked to enter the location and file name of the PDF to be created and click Save to export the file PDF Options x General Initial View User Interface Security i e a POF Options O O OO B General Initial View User Interface Security Page or Bookma General Initial View Wser Interface Security Thumbr Window options Open on pe Li Besze window t _ Center window ee Open in full sere z Default Display documer A Eitin wi
283. gged object when mouse enable the Copy when moving option in Tools Options button is released Celframe Office Draw General to use this shortcut key Ctrl Enter with keyboard focus F6 on a drawing object icon Inserts a drawing object of default size into the on Tools bar center of the current view Shift F10 Opens the context menu for the selected object Ctrl Enter Enters text mode if a text object is selected If there are no text objects or if you have cycled through all of the text objects on the page a new page is inserted Alt Press the Alt key and drag with the mouse to draw or resize an object from the center of the object outward Alt click on an object Selects the object behind the currently selected object Alt Shift click an object Selects the object in front of the currently selected object Shift key while selecting an object Adds or removes object to or from the selection Shift drag while creating or resizing an object Constrains the dimensions of the object to multiples of 45 degrees Tab Cycles through the objects on the page in the order in which they were created Shift Tab Cycles through the objects on the page in the reverse order in which they were created Shortcut Keys for 3D Effects Illumination tab Navigating with the Keyboard in Slide Sorter Moves the focus to the first slide Moves the focus to the next slide Makes the slide with the focus the current slide
284. gt Font Size from the main menu bar To change the font type select Format gt Fonts from the main menu bar Formula in Celframe Power Presentation is treated as an object therefore it will not be automatically aligned with the rest of the text The formula can be however moved around but not resized as any other object Chapter 5 Printing E mailing Exporting and Saving Quick printing Click the Print File Directly icon amp to send the entire document to the default printer defined for your computer Controlling printing Celframe Power Presentation provides many options for printing a presentation with multiple slides on one page with a single slide per page with notes as an outline with date and time with page name and more For more control over printing a presentation choose File gt Print to display the Print dialog Printer a SASA Mame 1192 166 1 200 Canon MP190 series Printer fka Status Ready Type Canon MP190 series Printer Location USB001 Comment Print to File Print range copies all Number of copies i Pages L moo Sa ha Collate Selection The Print dialog On the Print dialog you can choose Which printer to use if more than one are installed on your system and the properties of the printer for example orientation portrait or landscape which paper tray to use and what paper size to print on The properties available depend on the selected printer consult the printer s
285. h individual column can be adjusted If you have more than six columns use the arrows at the right and left to view them all Table Format Table Text Flow Background Adjust columns proportionally Remaining space Column width l Table Format dialog box Columns page Specifying Table Borders On the Table Format dialog box select the Borders tab Here you can set borders for a whole table or groups of cells within a table In addition a shadow can be set for the whole table Borders have three components where they go what they look like and how big a space is left around them Line arrangement specifies where the borders go If a group of cells is selected the border will be applied only to those cells You can specify no border or any combination of border for the outside edges and the cell divisions either by selecting a default arrangement or by clicking on the lines in the User defined area to get exactly what you want Line specifies what the border looks like the style and color There are a number of different styles and colors to choose from Spacing to contents specifies how much space to leave between the border and the cell contents Spaces can be specified to the left right above and below Check Synchronize to have the same Spacing all the way round Shadows always apply to the whole table A shadow has three components where it is how thick it is and what color it is Set each of these un
286. hart updates with the new values Modification of chart data is also possible if you for example have copied a chart from a Spreadsheet document into a Write document and now double click the chart in the Celframe Office Write document Remember however you are only editing the copy and not the original document You can change the type of chart any time When you double click on the chart and choose Format Chart Type a dialog appears presenting you with various types to choose from Object Properties Position and Size Title Legend Axis Grid Chart Wall Chart Floor Chart Area Chart Type Table 4utoFormat 30 Effects 3D View Arrangement Try out the different options in the Chart Type dialog You can also switch between 2D and 3D representation With the Columns chart type you can select a Combination Chart of lines and columns e 3D charts can be rotated and tilted with the mouse for an optimal point of view e In Line Charts you can use the data series symbols that are applied automatically by Celframe Office Chart You can also select symbols yourself from graphic files or from the Gallery Editing Chart Titles To edit a chart title that you have inserted into a Celframe Office Spreadsheet 1 Double click on the chart A gray border appears around the chart and the menu bar now contains commands for editing the objects in the chart 2 Double click on the default title
287. harts Fonts Automatic Internet Font settings For HTML and Basic sources E E E ol ll Mon proportional Fonts only Size 10 wt Defining a font to be substituted for another font Security Options Use the Celframe Office Security page to choose security options for saving documents and for opening documents that contain macros Options Celframe Office Security E Celframe Office User Data eneral Warn iF document contains recorded changes versions hidden information or notes Memory VIEW S Print When saving or sending When signing Paths Colors Fonts Remove personal information on saving Security Options When printing When creating PDF files Appearance d Recommend password protection on sawing Accessibility Java Load Save Adjust the security level For executing macros and specify trusted Language settings macro developers Celframe Office Write Macro Security Celframe Office Write Web l l Celframe Office Data Access File sharing options For this document Charts _ Open this document in read only mode Internet Macro security E E G amp G _ Record changes Choosing security options for opening and saving documents Security Options Section If you record changes save multiple versions or include hidden information or notes in your documents and you do not want some of the recipients to see that information you can set warnings to remind you to remove this informatio
288. he current slide 24 Background Color Click the color that you want to use as a background 25 Increase Spacing Click the Increase Spacing icon to increase the paragraph spacing above the selected paragraph 26 Decrease Spacing Click the Decrease Spacing icon to decrease the paragraph spacing above the selected paragraph 27 Move Up Positions the selected paragraph before the one above it 28 Move Down Positions the selected paragraph after the one below it Picture Bar Use the Picture bar to set the color contrast and brightness options for the selected graphic object s a Filter eq Graphics mode Mo Color Transparency Line 2 Background Shadow Crop Graphic Filter Bar This icon on the Picture bar opens the Graphic Filter bar where you can use various filters on the selected picture Graphics Mode Lists view attributes for the selected graphic object The embedded or linked graphic object in the current file will not be changed only the view of the object Color With the Color toolbar you can edit some properties of the selected object Transparency Specifies the transparency in the graphic object Values from 0 opaque to 100 transparent are possible Line Set the formatting options for the selected line or the line that you want to draw Background Defines a background for a single page or for all of the pages in the active file Shadow Adds a shadow to the selected obje
289. he Save As dialog box appears 3 In the Save as type drop down menu select the type of Word format you need 4 Click Save File name Write AvE Save as type Microsoft Word 97 200 AP LAS D Ceframe Document Text oct CelftrameDocument Text Template ott Cetframe Office 1 0 Text Document cw Ceframe Office 1 0 Text Document Template stw J Microsoft Word 95 doc Microsoft Word 6 0 doc Rich Text Format rit Text bet Text Encoded txt HTML Document Cetframe Office Writer html Microsoft Word 2007 Document docx Saving a file in Microsoft Word format From this point on all changes you make to the document will occur only in the Microsoft Word document You have actually changed the name of your document If you want to go back to working with the Celframe Office version of your document you must open it again To have Celframe Office save documents in a default Microsoft Word file format go to Tools gt Options gt Load Save gt General There is a section named Default file format Under Document type select Text document under Always save as select your preferred file format For Celframe Office the default file format is Microsoft Word 97 2000 XP doc Printing a Document Click the Print File Directly icon SJ to send the entire document to the default printer defined for your computer For more control over printing use File gt Print to display the Print dialog box
290. he color of text in a text object double click the text object select the text and then click a color EERE EN EA Bee BERS REEEES BERR EREED CSREES Umm You can also drag a color from the Color Bar and drop it on a draw object on your slide To detach the Color Bar click on a gray area of the toolbar and then drag To reattach the Color Bar drag the title bar of the toolbar to the edge of the window 3D Settings The 3D Settings toolbar controls properties of selected 3D objects Extrusion on off Switches the 3D effects on and off for the selected objects pg Extrusion On Off Tilt Down Tit Down Tilts the selected object downwards by five degrees o amp Tit up l cp Tilt Left Tilt Up G Tilt Right Tilts the selected object upwards by five degrees Lf Depth Tilt Left GF Direction or Lighting Tilts the selected object left by five degrees Surface ti 3D Color Tilt Right Tilts the selected object right by five degrees Depth Opens the Extrusion Depth window Select an extrusion depth Enter an extrusion depth Direction Opens the Extrusion Direction window Select a direction Select a perspective or parallel extrusion method Lighting Opens the Extrusion Lighting window Select a lighting direction Select a lighting intensity Surface Opens the Extrusion Surface window Select a surface material or a wireframe display 3D Color Opens the Extrusion Color toolbar
291. he current paragraph or the selected paragraphs 15 Frame Properties Inserts a frame that you can use to create a layout of one or more columns of text and objects 16 Bring to Front Moves the selected object to the top of the stacking order so that it is in front of other objects 17 Send to Back Moves the selected object to the bottom of the stacking order so that it is behind the other objects 18 Change Anchor Allows you to switch between anchoring options 19 Link Links the selected frame to the next frame The text automatically flows from one frame to another 20 Unlink Frames Breaks the link between two frames You can only break the link that extends from the selected frame to the target frame OLE Object Bar The OLE Object bar appears when objects are selected and contains the most important functions for formatting and positioning objects ww Apply Style Align Left Center Horizontal Align Right E Align Top Align Vertical Center Align Bottom fy Frames Wrap Left ia Bring to Front Wrap Right i Send to Back Ea Wrap Off ar Change Anchor M Page Wrap Borders Wrap Through Er Line Style Optimal Page Wrap fF Line Color of the border 1 Apply Style Assigns a style to the current paragraph selected paragraphs or to a selected object 2 Align Left Aligns the left edges of the selected objects If only one object is selected in Draw or Power Presentation the left edg
292. he developing process reverses the brightness values These phenomena were used for artistic production of pictures With this effect filter you input a threshold value above which brightness the color values are reversed middle picture threshold value 70 With the Invert option the whole of the resulting picture will be inverted in color Aging lends pictures a certain look resembling that of old photos The process first produces a grayscale picture from the original and then reduces the intensity of the blue and green color values so that the final picture appears darker and redder In the middle example the aging degree was set to 0 at right it was 15 Posterize The Posterize filter reduces the number of colors in the picture The fewer colors the more flat the picture appears In the right picture below the number of colors was reduced to 8 The results of this filter are not always good B Pop Art m The Pop Art filter is supposed to change the colors of the picture to a pop art format but unfortunately it does not seem to function correctly at present The Charcoal sketch filter makes the picture appear as if it had been drawn with charcoal The outlines are in black and the original colors are suppressed Relief El The Relief filter calculates the edges in relief of the picture and produces a picture as if illuminated by a light source the position of the illuminating light being variable and pr
293. he settings on the Celframe Office Celframe Office Write Compatibility page If you are not sure about the effects of these settings leave them as the defaults provided by Celframe Office Options Celframe Office Write Compatibility Celframe Office PEA l l Load Save Compatibility options For CO Write doc Language Settings Options CelFrame Office Write General View Formatting Aids rid Basic Fonts Western Print Table Changes e printer metrics For document Formatting M Add spacing between paragraphs and tables fin current document M Add paragraph and table spacing at tops of pages fin current document Use Celframe Office 1 1 tabstop Formatting Do not add leading extra space between lines of text Use Celframe Office 1 1 line spacing M Add paragraph and table spacing at bottom of table cells Use Celframe Office 1 1 object positioning Use Celframe Office 1 1 text wrapping around objects AutoCaption W Consider wrapping style when positioning objects Celframe Office Write web CelFrame Office Data Access Charts Internet EE ea Use as Default Choosing compatibility options Use printer metrics for document formatting If this checkbox is selected the printer specified for the document determines how the document is formatted for viewing on screen The line breaks and paragraph breaks you see on screen match those that apply when the document is printed on that printer This setting can be useful w
294. headed arrow when properly positioned for a drag and drop move To change the size of the frame drag one of the handles Drag a handle on one of the sides to enlarge or reduce the text frame in one dimension only drag a corner handle to enlarge or reduce it in both dimensions These resizing actions distort the proportions of the frame Holding down the Shift key while dragging one of the handles makes the frame keep the same proportions You can open the Frame dialog box at any time by selecting the frame right clicking and choosing Frame from the pop up menu Options wrap Hyperlink Borders Background Columns Macro Size ec width E C To page _ Relative To paragraph Automatic To character Height fat least l As character _ Relative Aukosize d keep ratio Position Horizontal From left l to Paragraph area r Mirror on even pages vertical From top b l to Margin Follow text Flow Frame dialog box To remove the default border on a newly created frame open the Frame dialog box go to the Borders page and under Line Style select None Alternatively you can assign a borderless frame style to the frame Type Options Wrap Hyperlink Borders Background Columns Macro Line arrangement Line Spacing to contents Default Style Left 0 0g EE 0 05 pt 0 50 pt Top a 1 00 pt es pt Bottom 0 00 E 4 0 p ee ii ot Color E Black Right 0 00 User defined
295. hen several people are reviewing a document that will eventually be printed on a specific printer or when the document is exported to PDF a process that uses Adobe PDF as the printer If this checkbox is not selected a printer independent layout will be used for screen display and printing Add spacing between paragraphs and tables in current document In Celframe Office Celframe Office Write paragraph spacing is defined differently than it is in MS Word documents If you have defined spacing between two paragraphs or tables spacing is also added in the corresponding MS Word documents If this checkbox is selected MS Word compatible Spacing is added between paragraphs and tables in Celframe Office Write documents Add paragraph and table spacing at tops of pages in current document You can define paragraphs to have space appear before above them If this checkbox is selected any space above a paragraph will also appear if the paragraph is at the beginning of a page or column if the paragraph is positioned on the first page of the document or after a manual page break If you import an MS Word document the spaces are automatically added during the conversion Add paragraph and table spacing at bottom of table cells Specifies that the bottom spacing is added to a paragraph even when it is the last paragraph in a table cell Use as Default button Click this button to use the current settings on this page as the default in Celfr
296. henation settings Options Language Settings Writing Aids Celframe Office 7 l Load Save Writing aids Language Settings 4 ailable language modules FEMEI aE E Celframe Office Hunspell Spellchecker M ALTLinux LibHnj Hyphenator Celframe Office Write a Celframe Office WritefwWweb M Celframe Office New Thesaurus Celframe Office Daka Access l Charts User defined dictionaries Ae Internet M IgnoreallList All Minimal number of characters For hyphenation 5 Characters before line break 2 Characters after line break 2 Hyphenabe without inquiry Hyphenate special regions Setting hyphenation options To change the minimal number of characters for hyphenation the minimum number of characters before a line break or the minimum number of characters after a line break select the item and then click Edit Hyphenate without inquiry specifies that you will never be asked to manually hyphenate words that the hyphenation dictionary does not recognize If this box is not selected when a word is not recognized a dialog box will open where you can manually enter hyphens Hyphenate special regions specifies that hyphenation will also be carried out in footnotes headers and footers NS Hyphenation options set on the Writing Aids dialog box are effective only if hyphenation is turned on through paragraph styles Choices on the Writing Aids dialog box for characters before line break and characters after line br
297. hesaurus installed this feature is disabled Hyphenating Words To turn automatic hyphenation of words on or off Styles and Formatting Modifying a style 1 Press F11 to open the Styles and Formatting window 2 On the Paragraph Styles page of the Styles and Formatting window right click on Default and select Modify 3 On the Paragraph Style dialog box select the Text Flow tab 4 Under Hyphenation select or deselect the Automatically checkbox 5 Click OK to save Paragraph Indents amp Spacing Alignment Numbering Tabs DropCaps Borders Hyphenation Characters at line end Characters at line begin Maximum number of consecutive hyphens Breaks _ Insert pe Page Position Before With Page Style Page number U Options Do not split paragraph Keep with next paragraph Orphan control widow control Turning on automatic hyphenation Nj Turning on hyphenation for the Default paragraph style affects all other paragraph styles that are based on Default You can individually change other styles so that hyphenation is not active for example you might not want headings to be hyphenated Any styles that are not based on Default are not affected You can also set hyphenation choices through Tools gt Options gt Language Settings gt Writing Aids In Options near the bottom of the dialog box scroll down to find the hyp
298. hold an address book a stock list a phone book or a price list A database can have from one to several tables The Database Wizard helps you to create a database file and to register a new database within Celframe Office WS The database file contains queries reports and forms for the database as well as a link to the database where the records are stored Formatting information is also stored in the database file The Wizard permits the fields of the table to come from more than one suggested table We will create a table with fields from three different suggested tables in the Wizard Click Use Wizard to Create Table This opens the Table Wizard E DVD Celframe Office Data Access HE Create Table in Design View Description ES Use Wizard to Create Table Create View Step 1 Select fields You have a choice of two categories of suggested tables Business and Personal Each category contains its own suggested tables from which to choose Each table has a list of available fields We will use the DVD Collection Sample table in the Personal category to select the fields we need 1 Category Select Personal The Sample Tables drop down list changes to a list of personal Sample tables 2 Sample Tables Select DVD Collection The Available fields window changes to a list of available fields for this table 3 Selected Fields Using the gt button move these fields from the Available fields window to the Selected fields wi
299. i VIEW AutoText C Documents and Settings Userl4pplication Data Celframecrfi Print Backups CiDocuments and Settings User4oplication Data Celframecrfi Gallery C Documents and Settings User4pplication Data Celframecrti Colors Graphics CiHiDocuments and Settings User Application Data Celframecrfi Fonts My Documents C Documents and Settings UseriMy Documents security Templates C Documents and Settings User4pplication Data Celframecrfi Appearance Temporary Files CH DOCUME 1 WserLocals 1 Temp Accessibility Java Load Save Language Settings Celframe Office Write Celframe Office Write Wweb Celframe Office Data Access Charts Internet E ol Cog Eg Es Viewing the paths of files used Color Options In the Celframe Office Colors dialog You can specify colors to use in Celframe Office documents You can select a color from a color table edit an existing color or define new colors These colors will then be available in color selection palettes in Celframe Office Options Celframe Office Colors El Celframe Office l User Data Properties General Name Blue amp Memory view Color C Blue amp _ Print E Modify Paths Color table Colors Fonts EETTEEEN ae ocean bite Accessibility HEHEHEH EE _ Edit oo EERTE EH som HFE Celtrame Ortice Write _ Celf Office Write Web p Fr Office pists farses oe E ERREEN ir 4 dH H A A A A E Defining colors to use in color palettes Font Opti
300. i Celframe Office 2008 Setup Completing the Celframe Office 2008 Setup Wizard Click Le Finish bullion lo esil Lie 520p Wica Celframe Office Installation Issues If you have downloaded the binary file for Windows from http download celframe com it may be in ZIP TAR or EXE format 1 If the file is in the ZIP or TAR format decompress it into a temporary folder with a program such as WinZip or Pkzip If the file is in the EXE format simply double click the file to decompress it 2 Double click the Install icon that you find in the Install Folder or double click the file named setup exe A guided installation dialog will begin and will step you through the installation process Installation Problem in Vista There are several cases where Vista users encountered problem during installation You need to turn Off UAC to continue with the installation Steps to turn off UAC 1 Click Start and then click Control Panel 2 In Control Panel click User Accounts 3 In the User Accounts window click User Accounts 4 In the User Accounts tasks window click Turn User Account Control on or off 5 If UAC is currently configured in Admin Approval Mode the User Account Control message appears Click Continue 6 Clear the Use User Account Control UAC to help protect your computer check box and then click OK 7 Click Restart Now to apply the change right away or click Restart Later and close the User Accounts tasks
301. ic by clicking on it 2 Right click to display the context menu and move the mouse pointer to Wrap to display the various wrap modes 3 Select No Wrap When formatting some documents such as newsletters you may want to put photos mixed with text or just want to add some decorative images The Page Wrap option may satisfy this need When an image is inserted with the Page Wrap option you can move it anywhere on the page The text will be automatically adjusted around the image like water around a sailing boat The Optimal Page Wrap option is similar to Page Wrap but it maintains the text positioned beside the image The position is decided automatically in order to optimize the relative position between text and image Arrange Alignment Ei Fage Wrap E Optimal Page Wrap Wrap Through Picture Caption ImageMap In Background Edit Contour First Paragraph Changing the wrap of a graphic Double clicking on an image pops up the Picture dialog box where you can set all the parameters affecting the image On the Wrap page you can change the setting for the optimal page wrap Picture Spacing lt i Lett First paragraph Right In background Contour Top _ Outside only ir 47 dh d Bottom The Wrap page of the Picture dialog box The Wrap Through option lets you also insert an image overlapping the text In this case some part of the
302. ice Draw to create drawing objects To Create and Edit a Drawing Object 1 Press F6 to navigate to the Drawing bar 2 Press the Right arrow key until you reach the toolbar icon of a drawing tool 3 If there is an arrow next to the icon the drawing tool opens a sub toolbar Press the Up or Down arrow key to open the sub toolbar then press the Right or Left key to select an icon 4 Press Ctrl Enter The object is created at the center of the current document 5 To return to the document press Ctrl F6 You can use the arrow keys to position the object where you want To choose a command from the context menu for the object press Shift F10 To Select an Object 4 Press Ctrl F6 to enter the document 5 Press Tab until you reach the object you want to select During a Slide Show To start a slide show press Ctrl F2 Advance to the next slide or to the next animation effect Spacebar Advance to the next slide without playing object animation effects Alt PageDown Return to previous slide Alt PageUp Go to a specific slide Type the page number of the slide and then press Enter Slide Sorter When you first switch to Slide Sorter press Enter to change the keyboard focus to the workspace Otherwise press F6 to navigate to the workspace and then press Enter Selecting and deselecting slides Use the arrow keys to navigate to the slide that you want to select and then press the Spacebar To add to the selecti
303. ice Spreadsheet Inserting External Data in Table WebQuery Inserting by Dialog Inserting by Navigator Editing the external data 19xx 20xx Years Instructions for Charts Inserting Charts Editing Chart Titles Editing Chart Axes Editing Chart Legends Adding Texture to Chart Bars Formatting Bar for Charts Celframe Office Power Presentation 2008 Chapter 1 Introduction to Celframe Office Power Presentation Features Finding and Opening Power Presentation Starting the Presentation Wizard Power Presentation Window Component Tasks Pane Menus Standard Bar Drawing Bar Outline Bar Slide Sorter Bar Line and Filling Bar Slide View Bar Text Formatting Bar Picture Bar Edit Points Bar Options Bar Color Bar 3D Settings Fontwork Building a Presentation Creating the first slide Adding elements to the Title Page Insert a new slide Custom Animations Slide Transitions Using Templates Supplied with Celframe Office Setting a Custom Template as The Default Resetting the default to Celframe Office in built Default template Creating your Own Templates Modifying a Template Chapter 2 Adding and Formatting Text Working with Text Boxes Using text boxes created from the text box tool Moving a Text Box Resizing a Text Box Deleting a Text Box Pasting text Pasting unformatted text Formatting pasted text Inserting special characters Inserting non breaking spaces and hyphens Modifying a Style Selecting
304. ice still correctly assigns the ranges identified by name Range names must not contain any spaces For example it is much easier to read a formula for sales tax if you can write Amount Tax_rate instead of A5 B12 In this case you would name cell A5 Amount and cell B12 Tax_rate Use the Define Names dialog to define names for formulas or parts of formulas you need more often In order to specify range names 1 Select a cell or range of cells then choose Insert Names Define The Define Names dialog appears Define Names GK Cancel Help Assigned to 5heetl pBz 2 Type the name of the selected area in the Name field Click Add The newly defined name appears in the list below Click OK to close the dialog You can also name other cell ranges in this dialog by entering the name in the field and then selecting the respective cells If you type the name in a formula after the first few characters entered you will see the entire name as atip e Press the Enter key in order to accept the name from the tip e If more than one name starts with the same characters you can scroll through all the names using the Tab key Recognizing Names as Addressing You can use cells with text to refer to the rows or to the columns that contain the cells In the example spreadsheet you can use the string Column One in a formula to refer to the cell range B3 to B5 or Column Two for the cell range C2 to C5 You
305. ick the Break Link button Click Open to insert the image Edit Links Source File Element Status ink girl bmp BMP Windows Bitmap Graphic Manual Source File File Cs Program 20Fies CealframefCelFramet 200FFice 202008 20Professionall iigalle Element BMP Windows Bitmap Type Graphic Update Automatic Editing Bitmaps When you select the bitmap image the Picture Bar offers you the tools for editing the image Only a local copy is edited in the document even if you have inserted an image as a link N The Picture Bar may look slightly different depending to the module you are using A number of filters are located on the Graphic Filter toolbar which you can open with the icon on the Picture Bar 2 ba ka EnEn EOAR EEE 2 is The original picture file will not be changed by the filters Filters are applied to a picture only inside the document Some of the filters open a dialog which you can use to select for example the intensity of the filter Most filters can be applied multiple times to increase the filter effect Saving Bitmaps If you want to save in a format such as GIF JPEG or TIFF you must select and export the bitmap image This is only possible in Celframe Office Draw and Celframe Office Power Presentation Select the bitmap image You can also select additional objects such as text to be exported with the image by pressing the shift key while selecting or by opening a selection fra
306. ides while moving Horizontal scrollbar Celframe Office write Celframe Office WritelWeb Simple handles Vertical scrollbar y EA _ Large handles Ruler Formatting Aids Sa Display Horizontal ruler rin Satie Graphics and objects vertical ruler a Tables Smooth scroll Celframe Office Data Access a Charts Drawings and controls kerniek Field codes Motes 0 G amp G Settings Measurement unit Choosing View options Formatting Aids Option In Celframe Office text and HTML documents defines the display for certain characters and for the direct cursor Choose Tools gt Options gt Celframe Office Write Web gt Formatting Aids Defines which non printing characters are visible on screen Activate the Non printing Characters icon on the Standard bar All characters that you have selected on the Formatting Aids tab page will be displayed Options Celframe Office Write Web Formatting Aids Celframe Office l Load Save Display of Language Settings d Paragraph end Celframe Office Write Celframe Office Write wWeb Custom hyphens d Spaces Mon breaking spaces _ Breaks OHA Background Celframe Office Data Access Charts Internet Formatting Aids Options Paragraph end Specifies whether paragraph delimiters are displayed The paragraph delimiters also contain paragraph format information Custom hyphens Specifies whether user defined delimiters are displayed These are hidden delimiters that
307. ield as a primary key 3 In Fieldname drop down list select CollectionlD 4 Check Auto value if it is not already checked Click Next Table Wizard Set primary key Select Fields 4 primary key uniquely identifies each record in a database table Primary keys ease the linking of information in separate tables and it is recommended that you have a primary key Set types and Formats in every table Without a primary key it will not be possible to enter data into this table Set primary key Create table Create a primary key Automatically add a primary key Suto value Use an existing field as a primary key Fieldnarne ollectionID w Suto value Define primary key as a combination of several fields Available Fields Primary key Fields CollectionID MovieTitle gt u Actor Date Acquired pincer 4 Every table requires a Primary key field A primary key uniquely identifies an item or record in the table For example you might know two people called Robert or three people living at the same address and the database needs to distinguish between them I The simplest method is to assign a unique number to each one number the first person 1 the second 2 and so on Each entry has one number and every number is different so it is easy to say record ID 122 This is the option chosen here CollectionID is just a number assigned automatically by Base to each record of this table Step 4 Create the
308. ies that spelling errors will not be indicated with a red underline This mode allows you to check the spelling in the background while typing or loading a text but without the time consuming red underlining If you unmark the Do not mark errors box later you will immediately see the red underlining German spelling old Specifies that old German spelling rules are applied If you don t check this box Celframe Office follows the new spelling rules for spellcheck and hyphenation Minimal number of characters for hyphenation Specifies the minimum number of characters required for automatic hyphenation to be applied Characters before line break Sets the minimum number of characters of the word to be hyphenated that must remain at the end of the line Characters after line break Specifies the minimum number of characters of a hyphenated word required at the next line Hyphenate without inquiry Specifies that you will never be asked for a manual hyphenation If the field is not marked when a word is not recognized you will be presented with a dialog for entering hyphens Hyphenate special regions Specifies that hypernation will also be carried out in footnotes headers and footers Choosing Options for Celframe Office Write Settings chosen on the pages in the Celframe Office Celframe Office Write section of the Options dialog box determine how your Celframe Office Write documents look and behave while you are working on th
309. ifies the format of the current paragraph such as indents and alignment 19 Font Color Click to apply the current font color to the selected characters You can also click here and then drag a selection to change the text color Click the arrow next to the icon to open the Font color toolbar 20 Symbol Open the special character Picture Bar Use the Picture bar to set the color contrast and brightness options for the selected graphic object s 1 Graphic Filter Bar This icon on the Picture bar opens the Graphic Filter bar where you can use various filters on the selected picture 2 Graphic Mode Lists view attributes for the selected graphic object The embedded or linked graphic object in the current file will not be changed only the view of the object 3 Color With the Color toolbar you can edit some properties of the selected object 4 Transparency Specifies the transparency in the graphic object Values from 0 opaque to 100 transparent are possible 5 Line Set the formatting options for the selected line or the line that you want to draw You can also add arrowheads to a line 6 Background Click to apply the current font color to the selected characters You can also click here and then drag a selection to change the text color 7 Shadow Adds a shadow to the selected object If the object already has a shadow the shadow is removed If you click this icon when no object is selected the shad
310. igh end products like Adobe Distiller With this tool Celframe has brought forth the widely used PDF convertor to all users PDF Maker is perfect for Company Reports Marketing plans Contracts Spreadsheets Price lists Forms Timetables Graphs amp charts Newsletters Features e Supports any type of Celframe Applications e Password protection for PDF files e Set file permissions to restrict printing copying and future modifications to the document e Can send PDF files via email e Set an images resolution What are PDF Files Portable Document Format PDF files are well known for their ability to look the same on all computers regardless of Operating Systems and software versions A PDF file preserves the look and feel of the original document and contains all the original fonts images layout and formatting A PDF can be viewed and printed on any operating system including Windows MacOS and all Unix variants including Linux using the free Adobe Acrobat Reader L Staff Ext t Celframe 3 Adobe Acrobat Document hobs 42 KB Staff Ext Celframe Celframe Office Spreadsheet Staff Extension Number No Telefon Celframe 03 89981000 No Faks Celframe 0389982000 email info celframe com website www celframe com Designation n ee SE ee Seas Ee T CUM RECEPTIONIST Ul all Pages Selection NT OFFICER OPMENT CUM CHANNEL EXECUTIVE R CUM TRAINER
311. image without the need to watch the cursor position in the status bar When a selection is active its bounding rectangle will be highlighted in the rulers Tann seca 1100 Pixels Inches and Centimeters This lets you select how image coordinates are presented to you in various parts of the user interface including the rulers and the status bar The default is pixels If you select inches or centimeters extra calculations are performed to convert pixel measurements into inches and centimeters These calculations are based off the image s DPI settings which can be adjusted by the Image Resize Image Menu This menu contains commands that affect all layers of the current image This contrasts to the commands in the Layers Menu which only affect the currently active layer Crop to Selection Chrl ShiFk Resize Ctrl F Canvas Size trl ShiFk R Flip Horizontal Flip Vertical Rotate 90 Clockwise Ctrl H Rotate 90 Counter Clockwise Ctrl G Rotate 180 Ctrl J Crop to Selection This menu item is only available if a selection is active Clicking on this menu item will cause the image to be replaced with only the area that was selected If the selection is not a rectangle or Square then the bounding rectangle around the selection will be used However the pixels that were not in the selection will be made transparent Original image Here is the new image after having clicked on the Crop to Selectio
312. in our query or not Fields Condition Value aes qual to Fields is equal or less than is equal or greater than like Search conditions in the Query Wizard iS equal to the same as e is not equal to not the same as is smaller than comes before is greater than comes after is equal or less than the same as or comes before is equal or greater than the same as or comes after like similar to in some way N These conditions apply to numbers letters using the alphabetical order and dates 1 Since we are only searching for one thing we will use the default setting of Match all of the following 2 We are looking for a particular actor so select is equal to 3 Enter the name of the actor in the Value box Click Next Step 4 Select type of query We want simple information so the default setting Detailed query is what we want Click Next at the bottom of the window Since we have a simple query the Grouping and Grouping conditions are not needed Those two steps are skipped in our query Select the type of query Detailed query Shows all records of the query Summary query Shows only results of aggregate Functions Step 5 Assign aliases if desired We want the default settings Click Next Query Wizard Assign aliases if desired Field selection Field Alias Sorting order CvO Collection Actor Actor Search conditions DYD Collection MovieTitle MovieTitle Detail o
313. ine properties Style e Color Me Black Width 0 00crm Transparency OM Ho 3 Choose from the available tabs to make modifications then click OK i To select the legend first double click on the chart see step 1 then click N on the legend You can now move the legend within the chart using the mouse bic If you move the legend over another object of the chart you can no longer N open its Properties dialog by double clicking on it To open the Properties dialog either use the Format menu or click once on the legend then open the context menu and select Object Properties The same applies to all other objects of the chart Adding Texture to Chart Bars You can add texture to the bars in a graph or chart instead of the default colors via bitmap graphics 1 Enter edit mode by double clicking on the chart 2 Double click on the bar you want to edit All bars of this series are now selected 3 In the context menu choose Object Properties Then choose the Area tab Student Marks Marks melt th Chart wall BE Chart Area FS Use the icons on this toolbar to access most common chart commands 1 Title On Off Click Title On Off on the Formatting bar to show or hide the title and subtitle 2 Legend On Off To show or hide a legend click Legend On Off on the Formatting bar 3 Axes Title On Off Click Axes Title On Off on the Formatting bar to show or hide the a
314. ing Adjustments are also included which help you tweak an image s brightness contrast hue Saturation curves and levels You can also convert an image to black and white or sepia toned Powerful Tools Includes simple tools for drawing shapes the Magic Wand for selecting regions of similar color and the Clone Stamp for copying or erasing portions of an image There is also a simple text editor a tool for zooming and a Recolor tool Unlimited History Everybody makes mistakes and everybody changes their mind To accommodate this every action you perform on an image is recorded in the History window and may be undone Once you ve undone an action you can also redo it The length of the history is only limited by available disk space Layers For this discussion the following two images will be used for the background layer and for the Ist layer that is placed on top of the background layer Top Layer Pixels and Transparency Every layer in Celframe Office Studio is composed of pixels which are stored in the RGBA format The RGB part stands for red green blue and is used to store traditional color intensity The A is for alpha and is used to store information about the transparency of a pixel This alpha value may range from O completely transparent to 255 completely opaque Transparent pixels cannot be displayed on a computer monitor In order to simulate thi
315. into corner points Corner points have two movable control points which are independent from each other A curved line therefore does not go straight through a corner point but forms a corner 8 Smooth Transition Converts a corner point or symmetrical point into a smooth point Both control points of the corner point are aligned in parallel and can only be moved simultaneously The control points may differentiate in length allowing you to vary the degree of curvature 9 Symmetric Transition This icon converts a corner point or a smooth point into a symmetrical point Both control points of the corner point are aligned in parallel and have the same length They can only be moved simultaneously and the degree of curvature is the same in both directions 10 Close B zier Closes a line or a curve A line is closed by connecting the last point with the first point indicated by an enlarged square 11 Eliminate Points Marks the current point or the selected points for deletion This happens in the event that the point is located on a Straight line If you convert a curve or a polygon with the Convert to Curve icon into a Straight line or you change a curve with the mouse so that a point lies on the straight line it is removed The angle from which the point reduction is to take place can be set by choosing Tools Options Celframe Office Power Presentation Grid Options Bar To display the Options Bar choose View gt Toolbars
316. into the fields of one or more tables associated with the form They can also be used for viewing fields from one or more tables associated with the form A query creates a new table from the existing tables based upon how you create the query A report organizes the information of the fields of a query in a document according to your requirements Celframe Office Data Access creates relational databases This makes it fairly easy to create a database in which the fields of the database have relationships with each other With Celframe Office Data Access you can Create tables databases reports forms and make more informed decisions by effectively tracking reporting managing database using wizards Providing you most functions of Microsoft Access and get organised today Perform simple or complex sort in Celframe Data Access 2008 View subsets of your data with simple or complex filters in Celframe Data Access 2008 Create powerful queries to show your data in new ways including summaries and multi table views in Celframe Data Access 2008 Produce reports in a wide variety of formats using the Report Wizard in Celframe Data Access 2008 Build stylish smart looking database reports The flexible report editor can define group and page headers as well as group and page footers and even calculation fields are available to accomplish complex database reports Along with the flexible database client it is possible to create database reports from H
317. ion field of the Status Bar With geometric shapes such as Basic Shapes Symbol Shapes Block Arrows the only information shown in the Status Bar is that the shape is being resized as shown in the top left image With geometric e ements rectangles circles and so on the changes to the attributes of the element either relative or absolute In the case of a rectangle the relative percentage of the x and y dimensions of the original shape are shown For a line much more information is given the absolute change in x y coordinates of the end point being moved together with the current length and bearing of the modified line These are all given in the Status Bar and updated dynamically as the end point is moved This information can be very useful It is the only place in which one can see the exact start and end angle locations of an arc or where the length and bearing of a sloping line are shown With this information you can size the object with considerable accuracy Rotating and Shearing an Object Rotating an object lets you slant the object along an axis To do this dynamically use the red handles as you do when changing the size of the object Rotation works in a slightly different way for 3D objects because the rotation occurs in 3D Space and not in one plane To rotate an object or a group of objects drag a red corner handle point of the selection with the mouse The mouse cursor takes the shape of an arc of a circle with an
318. ion outline is not removed Paste If there is an image in the clipboard this command will allow you to paste it on to the active layer The pasted pixels will then be selected and the Move Selected Pixels tool will automatically be switched to This will allow you to move scale or rotate the pixels into the desired location and orientation If the image being pasted is too wide and or too tall for the current canvas size you will be asked if you want to resize the canvas Paste in to New Layer This is similar to Paste except that it creates a new layer makes it active and then performs the Paste command Paste in to New Image This is similar to Paste except that it first creates a new image makes it active and then pastes the contents of the clipboard in to it The new image is exactly the same size as the image that is in the clipboard Erase Selection This command erases the currently selected region of the active layer All pixels that lie within the selected region are placed with transparency This is similar to the Cut command except that the selected pixels are not copied to the clipboard Fill Selection If there is a selected region this will fill it with the current primary color Invert Selection If there is a selected region this will cause all pixels that are selected to be unselected and vice versa Select All This causes the entire canvas to be selected Deselect After you select this men
319. ions of the graphic are shown in the mage Size field The dimensions are related to the original size of the graphic The preview pane shows the location of the new edges of the graphic If you choose Keep Scale the graphic will be cropped to the scales shown in the width and height boxes and the picture reduced in size accordingly If you choose Keep image size the graphic will be cropped and then enlarged to the original image size In addition to cropping you can also enlarge or reduce the size of the graphic by changing the percentage scaling values or directly determine the size in the mage Size width and height boxes Take care with these operations in the Crop dialog the width and height are treated as totally independent values Changing one without the other can result in significant distortion of the image this might not be what you want The Position and Size dialog on the context menu has an option for keeping the width height ratio fixed while changing one of the two dimensions Changing values in one area Scale or Image Size will show up correspondingly in the other area Any changes made in the Crop dialog change only the view of the picture The original y Inport 4 picture is not changed If you want to export a cropped graphic you must do it through File gt Export to If you use the option Save as Picture from the context menu the changes are not exported The graphic filter toolbar Click the Filter icon icon
320. irmation of purchase email specified Inc note the period as part of the organization field please don t enter INC Inc or Incorporated 3 If you re still having problems try copy and paste from the registration email into the register dialog 4 You can check your product key online see Login here 5 As a last resort copy the details you ve entered into all three boxes and email it to support office celframe com Celframe Office Write 2008 Chapter 1 Introduction to Celframe Office Write Fully equipped word processor amp desktop publisher simple enough for a quick memo powerful enough to create complete books with contents diagrams indexes with built in wizards for all tasks Create your docs in HTML Adobe PDF or even to all Microsoft Word doc file formats With several formatting styles auto correct dictionary one click email and hundreds of other features Auto Format in Celframe Write 2008 takes care of the formatting as you write leaving you free to concentrate on your message Text frames and linking in Celframe Write 2008 give you the power to tackle desktop publishing tasks for newsletters flyers etc laid out exactly the way you want them to be Email your documents Celframe Office 2008 offers functionality to open a new e mailcomposer window with the active document directly attached Celframe Office 2008 will greatly simplify the task of configuring the email client to be use
321. irst switch to Handout view then choose Format gt Modify Layout Click the thumbnail image showing how many slide per page you want to print then click OK Now follow the print instructions above and choose Handouts Outline prints the title and headings of each slide in outline format Under Quality Default prints the presentation in color on a color printer or in grayscale on a mono printer including all background colors and images If you have used a dark background which looks good when projected the slides may not be very readable when printed especially on handouts with small images Grayscale prints in black white and grayscale on both color and mono printers and does not print background colors or images e Black amp white prints in black white and grayscale and does not print background colors or images Under Print you can choose additional elements to be printed in the page margin If you marked Brochure in the Page options area the only available selection in this area is Hidden pages Page name includes the name of the slide Not available with brochure printing Date prints the current date at time of printing Not available with brochure printing Time prints the current time Not available with brochure printing Hidden pages prints the slides that are marked as hidden in the presentation Under Page options Default prints the slides full size Fit to page scales down slides so they f
322. is identified by a different color for the arrow button To display all records again select the all entry in the AutoFilter combo box If you choose Standard the Standard Filter dialog appears allowing you to set up a standard filter Choose Top 10 to display the highest 10 values only To Apply a Standard Filter to a Cell Range 1 Click in a cell range 2 Choose Data Filter Standard Filter 3 In the Standard Filter dialog specify the filter options that you want 4 Click OK The records that match the filter options that you specified are shown Standard Filter Filter criteria Operator Field name Condition Column E none none Options Case sensitive d Regular expression Range contains column labels No duplication Copy results to Keep filter criteria Undefined Data range Sheet b 2 E unnamed Standard Filter The Advanced filter exceeds the three condition limitation and allows up to a total of eight filter conditions With advanced filters you enter the conditions directly into the sheet 1 Copy the column headers of the sheet ranges to be filtered into an empty area of the sheet and then enter the criteria for the filter in a row beneath the headers Horizontally arranged data in a row will always be logically connected with AND and vertically arranged data ina column will always be logically connected with OR 2 Once you have created a filter
323. istort Moise Fhoto Render Emboss Outline Relief Edge Detect This effect will highlight the edges in an image as if a light had been shown on it from a certain angle Original Modified Edi Emboss This effect will result in a black and white image where the edges have been given a three dimensional highlight similar to physical embossing Original Modified d Outline This effect will find the edges of an image and trace around them with the requested radius Original Modified d Relief This effect is similar to Edge Detect except that it blends the result back into the original image Original Modified A m Chapter 3 Miscellaneous Window Menu These commands allow you to hide or show the floating utility windows to reset them to their Original locations and to toggle their translucent effect Reset Window Locations Tools History Layers Colors Translucent Show Image List Chrl Next Tab Ctrl Tab Previous Tab Cbrl Shift Tab Reset Window Locations If you have lost any of the four floating windows Tools History Layers Colors you can use this to reset them all to their default locations Tools This toggles whether the Tools Window is visible History This toggles whether the History Window is visible Layers This toggles whether the Layers Wind
324. it on the paper in the printer Tile pages prints several slides on a page if the slides are smaller than the paper Brochure is discussed in Printing a brochure Paper tray from printer settings specifies that the paper tray to be used is the one defined in the printer setup Selecting default print options Selections on the Printer Options dialog over ride any default settings To specify default settings for printing use Tools gt Options gt Celframe Office Power Presentation gt Print The page displayed contains the same choices as the Printer Options dialog Use this page to specify quality settings for printing and whether to have Celframe Office warn you if the paper size or orientation of your document does not match the printer settings l Drawing Default C Motes Grayscale C Handouts 2 Black amp white C Cutline Print Page options Defeuk _ Date Fit to page LI Time CO Tile pages Brochure Paper tray from printer settings te Print options Printing in black and white on a color printer You may wish to print documents in black and white on a color printer to save expensive color ink or toner or to make handouts of slides with dark backgrounds easier to read Several choices are available To print the current document in black and white or grayscale 1 Click File gt Print to open the Print dialog 2 Click Properties to open the properties dialog for the printer
325. it to an e mail in the usual way Opening and saving a PowerPoint file Celframe Office Power Presentation file format is highly compatible with Microsoft s PowerPoint format You can open a PowerPoint presentation in Celframe Office Power Presentation edit it then save it in its original PowerPoint format or in Celframe Office Power Presentation format You can also create a new presentation in Celframe Office Power Presentation and save it as a PowerPoint file for sharing your presentation with those who have yet to discover Celframe Office Saving an Celframe Office Power Presentation file as a PowerPoint file 1 Choose File gt Save As from the menu bar 2 Select the location where you want the PowerPoint file saved and type a name for the file 3 Under File type choose Microsoft PowerPoint 97 2000 XP ppt 4 Click Save Recommendation always save your work in Celframe OpenDocument format before saving in Microsoft format Keep the Celframe Office Power Presentation file as your working copy if you need to change the presentation change it in the Impress version and then save it again as PowerPoint You are much less likely to have problems than if you open a file reviously saved in PowerPoint format edit it and save it again Opening a PowerPoint file in Celframe Office If you receive a file from someone in PowerPoint format and need to edit it in Celframe Office Power Presentation here is how to 1 In Celfr
326. ive it a gradient if desired Changing the chart graphic background The chart wall is the area that contains the chart graphic 1 Double click the chart so that it is enclosed by a gray border 2 Select Format gt Chart Wall The Chart Wall window appears It has the same formatting options as described in Changing the chart area background above 3 Choose your settings and click OK Inserting other objects Celframe Power Presentation offers the capability of inserting in a slide various types of objects such as music or video clips Writer documents Math formulas generic OLE objects and so on A typical presentation may contain movie clips sound clips OLE objects and formulas other objects are less frequently used since they do not appear during a slide show Ma nimated Image Pictures OLE Object ay Hyperlink E Plug in Express Part of the Insert menu Movies and sound To insert a movie clip or a sound into a presentation select Insert gt Movie and Sound Select the media file to insert from the dialog to place the object on the slide Formulas Use Insert gt Object gt Formula to create a Math object in a slide When editing a formula the main menu changes into the Math main menu Care should be taken about the font sizes used in order to make them comparable to the font size used in the rest of the slide To change the font attributes of the Math object select Format
327. j p il CELFRAME OFFICE 2008 USER MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS Introduction Technical Info Installation Activation Celframe Office Write Chapter 1 Introduction to Celframe Office Write Features The Write Interface Menu Toolbar Standard Bar Formatting Bar Picture Bar Frame Bar OLE Object Bar Table Bar Drawing Object Properties Bar Bullets and Numbering Bar Status Bar Hyperlink Bar Page Preview Author s Tools Rulers Formula Bar Using Dockable Floating Windows Using The Navigator Creating a New Document Creating a Document from a Template Opening an Existing Document Saving a Document Saving as a Microsoft Word Document Printing a Document Previewing Pages Before Printing Exporting to PDF General Page of PDF Options Dialog Box Initial View Page of PDF Options Dialog Box User Interface Page of PDF Options Dialog Box Getting help Closing a Document Chapter 2 Variable Option for Setting Celframe Office Write Celframe Office Option User Data options General Options Memory Options View Options Print Options Path Options Color Options Font Options Security Options Appearance Options Accessibility Option Java Options Options for Load Save General Load Save Options VBA Properties Load Save options Microsoft Office Load Save options HTML compatibility Load Save options Language Settings Language Option Writing Aids Option Choosing Options for Celframe
328. k and select Table from the pop up menu or select Table gt Table Properties from the main menu 3 In the Table Format dialog box select the Background tab 4 In the For section chose whether to apply the settings to cell row or table If you choose Cell any changes apply to all the selected cells 5 In the As section choose whether the background is a color or a graphic 6 To apply a color select the color and click OK 7 To apply a graphic first select the graphic to use This must be a graphic file accessible from your computer Celframe Office Write supports a large number of graphics formats You have the option with the Link check box to link the graphic file If it is linked changes to the graphic for example if you edit it in a different package will be reflected in your document However you also need to keep the linked graphic file with the document file If for example you email the document without the graphic file the graphic will no longer be visible Under Type select the type of placement for the graphic If you choose Position you can select where to position the graphic within the cells row or table If you choose Area the graphic is stretched to fill the whole area If Tile the graphic is tiled repeated horizontally and vertically to fill the area If the Preview check box is checked the graphic displays in the pane above the check box To apply the graphic click OK Table Format
329. kup copy If you have this set recovering your document after a system crash will be easier but recovering an earlier version of the document may be harder Size optimization for XML format no pretty printing Celframe Office documents are XML files When you select this option Celframe Office writes the XML data without indents and line breaks If you want to be able to read the XML files in a text editor in a structured form deselect this option Default file format If you routinely share documents with users of Microsoft Word you might want to change the Always Save as attribute for text documents in the Standard file format section to one of the Word document types VBA Properties Load Save options 1 Choose Load Save gt VBA Properties 2 On the Options Load Save VBA Properties You can choose whether to keep any macros in MSOffice documents that are opened in Celframe Office If you choose Save original Basic code the macros will not work in Celframe Office but are retained if you save the file into Microsoft Office format If you choose Load Basic code to edit the changed code is saved in an Celframe Office document but is not retained if you save into an MSOffice format Options Load Save VBA Properties Celframe Office Load Save Microsoft Word 9 2000 General Load Basic code to edit VEG Properties Microsoft Office Save original Basic code again HTML Compatibility Language Settings Microsoft Excel 9
330. l cells on Sheet through Sheet3 Chapter 2 Work with Calculation and Filter Calculating with Formulas All formulas begin with an equals sign The formulas may contain numbers or text and other data is also possible such as format details The formulas also contain arithmetic operators logic operators or function starts i Remember that the basic arithmetic signs can be used in formulas using the N Multiplication and Division before Addition and Subtraction rule Instead of writing SUM A1 B1 it is better to write A1 B1 Tip Parentheses can also be used The result of the formula 1 2 3 produces a different result than 1 2 3 Here are a few examples of Celframe Office Spreadsheet formulas A1 10 Displays the contents of cell Al plus 10 A1 16 Displays 16 of the contents of Al Al A2 Displays the result of the multiplication of Al and A2 ROUND A1 1 Displays the contents of cell Al rounded to one decimal place EFFECTIVE 5 1 2 Calculates the effective interest for 5 annual nominal interest with 12 payments a year B8 SUM B10 814 B8 SUM B10 814 0 B1 4 Calculates B8 minus the sum Calculates B8 minus the sum of the cells B10 to B14 0 the cells B10 Calculates B8 minus the sum of the cells B10 to B14 0 B14 in SUM B10 B14 Calculates the sum of cells B10 to B14 and adds the value to B8 SUM B1 B65536 Sums all numbers in column B It is also possible to nest functions in for
331. laceholder for a graphic double click anywhere in the graphics frame This opens a dialog for selecting the file to be inserted The detailed procedure is given below Click to add title Double click to add graphics Click to add an outline Slide with automatic layout including a placeholder for graphic object Whether you are using an Layout for the placement of the picture or you are just inserting a picture follow these steps 1 Select Insert gt Picture When using an Layout double click in the graphics frame instead 2 In the Insert Picture dialog browse to the directory containing the desired picture 3 Select the file Celframe Office recognizes a very large number of image types and if the Preview check box is selected will display a reduced copy of the selected file 4 Click Open to place the picture on the current selected slide The picture is now displayed on the slide with green resizing handles around it Insert picture ol glass ol lips_hand My Recent SI mug_hand Documents My Documents IP T My Computer My Network File name pencil Places Files of type lt All formats bps det emt eps gif jpg Cancel W Link ff Preview Inserting a picture from a file Notice in the Insert picture dialog the two checkboxes called Link and Preview Their position is determined by the operating system but they are normally in the bottom part of the dialog If Preview is checked
332. late is identical to the Default paragraph style Formatting Individual Cells You can format each cell independently of other cells For example you can Format the characters change the font the font style and the background colors Set different indentation values when you select a cell the horizontal ruler shows the indentation points with gray pentagons Vary the indentation by clicking and dragging these points Change the text alignment for example a number can be aligned to the right while text on another line in the cell is aligned to the left or centered To change the format of a cell or range of cells 1 Select the cell or range of cells to be modified You can select a single cell by clicking in it select a range with click and drag or select a row or column using menu or toolbar choices 2 Right click the selection and select Table or select Table gt Table Properties from the menu bar 3 From the Table Format dialog box select the property to modify Inserting Rows and Columns To insert any number of rows or columns 1 Place the cursor in the row or column where you want new rows or columns to be inserted and right click On the pop up menu select Row gt Insert or Column gt Insert This will display a dialog box where you can select the number of rows or columns to add before or after the selected one 2 Set Amount to the number of rows or columns to insert and Position to Before or After
333. late totals The database ranges in spreadsheets have nothing to do with the databases and Spreadsheets that are addressed in Tools gt Data Sources and edited in the data source browser F4 Spreadsheet can contain several sheets which are manipulated Combining several adjacent rows of a spreadsheet into a database area is a way for example to sort them together Furthermore external files can be imported into a Spreadsheet Creating Records in a Spreadsheet 1 Open a new spreadsheet 2 Enter the column titles in the first row e g Date in cell Al Item in cell B1 Amount in C1 Then enter some information ltem Amount 2 109 Groceries 4157 00 12009 Shoes 43 00 12 12 09 Dinner 41 60 12 15 09 Flowers 6 00 12 19 09 Dress f35 00 2 45 09 Handbag 45 90 2 46 09 Lunch 10 00 2 50 09 Hand phone 054 00 To format the sheet in the same manner as in the illustration above proceed as follows Select row 1 by clicking on the row header Click the Bold icon Select the entire column A by clicking on the column header Open the context menu Choose Format Cells In the Cell Attributes dialogue click the Numbers tab Choose a date format for Column A Select column C by clicking on the column header Apply a currency format Clicking the Number Format Currency icon on the object bar is sufficient O CON OD WU BWYN Format Cells Font Font Effects Alignme
334. lbar that contains functions for optimizing the rows and columns in a table 9 Top Aligns the contents of the cell to the top edge of the cell 10 Center Centers the contents of the cell horizontally in the cell 11 Bottom Aligns the contents of the cell to the bottom edge of the cell 12 Insert Row Inserts one or more rows in the table below the selection You can insert more than one row by opening the dialog Table gt Insert gt Rows or by selecting more than one row before clicking the icon The second method inserts rows of the same height as the originally selected rows 13 Insert Column Inserts one or more columns into the table after the selection You can insert several columns at the Same time by opening the dialog choose Table gt Insert gt Columns or by selecting several columns before clicking the icon If the latter method is used the columns inserted will have the same relative width as the selected columns 14 Delete Row Deletes the selected row s from the table 15 Delete Column Deletes the selected column s from the table 16 Select Table Selects the current table 17 Select Column Selects the current column 18 Select Rows Selects the current row 19 Table AutoFormat Automatically applies formats to the current table including fonts shading and borders 20 Table Properties Specifies the properties of the selected table for example name alignment spacing column width borders and b
335. lect the document type For conversion Text documents Spreadsheets Drawing presentation documents Master documents formulas C Microsoft Office Word d ocuments Excel documents _ PowerPoint documents Please note thak when converting Microsoft documents any attached YEA macros lose their Functionality Create log file Saving Documents in Other Formats 1 Choose File Save as You will see the Save as dialog 2 In the Save as type list box select the desired format 3 Enter a name in the File name box and click Save If you want the file dialogs to offer another file format as default select that format in Tools Options Load Save General in the Default file format area Saye ihi Ej Desktop Hmy Documents Fi My Computer My Recent omy Network Places Documents a aa o Microsoft Excel 97200074F xls r CelframeDocument Spreadsheet ods CelframeDocument Spreadsheet Template ots Celframe Office 1 0 Spreadsheet sxc Celfrarne Office 1 0 Spreadsheet Template stc My Documents Data Interchange Format dif dBASE dbf er Microsoft Excel 97720004F Template slt Microsoft Excel 95 xls wi Microsoft Excel 95 Template lt hiy Computer Microsoft Excel 5 0 xls Microsoft Excel 5 0 Template xt STLA slk HTML Document Celtrame Office Calc tral Microsoft Excel 2003 ML srl My Network File name Pocket Excel psl Save Places Microsoft Excel
336. les shows the handles as flat Squares and Large Handles shows the handles in a larger size You can combine the effects obtained by pressing on both buttons and thus have large handles having a 3D shape or small handles having no 3D shape whichever suits your needs or preferences Simple Handles 0 Large Handles Selection Modes There are three selection modes 1 Moving and changing size 2 Editing 3 Rotating points To set the default mode 1 or 2 for selecting objects click on the Points button Z on the Drawing toolbar In standard mode when you begin a new drawing the Points button is not active and the default mode is for selections to be moved or changed in size these selections are indicated by small green squares When the Points button is active the default mode is for selections to be edited these selections are indicated by blue squares Selections for rotating objects are indicated by small red circles and a symbol representing the center of rotation To choose these selections click on the Effects drop down button from the Drawing toolbar and after that on the object Changing The Selection Mode To go from one mode to another you can do one of the following Choose the Points button from the Drawing toolbar to switch from simple selection mode to Points mode Choose the Effects drop down button from the Drawing Toolbar to activate the Rotation mode for a selected object To exit Ro
337. lick the Insert Footnote Directly or Insert Endnote Directly icon on the Insert toolbar Insert Endnote Directly Using the Insert Footnote Directly icon on the toolbar If you use Insert gt Reference gt Footnote the Insert Footnote dialog box is displayed Here you can choose whether to use the automatic numbering sequence specified in the footnote settings and whether to insert the item as a footnote or an endnote Insert Footnote Numbering Character Type Footnote Endnote Inserting a footnote directly A footnote or endnote marker is inserted in the text and the cursor is relocated to the footnote area at the bottom of the page or to the endnote area at the end of the document Type the footnote or endnote content in this area You can edit an existing footnote or endnote the same way you edit any other text To delete a footnote or endnote delete the footnote marker The contents of the footnote or endnote are deleted automatically and the numbering of other footnotes or endnotes is adjusted automatically Checking Spelling Write provides a spelling checker which can be used in two ways AutoSpellcheck checks each word as it is typed and displays a wavy red line under any misspelled words Once the word is corrected the red wavy line disappears tolbar toolbar To perform a separate spellcheck on the document or a text selection click the Spellcheck button v This checks the document or s
338. ll have red handles instead of the usual green handles Grab one of the handles and move it to rotate the object The black circle in the middle of the object is the pivot center of rotation You can move the pivot with the mouse Flip an object Select an object and click on the Flip icon You will see a dashed line through the middle of the object This dashed line is the axis of symmetry The object will be reflected about this line Move one or both ends of the line with your mouse to set the axis Then grab any one of the eight green handles and move it across to the other side of the dashed line The new position of the figure is shown dashed until the mouse is released If you press the Shift key while moving the line the line will rotate in 45 degree increments Distorting an Image There are three tools on the Effects menu that let you drag the corners and edges of an object to distort the image The Distort tool distorts an object in perspective the Set to Circle slant and Set in Circle perspective tools both create a pseudo three dimensional effect The results of using these tools are shown in the following figures Distort an object Select an object and click on the Distort icon Draw will ask if you want to transform the object to a curve This is a necessary step before distortion so click Yes Then you can move the object handles to stretch it The midpoint handles distort the figure either ho
339. llcheck and hyphenation Edit If you want to change a value select the entry and then click Edit You will see a dialog for entering a new value Check uppercase words Specifies that capitalization is checked during spellcheck Check words with numbers Specifies that words that contain numbers as well as letters are to be checked Check capitalization Checks for the correct use of capitals at the start of words during spellcheck Check special regions Specifies that special regions such as text in headers and footers document tables and text frames are checked during spellcheck Check in all languages Checks spelling against all installed language dictionaries The Language font attribute is therefore not taken into account Check spelling as you type Automatically checks spelling as you type and underlines errors Typing errors are highlighted in the document with a red underline If you place the cursor over a word marked in this way you can open the context menu to obtain a list of corrections Select a correction to replace the word If you make the same mistake again while editing the document it will be marked as an error again To place the word pair in the AutoCorrect replacement table open the AutoCorrect context menu and choose AutoCorrect Make your selection from the submenu The word is replaced and at the Same time the word pair is placed in the replacement table Do not mark errors Specif
340. lleted to numbered and vice versa are explained in Changing the appearance of the list Press Shift Enter to start a new line without creating a new bullet or number The new line will have the same indentation of the previous line Press instead the button bullets on off on the text formatting toolbar for a line without bullet If the text formatting toolbar is not showing enable it selecting View gt Toolbar gt Formatting in the menu bar Creating lists in other text boxes To create a list in a text box follow these steps 1 Place the cursor in the text box 2 Click the Bullets On Off button dima on the text formatting toolbar If the text formatting toolbar is not showing enable it by selecting View gt Toolbar gt Formatting from the menu bar 3 Type the text and press Enter to start a new bulleted line 4 The default list type is a bulleted list Creating a new outline level 1 If necessary press Enter to begin a new line 2 Press Tab Each time you press Tab the line indents to the next outline level Pressing Enter creates a new line at the same level as the previous one To return to the previous level press Shift Tab Changing the appearance of the list You can fully customize the appearance of a list changing the bullet type or numbering for the entire list or for single entry All the changes can be made using the Bullets and Numbering dialog which is accessed by selecting Format gt Bullets and
341. llets and Numbering Bullets Numbering type Graphics Position Format Level Numbering Bullet Peeyvieu Preview Preview Color C Automatic Preview Relative size 45 Preview Character Preview Preview l 2 3 4 a 6 F E E l Previey Previe Pres Depending on the numbering style selected in the Numbering box bullet graphic numbering some of the following options become available on the page Before Enter any text to appear before the numbe After Enter any text to appear after the number for example a punctuation mark Color Pick the color for the list marker number or bullet character Relative size Specify the size of the number relative to the size of the characters in the paragraph of the list Start at Enter the first value of the list Character button Click this button to select the character for the bullet Graphics selection button Opens a list of available graphics Gallery or allows the selection of a file on the hard disk to be used as marker Width and Height Specify the dimensions of the graphic marker Keep ratio checkbox If selected the ratio between the width and the height of the graphic marker is fixed The right hand side of the screen shows a preview of the modifications made To revert to the default values click the Reset button in the bottom right corner Using the Customize page you can create complex structured layouts for ex
342. location or with a different file name or file type 5 Document as E mail Opens a new window in your default e mail program with the current document as an attachment The current file format is used If the document is new and unsaved the format specified in Tools gt Options gt Load Save gt General is used 6 Edit File Use the Edit File icon to activate or deactivate the edit mode 7 Export as PDF Saves the current file to Portable Document Format PDF A PDF file can be viewed and printed on any platform with the original formatting intact provided that supporting software is installed 8 Print File Directly Click the Print File Directly icon to print the active document with the current default print settings These can be found in the Printer Setup dialog which you can call with the Printer Settings menu command 9 Spellcheck Checks the document or the current selection for spelling errors 10 AutoSpellceck On Off Automatically checks spelling as you type and underlines errors 11 Cut Removes and copies the selection to the clipboard 12 Copy Copies the selection to the clipboard 13 Paste Inserts the contents of the clipboard at the location of the cursor and replaces any selected text or objects Click the arrow next to the icon to select the format 14 Format Paintbrush Copies the formatting of the selected text or object and applies the formatting to another text selection or object Click the Forma
343. m in the Navigator right click the item and then choose a command from the context menu The Navigator helps you to reach objects quickly To open quickly by pressing F5 To move the Navigator drag its title bar To dock the Navigator drag its title bar to the left or to the right edge of the workspace To undock the Navigator double click in a free area of the Navigator Click the plus sign next to a category in the Navigator to view the items in the category To view the number of items in a category rest your mouse pointer over the category in the Navigator To jump to an item in the document double click the item in the Navigator If you only want to see the content in a certain category highlight the category and click the Content View icon N The Navigator looks somewhat different in a master document Navigator min T r ar hu me N Content wiew Tables Text frame Graphics OLE objects Bookmarks Sections Hyperlinks gt References E6fleeer CO Write active Ia EE The Navigator You can arrange chapters and move headings in the document by using the Navigator 1 Click the Content View icon to expand the headings if necessary 2 Click on the heading in question 3 Drag the heading to a new location on the Navigator or click the heading in the Navigator list and then click Promote Chapter Demote Chapter Promote Level or Demote Level Promote Chapter Navigator ki Demot
344. m will signal that you see the original unchanged document In addition the program can show you the public key information from the certificate You can compare the public key with the public key that is published on the web site of the certificate authority Whenever someone changes something in the document this change breaks the digital signature To sign a document 1 Choose File gt Express gt Digital Signatures 2 If you have not saved the document since the last change a message box appears Click Yes to save the file 3 After saving you see the Digital Signatures dialog box Click Add to add a public key to the document 4 In the Select Certificate dialog box select your certificate and click OK 5 You see again the Digital Signatures dialog box where you can add more certificates if you want Click OK to add the public key to the saved file A signed document shows an icon in the status bar You can double click the icon to view the certificate Celframe Office Spreadsheet 2008 Chapter 1 Introduction to Celframe Office Spreadsheet Celframe Office Spreadsheet is a spreadsheet application that you can use to calculate analyze and manage your data You can also import and modify Microsoft Excel spreadsheets Supporting the latest XML amp Adobe PDF formats Hide or reveal Design Themes with a single click in Celframe Spreadsheet 2008 using default or create your own themes Celframe Spreadsheet 2008 offers
345. mail Opens a new window in your default e mail program with the current document as an attachment The current file format is used If the document is new and unsaved the format specified in Tools Options Load Save General is used 6 Edit File Use the Edit File icon to activate or deactivate the edit mode 7 Export as PDF Saves the current file to Portable Document Format PDF A PDF file can be viewed and printed on any platform with the original formatting intact provided that supporting software is installed 8 Print File Directly Click the Print File Directly icon to print the active document with the current default print settings These can be found in the Printer Setup dialog which you can call with the Printer Settings menu command 9 Print Perview Displays on screen the way a document will print on paper Print preview eliminates wasting paper as corrections are made before the document is printed 10 Spellcheck Checks the document or the current selection for spelling errors 11 AutoSpellcheck On Off Automatically checks spelling as you type and underlines errors 12 Cut Removes and copies the selection to the clipboard 13 Copy Copies the selection to the clipboard 14 Paste Inserts the contents of the clipboard at the location of the cursor and replaces any selected text or objects Click the arrow next to the icon to select the format 15 Format Paintbrush Copies the formatting of the selected te
346. mat Rows Hide Rows command Manually hidden rows are deleted when you delete a selection that contains them To Remove a Filter From a Cell Range 1 Click in a filtered cell range 2 Choose Data Filter Remove Filter Entering Matrix Formulas The following is an example of how you can enter a matrix formula without going into the details of matrix functions Assume you have entered 10 numbers in Columns A and B A1 A10 and B1 B10 and would like to calculate the sum of each row in Column C Using the mouse select the range C1 C10 in which the results are to be displayed Press F2 or click in the input line of the Formula bar Enter an equal sign KE W N Select the range Al A10 which contains the first values for the sum formula VI Press the key from the numerical keypad 6 Select the numbers in the second column in cells B1 B10 7 End the input with the matrix key combination Shift Ctrl Enter The matrix area is automatically protected against modifications such as deleting rows or columns It is however possible to edit any formatting such as the cell background Chapter 3 Entering Reference Naming Cells A good way of making the references to cells and cell ranges in formulas legible is to give the ranges names For example you can name the range A1 B2 Start You can then write a formula such as SUM Start Even after you insert or delete rows or columns Celframe Off
347. me 1 Right click on the image in the Gallery window 2 Choose Delete from the pop up menu A message appears asking if you want to delete this object 3 Click Yes Insert Preview Title Delete in iS The image is deleted from the Gallery only The original image file is not deleted All the images in a gallery are actually linked files From time to time it is beneficial to update the gallery theme to make sure that all the files are still there To do so right click n the theme where you added at least one file and then select Update from the pop up menu Adding a new theme to the Gallery 1 Click the New Theme button above the list of themes 2 Click the General tab and type a name for the new theme 3 Click the Files tab Backgrounds fuzzy lightgrey C Program Files Celframe Properties of New heme 1 File type lt All Files gt lt No Files gt Add All Setting up a new theme in the Gallery 4 Click Find Files The Select Path dialog opens Browse to the folder that contains the image files for the new theme and click OK 5 Back on the Files tab either click on Add All to install all of the files in the selected folder or use File Type and or select one or more files from the displayed list and click on Add to install a selection of files to the new theme 6 Click OK when finished The files do not show in the large box under the File Type box and under the General tab
348. me Office Writefweb Celframe Office Data Access Category and Frame Format Charks Character style Mone Internet HAA Apply border and shadow Illustration 1 Setting up a new category for automatic captions on graphics Celframe Office Write Web Option Settings chosen on the pages in the Celframe Office Write Web section of the Options dialog box determine how your Write Web documents look and behave while you are working on them Options Celframe Office Write Web Celframe Office Load Save Celframe Office write elframe Office Writes web VIEW This is where you define the basic settings For Celframe Office documents in HTML Format Formatting Aids For example vou decide which contents should be displayed on the screen or printed Grid how the pages are scrolled on the screen in which color keywords are highlighted in the Print source kext and much more Table Background Celframe Office Data Access Charts Internet OHA Celframe Office Write Web View Option Choose Celframe Office Write Web gt View on the Options dialog box If the items on this page are not self explanatory you can easily test their effects in a blank document This is a good page to check if for example you cannot see graphics on the screen or you see field codes instead of the text or numbers you are expecting Options Celframe Office Write Web View Celframe Office l l Load Save Guides lt I Language Settings Gu
349. me Office l l LoadiSave Metrics dating Language Settings Measurement unit Inch Update links when opening Celframe Office Spreadsheet O Always General Tab stops 0 50 F View On request Calculate Sort Lists Never Changes Grid Input settings Print Celframe Office Data Access Press Enter to move selection Charts Press Enter to switch to edit mode Internet _ Expand Formatting Expand references when new columms rows are inserted Highlight selection in column row headers _ Use printer metrics for text Formatting Show overwrite warning when pasting data Referencing Other Sheets In a sheet cell you can show a reference to a cell in another sheet Va 2 Al Open a new empty spreadsheet By way of example enter the following formula in cell Al of Sheet Sheet2 Al Click the Sheet 2 tab at the bottom of the spreadsheet Set the cursor in cell Al there and enter text or a number If you switch back to Sheet1 you will see the same content in cell Al there If the contents of Sheet2 Al change then the contents of Sheet1 Al also change fie a Sheet2 Al At E foa T 1234 E Sheet 1 Sheet 2 In the same way a reference can also be made to a cell from another document provided that this document has already been saved as a file 1 2 Choose File Open to load an existing spreadsheet document Choose File New to open a new spreadsheet document Set the curso
350. me around all objects Choose File Export to The Export dialog opens The Export command writes the picture with all applied filter effects to a file The Save as Picture command in the context menu saves the picture without any filter effects if the picture was inserted as a linked picture An embedded picture will always be saved or exported with filters applied In the File format field select the file format you want for example GIF or JPEG If you only want to export the selected objects mark the Selection box If Selection is not marked the entire page of the document is exported Enter a name for the file and click Export Copying Graphics from the Gallery If you drag a graphic from the Gallery into a text spreadsheet or presentation document the graphic will be inserted there If you release the graphic directly on a draw object please note the following If you move the graphic drag it without pressing any key in which case no additional symbol appears next to the mouse pointer only the attributes are copied from the graphic and applied to the draw object on which you release the mouse button If you copy the graphic drag it while holding down the Ctrl key in which case a plus sign appears next to the mouse pointer the graphic will be inserted as an object If you create a hyperlink drag while holding down Shift and Ctrl in which case a linking arrow appears next to the mouse pointer the drawing object is
351. me for the keyboard configuration file in the File name box or select an existing file from the list If you need to browse to find a file from another location 4 Click Save A confirmation dialog will appear if you are about to overwrite an existing file otherwise there will be no feedback and the file will be saved Loading a saved keyboard configuration To load a saved keyboard configuration file and replace your existing configuration click the Load button near the bottom right of the Customize dialog and then select the configuration file from the Load Keyboard Configuration dialog Resetting the shortcut keys To reset all of the keyboard shortcuts to their default values click the Reset button near the bottom right of the Customize dialog Use this feature with care as no confirmation dialog will be displayed the defaults will be set without any further notice or user input Shortcut Keys The following is a list of shortcut keys for Celframe Office Power Presentation Some of the shortcut keys may be assigned to your desktop system Keys that are assigned to the desktop system are not available to Celframe Office Try to assign different keys either for Celframe Office in Tools Customize Keyboard or in your desktop system You can use the keyboard to access Celframe Office Power Presentation commands as well as to navigate through the workspace Celframe Office Power Presentation uses the same shortcut keys as Celframe Off
352. ment in which consolidation has been defined this data will again be available Applying Goal Seek With the help of Goal Seek you can calculate a value that as part of a formula leads to the result you specify for the formula You thus define the formula with several fixed values and one variable value and the result of the formula Goal Seek Example To calculate annual interest I create a table with the values for the capital C number of years n and interest rate i The formula is I Cr ni Let us assume that the interest rate i of 7 5 and the number of years n 1 will remain constant However you want to know how much the investment capital C would have to be modified in order to attain a particular return I For this example calculate how much capital C would be required if you want an annual return of 15 000 Enter each of the values for Capital C an arbitrary value like 100 000 number of years n 1 and interest rate i 7 5 in one cell each Enter the formula to calculate the interest in another cell Instead of C n and i use the reference to the cell with the corresponding value 1 Place the cursor in the cell containing the interest and choose Tools Goal Seek The Goal Seek dialog appears Goal Seek Default setting Formula cell Target value Variable cell 2 The correct cell is already entered in the field Formula Cell 3 Place the cursor in the field Variable Cell In the
353. mes for the boxes These have the advantage of automatic line breaks Drawing a flow diagram For drawing flow diagrams also known as flowcharts Draw offers a separate toolbar which is reached from an icon found on the main Draw toolbar The easiest way to draw a flowchart is to follow the same setup procedure as for organization charts The necessary symbols are selected from the toolbar and dragged into position The individual symbols must be exactly positioned if the connectors joining them are to form a vertical line The midpoints of all the symbols that lie in a vertical straight line should have the same X coordinate and those on the same level should have the same Y coordinate Select the shapes that are to lie in a vertical straight line and center them with Modify gt Alignment gt Centered For those on a horizontal line select the shapes and center them with Modify gt Alignment gt Center After adding text and setting the fill color you can join individual symbols together and add text to the connectors where necessary Glue points and connectors Connectors are lines or arrows whose ends automatically dock to a glue point of an object Connectors are particularly useful when drawing organization charts flow diagrams and mindmaps The connecting lines between the symbols remain intact even after moving and rearranging of the various drawing blocks Click the button on the Draw toolbar to open the tearoff Connec
354. mn You can then either define extra page styles for pages with different numbers of columns or use sections for pages or parts of pages with different numbers of columns To define the number of columns on a page 1 Choose Format gt Columns or go to the Columns page of the Page Style dialog box 2 On the Columns dialog box choose the number of columns and specify any spacing between the columns and whether you want a vertical separator line to appear between the columns You can use one of Celframe Office Write s predefined column layouts or you can create a customized column layout The preview box located to the right of the Settings area shows how the column layout will look 3 Notice the Apply to box on the right hand side of the dialog box In this case the changes are being applied to the Default page style 4 Click OK to save the changes Columns Settings ance 2 E Ea Apply to Page Style Defa Width and spacing Column Width Spacing 0 00 Autowidth Separator line Line Height Position Defining the number of columns on a page Using a Predefined Column Layout The Settings area displays five predefined column layouts To use one of them click the desired layout Specifying theNumber of Columns If you prefer to create a customized column layout you must specify the number of columns that you want Enter the desired number in the Columns box in the Settings area Distrib
355. mulas You can also nest functions within functions The Function Wizard assists you with nested functions Entering Formulas in The Formula Bar Click the cell in which you want to enter the formula Click the Function icon on the Formula Bar You will now see an equals sign in the input line and you can begin to input the formula After entering the required values press Enter or click Accept to insert the result in the active cell If you want to clear your entry in the input line press Escape or click Cancel You can also enter the values and the formulas directly into the cells even if you cannot see an input cursor Formulas must always begin with an equals sign If you are editing a formula with references the references and the associated cells will be highlighted with the same color You can now resize the reference border using the mouse and the reference in the formula displayed in the input line also changes Show references in color can be deactivated under Tools gt Options gt Celframe Office Spreadsheet gt View If you would like to view the calculation of individual elements of a formula select the respective elements and press F9 For example in the formula SUM A1 B12 SUM C1 D12 select the section SUM C1 D12 and press F9 to view the subtotal for this area N If an error occurs when creating the formula an error massage appears in the active cell Calculating with Dates and Times In Celframe Office Spr
356. n or you can have Celframe Office remove some information automatically Note that unless removed much of this information is retained in a file whether the file is in Celframe Office s default OpenDocument format or has been saved to other formats including PDF Remove personal information on saving Select this checkbox to always remove user data from the file properties when saving the file To manually remove personal information from specific documents clear this checkbox and then use the Delete button under File gt Properties gt General Macro security Click the Macro Security button to open the Macro Security dialog where you can adjust the security level for executing macros and specify trusted sources File sharing options for this document Select the Open this document in read only mode checkbox to restrict this document to be opened in read only mode only This option protects the document against accidental changes It is still possible to edit a copy of the document and save that copy with the same name as the original Select the Record changes checkbox to enable recording changes This is the same as Edit Changes Record To allow other users of this document to apply changes but prevent them from disabling change recording click the Protect button and enter a password Appearance Options Writing editing and page layout are often easier to do when you can see as much as possible of what s going on in your doc
357. n if tiling is enabled there is always a horizon that clips the image this will cause the original layer s contents to show through instead of being replaced with transparency Using all of these controls enables you to make some pretty fantastic changes to your image The following image was modified using many facilities of Celframe Office Studio including Rotate Zoom Adjustments Menu The commands in this menu are meant for adjusting the image in various ways to get the colors to look the way you want them to Guto Level Ctrl le L Black and White Ctrl Shift 3 Brightness f Contrast Ctrl Shifk c CUrVES Ctrl Shift M Hue Saturation Ctrl Shift U Invert Colors CErl ShiFe I Levels CErI L Sepia Ctrl Shift F This image will be used to illustrate what the various adjustments can do Auto Level This can be used to equalize the colors of an image so that overly dark or bright images are brought back to a normal range This is equivalent to using the Levels adjustment and then clicking the Auto button After using this adjustment which has no configuration options the image looks like this Brightness Contrast This may be used to make the colors in an image brighter or darker or to make colors stand out more or less from those around them Original image that is now both brighter and has higher contrast Curves This adjustment may be used to adjust the curves of an image
358. n menu item Note that the bounding rectangle of the selection outline was used to determine the new image s size but that any pixel that was outside of the selection was made transparent Also keep in mind that the checkerboard pattern is used to indicate areas of the image that are transparent It is not actually part of the image Resize This command lets you change the size of the image In so doing the image is either stretched or shrunken to the size you specify You may specify a relative percentage to resize the image by or you specify the absolute pixel or print size that you desire If the Maintain aspect ratio option is checked then typing a new Width value will maintain a proportional Height value and vice versa If you choose to modify the print size of an image the pixel size will be based on the resolution which defaults to 96 pixels per inch which is the same as 37 8 pixels per centimeter You can use this dialog to affect the print size of an image by adjusting just the resolution Note that if you only modify the resolution of the image the pixel size will remain the same and no resampling is performed There are multiple types of resampling that you may choose Resampling is the process of computing what the new pixels should be based on what the old pixels are E Resize New size 222 6 KB Resampling Best Quality CO By percentage 100 pA By absolute size Maintain aspect ratio Fisel si
359. n row on all pages of a document choose Format Express Print Area Edit Rotating Tables Transposing In Celframe Office Spreadsheet there is a way to rotate a spreadsheet so that rows become columns and columns become rows 1 Select the cell range that you want to transpose 2 Choose Edit Cut 3 Click the cell that is to be the top left cell in the result 4 Choose Edit Paste Special 5 In the dialog mark Paste all and Transpose If you now click OK the columns and rows are transposed Paste Special Selection lt lt Operations Paste all None Strings Add Cancel Numbers O Subtract Help Date amp time O Multiply Formulas Divide Motes Formats Objects Options Shift cells Skip empty cells Don t shift Down Right User Defined Functions You can apply user defined functions in Celframe Office Spreadsheet in the following ways e You can define your own functions using the Basic IDE This method requires a basic knowledge of programming e You can program functions as add ins This method requires an advanced knowledge of programming Defining A Function Using Celframe Office Basic 1 Choose Tools Macros Organize Macros Celframe Office Basic Record Macro Run Macro Celframe Office Basic Digital Signature Python BeanShell Macros j AutoLorrect Customize options
360. n to insert a predefined function into the formula Status Bar The Status Bar displays information about the current sheet Setta at o o o inel 1 Position in document Displays the number of the current sheet and the total number of sheets in the spreadsheet 2 Current Page Style Displays the current Page Style Double click to edit the style right click to select another style 3 Zoom Specifies the current page display zoom factor 4 Insert Mode Displays the current insert mode You can toggle between INSRT insert and OVER overwrite This field is only active if the cursor is in the input line of the formula bar or in a cell 5 Selection Mode Displays the current selection mode You can toggle between STD Standard EXT Extend and ADD Add Document Modification Wl PAS If changes to the document have not yet been saved on the hard drive a is displayed in this field on the Status Bar This also applies to new not yet saved documents Standard Formula Date Time Error Warning Displays information about the current document By default the SUM of the contents of the selected cells is displayed Sheet Bar At the bottom of the grid of cells are the sheet tabs These tabs enable access to each individual Sheet with the visible or active sheet having a white tab Clicking on another sheet tab displays that sheet and its tab turns white You can also select multiple sheet tabs at once by holding down the Con
361. nOffice org users perform a wide range of tasks Using Writer s Tools you can back up documents look up and translate words and phrases 9 Window Use the Window menu to open split and arrange windows 10 Help The Help menu allows you to start and control the Celframe Office Help system The Toolbars This submenu lists the toolbars that are available in soreadsheets This overview describes the default toolbar configuration for Celframe Office Standard Bar The Standard bar is available in every Celframe Office application 1 New Creates a new Celframe Office document 2 Open File Opens or imports a file 3 Save Saves the current document 4 Save AS Saves the current document in a different location or with a different file name or file type 5 Document as E mail Opens a new window in your default e mail program with the current document as an attachment The current file format is used If the document is new and unsaved the format specified in Tools Options Load Save General is used 6 Edit File Use the Edit File icon to activate or deactivate the edit mode 7 Export Directly as PDF Saves the current file to Portable Document Format PDF A PDF file can be viewed and printed on any platform with the original formatting intact provided that supporting software is installed 8 Print Click the Print icon to print the active document with the current default print settings These can be found in the Printer
362. nd the name of the link is taken from the URL Name combo box 5 Find Click and choose one of the Internet search engines from the submenu The search term is entered in the URL Name box The list of search engines in the Find submenu is defined in Tools gt Options gt Internet gt Search Page Preview The Page Preview Bar appears when you view the current document in the page preview mode 1 Previous Page Moves back to the previous page in the document This function is only active when you select the Page Preview function on the File menu 2 Next Page Moves forward to the next page in the document This function is only active when you select the Page Preview function on the File menu 3 To Document Begin Moves to the first page of the document This function is only active when you select the Page Preview function on the File menu 4 To Document End Moves to the last page of the document This function is only active when you select the Page Preview function on the File menu 5 Page Preview Two Pages Displays two pages in the Page Preview window Uneven numbers will always appear on the right side even numbers on the left 6 Page Preview Multiple Pages Defines the number of pages displayed on screen Click the arrow next to the icon to open a grid to select the number of pages to be displayed as rows and columns in the preview 7 Book Preview Select to display the first page on the right side in the page pr
363. ndow click the Queries icon in the Databases section then in the Tasks section click Use Wizard to Create Query The Query Wizard window opens Database a Create Query in Design view Description ES Use Wizard to Create Query Tables stil Create Query in SQL view ee Queries Queries Reports Embedded database HSQL database engine O Po X m When working with a query more than one table can be used Since different tables may contain the same field names the format for naming fields in a query is Table name and field name A period is placed between the table name and the field name Query Wizard Select the fields columns for your query Field selection Tables Sorting order Table DYD Collection Search conditions Available Fields Fields in the Query CollectionID Movie Title Actor Date Acquired Grouping conditions Notes Genre o Detail or summary o Grouping Aliases OVervielw First page of the Query Wizard Step 1 Select the fields Select the DVD Collection table from the dropdown list of tables If the Tables selection is not Table DVD Collection click the arrow Click Table DVD Collection in the list to select it Select fields from the DVD Collection table in the Available fields list Click MovieTitle and use the gt button to move it to the Fields in Query list Move the Actor and DateAcquired fields in the same manner Click Next T
364. ndow in this order CollectionID Movie Title Actor DateAcquired Notes and Genre Table Wizard Seb types and Formats Set primary key Create table Select fields for your table This wizard helps you to create a table For your database After selecting a table category and a sample table choose the Fields vou wank to include in your table You can include Fields From more than one sample table Category O Business Sample tables DYVO Collection Available Fields Director Length Producer Purchasedat PurchasePrice Fating Releaseear Review lt Back Personal e e Selected fields CollectionID MovieTitle Actor Date Acquired Motes Genre e Selected Fields from another sample table Click Business as the Category Select Employees from the dropdown list of sample tables Use the gt button to move the Photo field from the Available fields window to the Selected fields window Table Wizard Select fields for your table Select Fields This wizard helps you to create a table For your database After selecting a table category and a sample table choose the Fields vou want to include in your table You can include Fields Set types and Formats From more than one sample table Set primary key Category Create table Business Personal Sample tables Employees Available Fields Selected Fields FirstName CollectionID LastName MovieTitle MiddleMame Actor MobileNumber
365. ned Column Layout Specifying theNumber of Columns Distributing Text Across Columns Formatting Column Width and Spacing Formatting Separator Lines Reverting to a Single Column Layout Changing the Number of Columns for Existing Text Creating Frames Linking Frames Creating Headers and Footers Portrait Headers on Landscape Pages Numbering Pages Restarting Page Numbering Changing the Format of Page Numbers Chapter 5 Working with Graphics Inserting a Graphic From a File Linking a Graphic File Resizing a Graphic Unscaled Resize Celframe Office Gallery Adding an Image to The Gallery Arranging and Aligning Graphics Wrapping Text Around Graphics Anchoring Graphics and Drawing Objects Adding Captions Automatically Chapter 6 Working with Tables Inserting a New Table Creating Nested Tables Using AutoCorrect to Create a Table Default Parameters Formatting Individual Cells Inserting Rows and Columns Merging and Splitting Cells Choosing Table Spacing and Alignment Specifying Text Flow Resizing Rows and Columns Specifying Table Borders Selecting Background Colors and Graphics AutoFormatting Tables Using Spreadsheet Functions in a Table Chapter 7 Miscellaneous Using Shortcut Keys Celframe Office Write Accessibility Shortcut Keys Counting Words Recording a Macro Printing Envelopes Digital Signing of Documents Celframe Office Spreadsheet 2008 Chapter 1 Introduction to Celframe Office Spreadsh
366. ng Fields 1 Grouping Sort options Choose layout Create report Moke The dumm text will be replaced by data From the database when the report is created Group dialog box 5 Sort options We do not want to do any additional sorting Click Next Report Wizard Steps According to which fields do you want to sort the data 1 Field selection Sort by 2 Labeling fields Ascending Date 3 Grouping O Descending soree Then by DOE options Ascendin undefined Choose lawout Descending Create report Then Dy undefined Th eT bw Undefined 6 Choose layout We will be using the default settings for the layout Click Next Report Wizard Steps How do you want your report to look Field selection Layout of data Layout of headers and footers Outline Borders Bubbles Outline Compact Cinema Outline Elegant Controlling Outline Highlighted Default Sart options Outline Modern Drafting Outline Red amp Blue Finances Choose layout Outline indented Borders Flipchart Outline indented Compact Formal with Company Logo Outline indented Elegant Generic Outline indented Highlighted Screenbeans Outline indented Modern Worldmap Outline indented Red amp Blue Labeling Fields Grouping Create report Orientation Mote The dummy text will be replaced Landscape x by data From the database when the report
367. nge Entry required to Yes Otherwise leave Entry required as No Length Unless you have an movie title that exceeds 100 characters in length counting the spaces do not change the length Actor Use the Default setting and set Entry Required to Yes Date Acquired Length default setting Entry required should be No You may not know the date Format Only change the Entry Required setting from No to Yes Notes No changes are required e Genre set Entry Required to Yes Photo Use the default settings When you have finished click Next Table Wizard Set field types and formats Selected Fields Field information CollectionID Field name MovieTitle Set primary key Actor Field Type Text VARCHAR Date cqguired n Create table Nokes Entry require Ves Ww Genre Fhoto MovieTitle Length 100 AS Each field also has a Field Type In Base the field type must be specified These types include text integer date and decimal If the field is going to have general information in it for example a name or a description then you want to use text If the field will always contain a number for example a price the type should be decimal or another appropriate numerical field The wizard picks the right field type so to get an idea of how this works see what the wizard has chosen for different fields Step 3 Set primary key 1 Create a primary key should be checked 2 Select option Use an existing f
368. nged in rows and the Column field the first cell of the range arranged in columns Calculating with Two Variables Consider columns A and B of the sample table above You now want to vary not just the quantity produced annually but also the selling price and you are interested in the profit in each case Expand the table shown above D2 thru D11 contain the numbers 500 1000 and so on up to 5000 In El through H1 enter the numbers 8 10 15 and 20 Ppa s fe fete e 1 Selling 10 10 price Direct 7000 6000 costs A Fixed costs Fixed costsj10000 10000 fioo 4000 2000 a ee Quantity 2000 fiso 1000 2000 pe p B4 om B2 e 2000 6000 B3 1 Select the range D1 H11 Choose Data Multiple Operations With the cursor in the Formulas field click cell B5 A O N Set the cursor in the Rows field and click cell B1 This means that B1 the selling price is the horizontally entered variable with the values 8 10 15 and 20 5 Set the cursor in the Column field and click in B4 This means that B4 the quantity is the vertically entered variable 6 Close the dialog with OK You will see the profits in the range E2 H11 In some cases you must first press F9 to update the table Validity of Cell Contents For each cell you can define entries to be valid Invalid entries to a cell will be rejected The validity rule is activated when a new value is entered If an invalid value has already been i
369. nk Bird m Properties Help Category Illustration Wumbering Arabic 1 2 3 AutoCaption Separator Options Position Hlustration Pink Aird Illustration 1 Pink Bird Defining the caption for an illustration In the Category box you can type any name you want Celframe Office will create a numbering sequence using that name Chapter 6 Working with Tables Inserting a New Table To insert a new table position the cursor where you want the table to appear then use any of the following methods to open the Insert Table dialog box From the main menu select Table gt Insert gt Table e Press Control F1 2 From the Standard toolbar click the Table icon Insert Table Hame Tablei SS SSS Cancel Columns Rows Options Heading Repeat heading The first 1 Don t split table Border AutoFormat Inserting a new table using the Insert Table dialog box Here you can specify the properties for the new table Under Name you can enter a different name than the Celframe Office generated default for the table Under Size specify the initial number of columns and rows for the new table You can change the size of the table later if necessary Under Options set up the initial table characteristics Selecting the check boxes in this section of the dialog produces the following results Heading Defines the first row s in the table as headings The default
370. ns To delete a record right click on the gray box to the left of a row to highlight the entire row and select Delete Rows to remove the selected row Lint CollectionID MovieTitle no Shoes Table Format Row Height Delete Roms Deleting a row in the Data View window Launching Base to work on data sources You can launch Celframe Office Data Access at any time from the View Data Source pane Just right click on a database or the Tables or Queries icons and select Edit Database File Once in Data Access you can edit add and delete tables queries forms and reports Using data sources in Celframe Office documents To insert a field from a table into a document for example a Spreadsheet or Write document click on the field name the gray square at the top of the field list and with the left mouse button held down drag the field onto the document In a Write document it will appear as lt FIELD gt where FIELD is the name of the field you dragged In Spreadsheet it will appear as a text box One common way to use a data source is to perform a mail merge Clicking on the Mail Merge icon Mail Merge the View Data Source pane launches the a small paper and envelope icon on Mail Merge wizard which steps through creating a mail merge document Entering data in a form Records are used to organize the data we enter into a form They also organize the data we enter into a subform Each type of field
371. ns or the cursor is placed in a multiple column text frame you can change the column width and the column spacing by dragging them on the ruler with the mouse When an object an image or a draw object is selected you will see the borders of the object in the ruler You can change the borders by dragging them on the ruler with the mouse If the cursor is placed in a table cell you can change the indents for the contents of the cell by dragging them with the mouse on the ruler You can change the boundary lines of the table on the ruler or by dragging the actual boundary line These icons mark the left indent for the first line of the current paragraph top triangle and the left indent for the other lines of the paragraph bottom triangle a This icon on the right of the ruler marks the right indent of the current paragraph Set left indent Drag the bottom left mark to the right while pressing the mouse button Set left indent of first Drag the top left mark to the right while line pressing the mouse button Set right indent Drag the mark on the right to the left while pressing the mouse button In order to change the left indent starting with the second line of a paragraph hold down the ay click the triangle on the bottom left and drag it to the right Tabs that have been set are not changed when indenting a paragraph If the set tabs end up outside the margins of the paragraph they are no longer displayed but they s
372. ns change according to the type of input displaying accept and reject buttons whenever the input is not a formula Use the green Accept button to accept the input made in a cell or simply select a different cell In case Celframe Power Presentation wrongly recognized the type of input it is possible to change it using the toolbar or from the Format gt Cells in the main menu bar Formatting spreadsheet cells Normally for the purpose of a presentation it may be necessary to increase considerably the size of the font as well as matching it to the style used in the presentation The fastest and most flexible way to format the embedded spreadsheet is to make use of styles When working on an embedded spreadsheet it is possible to access the cell styles created and use them It is however recommended to create specific cell styles for presentation spreadsheets as the cell styles are likely to be unsuitable when working within Celframeframe Power Presentation To apply a style or indeed manual formatting of the cell attributes to a cell or group of cells simultaneously first select the range to which the changes will apply A range consists of one or more cells normally forming a rectagular area A selected range consisting of more than one cell can be easily recognized because all its cells except the active one have a black background To select a multiple cells range 1 Click on the first cell belonging to the range either the left top cell o
373. nserted into the cell or if you insert a value in the cell either with drag and drop or by copying and pasting the validity rule will not take effect N You can choose Tools Detective at any time and choose the command Mark Invalid Data to display which cells contain invalid values Using Cell Contents Validity 1 Select the cells for which you want to define a new validity rule 2 Choose Data Validity 3 On the Criteria tab page enter the conditions for new values entered into cells 4 In the Allow field select an option 5 If you select Whole Numbers values such as 12 5 are not allowed Choosing Date allows date information both in the local date format as well as in the form of a serial date Similarly the Time condition permits time values such as 12 00 or serial time numbers Text Length stipulates that cells are allowed to contain text only Select List to enter a list of valid entries Validity Input Help List Allow blank cells Show selection list Sort entries ascending Entries After you have determined the conditions for cell validity you can use the other two tab pages to create message boxes On the Input Help tab page enter the title and the text of the tip which will then be displayed if the cell is selected On the Error Alert tab page select the action to be carried out in the event of an error If you select Stop as the action invalid entries are not accepted
374. nt Borders Background Cell Protection Category Format Language All English USA o Default User defined 1 234 Mumber 1 234 00 illen 1 234 41 234 1 234 00 USD Scientific 1 234 00 USD 4157 00 Options Decimal places Negative numbers red Leading zeroes Thousands separator Format code 409 0 00 RED 409 40 00 Format Cell Defining Database Ranges 1 Select the three column area and define the selected area as a database range by choosing Data gt Express gt Define Range 2 The selected range already appears in the Define Database Range dialogue Be sure to mark the check box Contains column headers so that the first row is correctly taken into account This box becomes visible when the More button is clicked 3 Enter a name for the range 4 Close the dialogue with OK The selected range is now defined as a database range which among other things means that the rows records can be conveniently sorted Any sort lists and filters that have been defined for the database range will also be updated Define Database Range Mame Database Range Sheet F4d1 C 1 Options Contains column labels _ Insert or delete cells Keep formatting Don t save imported data SOuUrce Operations Define database range Sorting Database Ranges Select a range of cells and define these as a database range by choosing Data gt Express gt Define Range Set the cursor
375. nt quality Gradient stripes Intermediate color Convert colors to grayscale Load Save Language Settings Celframe Office Write Celframe Office Writes Web Celframe Office Data Access Charts Internet Normal print quality Resolution 200 DPI default Include transparent objects AAA eee Printer warnings d Paper size Transparency Fi Faper orientation Choosing general printing options Path Options You can change the location of files associated with or used by Celframe Office to suit your working situation In a Windows system for example you might want to store documents by default somewhere other than My Documents 1 In the Options dialog click Celframe Office gt Paths 2 To make changes select an item in the list and click Edit On the Select Paths dialog add or delete folders as required and then click OK to return to the Options dialog Note that many items have at least two paths listed one to a shared folder which might be on a network and one to a user specific folder normally on the user s personal computer You can use the entries in the Celframe Office Paths dialog to compile a list of files such as those containing AutoText that you need to back up or copy to another computer Options Celframe Office Paths E Celframe Office User Data Paths used by Celframe Office General Type Path Memory AutoCorrect CiiDocuments and SettingsiUsertApplication Data Celframecrf
376. nter Press F6 to place the cursor inside the document Inserting Text Tables 1 Press F6 until the focus is on the Standard toolbar 2 3 Press the right arrow key until the Table icon is selected Press the down arrow key and then use the arrow keys to select the number of columns and rows to include in the table Press Enter Press F6 to place the cursor inside the document Shortcut Keys You can use shortcut keys to quickly perform common tasks in Celframe Office This section lists the default shortcut keys for Celframe Office Write Function Keys for Celframe Office Write Fe ovenduasouceview a C Shortcut Keys for Celframe Office Write Ctrl Plus Key Calculates the selected text and copies the result to the clipboard Ctrl Hyphen Custom hyphens hyphenation set by you Ctrl Shift minus sign Non breaking dash is not used for hyphenation Ctrl multiplication sign only on number Run macro field pad Ctrl Space Non breaking spaces Non breaking spaces are not used for hyphenation and are not expanded if the text is justified Alt Enter Inserting a new paragraph directly before or after a section or a table Arrow Right Move cursor to right Ctril Home Go to start of document Ctrl Shift Home Go and select text to start of document Ctrl Shift Tab Use previous suggestion with Automatic Word Completion Alt W Spellchecker dialog Call back the original unknown wo
377. ntext menu including adding an additional print range removing the scaling and inserting additional manual line and column breaks Printing Sheets in Landscape Format In order to print a sheet you have a number of interactive options available under View Page Break Preview Drag the delimiter lines to define the range of printed cells on each page To print in landscape format proceed as follows l 2 Go to the sheet to be printed Choose Format Page The command is not visible if the sheet has been opened with write protection on In that case click the Edit File icon on the Standard bar 3 Select the Page tab Select the Landscape paper format and click OK Choose File Print You will see the Print dialog Depending on the printer driver and the operating system it may be necessary to click the Properties button and to change your printer to landscape format there In the Print dialog under Print range select the pages to be printed All All sheets will be printed Pages Enter the pages to be printed The pages will also be numbered from the first sheet onwards If you see in the Page Break Preview that Sheet will be printed on 4 pages and you want to print the first two pages of Sheet2 enter 5 6 here Selection Only the selection will be printed If cells are selected these are printed If no cells are selected all those sheets whose names at the bottom on the sheet tabs are selected will be
378. o bends e Straight e Curved 9 Lines and Arrow Available ten tools for drawing lines and arrows 10 3D Objects Open the 3D Objects toolbar where you can add 3D shapes to the current slide 11 Basic Shapes Opens the Basic Shapes toolbar which you can use to insert graphics into your document 12 Symbol Shapes Opens the Symbol Shapes toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document 13 Block Arrows Opens the Block Arrows toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document 14 Flowcharts Opens the Flowcharts toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document 15 Callouts Opens the Callouts toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document 16 Stars Opens the Stars toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document 17 Points Enables you to edit points on your drawing 18 Glue points Enables you to edit glue points on your drawing 19 Fontwork Gallery The Fontwork Gallery displays previews of Fontwork objects 20 From file Inserts a picture into the current document 21 Gallery Opens the Gallery where you can select graphics 22 Effects Specifies the settings and enhancements for the current effect 23 Alignment Modifies the alignment of selected objects Line and Filling Bar The Line and Filling bar contains commands for the current editing mode gt E k v S Color na C Blue 8 he bbe ah bl a a 1 Styles and Formatting ir Specifie
379. o change the order of the fields select the field you want to move and click the up or down arrow to move it up or down Fields in the Query DYVD Collection Actor DYVD Collection Movie Title DY D Collection Date Acquired 5 W Step 2 Select the sorting order In our query the Actor is most important The Movie title is less important and the date acquired is of least importance Of course if we were interested in what movie we bought on a given day the date acquired would be the most important Query Wizard Ed Steps Select the sorting order 1 Field selection 4scendin Sorting order OVD Collection Actor Oa Descending 3 Search conditions H Then by 4 Detail or summary 4scendin undefined ka O cenami 5 Grouping Descending 1 Click the first Sort by dropdown list a Click DVD Collection Actor to select it b If you want the artists to be listed in alphabetical order a z select Ascending on the right If you want the artist listed in reverse order z a select Descending on the right 2 Click the second Sort by dropdown list a Click DVD Collection MovieTitle b Select Ascending or Descending according to the order you want 3 Repeat this process for DVD Collection DateAcquired 4 Click Next Step 3 Select the search conditions They allow us to compare the name we entered with the names of the actor in our database and decide whether to include a particular actor
380. o export a combination of page ranges and single pages by using a format like 3 6 8 10 12 Selection Exports whatever material is selected Images section Lossless compression Images are stored without any loss of quality Tends to make large files when used with photographs Recommended for other images JPEG compression Allows for varying degrees of quality A setting of 90 tends to work well with photographs small file size little perceptible loss Reduce image resolution Lower DPI dots per inch images have lower quality W EPS images with embedded previews are exported only as previews EPS images without embedded previews are exported as empty placeholders General section Tagged PDF Includes special tags into the corresponding PDF tags Some tags that are exported are table of contents hyperlinks and controls This option can increase file sizes significantly Export notes Exports notes in Celframe Office Write and Calc documents as PDF notes Export bookmarks Exports bookmarks Create PDF form Submit format Choose the format of submitting forms from within the PDF file This setting overrides the control s URL property that you set in the document There is only one common setting valid for the whole PDF document PDF sends the whole document FDF sends the control contents HTML and XML Most often you will choose the PDF format Export automatically inserted blank pages If selected a
381. o show where you have added or deleted material or changed formatting Later you or another person can review and accept or reject each change Not all changes are recorded For example changing a tab stop from align left to align right and changes in formulas equations or linked graphics are not recorded Preparing a Document for Review When you send a document to someone else to review or edit you may want to prepare it first so that the editor or reviewer does not have to remember to turn on the revision marks After you have protected the document any user must enter the correct password in order to turn off the function or accept or reject changes 1 Open the document To check whether it contains multiple versions click File gt Versions If multiple versions are listed save the current version as a separate document with a different name and use this new document as the review copy 2 With the review copy open make sure that change recording is turned on The Tools gt Track Changes menu item has a check mark next to it when recording is turned on 3 Click Tools gt Protect Document On the Enter Password dialog box type a password twice and click OK Passwords must contain at least five characters It is not necessary to password protect the document while preparing it for review Compare and Merge Documents Sometimes reviewers may forget to record the changes they make This is not a problem with Celframe Offi
382. o show you that you re in the right field In the subject field add a topic of your mail message If you don t specify a subject you don t have to you will be asked to do so before the mail message is sent Then press Send Add attachments The first thing you need to do is open a new message c Compose no su bject Morten W Petersen Project Manager Nidelven IT Email morten nidelven it no Phone 47 45 44 00 69 Blog http wew blogologue com Having done that you need to press the attachment button Right next to the attachment button is there also an arrow you ve got 2 choices either attach a file or a web address Click on the attachment button and a window for browsing your folders will appear for your hard drive File s Web Page Locate the file you want to attach from your local directory and press open Your mail message now has a file attached If you want to add more attachments to the same email simply repeat the process If you want to attach a web page simply choose Attach web page and fill in the URL for example http www celframe com l Compose no subject Morten W Petersen lt motern nidelven it n Project Manager Hideiven IT Email morten nidelven it no Phone 47 45 44 00 69 Morten W Petersen Blog http www blogologue com aaa Address book Once in a while you may need to att
383. o that it is in front of other objects 12 Send to Back Moves the selected object to the bottom of the stacking order so that it is behind the other objects 13 Alignment Modifies the alignment of selected objects 14 Change Anchor Allows you to switch between anchoring options Bullets and Numbering Bar The Bullets and Numbering bar contains functions to modify the structure of numbered paragraphs including changing the order of paragraphs and defining different paragraph levels X Ai E ayt p HEN Dd lhl dl Assigns bullet points to the selected paragraphs or removes them from bulleted paragraphs 1 Bullets On Off 2 Numbering On Off Adds or removes numbering from the selected paragraphs 3 Numbering Off Turns off numbering or bullets in the current paragraph or selected paragraphs 4 Promote One Level Moves the selected paragraph up one level in the numbering or bullets hierarchy 5 Demote One Level Moves the selected paragraph down one level in a numbering or bullets hierarchy 6 Promote One Level With Subpoints Shifts paragraphs with subpoints up one numbering level This is only visible when the cursor is positioned within numbered or bulleted text 7 Demote One Level With Subpoints Shifts paragraphs with subpoints down one level This is only visible when the cursor is positioned within numbered or bulleted text 8 Insert Unnumbered Entry Inserts a paragraph without numbering The existing numbering will
384. objects special characters and other files 5 Format Contains commands for formatting the layout and the contents of your document 6 Tools Contains spelling tools a gallery of object art that you can add to your document as well as tools for configuring menus and setting program preferences 7 Slide Show Contains commands and options for running a presentation 8 eVoice eVoice is an easy to use extension to embed voice comments in your slides It provides the capabilities of recording and adding audio commentaries to your slide shows 9 Bluetooth Menu It similarly provides a wireless network for transferring files and pictures that you have acquired on a mobile device 10 Author s Tools Is a set of utilities designed to help Celframe Office users perform a wide range of tasks Using Writer s Tools you can back up documents look up and translate words and phrases 11 Window Contains commands for manipulating and displaying document windows 12 Help The Help menu allows you to start and control the Celframe Office Help system Standard Bar The Standard bar is available in every Celframe Office application Ube Fad ery E A Ss OO Bd BOD ey tity cet ela ahah a 1 New Creates a new Celframe Office document 2 Open File Opens or imports a file 3 Save Saves the current document 4 Save As Saves the current document in a different location or with a different file name or file type 5 Document as E
385. odify outgoing server settings by choosing Account Settings from the Tools menu Account Wizard Account Name Enter the name by which you would like to refer to this account for example Work Account Home Account or News Account Account Name matern nidelvenit no You will get a summary Check your information and if everything is OK press finish Account Wirard Congratulations Please verify that the information below is correct Account Name motern nidelvenit no Email Address motern nidelyen it no Incoming User Name motern nidelven t no Incoming Server Name mail nidelven t no Incoming Server Type IMAP Outgoing User Name motern nidelven t no Outgoing Server Name SMTP mail nidelvent no Click Finish to save these settings and exit the Account Wizard Mark your email address and press Get mail You are immediately asked for the password to your email account Fill in and press OK You can also choose if you want Celframe Office Mail to remember the password Don t save the password until you re sure it s typed in correctly because it is hard to change it once it has been saved Een Ceiegee Pie fel Pe py aT cenina Ya irene aaa Cb eats e ML aAa i E D aea ee e Eiri E ara a Pwa Or mea r e e 1 Po C Use Password Manager to remember this password If you have filled in everything correctly you should now be able to enjoy Celframe Office Mail
386. oducing shadows in different directions and magnitude Mosaic The Mosaic filter takes a number of pixels and converts them into a single color rectangular tile The whole picture is tiled and appears to be a mosaic Pictures below had an element resolution of 5 pixels The picture on the right had in addition the Enhance edges option selected and with the greater contrast at the edges appears to be a little sharper If your picture is linked filters are applied only to the current view The stored picture is not Rox changed When you close the document all filtering is lost You should ensure that you export the picture to create a copy with all the filters applied File gt Export to If you have embedded the graphic in the document all filters are applied directly on the embedded graphic You cannot remove filtering applied to a picture If you do not want to retain a filter you must use Edit gt Undo to return to an earlier state of editing After you save and close the document the filter effects are permanent Eyedropper Use the eyedropper to change one color in a picture for another or set the the color as transparent The tool works always on the entire picture you cannot select only a region for editing The changes are carried out on the graphic itself For this reason you cannot use the eyedropper tool on a linked graphic If you try you will receive the following message Q This graphic is linked to a
387. of 500 from 500 to 5000 3 Mark the range D2 E11 and thus the values in column D and the empty cells alongside in column E 4 Choose Data Multiple operations 5 With the cursor in the Formulas field click cell B5 6 Set the cursor in the Column field and click cell B4 This means that B4 the quantity is the variable in the formula which is replaced by the marked column values 7 Close the dialog with OK You will see the profit in column E Calculating with Several Formulas Simultaneously 1 Delete column E 2 Enter the following formula in C5 B5 B4 You are now calculating the annual profit per item sold Select the range D2 F11 thus three columns Choose Data Multiple Operations With the cursor in the Formulas field mark cells B5 thru C5 Set the cursor in the Columns field and click cell B4 XN ODO OO A UW Close the dialog with OK You will now see the profits in column E and the annual profit per item in column F Multiple Operations Across Rows and Columns Celframe Office allows you to carry out joint multiple operations for columns and rows in so called cross tables The formula cell has to refer to both the data range arranged in rows and the one arranged in columns Select the range defined by both data ranges and call the multiple operation dialog Enter the reference to the formula in the Formula field The Row field is used to enter the reference to the first cell of the range arra
388. of the Celframe Office Help for the current application You can scroll through the Help pages and you can search for index terms or any text 22 What s This Enables extended help tips under the mouse pointer till the next click Formatting Bar The Formatting bar contains basic commands for applying manually formatting E Jo E CO Arial 10 Y bB P Tihhi Mm tI ill I i a E A O R a a a 8l Bl Fa 1 Styles and Formatting Specifies whether to show or hide the Styles and Formatting window which is where you can assign and organize Styles 2 Font Name Allows you to select a font name from the list or enter a font name directly You can enter several fonts separated by semicolons Celframe Office uses each named font in succession if the previous fonts are not available 3 Font Size Allows you to choose between different font sizes from the list or to enter a size manually 4 Bold Makes the selected text bold If the cursor is in a word the entire word is made bold If the selection or word is already bold the formatting is removed 5 Italic Makes the selected text italic If the cursor is in a word the entire word is made italic If the selection or word is already italic the formatting is removed 6 Underline Underlines or removes underlining from the selected text 7 Align Left Aligns the contents of the cell to the left 8 Align Center Horizontally Horizont
389. of the indexes and tables according to your individual needs Live hyperlinks and bookmarks let you jump directly to the corresponding items in the text Desktop Publishing with Celframe Office Write Celframe Office Write contains numerous desktop publishing and drawing tools to assist you in creating professionally styled documents such as brochures newsletters and invitations You can format your documents with multi column layouts text frames graphics tables and other objects Calculations Text documents in Celframe Office have an integrated calculation function that helps you execute sophisticated calculations or logical links You can easily create a table in a text document in order to perform calculations Creating Drawings The Celframe Office Write drawing tool lets you create drawings graphics legends and other types of drawings directly in text documents Inserting Graphics You can insert pictures with different formats into a text document including graphics with a JPG or GIF format The most common formats can be edited directly in a text document with the image editor In addition the Gallery provides a collection of clipart graphics organized by theme Flexible Application Interface The program interface is designed so that you can configure it according to your preferences including customizing icons and menus You can position various program windows such as the Styles and Formatting window or the Navigator as
390. ols gt Word Count Celframe Office displays the number of words and characters in the selection as well as the number of words in the document You can also see the number of words and characters and other information in the entire document in File gt Properties gt Statistics Properties of CO Write doc General Description User Defined Internet Number of Pages 1276 Mumber of Tables B6 Number of Graphics 129 Mumber of OLE Objects T Mumber of Paragraphs 1665 Number of Ww ords 22224 Mumber of Characters 129917 Number of Lines Counting The Words Properties Chapter 4 Formatting Pages Setting up Basic Page Layout Using Styles In Celframe Office Write page styles define the basic layout of all pages including page size margins the placement of headers and footers borders and backgrounds number of columns and so on Celframe Office Write comes with several page styles which you can build on or modify and you can define new custom page styles You can have one or many page styles in a single document All pages in a Celframe Office Write document are based on styles If you do not specify a page style Celframe Office Write uses the Default page style Any modifications of page styles including the Default page style apply only to the document you are working on If you want the changes to be the default for all documents you need to put the changes into a template and mak
391. on Outgoing Server 5MTF M Aah tes ae C Documents and Settings admin My Documents Teme Choose Attach my vCard to messages Outgoing Server SMTP S See Set as Default Highlight your mail address on the left hand side e Check the box which says Attach this signature e With the browse button to the right locate your signature txt e Press OK Send a mail to yourself to see the result if you don t like it you can always edit the text file Write Send mail In this part of the introduction will show you how to send a mail address book and other more advanced features R i i z ia You got two options either use the button on the toolbar or press Write new message this will open a new window where you can edit your mail and send it a Compose no subj ect I Morten W Fetersen Project Manager KHidelven IT Email morten nidelven it na Phone 47 45 44 0060 69 Blog Attp wew blogologue com sete f eA Hi eae ot E7 a 4 a TAn As you see the signature is already added in the bottom For anyone who receive your mail message you need to fill in a mail address This is done in the To field just click on it and a cursor will appear t
392. on Type or paste your text in the text box These text boxes are known as Layout text boxes Using text boxes created from the text box tool In Normal View 1 Click on the Text icon on the Drawing toolbar 2 Click and drag to draw a box for the text on the slide Do not worry about the vertical size and position the text box will expand if needed as you type 3 Release the mouse button when finished The cursor appears in the text box which is now in edit mode 4 Type or paste your text in the text box 5 Click outside the text box to deselect it m G G a CELFRAME OFFICE POWER PRESENTATION a Selected text box showing the green resizing handles and text toolbar Moving a Text Box In Normal view notice how the pointer changes from an arrow to an l beam as you move it over the text in a text box 1 Click when the pointer becomes an I beam The text box is now in edit mode witha gray border and green resizing handles 2 Move the I beam or pointer over the gray border Notice how it changes shape becoming a four headed arrow or a similar shape depending on the operating system and user s settings 3 When the four headed arrow appears click and drag to move the text box An empty dashed line box shows where your text box will be placed 4 Release the mouse button when the text box is in the desired position Resizing a Text Box In Normal view when the green resizing handles are displayed move the I beam or
393. on use the arrow keys to navigate to the slide s that you want to add and press Spacebar again To deselect a slide navigate to the slide and then press Spacebar Copying a slide 1 Use the arrow keys to navigate to the slide that you want to copy and then press Ctrl C 2 Move to the slide where you want to paste the copied slide and then press Ctrl V 3 Select Before or After the current slide and then click OK Moving a slide 3 Use the arrow keys to navigate to the slide that you want to move and then press Ctrl X 4 Navigate to the slide where you want to move the slide and then press Ctrl V 5 Select Before or After the current slide and then click OK Function Keys for Celframe Office Power Presentation fone ews ston Shortcut Keys in Slide Shows a Spacebar or Right arrow or Down arrow or Play next effect if any else go to next slide Page Down or Enter or Return or N Alt Page Down Go to next slide without playing effects number Enter Type a number of a slide and press Enter to go to the slide Left arrow or Up arrow or Page Up or Play previous effect again If no previous effect Backspace or P exists on this slide show previous slide fone mio ist stein este stow cd iio ste si shaw Bor Show black screen until next key or mouse wheel event Wor Show white screen until next key or mouse wheel event Shortcut Keys in the Normal View Fit page in window Divide Key Zoom in
394. on or by right clicking the object and selecting Arrange from the context menu then selecting from the list of Bring Forward or Send Backward options Selecting Several Objects To select or reselect several objects one by one hold down the Shift key and click on the various objects to be selected or deselected One click on an object selects it a second click reselects it Moving and Dynamically Adjusting an Object s Size There are several ways of moving or changing the size of an object The method described here is called dynamic in the sense that it is carried out using the mouse When you dynamically change an object remember to check the right hand area of the Status Bar at the bottom of your screen This shows detailed information about the ongoing manipulation For example during a resizing manipulation the following information is displayed The Information field shows which object is selected the current position X Y coordinates and object dimensions width x height of the object being moved are shown The information displayed changes as the mouse is moved The units of measurement displayed are those selected under Tools gt Express gt Options gt Celframe Office gt General wo 3 12 3 84 223 1 SE 2 2 45 uF Slide 1 f 1 Layout Default Object Position Object Current proportional Dimension nage size Status bar during dynamic adjustment Dynamic Movement of Objects To move an object select it and then
395. ons You can define replacements for any fonts that might appear in your documents If you receive from someone else a document containing fonts that you do not have on your system Celframe Office will substitute fonts for those it does not find You might prefer to specify a different font from the one the program chooses 1 In the Options dialog click Celframe Office gt Fonts 2 On the Celframe Office Fonts dialog Select the Apply Replacement Table checkbox Select or type the name of the font to be replaced in the Font box If you do not have this font on your system it will not appear in the drop down list in this box so you need to type it in In the Replace with box select a suitable font from the drop down list of fonts installed on your computer 3 The checkmark to the right of the Replace with box turns green Click on this checkmark A row of information now appears in the larger box below the input boxes Select the checkboxes under Always and Screen 4 In the bottom section of the dialog you can change the typeface and size of the font used to display source code such as HTML and Basic in macros Options Celframe Office Fonts GE Celframe Office User Data Aoply replacement table General Memory Font Replace with View Print Calibri Cambria Math ee Security Appearance Accessibility Java Load Save Language Settings Celframe Office Write Celframe Office Writes Web Celframe Office Data Access C
396. oom This command allows you to rotate and pan in all three dimensions Merge Layer Down This will take the current layer and merge it into the layer that is below it Flatten Image This takes the multiple layers of an image and combines them into one layer It is only available if the image has more than one layer Rotate Zoom This command in the Layers menu allows you to do free rotation about all 3 axes X Y and Z2 Rotate Zoom Roll Rotate Fine Tuning Angle Twist Angle Twist Radius Tiling _ Preserve background i Reset All There are three areas that you may adjust Roll Rotate This allows you to rotate about the Z axis by dragging the mouse around the perimeter There is also a ball globe in the center which allows you to rotate about the other two axes X and Y Rotating the perimeter Z axis controller will also rotate the globe Pan This allows you to slide the image around so that you can get the right portion in view of the canvas Zoom This allows you to slide the image back and forth to focus on the portion of the image that you are interested in There are also two checkboxes Tiling If the image is rotated tilted or panned in such a way that it does not fill the canvas this will cause the image to start repeating on itself in such a way that it tiles the canvas Preserve Background If there are parts of the canvas that are not covered by the image eve
397. oosing Grid options Print Options On the Celframe Office Write Web Print page you can choose which items are printed with the document by default These options are in addition to those on the Celframe Office Print page Some considerations When you are working on drafts and you want to save printer ink or toner you might want to deselect some of the items in the Contents section The Print black selection causes color text but not graphics to print as black on a color printer on a black and white printer this option causes color text to print as solid black instead of shades of grey dithered Contrast Print black with Convert colors to greyscale on the Options Ce frame Office Print page which prints all graphics as greyscale on color printers On black and white printers color in graphics normally prints as greyscale If you are printing double sided on a non duplexing printer you might choose to print only left or right pages then turn the stack over and print the other pages Depending on how your printer ejects pages face up or face down you might need to print the pages in reverse order so they stack in the correct order as they are printed Options Celframe Office Write Web Print Oe Ge CelFrame Office Loads Saye Language Settings CelFrame Office Write Celframe Office Write web VIE Formatting Aids Grid Table Background Celframe Office Data Access Charts Internet Table Options On the
398. or This is short for exclusive OR which is an advanced blending mode that is primarily used for image analysis and not for drawing or image composition Main Window The Celframe Office Studio user interface is broken up in to 10 major areas New Image 53 Celframe Office Studio SBER History T New Image Colors z z ore aA Pinay 1 BAB akon TT Fea TE 5 sy aiee E T J gt abstract_ 0012 Background are i ee Pal Selection top left 0 0 Bounding rectangle size 1600 x 1200 Area 1 920 000 pixels square in 1600 x 1200 tj 635 361 10 1 Title Bar This tells you the name of the image you are working with as well as the current zoom level Celframe Office you are using 2 Menu Bar This is where you can access the various menu items 3 Toolbar Right below the menus is the toolbar which contains several buttons and controls for executing various commands and adjusting parameters for the active tool 4 Image List Each image that has been opened has a thumbnail displayed in the image list This works much like a tabbed web browser just click on an image to switch to it 5 Image Canvas This is where the image is visible and is the area where you may draw and perform other actions 6 Tools Window This where the active tool is highlighted and where you may choose from other tools 7 History Window Everything you ve done to an image since you opened it is listed in this window 8
399. or New Module button and enter a name for the library or module 7 Enter a name for the new macro in the Macro name text box Do not use Basic keywords as a name 8 Click Save gi Record Macro AutoCorrect Run Macro Customize Cirganize Macros Options Digital Signature Express Organize Dialogs Accessing Macro Printing Envelopes Printing envelopes involves two steps setup and printing To set up an envelope to be printed by itself or with your document 1 Click Insert gt Express gt Envelope from the menu bar 2 In the Envelope dialog box start with the Envelope tab Verify add or edit the information in the Addressee and Sender boxes the from on the envelope You can type information directly into the Addressee and Sender boxes or use the right hand drop down lists to select the database or table from which you can draw the envelope information if desired 3 On the Format page verify or edit the positioning of the addressee and the sender information The preview area on the lower right shows the effect of your positioning choices Envelope Envelope Format Addressee Database Table Database field Sender Choosing addressee and sender information for an envelope To format the text of these blocks click the Edit buttons to the right In the drop down list you have two choices Character and Paragraph In Character you can choose Fonts Sizes Fonts
400. ord 9 2000 P Template dot My videos Microsoft Word 6 0 95 doc Microsoft Word 95 Template dot Rich Text Format rit Tet Ctt Text Encoded tt HTML Document Ceframe Office Writer html Microsoft Word 2007 Document docx Microsoft WinWord 5 doc WordPerfect Document wpd Ichitara 897 10 11 jtd Ichitaro 89 10 11 Template jtt Hangul WP 97 C hwp WPS 20000fice 1 0 Cwps Celframe Document Spreadsheet ods 0 Celframe Document Spreadsheet Template ots iy Network File name Celframe Office 1 0 Spreadsheet sxc 3 ee a Celtrame Office 1 0 Spreadsheet Template stc Files of type All files Cancel Version Read onhy Open Document This method opens Word doc files as well as Celframe Office files and other formats You can also open an existing Celframe OfficeWrite document using the same methods you would use to open any document in your operating system Saving a Document There are three ways to save a document in Write e Press Control sS Select File gt Save e Click the Save button on the main toolbar You also can tell Write to save your document automatically at regular intervals To enable this you must configure Celframe Office to save all documents automatically 1 Select Tools gt Options The Options window appears 2 Select Load Save gt General 3 Click on Save AutoRecovery information every This enables the box to set the interv
401. ordingta accross acheive acheived acheiving acn acommodate acomodate actualy additinal Custom Quotes Quotes Word Completion Completion With Text only Hew SS ait about a about it absence accessories accident accommodate according ta across achieve achieved achieving can accommodate accommodate actually additional AutoCorrect Dialog Box Using word completion If Word Completion is enabled Celframe Office Write tries to guess which word you are typing and offers to complete this word for you To accept the suggestion press Enter Otherwise continue typing Many people prefer not to use Word Completion If you do not want to use it select Tools gt AutoCorrect gt Word Completion and uncheck Enable word completion You can customize word completion from the Tools gt AutoCorrect gt Word Completion page Add append a space automatically after an accepted word Show the suggested word as a tip hovering over the word rather than completing the text as you type e Change the maximum number of words remembered for word completion and the length of the smallest words to be remembered Delete specific entries from the word completion list Change the key that accepts a suggested entry the options are right arrow End key Return Enter Space bar and Tab AutoCorrect Replacements and exceptions For language English USA Replace Exceptions Custom
402. ork Gallery icon 4 In the Fontwork Gallery dialog select a Fontwork style and click OK The Fontwork object is inserted into your document Fontwork Gallery Select a Fontwork style ont work cela Eonjyork contor 5 Double click the object to enter text edit mode 6 Replace the default Fontwork text with your own text 7 Press Esc to exit text edit mode To edit a Fontwork object Click the Fontwork object The Fontwork toolbar is displayed If you do not see the Fontwork toolbar choose View gt Toolbars gt Fontwork Click an icon in the Fontwork toolbar Fontwork Gallery The following icons are available Fontwork Gallery adds another Fontwork object P Fontwork Shape a Fontwork Same Letter Height Fontwork Shape edits the shape ontwork Same Letter Melgnes Fontwork Same Letter Heights changes the height of characters Fontwork Alignment AW Fontwork Character Spacin Fontwork Alignment aligns the text j 7 pore Fontwork Character Spacing changes the character spacing and kerning To edit more Fontwork attributes 1 Click the Fontwork object to select it 2 Select the properties from the Drawing Object Properties toolbar You can change the line width line color fill color fill style and more Chapter 3 Adding and Formatting Pictures Inserting a picture from a file Inserting a picture from a file is quick and easy If the layout of the slide already contains a p
403. ormat created by Celframe Photoalbum 2008 Blue Shifted Classic FreshClassic Metallic Radiant Slick Smart Shifted Lacking down ar The siea Cwenookuing a beautiful pond Bear tracks IE mi ji Screenshot 2 5 Classic v1 4 Ce elframe Photoalbum 2008 This classic theme provides contact sheets of thumbnails as well as javascript based slideshows for each subalburm in your album Results mimick the original format created by Celframe Photoalbum 2008 Save to C Documents and Settings User My DocumentsiMy Pictures wy E save X cancer Fresh Classic This classic theme provides contact sheets of thumbnails as well as javascript based slideshows for each subalbum in your album Results mimick the original format created by Celframe Photoalbum 2008 Save As Theme Preview BlueShifted Classic FreshClassic Metallic Radiant Slick SmartShifted Fresh Classic v1 0 Daniel This classic theme provides contact sheets of thumbnails as well as javascript based slideshows for each subalbum in your album Results mimick the original format created by Celframe Photoalbum 2008 Save to C Documents and Settings UseriMy Documents My Pictures Metallic A modern theme using frames Visitors may use the navigation bar for fast switching between collections Save is Themes Theme Preview isemi a My Photo Album 2005 Classic Veron peice dure yer 204 FreshClassic Metallic Radiant Slick SmarkShifk
404. ormation for it on the next page The title contains an author name e mail address and home page along with any additional information you want to include This page of the Wizard does not display if Create title page was not chosen HTML Export Information For the tithe page Author Celframe E mail address Your homepage Additional information Link to a copy of the original presentation HTML Export Title page information 7 Choose the navigation button style to use to move from one page to another If you do not choose any Celframe Office will create a text navigator HTML Export Select button style Text only E HTML Export Choosing navigation style 8 Select the color scheme for the web pages Available schemes include the document s existing scheme one based upon browser colors and a completely user defined scheme You can save a new scheme so that it will appear on the first page of the HTML export wizard HTML Export Select color scheme G 4ooly color scheme From document Use browser colors O Use custom color scheme Hyperlink Hyperlink Active Link Active link Visited Link Visited link HTML Export Choosing color scheme 9 Click Create to generate the HTML files If this is a new design a small dialog pops up If you might want to reuse this design you can give it a name and Save it Otherwise click Do Not Save Name HTML Design CelFrame
405. ow is added to the next object that you draw 8 Crop Opens a dialog to crop pixel graphics The function is available only if the pixel graphic is marked Edit Points Bar The Edit Points Bar appears when you select a polygon object and click Edit Points Converting 2D Objects to Curves Polygons and 3D Objects The functions provided allow you to edit the points of a curve or an object converted to a curve The following icons are available 1 Edit Points Allows you to activate or deactivate the edit mode for objects In the edit mode individual points of the drawing object can be selected 2 Move Points Activates a mode in which you can move points The mouse pointer displays a small empty square when resting on a point Drag that point to another location The curve on both sides of the point follows the movement the section of the curve between the next points changes shape Point at the curve between two points or within a closed curve and drag the mouse to shift the entire curve without distorting the form 3 Insert Points Activates the insert mode This mode allows you to insert points You can also move points just as in the move mode If however you click at the curve between two points and move the mouse a little while holding down the mouse button you insert a new point The point is a smooth point and the lines to the control points are parallel and remain so when moved If you wish to create a corner point yo
406. ow is visible Colors This toggles whether the Colors Window is visible Translucent This controls whether the four floating windows are translucent or always opaque This can affect performance and is automatically disabled when running in a Remote Desktop or Terminal Services session Show Image List This will display the image list drop down Next Tab This will switch to the image that is next in the image list Previous Tab This will switch to the previous image in the image list Help Menu This menu provides quick access to this documentation the ability to send feedback or a report to the authors of Celframe Office Studio Celframe Office Studia Help F1 Celframe Office Online Support Registration Check For Updates Customer Feedback Contact Ls bout Celframe Office Studio Celframe Office Studio Help This launches the help file Celframe Office Online This will open the Celframe website Support This will open the Celframe Office support Registration This will open the Celframe Office Product Registration Page Check for Updates This will open the Celframe Office Product Updates Page Customer Feedback Enables you to send general feedback regarding Celframe Office Studio Contact Us This will open the Celframe website About Celframe Office Studio This shows some information about Celframe Office Studio including the copyright Tools Window This is where you may
407. ow this ten step outline 1 The Date field in the main form needs a dropdown capability It also needs to be lengthened to show the day of the week month day and year 2 Shorten the length of the payment fields all fields containing the word payment 3 The controls need to be move into groups 4 Some of the labels need to have their wording changed Some single words should be two words Some abbreviations should be used if possible Misc for miscellaneous 5 The widths of several fields and labels need to be changed 6 All the fields whose label ends in Payment will be replaced with a list box This box contains the entries from the Payment Type table 7 The Note field needs to be lengthened vertically and a scroll bar added It also needs to be moved 8 Changes need to be made in the Date columns of the subform that are similar to the changes in the main form 9 Headings need to be added for each group in the main form 10 The background needs to be changed to a picture Some of the labels will have to be modified so that they can be read clearly The font color of the headings need to be changed as well Here are some pointers that we will be using in these steps The controls in the main form consists of a label and its field Sometimes we want to work with the entire control and other times we want to work with only the label or field There are times when we want to work with a group of controls e Clicking a label o
408. ower left corner Show Slide Show the selected slide during a slide show Hide Slide Hides the selected slide so that it is not displayed during a slide show Slides Per Row Enter the number of slides to display on each row in the Slide Sorter Text Formatting Bar To display the Text Formatting Bar place the cursor inside a text object 1 Font Name Allows you to select a font name from the list or enter a font name directly You can enter several fonts separated by semicolons Celframe Office uses each named font in succession if the previous fonts are not available 2 Font Size Allows you to choose between different font sizes from the list or to enter a size manually 3 Bold Makes the selected text bold If the cursor is in a word the entire word is made bold If the selection or word is already bold the formatting is removed 4 Italic Makes the selected text italic If the cursor is in a word the entire word is made italic If the selection or word is already italic the formatting is removed 5 Underline Underlines or removes underlining from the selected text 6 Shadow Adds a shadow to the selected text or if the cursor is in a word to the entire word 7 Left Aligns the selected paragraph s to the left page margin 8 Center Centers the selected paragraph s on the page 9 Right Aligns the selected paragraph s to the right page margin 10 Justify Aligns the selected paragraph s to the left an
409. owing or hiding text object and table boundaries Accessibility Option The following accessibility features are part of Celframe Office Support of external devices and applications Access to all functions by keyboard The keys that replace the mouse actions are listed in the Celframe Office Help Improved readability of screen contents Zooming of on screen user interface for menus icons and documents The user interface is scalable through your operating system settings The default font size for dialogs is 12pt corresponding to a scale of 100 You can also change the font size for dialogs in Tools Options Celframe Office View The zoom factor of a document can be changed in View Zoom or by double clicking the zoom factor displayed in the Status Bar Please note that accessibility support relies on Celframe Office Java technology for communications with assistive technology tools This means that the first program startup may take a few seconds longer because the Java runtime environment has to be started as well Options Celframe Office Accessibility E Celframe Office User Data General Memory View Print Paths Colors Fonts Security ERNIE Jav Miscellaneous options Support assistive technology tools program restart required Use text selection cursor in read only text documents Allow animated graphics Allow animated text Help tips disappear after Options For high contrast appearance
410. ows inside of it and it pulsates slowly in order to distinguish it from the image that you are working on This is called the nub and may be used to move the text before you have finished with it If you click and drag the nub the text will move along with it If you hold down the Ctrl key the nub and cursor will not be visible until you release the Ctrl key This is useful if you need to preview exactly how the text will appear without the distractions of the cursor and the nub If you tap the Ctrl key the nub will disappear If you tap the Ctrl key again it will come back While typing you may press the Esc key to finish the text and render it to the layer Once you have finished with text it may not be modified except by undoing it and retyping the text To be precise after the text is rendered it no longer exists in the image as text but only as pixels and that is why this limitation exists You may control the color of the text by setting the primary color in the Colors Window The text will also use the current file style antialiasing and alpha blending settings Line Curve This tool may be used to draw lines and curves These two abilities are grouped in to one tool because it is possible to stipulate that a line is simply a perfectly straight curve therefore this tool always draws curves but lines simply have no curve applied to them Drawing a line is simple click where you want the line to start and then drag over
411. ox selected so templates slide designs and slide transitions appear in the preview box as you choose them From Template uses a template design already created as the basis for a new presentation The wizard changes to show a list of available templates Choose the template you want Open Existing Presentation continues work on a previously created presentation The wizard changes to show a list of existing presentations Choose the presentation you want Click Next The Presentation Wizard step 2 appears if you selected Empty Presentation Presentation Wizard Select 4 slide design Presentation Backgrounds lt Original gt Airbrush Ambassador Alark and Grav Frame Select an output medium Original Screen O Overhead sheet Slide O Paper ee cont E e create _ Preview Selecting a slide design using the Presentation Wizard Choose a design under Select a slide design The slide design section gives you two main choices Presentation Backgrounds and Presentations Each one has a list of choices for slide designs If you want to use one of these other than lt Original gt click it to select it By clicking an item you will see a preview of the slide design in the Preview window Celframe Office Power Presentation contains three choices under Presentations lt Original gt Introducing a New Product and Recommendation of a Strategy e lt Original gt is for a blank presentation slide design e Both Introdu
412. pacing Opens the Fontwork Character Spacing window Click to apply the character spacing to the selected Fontwork objects Custom Opens the Fontwork Character Spacing dialog where you can enter a new character spacing value Value Enter the Fontwork character spacing value Drawing Grid and Guides Draw offers a grid as a drawing aid The grid can be turned on or off by clicking on the Grid icon on The points of the grid displayed on the screen are not shown on the printed drawing The color Spacing and resolution of the grid points can be individually chosen for each axis Guides are special helper lines that can be turned on or off by clicking on the Guides icon Draw offers a Snap function with which you can place drawings exactly on these guides Showing the position of the object while moving it makes positioning the object much easier If this function is activated pairs of vertical and horizontal lines enclosing the object are shown while moving the object These lines extend to the edges of the drawing area Customizing Toolbars Standard Color Pallete Toolbars Status Bar Ruler Grid Master Page Pane Input Method Status Display Guides i Snap to Guides Ge Zoom 2 Guides bo Front For greater control you can add other functions to a toolbar and move tools between toolbars To do this in the View gt Toolbars menu select Customize select the Toolb
413. pe Whether a single pair of fields from two tables are chosen as the relationship or two or more pairs are chosen certain requirements must be met for the form to work No field from the subform can be the Primary key for its table Each pair of joined fields must have the same file type One of the fields from the main form must be the Primary key for its table Step 5 Arrange controls 1 Arrangement of the main form Click Columnar Labels on top The labels will be placed above their field 2 Arrangement of the subform Click As Data Sheet The labels are column headings and the field entries are in spreadsheet format Click Next Form Wizard Arrange the controls on your form Field selection Label placement Align left Set up a subform Align let Align right Add subform Fields Arrangement of the main Form 4 Get joined Fields m Arrange controls _ Sek data entry Colummar Labels on Top Apply styles Arrangement of the subform 0 0 lt _j _ m 45 Data Sheet Sek name Step 6 Set data entry Unless you have a need for any of these entries to be checked accept the default settings Click Next mo Form Wizard Select the data entry mode Field selection The Form is to be used for entering new data only Existing data will not be displayed Set up a subform The Form is to display all data Add subf Field a Do
414. pect ratios or your display resolution Selections can be dragged around scaled in place and rotated about their centers You can drag any selection edge or corner too If you want to crop the image just select what you want and click the crop button Correcting Tilt The new correct tilt feature helps straighten your photos in a snap Celframe Photoalbum 2008 doesn t need you to carefully tell it how much to rotate your photo by dragging a slider or heaven forbid typing in the number of degrees Instead just identify what should have been a vertical or horizontal edge and you re done Histogram Editing Brightness amp Contrast While Celframe Photoalbum 2008 provides a number of automatic image fixing tools such as color and contrast correction and red eye reduction sometimes it is necessary to directly edit the image histogram Using Celframe Photoalbum s novel split view interface you can quickly enhance your images and see the results side by side with the original form in real time Image Previews It is pretty common to have a directory full of files that have similar names Now you can pick out the ones you want before you add them using the new file preview functionality In addition seeing what photos look like you ll the image resolution type and size Menu New Open new album Open Load Album File Photos Tools Help Mew Ctrl N Open Chrl 0 Open Recent Mi Save Ctrl 5 A Sav
415. peed drop down menu Medium is a good choice for now Click Create A new presentation is created N If you selected From template on step 1 of the Wizard the Next button will be active on step 3 and other pages will be available These pages are not described here Power Presentation Window Component The Main window has three parts the Slides pane Workspace and Tasks pane The Slides pane contains thumbnail pictures of the slides You can select an individual slide and perform other operations The Workspace is where most of the work is done to create individual slides The Tasks Pane contains a group of four tasks which affect styles the layout animation and transitions between slides in your presentation Slides Pane The Slides pane contains the thumbnail pictures of the slides in your presentation They are in the order they will be shown in a default presentation Clicking a slide selects it and places it in the Workspace Workspace The Workspace has five tabs Standard Synopsis Annotations Leaflet and Slide Mixer These five tabs are called View Buttons There are also many toolbars which can be used to create a slide View gt Toolbars shows a list of what is available The Workspace section is below the View Buttons This is where you put the various parts of your selected slide together Standard view is the main view for creating individual slides Use this view to format and design and to add text graphics and anim
416. pixel depth 8 bits per channel 1 bit dithered The impression of grayscale is produced by a raster Actually there are only two colors 1 bit threshold You cannot directly set the threshold value With the help of the color tool on the Picture toolbar you can influence which part of the image is set to black vary color settings red green blue level brightness contrast and or gamma value to see what works best for your image To do this you must first export and save the modified image with File gt Export and then reopen it before you finally change the color depth 4 bit color palette With 4 bits a total of 16 colors can be produced The color steps are quite fine because the process uses not the 16 RGB basic colors but selects those from the palette which best match the colors in the image 4 bit grayscale palette 8 bit color palette With 8 bits a total of 256 colors can be produced The image at left is at first glance very difficult to distinguish from the original A big difference is that the picture is only one third of the size of the 24 bit version Celframe Office Studio 2008 Chapter 1 Introduction to Celframe Office Studio Celframe Office Studio is professional photo editing software with an intuitive and innovative user interface with support for layers unlimited undo special effects and a wide variety of useful and powerful tools Supporting various file formats including Adobe Photo
417. point center point or a pivot point that you designate Select the object you want to rotate On the Mode toolbar in Celframe Office Draw or on the Drawing bar in Celframe Office Power Presentation click the Rotate icon Move the pointer to a corner handle so that the pointer changes to a rotate symbol Drag the handle to rotate the object To change the pivot point drag the small circle in the center of the object to a new location To skew the object vertically or horizontally drag one of the side handles Editing the inside fill of an object The area fill of an object can be a uniform color a gradient a hatching or a pattern from an image It can be made partly or wholly transparent and can throw a shadow Common fill properties In most cases you will choose one of the standard fill options whether it is a color a gradient or an image These options are all available from the Line and Filling toolbar Fill with a uniform color Select the object you wish to edit On the Line and Filling toolbar select Color on the pull down list at the right of the paint can and then choose a color from the right hand menu MM Reds G E Magenta i B Magenta 2 E Magenta 3 E Magenta 4 Filling with a color Fill with a gradient Select the object you wish to edit On the Line and Filling toolbar select Gradient and then choose a gradient from the right hand menu 1 Gradient 4 sSradient 5 ee sradient 6 B Linear blue
418. pointer over any handle Notice how the pointer changes shape indicating in what direction the text box will be resized The corner handles change the two dimensions of the text area simultaneously while the four handles in the middle of the sides modify only one of the dimensions When the two headed arrow is displayed click and drag to resize the text box To maintain the proportions of a text box while resizing press and hold the Shift key then click and drag Make sure to release the mouse button before releasing the Shift key Celframe Office also provides a different type of text box which resizes horizontally to automatically fit the text as it is inserted To insert an auto resizing text box click on the Icon in the text toolbar and then click on the place in the slide where you want the first letter of the text to appear If the text toolbar is not visible choose View gt Toolbars gt Text For more accurate control over the shape size and position of the text box instead of using the mouse use the Position and Size dialog Select the text box then press F4 or select Format gt Express gt Position and Size from the menu bar Deleting a Text Box 1 Click the text once to display the gray border and green resizing handles of the text box 2 Position the pointer anywhere on the gray border so that it becomes either a four headed or two headed arrow 3 Click once The gray border disappears leaving only the green resizin
419. port from and press next Example Outlook Express Please select the program from which you would like to import Eudora Outlook Outlook Express Outlook PST Text file LDIF tab csv txt Outlook Express mail and address books lt Back Once again you get a notification of what action Celframe Mail Office has done This message will vary depending on what type of address book you have imported An error occurred importing addresses from Outlook Express Error importing address book all addresses may not have been imported Opening your address book you will see Celframe Mail Office has added the imported address book as folder in your address book Fl Address Book Filters Having a big flow of e mail s dropping in your inbox can be time consuming to read to deal with this and save yourself some time and be able to read the right e mails first You might want to add a filter so Celframe Office Mail can place the different mails in different folders First thing you need to do is create a new folder Example use the folder Sales as the target mail folder es ee celframe Office Mail 2008 Mail Local Folders New Folder Name Sales Create as a subfolder of Local Folders Name your folder as Sales then choose where it should be located and press OK If things are done right you should now have a new subfolder under Local folders You
420. printed By pressing Ctrl while clicking a sheet name you can change this selection If under Format Print ranges you have defined one or more print ranges only the contents of these print ranges will be printed Saving Sheets in HTML Celframe Office Spreadsheet saves all the sheets of a Soreadsheet document together as an HTML document At the beginning of the HTML document a heading and a list of hyperlinks are automatically added which lead to the individual sheets within the document Numbers are shown as written In addition in the lt SDVAL gt HTML tag the exact internal number value is written so that after opening the HTML document with Celframe Office you know you have the exact values 1 To save the current Spreadsheet document as HTML choose File Save As 2 In the Save as type list box in the area with the other Celframe Office Spreadsheet filters choose the file type HTML Document 3 Enter a File name and click Save Save ire Desktop e fe gt Ed Emy Documents 4 My Computer My Recent My Network Places Documents Microsoft Excel 97720007F xls eee CelframeD ocument Spreadsheet ods CelframeD ocument Spreadsheet Template ots Celframe Office 1 0 Spreadsheet sxc Celframe Office 1 0 Spreadsheet Template stc Data Interchange Format dif dBASE dbf Microsoft Excel 97 20004P Template xlt Microsoft Excel 95 xls Microsoft Excel 95 Template lt Microsoft Excel 5 0 ls Micro
421. py from the context menu E DVD Celframe Office Data Access File Edit wiew Insert Tools Author s Tools Window Help LUGS 4ayy sam 9 amp i 2 Cbe X m Database SS Create Table in Design Views Description SS Use Wizard to Create Table Create View Delete Rename Edit Open Form Wizard Report Wizard 3 Move the mouse pointer below this table right click and select Paste from the context menu The Copy table window opens 4 Change the table name to Cartoon and click Next Copy table Table name Cartoon Options Definition and data Definition s table view ppend data Create primary key Mame 5 Click the gt gt button to move all the Fields from the left window to the right window and click Next Apply columns Existing columns CollectionID MovieTitle Actor Date Acquired Motes Genre Photo te J caa J pack Je 6 Since all the Fields already have the proper File Type formating no changes should be needed However this is the time and place to make these changes if they are needed Click Create The new table is created E DVD Celframe Office Data Access File Edit View Insert Tools Author s Tools Window Help OF ee AAFF AnA 9 m ajz a ae X mi Database 1 Create Table in Design View Description S Use Wizard to Create Table Create Views a p2 c T m LPa ak 111 iii
422. r date time gt Date Area h Cian Otis ihe bhis O e gg tm dm am tet fe aah Yooh EA doka Fanki F erasa Pou n FF Waring Win Tert Seeger re p amben E Dala E ee ee ee bmm ee ee a a m Ds s m kes hyi dk ee Ge so he Pea Bogie gt Poco on dhe beep db Oe bee fanke footer numbers Slide Mixer view shows a thumbnail of each slide in order Use this view to rearrange the order of Slides produce a timed slide show or add transitions Standard Synopsis Annotations Leaflet Slide Mixer Peai ian r d i a Teas Stik ils 2585 a Slide 1 a Slide 2 5 SWIM Ain Te tt D E m ky m d pri pa mn l a m m nk p mal mpri prm k nk a sp phrais a at i dw gg a ha ren bee ews ka hah mel hi k a npa mnie ain fp bene F E n m k h im di kama G a a a beu e1 ka n im DENE Ej pE PT LE DE Hepat sem iss byien es ee kn To ripu mm L m pce ee ees ai z onana teatel Pera mr kn bah mm i kma a A k nhe Slide 5 Slide 6 Sener Devin ent Inte AGF 7 el ela lead pma TAT DAT iw B A m aa a BA G mE ampi p ug aea m aes i 1 kri mks lent his ma hele mal m sh aah aslo el kaa Se n t shs pon I p ma m mbe n n ak 13 H z Slide 13 zo Slide 14 Slide 15 z Slide 16 Tasks Pane The Task pane has four sections a Master Pages Here you define the Page Style you will be using for your presentation Power Presentation contains five prepackaged Master Pag
423. r Inversion This applies a transformation between Cartesian and polar coordinate systems Original Modified Pa A Tile Reflection This makes the image appear as though it were behind a sheet of glass with articulated tiles Original Modified Twist This effect is used for twisting a portion of the image either clockwise or counter clockwise reine Modified p a Noise These are meant for adding noise to or removing noise from the image Artistic Blurs Distort Add Moise Fhoto 1 Median Render a Reduce Moise Stylize Add Noise This adds random noise to the image Original Modified d a Median This effect is useful for noise removal if applied with a low Radius setting At higher Radius values it creates more of a blurring effect Original Modified a Reduce Noise This effect can be very useful for reducing image noise especially in photographs without losing fine details and contrast Original Modified J Photo Effects These are usually most useful when used on photographs Last Filter Pencil Sketch Ctrl F Artistic Blurs Distort Moise Glow Render Red Eye Removal Stylize amp Sharpen Soften Portraik Glow This effect gives the image a glowing effect You can control the brightness and contrast of the
424. r artwork with precise color control for high fidelity printing Start Up Celframe Office Publisher When you first start up Celframe Office Publisher you will get a New Document window To create a new page you have to tell the program to do exactly that The main purpose is to give youa maximum of control over design and content of your document For our purposes we are going to Start off easy and home based So change the page size to A4 pick mm for our Default Units and Single Page for our cover page layout Leave the rest of the default settings as they are After clicking the OK button Publisher creates a new page i elilrame ONice PUDISHEr File Edit Item Insert Page View Extras Windows Help Ta era eo eel een Pele lee nan he Size Single Double 3 Fold 4 Fold Page Sided Width 210 000 mm Orientation Portrait x Height 297 000 mm i gt i First Page is Margin Guides Bleeds Options Number of Pages 1 Preset Layouts Mone a it Millimet a Left 14 141 mm Default Unit C Automatic Text Frames Right id4 ilimm lt Columns Top 14 4limm il Gap 3 861 mm Bottom l14 llimm 2rinker Margins C Show Document Settings After Creation C Do not show this dialog again OK Cancel Now we are looking at the actual Celframe Office Publisher program You ll notice that in some ways it looks very much like a word processor with Layout view on We are mostly con
425. r field selects the entire control A border appears around the control with eight green handles You can then drag and drop it where you want Control click a label or field selects only the label or field By using the Tab key you can change the selection from the field to the label or the label to the field Moving a group of controls is almost as easy as moving one of them a Click the field of one of the top left control to be moved to select it b Move the cursor to just above and to the left of the selected control c Drag the cursor to the bottom right of the group of controls and release the mouse button As you drag the cursor a dashed box appears showing what is contained in your selection Make sure it is big enough to include the entire length of all the controls When either changing a size or moving a control two properties of the Form Design toolbar should be selected Snap to Grid and Guides when Moving Your controls will line up better and an outline of what you are moving moves as the cursor moves Step 1 Change the Date field 1 Control click the Date field to select it 2 Move the cursor over the middle green handle on the right side It should change to a single arrow _ 3 Hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor to the right until the length is 5 cm The vertical dashed line is lined up with the 5 Release the mouse button 4 Click the Control icon in the Form Con
426. r in the cell where you want to insert the external data and enter an equals sign to indicate that you want to begin a formula Now switch to the document you have just loaded Click the cell with the data that you want to insert in the new document Switch back to the new spreadsheet In the input line you will now see how Celframe Office Spreadsheet has added the reference to the formula for you The reference to a cell of another document contains the name of the other document in single inverted commas then a hash then the name of the sheet of the other document followed by a point and the name of the cell Confirm the formula by clicking the green check mark If you drag the box in the lower right corner of the active cell to select a range of cells Celframe Office automatically inserts the corresponding references in the adjacent cells As a result the sheet name is preceded with a sign to designate it as an absolute reference If you examine the name of the other document in this formula you will notice that it is written as a URL This means that you can also enter a URL from the Internet Chapter 4 Database Function Spreadsheets in also able to manage records consisting of several fields as in a database Think of each row of the spreadsheet as a record whose fields are arranged in the individual columns Then for example sort or group the Spreadsheet database by rows look for key words and calcu
427. r of text in a text object double click the text object select the text and then click a color You can also drag a color from the Color Bar and drop it on a draw object on your slide You can access several specialized color palettes in Celframe Draw as well as change individual colors to your own taste This is done using the Area dialog reached by choosing Format gt Background gt Colors tab Area Area Shadow Transparency Gradients Hatching Bitmaps Properties Mame Green 4 Color E Green 4 Table standard gt yr Load Color ir 4 dH Background Area To detach the Color Bar click on a gray area of the toolbar and then drag To reattach the Color Bar drag the title bar of the toolbar to the edge of the window To load another palette click on the Load Color List button The file selector dialog asks you to choose one of the standard Celframe palettes files bearing the file extension soc For example web soc is a color palette that is particularly adapted to creating drawings that are going to appear in Web pages The colors will correctly display on workstations with screens displaying at least 256 colors 3D Settings The 3D Settings toolbar controls properties of selected 3D objects Extrusion on off oa Extrusion On Off Switches the 3D effects on and off for the selected objects E Tilt Down Tilt Down Tilt up CD Tilt Left JA Tilt Right Tilts the selected object downwards b
428. r summary DVD Collection Dateacquired DateAcquired Grouping 6 Grouping conditions 7 Aliases OVErview Step 6 Overview Name the query To the right of this are two choices Select Display Query Click Finish Query Wizard Check the overview and decide how to proceed Field selection Mame of the query How do you want to proceed after creating 7 Query DYD Collection the query Display Query Search conditions O Modify Query Sorting order Detail or summary Overview Fields in the Query Actor DVD Collection Actori MovieTitle DYB Grouping Collection MovieTitle Date Acquired DYD Collection Date Acquired 5 Grouping conditions Sorting order Actor 450 MovieTitle 450 Datedcquired ASC Aliases No conditions were assigned No Groups were assigned No grouping conditions were assigned Step 7 Modify the query We are skipping this step since we have nothing to modify If you select the Modify Query choice the query would open in Design view To make modifications follow the instructions in the next section Using the Design View to create a query Using the Design View to create a query Creating a query using Design View is not as hard as it may first seem It may take multiple steps but each step is fairly simple E The procedures we will be using only work with relational databases This is Rex because of how relational databases are constructed The elements of a r
429. r the right bottom cell of the rectangular area 2 Keep the left mouse button pressed and move the mouse to the opposite corner of the rectangular area which will form the selected range 3 Release the mouse button To add further cells to the selection press the Contro key and repeat the steps 1 to 3 above Some shortcuts are very useful to speed up the selection To select the whole visible sheet click at the intersection between the rows indexes and the column indexes or press Contro A To select a column click on the column index at the top of the spreadsheet To select a row click on the row index on the left hand side of the spreadsheet Once the range is selected you can modify the formatting such as font size alignment including vertical alignment font color number formats borders background and so on To access these settings select Format gt Cells from the main menu bar Format Cells Font Effects Alignment Borders Background Cell Protection Category Format Language All Default User defined i Mumber Percent CUrFency Date Time Scientific LESS Options Decimal places Negative numbers red Leading zeroes Thousands separator Format code General The Format Cells dialog If the text does not fit the width of the cell increase these values by hovering the mouse over the line separating two columns and when the mouse cursor changes shape clicking the left button and
430. r their respective keyboard shortcuts Clipboard and Selection clipboard can contain different contents at the same time Print Options Set the print options to suit your default printer and your most common printing method You can change these settings at any time either through this dialog box or during the printing process by clicking the Options button on the Print dialog box 1 In the Options dialog box click Celframe Office gt Print 2 On the Celframe Office Print page look at the Printer warnings section near the bottom 3 Here you can choose whether to be warned if the paper size or orientation specified in your document does not match the paper size or orientation available for your printer Having these warnings turned on can be quite helpful particularly if you work with documents produced by people in other countries where the standard paper size is different from yours If your printouts are coming out incorrectly placed on the page or chopped off at the top bottom or sides or the printer is refusing to print the most likely cause is pagesize incompatibility Options Celframe Office Print El Celframe Office User Daka General Memory View Print _ Reduce transparency Paths Reduce print data Print to file Settings For Printer Printer Reduce gradients Colors Fonts Security Anpearance Accessibility Java Automatically Mo transparency _ Reduce bitmaps High pri
431. r to select a text frame by clicking the text 12 Double Click to add Text Specifies whether to select a text frame by clicking the text 13 Simple Handles Turns off 3 D highlighting on selection handles 14 Large Handles Displays large selection handles 15 Create Object with Attributes If this icon on the Options bar is activated objects are shown with their attributes while you draw them If this icon is not activated only a contour is shown while drawing and the object is shown with all attributes when you release the mouse button 16 Picture Placeholders Specifies whether to display only the contour of inserted graphics 17 Contour Mode Specifies whether to display only the contour of filled drawings without the filling 18 Text Placeholders Specifies whether to display a text window without its text contents 19 Line Contour Only Specifies whether to always display lines and contours as fine lines This display does not depend on the currently used line width 20 Exit all Groups Exits all groups and returns to normal view Color Bar Show or hides the Color Bar To modify or change the color table that is displayed choose Format gt Background gt Area and then click on the Colors tab Click the color that you want to use To change the fill color of an object in the current file select the object and then click a color To change the line color of the selected object right click a color To change t
432. r true Setting the Next Style property for a page style You can override the Next Style property by manually inserting a page break and specifying a page style or by starting a page with a paragraph or table that has its own page style property defined These techniques are described in Inserting a landscape page into a portrait document Changing Page Orientation Within a Document A document can contain pages in more than one orientation A common scenario is to have a landscape page in the middle of a document whereas the other pages are in a portrait orientation Here are the steps to achieve it Setting Up a Landscape Page Style 1 Note the page style that is current and the margin settings You can find the margin settings on the Page page of the Page Style dialog box 2 Create a new Style Right click on the current page style in the Styles and Formatting window and choose New Styles and Formatting Left Page Right Page Starting a new page style 3 On the Organizer page of the Page Style dialog box name by typing in the Name field this new style Landscape and set the Next Style property to Landscape to allow for having more than one sequential landscape page 4 On the Page page of the Page Style dialog box set the Orientation to Landscape The width and height attributes of the page will automatically change 5 Change the margins so that they correspond with the margins of the portrait page That is
433. rame Office Macros Delete Help In the Basic IDE select the source of your user defined function and copy it to the clipboard Close the Basic IDE Choose Tools Macros Organize Macros Celframe Office Basic In the Macro from field select Name of the Spreadsheet document Standard Module Click Edit Paste the clipboard contents in the Basic IDE of the document Applying a User defined Function in Celframe Office Spreadsheet Once you have defined the function VOL a b c in the Basic IDE you can apply it the same way as the built in functions of Celframe Office Spreadsheet 1 Open a Spreadsheet document and enter numbers for the function parameters a b and c in cells Al B1 and Cl Set the cursor in another cell and enter the following VOL A1 B1 C1 The function is evaluated and you will see the result in the selected cell Inserting External Data in Table WebQuery With the help of the Web Page Query Celframe Office Spreadsheet import filter you can insert tables from HTML documents in a Spreadsheet You can use the same method to insert ranges defined by name from a Spreadsheet or Microsoft Excel spreadsheet The following insert methods are available Inserting by Dialog 1 Set the cell cursor at the cell where the new content will be inserted 2 Choose Insert Express Link to External Data This opens the External Data dialog 3 Enter the URL of the HTML documen
434. rces View Data Sources navigation buttons Launching Base to work on data sources Using data sources in Celframe Office documents Entering data in a form Creating Queries Using the Wizard to create a query Using the Design View to create a query Chapter 4 Report Creating reports Creating a static report Car Fuel report Creating a Dynamic Report Modifying a report Celframe Office Draw 2008 Chapter 1 Introduction to Celframe Office Draw Features Workplace Rulers Status Bar Menu and Toolbars Menu Toolbars Drawing Bar Line and Filling Bar Text Formatting Bar Picture Bar Edit Points Bar Options Bar Color Bar 3D Settings Fontwork Drawing Grid and Guides Customizing Toolbars Chapter 2 Working with Objects and Object Points Selection Modes Changing The Selection Mode Selecting Objects Direct selection Selection by framing Selecting hidden objects Arranging objects Selecting Several Objects Moving and Dynamically Adjusting an Object s Size Dynamic Movement of Objects Dynamic size modification of objects Dynamic Size Modification of Objects with the Help of the Status Bar Rotating and Shearing an Object Changing Inclination or Perspective Chapter 3 Working with Object Setting Size and Position Exactly Position and Size Rotating Objects Slant and Corner Radius Corner Radius Slant Editing object points An alternative way to change the form of basic shapes How Curv
435. rd into the text box Ctrl double click or Ctrl Shift F10 Use this combination to quickly dock or undock the Navigator Styles and Formatting window or other windows Shortcut Keys for Paragraphs and Heading Levels Ctrl Alt Up Arrow or Ctrl Up Arrow Move the active paragraph or selected paragraphs up one paragraph Ctrl Alt Down Arrow or Ctrl Down Move the active paragraph or selected paragraphs down one paragraph Arrow The heading in format Heading X X 1 9 is moved down one level in the outline The heading in format Heading X X 2 10 is moved up one level in the outline At the start of a heading Inserts a tab stop Depending on the Window Manager in use Alt Tab may be used instead To change the heading level with the keyboard first position the cursor in front of the heading Shortcut Keys for Tables in Celframe Office Write Ctrl A If the active cell is empty selects the whole table Otherwise selects the contents of the active cell Pressing again selects the entire table Ctrl Home If the active cell is empty goes to the beginning of the table Otherwise first press goes to beginning of the active cell second press goes to beginning of the current table third press goes to beginning of document Ctrl End If the active cell is empty goes to the end of the table Otherwise first press goes to the end of the active cell second press goes to the end of the current table third press goes to th
436. re The result should look like this Text Frame Celframe Office Publisher C Documents and Settings Useri My Documents celf sla Fie Edt Item Insert Page View Extras Windows Help l Debus soo vo LUT AOADA EO ee Properties CIELFRAME BYE Spe Text T iT i 15 000 AN 21 00 Mn IT 100 00 Le a Black v MB 100 lt r Black IM 100 medek esas Jia 200066 Paragraph Style p Character Style Optical Margins Zi Image Line Colours l looms Seu ee ee Sl w mions eA vs A Ke Lt S aoro v O EB norma vision D ee To MeO 0s 619 00 pt Y Pos 385 00 pt Create another text frame double click and type DYNAMICS Choose the font and the ont size as in the first text frame Switch to the Color tab select the Blend Mode and set Shade to 30 and Opacity to 80 Celframe Office Publisher C Documents and Settings User My Documents celf sla le Edt Tkem Inset Page View Extras Windows Help Oe aR ALS ee DOs JER BO O 434 BQARMMHA AS Properties Shape Group Text Image Line Colours Shade C Display only used Colors Transparency Settings Opacity BO gt Berd Mode Overprinting knockout O Overprint Pos 333 00 pt Now add other text frames and insert the texts ARE YOU CELFRAME
437. re in the points mode by clicking the Points icon on the Drawing toolbar by dragging the large handle with the mouse The larger the value for the corner radius the more round will be the object Slant You can shear the older classic Draw objects but not the newer Shape objects Enter the slant angle in the box marked S ant Angle Position and Size Position and Size Rotation Slant amp Corner Radius Corner radius Radius Slant Angle 60 29 degrees Example of setting the slant angle in a classic Draw object Editing object points For polygons and Bezier curves Draw offers a complete set of tools that let you accurately edit the contour of an object To edit other objects in the same way you must first convert them into curves To do this select the object then right click and choose Convert gt To Curve or choose Modify gt Convert gt To Curve from the menu bar You can also convert the shapes to a polygon Convert gt To Polygon With polygons the edge points are always connected with straight lines and not with curves Some of the techniques described work equally with polygons as with curves An alternative way to change the form of basic shapes In current versions of Draw many of the new shapes can be directly edited without having to first convert them to curves You can recognize these objects by the presence of one or more yellow handles The figure shows a selection of shapes with such handle
438. red you can insert a special formatting mark To access the Formatting marks options select from the menu bar Insert gt Formatting marks Impress supports three formatting marks Non breaking space A non breaking space between two words prevents these two words being separated over two lines Press Contro Space bar on the keyboard to insert a non breaking space Non breaking hyphen A non breaking hyphen keeps the two words separated by the hyphen on the same line Optional hyphen An invisible hyphen that is activated thus breaking the word only when the word is too long to fit on one line Caution In Celframe Office Writer a non breaking hyphen can be inserted by pressing Control Minus sign This shortcut does not work in Impress Formatting text Formatting text can give a presentation a consistent look and a dynamic feel The appropriate use of formatting can even enhance the audience s understanding of your message by holding their interest Whenever you enter text either in an Layout text box or in a normal text box it already comes with an underlying style Generally this style is the outline level of the point where the text was entered for Layout text boxes or the Default Graphic style for text boxes On these occasions select the manually formatted text and then select Format gt Express gt Default formatting from the menu bar Modifying a Style In Power Presentation there are two categories of styles pre
439. rful but not very intuitive They can save time and effort by combining multiple finds into one Tip The online help describes many more regular expressions and their uses To search for a character that is defined as a wildcard type a backslash before the character To use wildcards and regular expressions when searching and replacing 1 On the Find amp Replace dialog box click More Options to see more choices Select the Regular expressions checkbox 2 Type the search text including the wildcards in the Search for box and the replacement text if any in the Replace with box Not all regular expressions work as replacement characters the line break n is one that does work 3 Click Find Find All Replace or Replace All Find amp Replace Search For l Find Airframe Find all Replace with Replace Replace All Match case Whole words only m Current selection only Backwards d Regular expressions Similarity search le i Mo Format Search for Styles Attributes Format Expanded Find amp Replace dialog box Inserting Special Symbol A special character is one not found on a standard English keyboard To insert a special character 1 Place the cursor in your document where you want the character to appear 2 Click Insert gt Symbol to open the Special Characters dialog box Special Characters Arial wo Subset Basic Latin ae i i eeeh
440. right click gt Get Image Now use the mouse to move the rotated of the image You also can insert another image as you wish E File Edit Item fs i F ra pre Extras Windows a DER AT ESE TEN oe OOS SEREU Ore O44 BQARHHAAN gt a Properties Bi YYZ Mame Tex50 Geometry Ping 72 00 pt Pins 588 010 pt Width 244 00 pt Height 47 0101 pt aa j I a gt 4b 4h 4 gt ja Rotation 90 0 I Basepoint l Level DD SE oS 8 a A Shape Group A Text I Image Line Colours wt qa nA St JS Aoo v EA fora ven BEARTA k Pos 155 00 pt Y Pos 551 00 pt Now click File gt Save enter Celframe as the file name and click OK You just successfully created your first document in Celframe Office Publisher It wasn t that hard was it Celframe Office Publisher C Documents and Settings User My Documents My Pictures M5S com_files Document 1 sla F el E er ee a a3 A fd Pee eri fey ies ee l AE ao E Tw E p ARE YOLU CELFEAME YET i x Pos 1007 00 pt Posi Pos 644 86 pt Er SA Celframe Office Mail 2008 Chapter 1 Introduction to Celframe Mail Celframe Office Mail is one of those programs which can compete with MS Outlook Express not only because it has similar functionality but it s also user friendly Microsoft Outlook Express has fora number of years been the leading application for sending and rec
441. rizontally handle on vertical side of figure or vertically handle on horizontal side of figure Distort an image Set in circle perspective Select an object and click on the Set in Circle perspective ad icon Draw will ask if you want to transform the object to a curve This is a necessary step before distortion so click Yes Then you can move the object handles to give a pseudo three dimensional perspective I L I l pea 4 I Set an image in a circle with perspective Set to circle slant m Select an object and click on the Set to Circle slant icon Draw will ask if you want to transform the object to a curve This is a necessary step before distortion so click Yes Then you can move the object handles to give a pseudo three dimensional slant perspective Set an image to a circle with slant perspective Transforming an object into a curve is a safe operation but it cannot be reversed other than by clicking the Undo button Dynamic Gradients You can control transparency gradients in the same manner as color gradients Both types of gradient can be used together With a transparency gradient the direction and degree of an object s fill color changes from opaque to transparent in a regular gradient the fill changes from one color to another but the degree of transparency remains the same If you have assigned transparency to an object with a color fill you can control the transparency
442. rmatting toolbar also appears under the menu bar Use this toolbar to set the desired text properties you can directly input the text If you draw a connector and and then click on it only the end and control points become active In Spite of this a connector has its own object frame in this case an invisible one You can picture it easily by imagining a rectangle enclosing the start and end points of the connector When you add text to a connector the location of the text is referenced to this rectangle The exact position of the text can be set in the Text dialog This dialog appears when you double click on text and then choose Text from the pop up menu or when you single click on the connector and select Format gt Text from the menu bar Take particular note of the Spacing to borders and Text anchor sections in the Text dialog In the Text anchor section you can see the possible locations for the text In the above example the text is anchored at the top left In the Spacing to borders section at the lower left you can input also negative values of spacing to position the text outside the frame Text Animation Text Fit width to text Word wrap text in shape Fit height to text Resize shape to Fit text _ Adjust to contour Spacing to borders Trex anchor Left P Aj _ _ r l Right Top Full width Bottom ir dr 4 Adjusting text to suit the connecting line If you want the tex
443. rol key equipped word processor amp desktop publisher simple enough for a qu ih to create complete books with contents diagrams indexes with BL Create your docs in HTML Adobe PDF or even to all Microsoft Word di al formatting styles auto correct dictionary one click email and hundrec Format in RESET Haan ited Es nitrate on your message takes care of the formatting as you write rames and linking In EER give you the power to tackl for newsletters flyers etc laid out exactly the way you want them to be your documents Weusi offers functionality to open a my With the active document directly attached Celframe Office 2008 wil if configuring the email chent to be used for this feature export to the web from BEER RSie mee applications Exportine Io Language now produces valid SHTML extensible Hyper Text Ma output I signatures and encryption enhancement in Waien Dic J protection of document content The new ML extensible Markup L Selecting items that are not next to each other Cutting Copying and Pasting Tex Cutting and copying text in Celframe Office Write is similar to cutting and copying text in other applications You can copy or move text within a document or between documents by dragging or by using menu selections icons or keyboard shortcuts You can also copy text from other sources such as Web pages and paste it into a Celframe Office Write document To move cut and paste
444. roperties git Name Table 1 C Automatic Width 4 42 Relative Left From left Right Center Spacing Left Fight Abie a hl Fs r H r A r Below Table Format dialog box On this page you can Set a name for the table This has no effect on the display but makes the table easier to find when using the Navigator This can be very useful if your document has a number of tables A table name cannot have any spaces To make a meaningful name you could use underscores or hyphens e Set the overall width of the table either absolute or relative to the page width This option is available only if the Alignment is not set to Automatic Specify how the table is aligned if it does not fill the width of the page between the margins Under Alignment Left aligns the table with the left margin e Right aligns the table with the right margin From Left lets you specify under Spacing exactly how far from the left margin the table is placed Center aligns the table in the middle between the left and right margins If the table width is less than the space between the margins the excess is evenly distributed on both sides of the table If the table width is greater the table will extend outside of the margins Manual lets you specify the distances from both left and right margins under Spacing Under Spacing Above and Below specify the distances to leave above and below the table Specifying Te
445. rotating pages Filling in Form Fields Commenting Filling in Form Fields any except extracting pages Enable copying of content Enable text access For accessibility tools Security page of PDF Options dialog box With an open password set the PDF can only be opened with the password Once opened there are no restrictions on what the user can do with the document for example print copy or change it With a permissions password set the PDF can be opened by anyone but its permissions can be restricted With both the open password and permission password set the PDF can only be opened with the correct password and its permissions can be restricted Permissions settings are effective only if the user s PDF viewer respects the settings After you set a password for permissions the other choices on the Security page become available These selections should be self explanatory Getting help Write provides several forms of help Placing the mouse pointer over any of the icons displays a small box called a tooltip It gives a brief explanation of the icon s function For a more detailed explanation select Help gt Show the Office Assistance and hold the mouse pointer over the icon you need more help with P Celframe Office Help Fi Le Show the Office Assistant support Registration Celframe Office Online Contact Us Check For Updates Customer Feedback Options About Celfame Office The Help menu
446. roup Groups can be temporary or assigned Temporary group only lasts as long as all of the combined objects are selected Assigned group lasts until it is ungrouped through a menu command Groups can also be grouped in other groups Actions applied to a group do not affect the relative position of the individual objects to each other in the group To group objects Select the objects you want to group and choose Modify gt Group For example you can group all of the objects in a company logo to move and resize the logo as a single object After you have grouped objects selecting any part of the group selects the entire group Selecting Objects in a Group You can select single objects in a group by entering the group Double click a group to enter it and click on the object to select it You can also add or delete objects to and from a group in this mode The objects that are not part of the group are grayed out To exit a group double click anywhere outside it Combining Objects and Constructing Shapes Combined drawing objects act as grouped objects except that you cannot enter the group to edit the individual objects X 3 You can only combine 2D objects To combine 2D objects Select two or more 2D objects Choose Modify gt Combine Unlike groups a combined object takes on the properties of the lowermost object in the stacking order You can split apart combined objects but the original object properties are lost
447. row Draws a Straight line that ends with an arrow where you drag in the current document To constrain the line to 45 degrees hold down Shift while you drag 4 Rectangle Draws a filled rectangle where you drag in the current document Click where you want to place a corner of the rectangle and drag to the size you want To draw a square hold down Shift while you drag 5 Ellipse Draws a filled oval where you drag in the current document Click where you want to draw the oval and drag to the size you want To draw a circle hold down Shift while you drag 6 Text Draws a text box where you click or drag in the current document Click anywhere in the document and then type or paste your text 7 Vertical Text To set the text orientation to 90 degrees 8 Curve The Curve icon on the Drawing bar opens the Lines toolbar where you can add lines and shapes to the current slide 9 Connectors Open the Connectors toolbar where you can add connectors to objects in the current slide A connector is a line that joins objects and remains attached when the objects are moved If you copy an object with a connector the connector is also copied There are four types of connector lines e Standard 90 degree angle bends e Line two bends e Straight e Curved 10 Lines and Arrow Available ten tools for drawing lines and arrows 11 3D Objects Open the 3D Objects toolbar where you can add 3D shapes to the current slide current slide
448. rrespondence Calendrier Education Miscellaneous My Templates Other Business Documents Personal Correspondence and Documents Presentation Backgrounds Presentation Templates Presentations Spreadsheet Templates Open document from template Templates and Documents Write Template s LEi New Document w c My Documents n Samples Organize alg Title Business Cards Cover Page ax Daily Calendar Department Personnel Internal Memo Invoice Monthly Calendar Newsletter Official Letter Personal Fax w Weekly Calendar Title Resume e web designer Sire 14 5 KB Date 02 14 2008 11 23 17 Type OpenDocument Text Template Modified on 01 02 1601 00 00 00 Printed on 01 01 2113 00 00 00 Creating a document from a template Opening an Existing Document Here is one way to open an existing document in Write 1 Click File gt Open 2 In the file chooser you can reduce the list of files by selecting the type of file you are looking for 3 Select the file you want and then click Open Text documents Spreadsheets Presentations Web pages Master documents Look in My Documents Amy Music Celframe Document Text odt my Pictures Celframe Document Text Template ott ee Celframe Office 1 0 Text Document sew My Received Files Celframe Office 1 0 Text Document Template my shapes Microsoft Word 97 2000 XP dac My Wider Microsoft W
449. rsor in the paragraph or table where the page is to return to portrait orientation and change the properties of that paragraph or table properties so that With Page Style is the portrait page style that was used before the Landscape page style 4 Click OK to return to the previous portrait page style Paragraph n Bac ground i ini Indents amp Spacing Alignment Numbering Drop Caps Hyphenation Automatically 2 Characters at line end 2 Characters at line begin T Maximum number of consecutive hyphens Breaks Insert Type Position Before With Page Style e Page number 0 Options _ Do not split paragraph _ Keep with next paragraph Orphan control Widow control Specifying a page break before a paragraph If you need the headers or footers on the landscape pages to be in portrait orientation see Portrait headers on landscape pages Using Columns to Define the Page Layout You can use columns for page layout in several ways Define the number of columns on a page using page styles e Switch between one column and multiple column layouts on the same page e Select existing text and change the number of columns Defining The Number of Columns on a Page It is a good idea to define your basic page style such as Default with the most common layout to be used in your document either single column or multiple colu
450. rt gt Object to start the process to insert a picture or object The item inserted automatically appears in a frame but the Frame dialog box does not appear Use the Insert Frame Manually icon on the Insert toolbar go to View gt Toolbars gt Insert to display it select the number of frames in the drop down menu and drag themouse to draw the frame Insert Frame Manually Using an icon on the Insert toolbar to create a frame aCelframe a o o o When you release the mouse button a box appears where the cursor is located in the document This box represents the frame an area isolated from the main document To add content to a frame first deselect the frame by clicking somewhere else on the page Then click inside the frame so that the cursor shifts its focus there Now add content just like you would on the main page When you are done deselect the frame To change the size or location of a frame first select the frame then use either the mouse or the Frame dialog box You can resize the frame manually by clicking on the green squares and dragging to the appropriate size or start adding content to it the frame will resize automatically if you for example add a large picture to it or go back to the Frame dialog box and set the size and other characteristics To change the location of the frame using the mouse drag and drop one of the edges or having the cursor anywhere within the frame The l bar cursor changes to a four
451. ry Options Defines the settings for the graphics cache and the number of steps you can undo Undo Defines the maximum number of reverse steps allowed Number of steps You can specify the number of steps which can be undone by selecting a number from the list Graphics cache The graphics cache saves the graphics contained in a document in your computer s main memory This means that the attributes of a graphic stored in the cache do not have to be re calculated if you return to the page containing the graphic after scrolling through a document Use for Celframe Office MB Specifies the total cache size for all graphics Memory per object MB Specifies that objects which are larger than the selected megabytes will not be placed in the cache Remove from memory after hh mm Specifies the time that each graphic remains in the cache in hours and minutes Cache for Inserted Objects Number of objects Choose the maximum number of OLE objects that are pooled in the cache Celframe Office Quickstarter Load Celframe Office during system start up Mark this check box if you want Celframe Office to enable quickstart Options Celframe Office Memory El Celframe Office User Data Undo Genera Humber of steps Memor Graphics cache Use for Celframe Office Memory per object Security Appearance Accessibility Cache For inserted objects Java Load Saye Language Settings Celframe Office GQuickstarter Celframe Office Write C
452. s 9 AddOns The AddOns consists of Annotations where you can insert extended note delete one extended note and delete all notes 10 Window Contains commands for manipulating and displaying document windows 11 Help The Help menu allows you to start and control the Celframe Office Help system Toolbar Write has several types of toolbars docked floating and tear off Docked toolbars can be moved to different locations or made to float and floating toolbars can be docked The top docked toolbar default position is called the Standard toolbar Write includes several additional context sensitive toolbars whose defaults appear as floating toolbars in response to the cursor s current position or selection For example when the cursor is in a table a floating Table toolbar appears Buttons with a small triangle to the right will display submenus tear off toolbars and other ways of selecting things with a long click depending on the button The tear off toolbars can be floating or docked along an edge of the screen or in one of the existing toolbar areas To move a floating tear off toolbar drag it by the title bar Displaying or Hiding Toolbars To display or hide toolbars choose View gt Toolbars then click on the name of a toolbar in the list An active toolbar shows a check mark beside its name Tear off toolbars are not listed in the View menu Moving Toolbars To move a docked toolbar place the mouse pointer over
453. s If you hover the mouse pointer over one of these handles and then drag it you can change the form of the shape the exact type of change is dependent on the shape itself The mouse pointer changes to a hand with index finger outstretched when hovered over one of these handles Examples of what you can do with this tool are rounding the corners of a rectangle or square changing the angles of an arc or ellipse or altering the control points of a circular or elliptical segment Some basic shapes with yellow handles How Curves Work Editing curves works on the basis of a method called Bezier curve The complete study of such curves goes beyond this scope of this guide and only the basics of this powerful method of editing the contour of an object are covered here The editing of a Bezier curve consists in principle of moving points or tangents passing through these points Each tangent has two control points one at each end and a junction point where it meets the curve The relative angle and distance between the control points determine the shape of the curve You can create many different shapes by moving either the junction point itself or one or both of the round handle points at either end of the tangent Creating different shapes by changing the tangent Experimenting with moving the control points of a tangent will yield countless variations of the basic starting shape Draw offers even more possibilities when you use the
454. s such as open close and print To close Celframe Office Draw click Exit 2 Edit The commands in this menu are used to edit Draw documents for example copying and pasting 3 View Sets the display properties of Draw documents 4 Insert This menu allows you to insert elements such as graphics and guides into Draw documents 5 Format Contains commands for formatting the layout and the contents of your document 6 Tools This menu provides tools for Celframe Office Draw as well as access to language and system settings 7 Modify Contains commands for working with objects in your document 8 Author s Tools Is a set of utilities designed to help Celframe Office users perform a wide range of tasks Using Writer s Tools you can back up documents look up and translate words and phrases 9 Window Contains commands for manipulating and displaying document windows 10 Help The Help menu allows you to start and control the Celframe Office Help system Toolbars This section provides an overview of the toolbars available in Celframe Office Draw This overview describes the default toolbar configuration for Celframe Office Standard Bar The Standard bar is available in every Celframe Office application j T L ol p 1 New Creates a new Celframe Office document 2 Open File Opens or imports a file 3 Save Saves the current document 4 Save AS Saves the current document in a different
455. s the Adobe Flash Player is available as a free download for those without Flash capable browsers these files can be viewed by just about anyone With Celframe Office you can export your Airframe Power Presentation slide show as a SWF file p incor 4 Saving in Flash format does not retain animation and slide transitions To export the presentation as a Flash SWF file 1 Choose File gt Express gt Export to gt choose swf extension gt Save 2 Select the location where you want the file saved and type a name for the file 3 Under File Format choose Macromedia Flash SWF swf and click Save Properties my Documents 4 My Computer E My Network Places HTML Document Celfframe Office Impress html h D Celframe Office 2004 PDF Portable Document Format pdf Recent Documents Express Wizards Download Template ofis Ma cromedia riasn awry swij j Eae eMy Documents XHTML xhtml S My Network Places BMP Windows Bitmap bmp EMF Enhanced Metafile emt EPS Encapsulated PostScript eps GIF Graphics Interchange Format gif JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group jpg jpeg IET O5 2 Metafile met Portable Bitmap pbm Mac Pict pct M Portable Graymap pgm lG Portable Network Graphic png Portable Pixelmap ppm 5 Sun Raster Image ras ta Scalable Vector Graphics svg StarView Metafile svm FF Tagged Image File Format tif tiff WM
456. s Celframe Office Studio uses a checkerboard pattern which looks like this If you see this then it means that part of your image is transparent The checkerboard pattern is not actually part of the image You may think of the checkerboard pattern as a virtual background layer or layer zero which is always below all layers that are shown in the Layers window However as previously mentioned it is not actually part of the image If you save the image and then view or load it with other software then the checkerboard pattern will not be there unless that other software also uses a checkerboard pattern to simulate transparency Layers and Opacity While every pixel has transparency information associated with it every layer also has an associated Opacity value The two terms are similar and in most cases can be treated as the same You may think of a layer s opacity value as a dimmer for the alpha values of every pixel in the layer For example if we take the top layer and adjust its opacity from 255 gradually down to 0 we will get the following images Layer 1 at 255 opacity 100 Completely opaque The top picture is not visible Layer 1 at 128 opacity about 50 Partially transparent The top picture is partially visible Layer 1 at O opacity 0 Completely transparent The top picture is visible Blend Modes A layer s blend mode specifies how it is blended with the layers below it To change a layer s blend mode
457. s Properties dialog box File gt Properties If you restart page numbering anywhere in the document then the total page count may not be what you want Restarting Page Numbering You can restart page numbering in two ways Method 1 1 Place the cursor in the first paragraph of the new page 2 Choose Format gt Paragraph 3 On the Text Flow page of the Paragraph dialog box check Insert in the Breaks area 4 In the Type drop down list select Page 5 In the Position drop down list select Before or After to position where you want to insert the page break 6 Check With Page Style and specify the page style to use 7 Specify the page number to start from and then click OK Method 2 1 Place the cursor in the first paragraph of the new page 2 Choose Insert gt Break 3 Page break is the default selected on the Insert Break dialog box Insert Break Type Line break Column break Style Mone K Cancel Help umber Restarting page numbering after a manual page break 4 Choose the required page in the Style drop down list 5 Check Change page number 6 Specify the page number to start from and then click OK Changing the Format of Page Numbers To set the page number to display in Roman numerals you need to specify the format of numbers in the page style In the Styles and Formatting dialog select the Page Styles icon and right click on the highlighted entry for the current st
458. s according to special conditions or to quickly calculate subtotals and totals Dynamic Charts Celframe Office Spreadsheet lets you present spreadsheet data in dynamic charts that update automatically when the data changes Opening and Saving Microsoft Files Use the Celframe Office filters to convert Excel files or to open and save in a variety of other formats Starting New Spreadsheet A new spreadsheet can be opened regardless of which other application of Celframe Office you are using at the time For example a new spreadsheet can be opened from Write From the menu bar Click File and then select New gt Spreadsheet From the toolbar Use the New Document button on the Standard toolbar Click the drop down arrow for a choice of what type of document to open text document spreadsheet and so on Click the button itself to create a new document of the type that is currently open if a spreadsheet is open a new spreadsheet document will be created Templates and Documents New Document wo Title Business Cards Database Drawing L HTML Document Labels Master Document Templates P3 Presentation B Spreadsheet z Text Document SM L Form Document My Documents EN Samples Organize Open the spreadsheet document From the keyboard lf you already have a spreadsheet open you can press Control N to open a new spreadsheet Opening existing spreadsheets A spreadshee
459. s and drag the divider to a new location Selecting Table gt Autofit from the main menu offers some shortcuts to resizing e Optimal column width or row height will make the columns or rows as narrow as possible while still fitting their contents Columns and rows can be distributed evenly to quickly bring them back to all being the same width or height Right click on the table and select Table from the pop up menu or select Table gt Table Properties from the menu bar On the Table Format dialog box select the Columns tab Adapt table width If a table already stretches to the page margins it cannot stretch any wider and the Adapt table width option is not available If the table is narrower increasing the width of a column will increase the width of the whole table If the table width already extends pasts the margins with the Adapt table width option checked attempting to change a column width will automatically decrease that column s size so that the table will now shrink to the page margins while keeping any other column sizes intact Adjust columns proportionally results in all columns changing their widths by the same amount when one is changed Remaining space shows how much farther the table can expand before hitting the limit of the margins This value cannot be edited and will not be negative in the event that the table width is already larger than the space between the left and right margins e Under Column width eac
460. s can be thought of as the opposite of Color Burn Lighter pixels are kept light whereas darker pixels must be blended with other dark pixels in order to remain dark Reflect This blend mode can be used for adding shiny objects or areas of light Glow This is the reverse of the Reflect mode it works the same as swapping the layer positions and using Reflect Overlay This is a combination of Screen and Multiply depending on the intensity of the layer pixel For darker colors this acts like Multiply For lighter colors this acts like Screen Difference The counterpart to Additive The layer pixel s intensity is subtracted from the composition pixel s intensity resulting in darker colors Since this can produce a negative intensity which is not possible to display the absolute value is used Thus both white minus black and black minus white will both produce white This is quite often useful when using the Clouds effect Negation At first glance this seems similar to Difference but it actually produces the opposite effect Instead of making colors darker it will make them brighter Lighten The lighter pixel of either the layer or the composition is used Darken The darker pixel of either the layer or the composition is used Screen This can be thought of as the opposite of the Multiply blend mode It is used to make pixels brighter with black being effectively transparent X
461. s dialog appears Alternatively if the icon 36 is visible you can click this to bring up the Special Characters dialog To show toolbar buttons that are not visible click on the small down arrow on the right end of the tool bar move the cursor over Visible Buttons and then click on the icon you wish to make visible 3 Choose the font and character subset from the Font and Subset drop down menus 4 Click the character you want to insert You may have to scroll to find the one you want 5 Click OK Selecting more than one character will insert all those characters Characters to be inserted are displayed below the character section in the order they were selected They will also be inserted in this order If you accidentally click the wrong character clicking another character will only add it to the ones being inserted Click Delete all the characters selected will be deleted then click the correct characters special Characters Font Arial o Subset Basic Latin eJels al cD 1 ofijzfjafalale 7jajol i fsla jaje c ojefjFjejafifs k t m N PfatR s tiulyi wixiy Zz e fatetetatetri atn ifs tei min platri s tiulviw xty z cit te ii lfet e lilts jelst fel z a j LJ 1 m sa T 1 a J T ui Wes U 0020 32 Characters Inserting non breaking spaces and hyphens Where it is not desirable for words separated by a space or by a hyphen to span over two lines or where an optional hyphen is desi
462. s icon is circled in red HR xa oe AE Query Design toolbar Step 5 Save and close the query Step 6 Create the query to calculate the fuel cost 1 Click Create Query in Design View to open a new query 2 Add tables But do not close theAdd Tables window 3 Add the End Reading query to this query a Click the Query radio button to get the list of queries in the database Add Table or Query Tables Queries ct Fuel Selecting queries to add to another query b Click End Reading c Click Add and then click Close Step 7 Add fields to the table at the bottom of the query Car Fuel End Reading i T Card Carld Date Fuel Cost Fuel Cost Fuel Quantity Fuel Quantity Payment Type Tables in this query 1 Double click CarlD in the End Reading query 2 Double click Fuel Quantity in the End Reading query 3 Double click Fuel Quantity in the Fuel table Field se Fuel Quantity Fuel Quantity Alias Table Car Fuel uel Car Fuel Sort visible Added fields to the query Step 8 Enter the FuellD difference field We want the difference between the FuelCost value of the Fuel table and FuelCost value of the End Reading query to equal one 1 1 Type End Reading FuelCost Fuel FuelCost in the field to the right of the FuelQuantity field of the Fuel Table Type the numeral 1 one in the Criterion cell of this column When entering fields for these calculations you must follow this forma
463. s section of the Printer Options dialog choose Brochure and Right pages Click OK twice to print the first side of each page 3 Flip the pages and put them back into the printer new side up and in the correct orientation You may need to experiment a bit to find out what the correct arrangement is for your printer 4 Click File gt Print and check Properties to make sure the printer setup is still correct 5 Click Options again In the Pages section of the Printer Options dialog choose Brochure and Left page Click OK twice to print the second side of each page 6 If your printer can do double sided printing then click on the checkboxes for both Left and Right along with Brochure Quick export to PDF Click the Export Directly as PDF icon to export the entire presentation using the default PDF settings You are asked to enter the file name and location for the PDF file but you do not get a chance to choose a page range or the print quality Controlling PDF content and quality For more control over the content and quality of the resulting PDF use File gt Export as PDF You are asked to enter the location and file name of the PDF to be created and then the PDF Options dialog opens This dialog has four pages described in this section Make your selections and then click Export Exporting as a Flash file Macromedia Flash file format SWF was created to store animation for web pages Because almost all browsers play Flash movie
464. s the beginning point for creating other slides These characteristics include the background objects in the background formatting of any text used and any background graphics For a simple presentation there is normally only one Master Page All slides are created by adding elements to the Master Page Another Master Page can be used for some of the slides if so desired If you decide later that the Master Page you chose does not meet your needs you can still choose a different Master Page or you can change parts of your Master Page All the slides which apply this Master Page will be changed the same way Make changes to the slide master you have chosen by selecting View gt Master gt Master Slide Most of this is done using styles As you are developing your slide master and then succeeding slides use F5 or F9 regularly to see what the slide you are working on looks like full screen Then use the Esc key to return to your work of creating your slide show You can spot problems sooner and easier this way You should first determine the styles you want to use for your presentation Remember to save frequently while working on the presentation to prevent any loss of information should something unexpected occur You might also want to activate the AutoRecovery function Tools gt Options gt Load Save gt General Make sure Save AutoRecovery information every is selected and that you have entered a number of minutes E Close Mast
465. s whether to show or hide the Styles and Formatting window which is where you can assign and organize Styles 2 Line Sets the formatting options for the selected line 3 Arrow Style Opens the Arrowheads toolbar Use the symbols shown to define the style for the end of the selected line 4 Line Style Select the line style that you want to use 5 Line Width Select the width for the line 6 Line Color Select a color for the line 7 Background Sets the fill properties of the selected drawing object 8 Area Style Filling Select the type of fill that you want to apply to the selected drawing object 9 Shadow Adds a shadow to the selected object If the object already has a shadow the shadow is removed If you click this icon when no object is selected the shadow is added to the next object that you draw 10 Image Map Allows you to attach URLs to specific areas called hot spots on a graphic or a group of graphics Text Formatting Bar To display the Text Formatting Bar place the cursor inside a text object iili lt x m r Wh id Allows you to select a font name from the list or enter a font name directly L d wiu s iC 1 Font Name You can enter several fonts separated by semicolons Celframe Office uses each named font in succession if the previous fonts are not available 2 Font Size Allows you to choose between different font sizes from the list or to en
466. selected text 8 Left Aligns the selected paragraph s to the left page margin 9 Center Centers the selected paragraph s on the page 10 Right Aligns the selected paragraph s to the right page margin 11 Justify Aligns the selected paragraph s to the left and the right page margins If you want you can also specify the alignment options for the last line of a paragraph by choosing Format gt Paragraph gt Alignment 12 Single Line Applies single line spacing to the current paragraph This is the default setting 13 1 5 Lines Sets the line spacing of the current paragraph to one and half lines 14 Double Line Sets the line spacing of the current paragraph to two lines 15 Numbering On Off Adds or removes numbering from the selected paragraphs To define the numbering format choose Format gt Bullets and Numbering To display the Bullets and Numbering Bar choose View gt Toolbars gt Bullets and Numbering 16 Bullets On Off Assigns bullet points to the selected paragraphs or removes them from bulleted paragraphs 17 Decrease Indent Click the Decrease Indent icon to reduce the left indent of the current paragraph or cell content and set it to the previous tab position 18 Increase Indent Increases the left indent of the current paragraph and sets it to the next tab stop 19 Font Color Click to apply the current font color to the selected characters You can also click here and then drag a selection to change the
467. sentation styles and graphics styles When inserting text in an Layout area the presentation styles become available while when inserting text in a text box or a graphic object it is possible to apply the graphic styles It is possible to create new graphics styles but not the presentation styles which are fixed and can only be modified To modify a style follow these steps 1 Open the Styles and Formatting window by pressing F11 or selecting Format gt Express gt Styles and Formatting from the menu bar 2 Select the style category by clicking on either the Presentation Styles icon or the Graphic Styles icon at the top of the Style and Formatting window 3 Right click on the style to be modified and select Modify from the pop up menu The dialog for making modifications to a graphics style is shown Ne Y oo Language ARS English UK The Presentation Style dialog Selecting Text Text must be selected before it can be formatted manually To format all the text in a text box click once on the text then click once on the border of the text box Only the green resizing handles are displayed Now any formatting changes will apply to all the text in the text box To format only part of the text click once on the text then select the text to be formatted by clicking and dragging highlighting over it You can also use keyboard combinations to select text move the cursor where you want to begin your selection press Shif
468. set to automatically format parts of a document according to the choices made on the Options page of the AutoCorrect dialog box Tools gt AutoCorrect gt Options The Help describes each of these choices and how to activate the autoformats Some common unwanted or unexpected formatting changes include Horizontal lines If you type three or more hyphens underscores ___ or equal signs on a line and then press Enter the paragraph is replaced by a horizontal line as wide as the page The line is actually the lower border of the preceding paragraph Bulleted and numbered lists A bulleted list is created when you type a hyphen asterisk or plus sign followed by a space or tab at the beginning of a paragraph A numbered list is created when you type a number followed by a period followed by a space or tab at the beginning of a paragraph Automatic numbering is only applied to paragraphs formatted with the Default Text body or Text body indent paragraph styles AutoCorrect Use replacement table Correct Two IMitial Capitals Capitalize First letter of every sentence Automatic bold and underline _ URL Recognition Replace 1st with 1st Replace 1 2 with vo Replace dashes Delete spaces and tabs at beginning and end of paragraph Delete spaces and tabs at end and start of line Ignore double spaces Apply numbering symbol Apply border Create table Apple Styles
469. shop psd too Built keeping in mind Adobe Photo shop users Features Simple intuitive and innovative user interface Every feature and user interface element was designed to be immediately intuitive and quickly learnable without assistance In order to handle multiple images easily Celframe Office Studio uses a tabbed document interface The tabs display a live thumbnail of the image instead of a text description This makes navigation very simple and fast New Image 53 Celframe Office Studio espe ape ents m pe ae ao oJ File Edit Ima ayer Adi a i Lene 2 ee E a ae aE aie ee fs Gino xy th See i ia Smooth B Z U Fil Solid Color Arial Black Comic Sans AS Courier New Estrangelo Edessa Franklin Gothic Medium adUtaml Georgia Impact Latha Lucida Console Lucida Sans Unicode Mangal ee ade a E Layers Usually only found on expensive or complicated professional software layers form the basis for a rich image composition experience You may think of them as a stack of transparency slides that when viewed together at the same time form one image Special Effects and Adjustments Many special effects are included for enhancing and perfecting your images Everything from blurring sharpening red eye removal distortion noise and embossing are included Also included is our unique 3D Rotate Zoom effect that makes it very easy to add perspective and tilt
470. si Ba I Skai Daryk Status Bar Celframe Draw Workspace Rulers You should see rulers bars with numbers on the upper and left hand sides of the workspace If they are not visible you can enable them by selecting them from the View menu View gt Ruler The rulers show the size of a selected object on the page When no object is selected they show the location of the mouse pointer which helps to accurately position drawing objects You can also use the rulers to manage object handles and guide lines making it easier to position objects Millimeter Centimeter Meter Kilometer Inch Fook Miles Point Pica Status Bar E LI I f _ a _ 44h Layout f Contrels j Sineaser Lines ks It Shape selecbec Tipe Bis 2 1 50 Eq Slide L f 1 Lavout Cefadt Information Position zoom Signature Slide Page Pane Indicator The Status bar is located at the bottom of the screen and includes several Draw specific fields The Information field shows which action is being carried out or which object type is selected The Position field shows different information depending on whether objects are currently selected or not e When no object is selected the left number pair shows the current position in X Y Cartesian coordinates of the mouse cursor e While an object is being resized with the mouse the right number pair shows the size of the object width and height e If an object is selected the
471. sition and spacing Level Indent Relative Spacing to kext Numbering alignment l a 4 z 6 li a J l Default The Position page used to set list indentation To set up an outline level first select it from the list on the left hand side of the page Then set the Indent which is the spacing between the bullet or number and the text If you select the checkbox Relative next to the indent the indent value will be measured relative to the previous level and not from the margin The numbering alignment is only useful when creating a numbered list use it to specify the alignment of the numbers For example you may want to align them to the right to line up one and two digit numbers in a pleasing way To fully appreciate how the Numbering alignment works try to create a numbered list with more than 10 elements and make sure that enough room has been made for a two or more digit number The Position page is not available if you are modifying a presentation style or graphics style however the same effects can be obtained by using the ndents and Spacing page of the dialog for creating or modifying a slide Customize page Use the Customize page to alter the style of all the outline levels The options available on this page depend on the type of marker selected for the list Select first the level you want to modify on the left hand side of the box To modify all 10 levels at once select 7 70 as the level Bu
472. size of the text in your documents Icon size and style The first box specifies the display size of toolbar icons Automatic Small or Large the Automatic icon size option uses the setting for your operating system The second box specifies the icon style theme here the Automatic option uses an icon set compatible with your operating system and choice of desktop for example KDE or Gnome on Linux Use system font for user interface If you prefer to use the system font the default font for your computer and operating system instead of the font provided by Celframe Office for the user interface select this checkbox Screen font antialiasing Select this checkbox to smooth the screen appearance of text Enter the smallest font size to apply antialiasing Menu Show icons in menus Select this option if you want icons as well as words to be visible in menus Font Lists Show preview of fonts The fonts you will see listed are those that are installed on your system Font Lists Show font history When you select this option the last five fonts you have assigned to the current document are displayed at the top of the font list 3D View Use OpenGL Specifies that all 3D graphics from Draw and Impress will be displayed in your system using OpenGL capable hardware If your system does not have OpenGL capable hardware this setting will be ignored Use OpenGL Optimized output Select this option for optimized OpenGL output Disa
473. soft Excel 5 0 Template xlt i HTML D ocument Celframe Office Calc html Microsoft Excel 2003 ML ml Kn Network Fi Pocket Excel pl eee oc Microsoft Excel 2007 Document slex L Save Save as type Microsoft Excel 97 2000 P xls Cancel if Automatic file name extension hay Documents My Computer 5 ave with password P Edit filter settings Opening Sheets in HTML Celframe Office offers various filters for opening HTML files which you can select under File Open in the Files of type list box e Choose the file type HTML Document Celframe Office Spreadsheet to open in Celframe Office Spreadsheet All Celframe Office Spreadsheet options are now available to you However not all options that Celframe Office Spreadsheet offers for editing can be saved in HTML format Open Look ir EE esktop Om Documents Y My Computer My Recent My Network Places Documents Desktop My Documents My Computer bio Network Places File name Files of type Versiory Sending Documents as E mail Hangul WP OF Fo hp P WPS 200070ffice 1 0 wos E CelframeDocument Spreadsheet ads CelframeDocument Spreadsheet Template ot Celframe Office 1 0 Spreadsheet sxc Celframe Office 1 0 Spreadsheet Template ste Data Interchange Format dif dBASE dbf Microsoft Excel 97720007F ales slay Microsoft Excel 97720007F Template xlt Microsoft Excel 4 6 5 0 95 ls
474. stall the latest software before entering the key Please see Celframe Office downloads 4 The three boxes must now be filled in exactly according to the details we ve given you Note that all the fields name organization and activation key must be exact see note b below 5 AS soon as step 3 is complete the OK button becomes active click on this to complete the process You will now be able to start the Celframe Office program s If the OK button does not become active then it can only be because the text you ve entered does not exactly match the details you ve been given or the key does not match your current version Trouble shooting 1 If you select Help About Activation in any Celframe Office application and the dialog says this application is fully registered then no further action need be taken If you select Help About in any Celframe Office application and you cannot see a Activation button then no further action need be taken 2 Please note that the Activation details for Name Organization and Key MUST BE EXACT including punctuation spacing and capitalization Examples If the name specified in the confirmation of purchase email was Arun Pudur entering ARUN PUDUR or P Arun or anything other than Arun Pudur will cause registration to fail If there was no organization specified in the registration email or letter don t try adding one in the registration screen If the conf
475. sub elements below it Filtering DataPilot Tables You can use filters to remove unwanted data from a DataPilot table Click the Filter button in the sheet to call up the dialog for the filter conditions Alternatively call up the context menu of the DataPilot table and select the Filter command The Filter dialog appears Here you can filter the DataPilot table T Start Refresh Delete Updating DataPilot Tables If the data of the source sheet has been changed Celframe Office recalculates the DataPilot table To recalculate the tables choose Data DataPilot Refresh Do the same after you have imported an Excel Pivot table into Celframe Office Spreadsheet Deleting DataPilot Tables In order to delete a DataPilot table select any cell in the DataPilot table then choose Delete in the context menu Start Refresh Filter Selecting DataPilot Output Ranges Click the button More in the DataPilot dialog The dialog will be extended You can select a named range in which the DataPilot table is to be created from the Results to box If the results range does not have a name enter the coordinates of the upper left cell of the range into the field to the right of the Results to box You can also click on the appropriate cell to have the coordinates entered accordingly If you mark the Ignore empty rows check box they will not be taken into account when the DataPilot table is created If the Identify c
476. suffix provides the command sequence sent at the end of a search Separator If you type more than one word while running a search these words will be separated by the character specified here Most search engines require the character To determine which prefixes separators and suffixes to use when defining a new search engine 1 Activate the search engine and perform a search with at least two words 2 Copy the URL from your browser s URL field and paste it into a blank document 3 Change the conditions for the search in the search engine if it offers you the choice 4 Again copy the contents of the URL field 5 Compare the URLs with the sample URLs in the fields of this dialog and make a note of the prefixes suffixes and separators used Case match Determines the case match for running a search The list contains the following entries None Upper and Lower The search terms entered are converted according to your selection Search engines handle queries differently according to the way they are constructed For example some are case sensitive and some are not Because of this it is best to select None as the case match option New Use this button to include a new search engine New deletes all important entries of the entry mask such as Name and Suffix Enter the new search engine together with all of the necessary details As soon as you accept your entries with Add the new search engine will appear in the search
477. t 5 Convert and save the abject Choosing Load Save Microsoft Office options HTML compatibility Load Save options Choices made on the Load Save HTML Compatibility dialog affect HTML pages imported into Celframe Office and those exported from Celframe Office See HTML documents importing exporting in the Help for more information Options Load Save HIML Compatibility Celframe Office l Load Save Font sizes Import General Size 1 _ Use English 54 locale For numbers VBA Properties Microsoft Office Sje d Import unknown HTML tags as fields Pane Settings PR d Ignore font settings Celframe Office Write 7 Export Celframe Office Writes Web Size 4 pie Celframe Office Data Access ia Netscape Navigator Charts Size 5 Internet _ Celframe Office Basic Size amp AAA ee Display warning ake Print layout Copy local graphics to Internet Character set Western Europe wWindows 125 Choosing HTML compatibility options Font sizes Use these fields to define the respective font sizes for the HTML lt font size 1 gt to lt font size 7 gt tags if they are used in the HTML pages Many pages no longer use these tags Import Use English USA locale for numbers When importing numbers from an HTML page the decimal and thousands separator characters differ according to the locale of the HTML page The clipboard however contains no information about the locale If this option is selected numb
478. t Back Fill in your name and email address press next Account Wizard Identity Each account has an identity which is the information that identifies you to others when they receive your messages Enter the name you would like to appear in the From field of your outgoing messages for example John Smith Your Name Morten W Petersen Enter your email address This is the address others will use to send email to you for example user example net Email Address matern nidelven it no Now you are asked to fill in the incoming server Example mail nidelven it no You may be asked for outgoing server as well Usually this is the same server then press next Account Wizard ah X Server Information Select the type of incoming server you are using Enter the name of your incoming server for example mail example net Incoming Server Enter the name of your outgoing server SMTP for example smtp example net Qutgoing Server Now you are asked to fill in your user name for your email provider for example jsmith press next Account Wizard User Names Enter the incoming user name given to you by your email provider for example jsmith Incoming User Name motern nidelven it no Your outgoing SMTP server hotmail com is identical to your incoming server your incoming user name will be used to access it You can m
479. t table or query name followed by a period follow by the field name For hyphenated or multiple word names table or query use double quotes around the table or query name Use the arithmetical symbol between the two More than one calculation can be done by using parentheses to group the arithmetical operations Field Alias Table Sort Visible Function l I CarId Fuel Quantity Fuel Quantity End Reading Fuel Cost Car Fuel Fuel Cost Car Fuel Fuel Car Fuel Criterion Typing in calculation of fields Step 9 Run the query and make some modification After we run the query to make sure it works correctly we will hide all of the fields that we do not need Step 10 Close save and name the query Close save and name the query There are obviously other calculations that can be made in this query such as cost per distance traveled Chapter 4 Report Creating reports Reports provide information found in the database in a useful way In this they are similar to queries Reports are generated from the database s tables or queries They can contain all of the fields of the table or query or just a selected group of fields Reports can be static or dynamic Static reports contain the data in the selected fields at the time the report was created Dynamic reports can be updated to show the latest data All reports are based upon a single table or query So you need first to decide what fields you want to use in th
480. t Item Insert Page view Extras Windows Help X Det DO sJFRBEO O 43 448208 FWA XA Info Undo Ctrit 2 Gek Image Ctrl D Adjust Frame to Image Update Image Preview Settings Image Effects ctrl E Edit Image Attributes PDF Options Is Locked Ctrl L Size is Locked Ctrl ShiFt L Send to Scrapbook Send to Patterns Copy Ctrl C Contents Py Properties frm ioar BION Se S Ml o Papen eee ee 85 372 mm Y Pos 136 525 mm In the image effects dialog let s go all out and apply four different effects to the image invert blur values are radius 7 0 greyscale and brightness set to 43 e Image Effects Available Effects Effects in use Blur Invert Brightness Blur Colourise Greyscale Duotone Brightness Tritone Quadtone Contrast Greyscale CUPYES Invert Posteris Sharpen Options Brightness 43 JL Adding Text The changes already done for background which is previous color is white to yellow and using Invert effects Create a text frame by clicking on the Text Frame icon in the toolbar You can create this frame by dragging just as you did with the shape It should be big enough to contain the text as shown below Then double click on the text frame and type CELFRAME Next click somewhere else on screen and select the text frame again by clicking on it Open the Properties F2 and open the Text tab Now you can set the text size and others setting he
481. t Paintbrush icon on the Standard toolbar 15 Undo Reverses the last command or the last entry you typed To select the command that you want to reverse click the arrow next to the Undo icon on the Standard bar 16 Redo Reverses the action of the last Undo command To select the Undo step that you want to reverse click the arrow next to the Redo icon on the Standard bar 17 Hyperlink Opens a dialog that enables you to create and edit hyper links 18 Chart Creates a chart in the current document 19 3D Effects Specifies the properties of a 3D object or converts a 2D object to 3D 20 Navigator Click the Navigator On Off icon to hide or show the Navigator 21 Zoom Reduces or enlarges the screen display of Celframe Office The current zoom factor is displayed as a percentage value on the Status bar 22 Airframe Office Help Opens the main page of the Celframe Office Help for the current application You can scroll through the Help pages and you can search for index terms or any text 23 What s this Enables extended help tips under the mouse pointer till the next click 24 Load URL Load URL Loads a document specified by an entered URL You can type a new URL or select one that is already registered Celframe Office automatically converts file paths into URL notation Enable this icon by Visible Buttons command click the arrow at the toolbar end Drawing Bar The Drawing bar holds the main drawing tools
482. t and then use the arrow buttons to extend your selection Formatting changes will apply only to the selected text Pressing the Control key along with the Shift key while creating a selection is useful to speed process This combination highlights the text word by word instead of character by character To speed up the selection even further you can combine the Shift key with the Home key or the End key to extend the selection up to the start or end of the line in which the cursor is positioned respectively Formatting Characters To view the character formatting options select Format gt Font or click the Font button A onthe Text Formatting toolbar If a toolbar with the text icon is not visible choose View gt Toolbars gt Text Formatting The Character dialog appears Character Font Effects Position Font Typeface Arial Regular Arial Black Italic Arial Marrow Bold Arial Unicode MS Bold Italic Book Antigua Bookman Old Style Rankshelf Swmhal 7 Language ASS English USA oyyy y Arial The same font will be used on both vour printer and your screen The box to set the basic font attributes Font Page Use the Font page to select the desired font type its base attributes Italic Bold etc as well as the size A sample of the font is displayed in the lower part of the dialog You can also specify the language of this style When writing a presentation in multiple languages you can make the bes
483. t can also be opened no matter what component of Celframe Office you are in From the menu bar Click File and then select Open From the toolbar Click the Open button on the Standard toolbar e From the keyboard Use the key combination Control O Each of these options displays the Open dialog where you can locate the spreadsheet that you want to open Some terminology differences between Spreadsheet and Excel Object Spreadsheet Excel Individual cell A1 Cell Cell Entire file Spreadsheet Workbook One tabbed sheet in a workbook Sheet 1 Sheet Worksheet Callouts in cells which appear when the mouse pointer is Notes Comments positioned over the cell Spreadsheet Workspace The main Calc workspace is shown below Formula Bar Standard Bar Formatting Bar en ee eee PAR a ay l fa Cell B g gt l E F G 1 j A 5 E 7 2 Indicator 5 3 7 Active Cell A _ 3 J al Row Header a a4 3 a a7 4 a 4 2 a FA w 4 H gbeeti herti Shei IES 313 l Betas bod ST i Spreadsheet interface The Title Bar Located at the very top of the screen On the Title bar Celframe Office Soreadsheet displays the name of the workbook you are currently using Book Celframe Office Spreadsheet The Menu Bar The window containing the document you want to work on must be selected in order to use the m
484. t of the language oe setting by creating two styles that only differ in the language but are otherwise the same This allows you to check the spelling of all of the contents without affecting the appearance This page is available when creating or modifying a presentation style or a graphics style Font Effects Page Use the Font Effects page to apply special effects to the text such as underlining color shadow and so on As for the Font page a sample of the text is displayed in the lower part of the dialog allowing a quick visual check of the effects applied This page is available when creating or modifying a presentation style or a graphics style Character Position Underlining Color a Without w C Automatic Strikethrough Relief Cwwithiout Individual words without Font color outline C Automatic C Shadow Advanced options for the character can be set in the Font Effects page Position Page The Position page has advanced options to customize text This page is not available when creating or modifying a presentation style or a graphics style Use this page to set the text position relative to the baseline when you need to insert subscripts or superscripts To create a superscript or a subscript do the following 1 Select Superscript or subscript as applicable 2 Specify the amount by which the text should be raised superscripts or lowered subscripts 3 Specify the dimension of the character relative
485. t options available under Table gt Table Properties gt Table or by right clicking and choosing Table gt Table Table Format Borders Background Text Flow Break Page Column Before O After With Page Style Default Yo Fage number Allow table to split across pages and columns Allow row to break across pages and columns Keep with next paragraph The first 1 5 rows Text direction Use superordinate object settings Alignment Vertical alignment Text Flow page Resizing Rows and Columns You can adjust the height of rows and the width of columns in a table in several ways You can manually resize rows and columns by dragging them to the desired size When the cursor is in the table a pair of thin gray lines appear in the rulers The horizontal ruler shows the column dividers and the vertical ruler shows the row dividers To change the width of a column or height of a row use one of these methods e Hold the mouse button down on a cell border so a double headed arrow appears and and drag the border to the desired position To change the column width using the ruler hold the mouse button down on the appropriate column divider double vertical line so that a double headed arrow appears and drag the divider to a new location To change the row height using the ruler hold the mouse button down on the appropriate row divider double horizontal line so that a double headed arrow appear
486. t or the name of the spreadsheet Press Enter when finished Click the button to open a file selection dialog 4 In the large list box of the dialog select the named ranges or tables you want to insert 5 You can also specify that the ranges or tables are updated every n seconds The import filter can create names for cell ranges on the fly As much formatting as possible is retained while the filter intentionally does not load any images Inserting by Navigator 1 Open two documents the Celframe Office Soreadsheet spreadsheet in which the external data is to be inserted target document and the document from which the external data derives source document 2 In the target document open the Navigator 3 In the lower combo box of the Navigator select the source document The Navigator now shows the range names and database ranges or the tables contained in the source document 4 In the Navigator select the Insert as link drag mode 5 Drag the desired external data from the Navigator into the target document If you have loaded an HTML document with the Web Page Query filter as the source document you will find the tables in the Navigator named continuously from HTML_tablel onwards and also two range names that have been created e HTML_all designates the entire document e HTML_tables designates all HTML tables in the document Editing the external data e Open Edit Links Here you can edit the link to the ext
487. t the current sheet Shift Ctrl Adds the next sheet to the current selection of sheets If all the sheets ina Page Down spreadsheet are selected this shortcut key combination only selects the next sheet Makes the next sheet the current sheet where is the multiplication sign on the numeric key pad Selects the data range that contains the cursor A range is a contiguous cell range that contains data and is bounded by empty row and columns where is the division sign on the numeric key pad Selects the matrix formula range that contains the cursor Enter ina Moves the cursor down one cell in a selected range To specify the direction that selected range the cursor moves choose Tools Options Celframe Office Spreadsheet General Function Keys Used in Spreadsheets Shortcut Keys Effect Ctrl F 1 Displays the note that is attached to the current cell Switches to Edit mode and places the cursor at the end of the contents of the current cell Press again to exit Edit mode If the cursor is in an input box in a dialog that has a Minimize button the dialog is hidden and the input box remains visible Press F2 again to show the whole dialog Ctrl F2 Opens the Function Wizard Moves the cursor to the Input line where you can enter a formula for the current cell Ctrl F3 Opens the Define Names dialog F4 Shows or Hides the Database explorer Shift F4 Rearranges the relative or absolute references for example Al A
488. t to follow the slope or curve of a line you need to activate and use the Fontwork tool To add it to the Draw toolbar choose Tools gt Customize from the menu bar On the Toolbars tab in the upper pulldown list of toolbars choose Drawing In the Toolbar content section click Add On the Add Commands dialog select the Category Format and the Command Fontwork Click Add then Close Add Commands To add a command to a toolbar select the category and then the command Then drag the command to the Commands list of the Toolbars tab page in the Customize dialog Category Commands Application AAT Font Size View ontwork Templates x Edit Pr Formatting On Orr Options Full width BASIC namma Insert fy Graphics mode Documents Green 2 Controls Group Navigate Half width Drawing Hiragana Modify EE NE Graphic v li gt Description Edits Fontiwwork effects of the selected object that has been created with the previous Fontwork dialog Back on the Customize dialog in the list of commands under Toolbar Content move the Fontwork icon to the location you want and then click OK To write slanting text two steps are necessary First add the text to the connector as described earlier The anchor location of the text is not important at this stage Second select the object with the text in this case the connector and click on the Fontwork icon to open the Fontwork dialog To make the text lie along the inclined
489. t to use for spellcheck and hyphenation New Opens the New Dictionary dialog in which you can name a new user defined dictionary or dictionary of exceptions and specify the language New Dictionary In the Dictionary section you can name a new user defined dictionary or dictionary of exceptions and specify the language Name Specifies the name of the new custom dictionary The file extension DIC is automatically appended Language By selecting a certain language you can limit the use of the custom dictionary By selecting All the custom dictionary is used independently of the current language Exceptions Specifies whether you wish to avoid certain words in your documents You can include in the custom dictionary defined in this way all the words to be avoided During the spellcheck if this exception dictionary is activated you will receive a corresponding note that this word should be avoided Edit Opens the Edit custom dictionary dialog in which you can add to your custom dictionary or edit existing entries In the Edit custom dictionary dialog you have the option to enter new terms or edit existing entries If you edit an exception dictionary the dialog has the added facility of defining an exception fora word During the spellcheck this exception is then listed as a suggestion When a dictionary is edited a check is made on the status of the file If the file is write protected it cannot be changed The b
490. t1 pBz Help Source data range Start o Sheetl Fb 2 82 Delete Copy results to undefined Sheet3 B 1 Additional Settings Click More in the Consolidate dialog to display additional settings e Select Link to source data to insert the formulas that generate the results in the target range rather than the actual results If you link the data any values modified in the source range are automatically updated in the target range The corresponding cell references in the target range are inserted in consecutive rows which are automatically ordered and then hidden from view Only the final result based on the selected function is displayed e Under Consolidate by select either Row labels or Column labels if the cells of the source data range are not to be consolidated corresponding to the identical position of the cell in the range but instead according to a matching row label or column label To consolidate by row labels or column labels the label must be contained in the selected source ranges Consolidate by _ Options Row labels Link to source data The text in the labels must be identical so that rows or columns can y Inrorat 4 be accurately matched If the row or column label does not match any that exist in the target range it will be appended as a new row or column The data from the consolidation ranges and target range will be saved when you save the document If you later open a docu
491. table 1 If desired rename the table at this point If you rename it make the name meaningful to you For this example make no changes 2 Leave the option Insert data immediately checked 3 Click Finish to complete the table wizard Close the window created by the table wizard You are now back to the main window of the database with the listing of the tables queries forms and reports Table Wizard Create table 1 Select Fields what do you want bo name your table DY D Collection 2 Sek types and formats 3 Set primary ke j ee Congratulations You have entered all the information needed to create your table what do vou want to do next Insert data immediately O Modify the table design Create a Form based on this table DVD D D Collection File Edit View Tools Author s Tools Window Help S Pee ee eee ee oh a a jee lt 4utoField gt OBJECT DVD Collection Data Access Creating a table by copying an existing table If you have a large collection of movie you might want to create a table for each type of movie you have Rather than creating each table from the wizard you can make a copy of the original table Each table can be named according to the type of movie contained in it Possible names could include Sad Horror Funny Cartoon and among others 1 Click on the Tables icon in the Database pane to see the existing tables Right click on the DVD Collection table icon Select Co
492. tart typing in search terms Saved Searches Celframe Mail 2008 saves you time by allowing you to store this search as a folder Rerunning the search is just a matter of clicking on the saved search folder in the folder pane Stay Informed Celframe Mail 2008 has been updated to provide more informative and relevant message alerts containing sender subject and message text for newly arrived messages Folders provide a pop up summarizing new messages in that folder Easy Access to Popular webmail services Celframe Mail 2008 makes it even easier to integrate and use various Web mail accounts from one inbox Gmail and Mac users can access their accounts in Celframe Mail 2008 by simply providing their user names and passwords Configuration When you open Celframe Office Mail for the first time you need to create a new account First click n Create a new account Ge his l i a ki T eee Bh Select Email account and press next Select Here Account Wizard Hew Account Setup In order to receive messages you first need to set up a Mail or Newsgroup account This Wizard will collect the information necessary to set up a Mail or Newsgroup account If you do not know the information requested please contact your System Administrator or Internet Service Provider Select the type of account you would like to set up Email account RSS News amp Blogs p ninensssnnsssunnnnann l
493. tation mode click on the Selection icon If you often work in Rotation mode you can choose the Rotation Mode after Clicking Object button from the Options bar and cycle through normal and rotation modes just by clicking on the object This can be more convenient than repeatedly clicking the selected object then clicking the Rotate button from the Drawing toolbar Rotation Mode after Clicking Object Selecting Objects Direct selection To select an object the easiest way is to click directly on it For objects that are not filled you have to click directly on the object s outline to select it Selection by framing You can select several objects at once by using the mouse to drag a large rectangle around the objects with the Select button as shown For this to work i the icon on the Drawing toolbar must be active Only objects that lie entirely within the rectangle will be selected Selecting the object Selecting hidden objects Even if objects are located behind others and not visible they can still be selected To select an object that is covered by another object hold down the A t key and click the object To select an object that is covered by several objects hold down the A t key and click through the objects until you reach the required underlying object To cycle through the objects in reverse order hold down the A t Shift keys when you click To help in making accurate selections you can check the number and
494. te from file and click OK 3 Click Search to browse to the file s location Select the file and click Open Then click OK Insert a new slide Insert gt Slide e Right click on the present slide and select New Slide from the context menu Select the layout slide that bests fits your needs If your slide consists only of a title with a graphic chart or spreadsheet inserting it as an OLE Object is the simplest But be advised doing this fora chart or spreadsheet is not simple This is an advanced technique Modify the elements of the slide At this stage the slide consists of everything contained in the Master page as well as the chosen layout slide This includes removing unneeded elements adding needed elements pictures and OLE Objects and inserting text Remove any element on the slide you do not need gt port Changes to any of the prepackaged layouts can only be made using View gt Normal which is the default Attempting to do this by modifying a slide master will result in an error message The slide master is modified using View gt Master gt Master Slide Custom Animations You can add a custom animation to a slide to make it more attractive You can choose from the custom animation list on animations and apply it on the items inside your slides F Custom Animation Modify effect Remove Custom Animation Effect _ Emphasis Stark ial Property Checkerboard E Circle Speed Diagonal Sq
495. ter a size manually 3 Bold Makes the selected text bold If the cursor is in a word the entire word is made bold If the selection or word is already bold the formatting is removed 4 Italic Makes the selected text italic If the cursor is in a word the entire word is made italic If the selection or word is already italic the formatting is removed 5 Underline Underlines or removes underlining from the selected text 6 Shadow Make a shadow for selected text 7 Left Aligns the selected paragraph s to the left page margin 8 Center Centers the selected paragraph s on the page 9 Right Aligns the selected paragraph s to the right page margin 10 Justify Aligns the selected paragraph s to the left and the right page margins 11 Increase Spacing Click the Increase Spacing icon to increase the paragraph spacing above the selected paragraph 12 Decrease Spacing Click the Decrease Spacing icon to decrease the paragraph spacing above the selected paragraph 13 Single Line Applies single line spacing to the current paragraph This is the default setting 14 1 5 Line Sets the line spacing of the current paragraph to one and half lines 15 Double Line Sets the line spacing of the current paragraph to two lines 16 Bullets On Off Assigns bullet points to the selected paragraphs or removes them from bulleted paragraphs 17 Font Specify the formatting and the font that you want to apply 18 Paragraph Mod
496. ter the name by which you would like to refer to this account for example Work Account Home Account or Wews Account Account Name news mozilla oral Check your input and verify it by pressing Finish Account Wizard Congratulations Please verify that the information below is correct Account Name news mozilla org Email Address mortern nidelvenit no News Server Name NNTP news mozilla org Outgoing User Name mortern Click Finish to save these settings and exit the Account Wizard You should now have a new folder located under Local folders named news mozilla org Highlight and rightclick the new news folder and choose subscribe Now you re presented with a window to choose which groups you want to subscribe to There s a group called mail news on news mozilla org which is a valuable resource for new users If you would like to subscribe to it search for mail news and subscribe to the group that comes up With other news servers you could also search for groups with the name car and so on Subseribe EE Account news mozilla org gt Show items that contain malnews ss ss lt SsSSCSs Select the newsgroups to subscribe to Please wait If you have a good connection or a lot of time choose to download 500 headers these will give you the subject line of the last 500 messages which you can read Download Headers netscape public mozilla mail news There are 56262 new
497. text A gray border appears around the text and you can now make changes Press Enter to create a new line LAIRD EPEAT OAR EDT EATS eStudent Marks Butadiene eee mot Marks meemi Mio nm a i th w Fow Row Fow Fou Fow 4 5 Ei T Stud Murn a 2 A single click on the title allows you to move it with the mouse 3 If you want to change the formatting of the main title choose Format Title Main Title This opens the Title dialog 4 Select one of the available tabs in the dialog to make modifications 5 Click OK In your document click outside the chart to exit chart editing mode Editing Chart Axes To edit the axes of a chart that you have inserted 1 Double click on the chart A gray border appears around the chart and the menu bar now contains commands for editing the objects in the chart 2 Choose Format Axis then select the axis or axes that you would like to edit A dialog appears 3 Select from the available sections and make the required changes 4 Click OK In your document click outside the chart to exit chart editing mode Editing Chart Legends To edit a chart legend 1 Double click on the chart A gray border appears around the chart and the menu bar now contains commands for editing the objects in the chart 2 Choose Format Legend or double click on the legend This opens the Legend dialog Transparency Characters Font Effects Position L
498. text will be hidden unless you change the transparency of the image After changing the transparency the final result looks like a decal applied over the text as in where the transparency has been set to 50 in the Transparency spin box in the Picture toolbar The words under the image are visible but appear lighter than the rest of the text u also insert an image overlapping the text In this case si 1 change the transparency of the image After changing th s like a decagapplied ower the text agn where the transp acy spin boxin the Picture toolbar The words under the rest of the te xt Transparent image added over the text You can obtain a similar result if you set a graphic s wrap to the In Background format In this case all the text will be clearly readable with characters that have the same intensity However the background graphic should not be dark otherwise the text could be difficult to read You can also use the Transparency spinbox to control the transparency Anchoring Graphics and Drawing Objects You can anchor graphics as a character or to a page paragraph or character You can also place graphics in a frame and anchor the frame to a page paragraph or character Which method you choose depends on what you are trying to achieve Here are the ways you can anchor graphics or drawing objects To Page The graphic keeps the same position in relation to the page margins It does not move as you add or delete
499. the More gt gt button the window will expand to present more detailed and fine grained information In this mode you may specify the exact value of each of the color s components in either the RGB Red Green Blue or HSV Hue Saturation Value color space Editing the color in hex or hexadecimal mode is also possible The alpha or transparency level may also be configured P i 7 he r 2 i i Introduction to Celframe Office Publisher Celframe Office Publisher is desktop publishing application that helps you create great looking documents of all kinds Being a page layout application it is different from word processors in the sense that it is concerned with laying out text images and drawings with a much higher level of precision and control by the designer which is not possible and sometimes not desirable with modern word processors What Can You Do With Celframe Office Publisher e Create great looking documents including things like CD covers greeting cards company brochures newsletters and posters e Create files which will print easily at your commercial printer e Create interactive PDF forms and presentation documents What is interactive PDF Interactive PDFs have special features like hyperlinks annotations non printing notes bookmarks a kind of an automatically created index for your PDF as well as special navigation features just like a web browser e Import photos and othe
500. the portrait top margin becomes the landscape left margin and so on 6 Click OK to save the changes Organizer Page Background l Header Footer Borders Columns Footnote Mame Landscape Next Style 31 andscape Category Custom Styles contains width 8 5inch Fixed height 11 0inch From top 1 0inch From bottom 1 0inch Text direction left to right horizontal Page Description Arabic PortraitLeft Not register true Organizer Page Background Header Footer Borders Columns Footnote Paper Fformat Format Width Height 11 00 Orientation G Portrait O Landscape Paper tray From printer settings Margins Layout settings Left 1 25 Page layout Right and left Right 1 25 Format 1 2 ri Top 1 00 _ Register true Bottom 1 00 Setting orientation and margins for a landscape page Inserting a Landscape Page into a Portrait Document Now that you have defined the Landscape page style here is how to apply it 1 Position the cursor in the paragraph or table at the start of the page that is to be set to landscape Right click and choose Paragraph or Table respectively in the pop up menu 2 On the Text Flow page of the Paragraph dialog box or the Table Format dialog box select Insert or Break for a table and With Page Style Set the Page Style property to Landscape Click OK to close the dialog box and to apply the new page style 3 Position the cu
501. the language used for the spellcheck function in western alphabets Asian Specifies the language used for the spellcheck function in Asian alphabets CTL Specifies the language for the complex text layout spellcheck For the current document only Specifies that the settings for default languages are valid only for the current document Enhanced language support Enabled for Asian languages Activates Asian languages support You can now modify the corresponding Asian language settings in Celframe Office If you want to write in Chinese Japanese or Korean you can activate the support for these languages in the user interface Enabled for complex text layout CTL Activates complex text layout support You can now modify the settings corresponding to complex Options Language Settings Languages Celframe Office Load Save Language of Lang ame Settings User interface English U54 Writing Aids Locale setting Default Celframe Office Write Celframe Office Writes yeb Decimal separator key Same as locale setting Celframe Office Data Access Charts Default currency Default Internet H E A Default languages For documents Western PE English USA Asian Korean Rok CTL Bengali India _ For the current document only Enhanced language support Enabled for Asian languages _ Enabled For complex text layout ECTL text layout in Celframe Office Languages Writing Aids Option Specifies
502. the text flows from one column to the next so that all the columns adjust to the same height If this is not what you want click anywhere in the section then choose Format gt Columns to reopen the Columns dialog box deselect the Evenly distribute contents to all columns check box and click OK to effect the change Choose View gt Express gt Nonprinting Characters or press Ctrl F10 to display end of paragraph markers 1 Often unexpected behavior of columns is due to extra paragraphs that are normally invisible to the user but are taking up space Columns Settings Columns width and spacing Column Width Spacing 0 00 Autowidth Separator line Line Mone Height LOO Position Top Specifying columns for a selection Creating Frames Inserts a frame that you can use to create a layout of one or more columns of text and objects You can create a frame in several ways depending on your needs Choose Format gt Frame to create an empty frame The Frame dialog box appears You can click OK and come back to customize it later or you can set the frame s characteristics at this stage Select text or a graphic choose Format gt Frame and click OK to create a frame containing the selection The selected text is automatically deleted from the normal text flow and inserted into the frame and the Frame dialog box appears Insert a picture or other object by selecting Insert gt Picture gt From file or Inse
503. the toolbar handle hold down the left mouse button drag the toolbar to the new location and then release the mouse button To move a floating toolbar click on its title bar and drag it to a new location Handle of docked toolbar 0 a a a a E Submenu Tear off toolbar Moving a docked toolbar Standard Bar The Standard bar is available in every Celframe Office application mEnE WAI Sd BE oF LoOWmns 1 New Creates a new Celframe Office document 2 Open File Opens or imports a file 3 Save Saves the current document 4 Save As Saves the current document in a different location or with a different file name or file type 5 Document as E mail Opens a new window in your default e mail program with the current document as an attachment The current file format is used If the document is new and unsaved the format specified in Tools gt Options gt Load Save gt General is used 6 Edit File Use the Edit File icon to activate or deactivate the edit mode 7 Export as PDF Saves the current file to Portable Document Format PDF A PDF file can be viewed and printed on any platform with the original formatting intact provided that supporting software is installed 8 Print File Directly Click the Print File Directly icon to print the active document with the current default print settings These can be found in the Printer Setup dialog which you can call with the Printer Settings menu command 9 Pag
504. the type of line that you want 1 pt 1 point 1 12 pica 172 inch 127360 mm 0 3527 mm 2 The default format is for the separator lines to have the same height as the columns If you want the separator lines to be shorter than the columns use the Height box to enter the height of the separator lines as a percentage of the height of the columns For example if you enter 50 the separator lines will be half as high as the columns 3 If you entered a height of less than 100 use the Position drop down list to select a vertical alignment for the separator lines The vertical positioning options are Top Centered or Bottom Reverting to a Single Column Layout To revert to a single column layout go to the Settings area and either reset the number in the Columns box to 1 or click the single column layout icon Changing the Number of Columns for Existing Text You can create columns and then type or paste text into them or you can select some existing text and change the number of columns for displaying it When you select text and change the number of columns for that text Celframe Office Write turns the selected text into a section Figure shows the Columns dialog box for a selection Notice that the Apply to box on the right hand side has Selection highlighted and an extra check box Evenly distribute contents to all columns appears in the upper left hand part of the dialog box As you add text to the section you will see that
505. tically updated although Now continuously changes In the Tools menu the menu item Cell Contents AutoCalculate is normally active however automatic calculation does not apply to the function NOW This ensures that your computer is not solely occupied with updating the sheet Calculating Time Difference If you want to calculate time differences for example the time between 23 30 and 01 10 in the same night use the following formula B2 lt A2 B2 A2 The later time is B2 and the earlier time is A2 The result of the example is 01 40 or 1 hour and 40 minutes In the formula an entire 24 hour day has a value of 1 and one hour has a value of 1 24 The logical value in parentheses is O or 1 corresponding to O or 24 hours The result returned by the formula is automatically issued in time format due to the sequence of the operands Entering Fractions You can enter a fractional number in a cell and use it for calculation Enter 0 1 5 in a cell without the quotation marks and press the input key In the input line above the spreadsheet you will see the value 0 2 which is used for the calculation If you enter O 1 2 AutoCorrect causes the three characters 1 and 2 to be replaced by a single character The same applies to 1 4 and 3 4 This replacement is defined in Tools AutoCorrect Replace tab If you want to see multi digit fractions such as 1 10 you must change the cell format to the multi digit fraction view Op
506. till exist To set several decimal tabs one after the other keep clicking the icon to the left of the ruler until the desired tab type is shown then click on the ruler Setting lett tabs Setting right tabs Setting decimal tabs B Setting centered tabs Formula Bar The Formula Bar allows you to create and insert calculations into a text document To activate the Formula Bar press F2 or View gt Toolbar gt Formula Text formula fry 7 Be y sum B1 B4 1 Cell Reference Displays the position of the cell cursor in a table 2 Formula Opens a submenu from which you can insert a formula into the cell of a table Place the cursor in a cell in the table or at the position in the document where you want the result to appear Click the Formula icon and choose the desired formula from the submenu 3 Cancel Clears the contents of the input line and closes the formula bar 4 Apply Transfers the contents of the input line into your document and closes the formula bar The contents of the input line are inserted at the cursor position in the document 5 Formula Area Allows you to create a formula by typing it directly into the input line or by clicking the Formula icon to display the formulas in submenu Changing Document Views Celframe Office has several ways to view a document Print Layout Web Layout Full Screen and Zoom You can select these choices on the View menu The only document view option with a submenu is Zoom When
507. till selected which means it is outlined in red dots and so called handles at each corner and the middle of a line Now use Windows gt Properties or press F2 to bring up the Properties For the time being let s stay in the default tab of this dialog which is called X Y Z The more complex a document is the more useful it is to give each object a unique name It will make it easier to find and to select it later on Not surprisingly we ll call our Shape Background Next make our rectangle match the size of the page Remember the values we chose for the page Insert them here but first don t forget to click on the chain symbol to the right of the boxes for changing the values for width and height If you try to do this without unlinking that chain you will see that a change in one value changes the other in a proportional way and it will seem like you are forever stuck which you will be until you unlink that chain Now that our rectangle has exactly the size of our page You need to make sure that it matches the page borders by setting its X and Y positions Debi ea BA ee Offs ASA O O 43 44 BAA Awe A ae 4 2 Background Geometry Pos 0 000 mm Y Pos 0 000 mm Qe ah ae ae ae Width 210 002 mm Height 297 000 mm Rotation 0 0 0Q Basepoint O e Level ae a e S EY o ERIC Shape Group Text Image Line Colours mm v 100 00 FILA A aw Ml Background vw
508. tioning or lower for dimensioning The possible base point positions correspond to the handles on the selection frame plus a central point The change in position lasts only as long as you have the dialog open when you close this dialog Draw resets the base point to the standard position Re The Keep ratio checkbox is very useful Click it to keep the ratio of width to height fixed while you change the size of an object You cannot move an object Check to see if the position is protected Rotating Objects Click on the Rotation tab of the Position and Size dialog Here you can define the rotation angle as well as the location of the pivot point Position and Size Position and Size Rotation Slant amp Corner Radius Piviok point Default settings Position s ss oe Sos Ff h p d Default settings ngle 0 00 degrees E 3 Rotation angle Rotating an object Slant and Corner Radius With some Draw objects the slant angle inclination or shearing and corner radius can be set in this dialog Position and Size Position and Size Rotation Slant amp Corner Radius Corner radius Radius Slant ngle Corner Radius Comer radius Radius 2 00cm Example of setting rounded corners You can use this dialog to round the corners of the usual Draw objects text boxes legends rectangles and square The same effect can be achieved when you a
509. tions are not absolutely necessary they do help Having these options selected permits you to update a table that has a relationship defined with another table It also permits you to delete a field from the table Relations Tables involved ar Fields involved Date s Update options __ Delete options CO Mo action Mo action Update cascade Delete cascade Set null gt Set null Set default Set default Chapter 2 Form Using the Wizard to create a form We will use the Wizard to create two forms Fuel and Car In the main database window click the Form icon Double click Use Wizard to Create Form to open the wizard Simple forms use only require some of these steps while more complex forms may use all of them E Retailer Celframe Office Data Access File Edit Yiew Insert Tools Author s Tools Window Help mace te oe free ee es eee ee Database E Create Form in Design view Description TEE E Use Wizard to Create Form Tables Fa Queries Mone Reports Step 1 Select fields 1 Under Tables or queries select DVD Collection as the table Available fields lists the fields for the DVD Collection table 2 Click the right double arrow to move all of these fields to the Fields in the form list Click Next Form Wizard Select the fields of your form Field selection Tables or queries Set up a subform Table DYOD Collection Add subform Fields Availa
510. to the baseline character size in percentage The amount by which the text is raised or lowered can be set to automatic by selecting the Automatic checkbox Character Position Superscript Raiseflower by Automatic Relative font size Subscript Scaling Scale width Spacing Default y Pair kerning Arial Dialog to set the character position attributes Two more position attributes can be set on this page The width scaling of the text which specifies the percentage of the font width by which to compress or expand the individual characters of the selected text The spacing between the characters of the font which can be defined in number of points Selecting the Pair kerning checkbox causes Celframe Office to automatically adjust the spacing between certain pairs of characters to visually improve the appearance Formatting paragraphs To view the paragraph formatting options select Format gt Express gt Paragraph or click the Paragraph button T on the Text Formatting toolbar If a toolbar with the text icon is not visible choose View gt Toolbars gt Text Formatting This dialog contains three pages that are described in detail below If Asian Typography has been activated a page called Asian Typography is also displayed Paragraph Indents amp Spacing Alignment Indent Before best After text 4 dh dH First line Spacing Above paragraph Below paragraph Line spacing Single The p
511. tomatically You can set up Celframe Office to add captions automatically whenever you insert a graphic a table or other objects into a document You can choose which objects are captioned automatically what the sequence name is for each caption for example Table or Illustration and the position of the caption To set up automatic captions 1 Click Tools gt Options gt Celframe Office Celframe Office Write Click on the sign to open the different options The Options Celframe Office Celframe Office Write AutoCaption dialog box opens 2 Select AutoCaption Now you can see several choices at the right of the dialog box for adding captions automatically 3 On the AutoCaption dialog box choose which objects will be automatically captioned and specify the characteristics of the captions To add captions using the Caption dialog box 1 Insert the graphic then select it and click Insert gt Reference gt Caption or select the graphic then Right click gt Caption 2 Under Properties on the Caption dialog box make your selections for the Category Numbering and Separator fields Illustration Arabic 1 2 3 and a colon respectively and type your caption text in the Caption text box at the top Whatever text you enter for the caption appears in the box at the bottom after the sequence name number and separator 3 Click OK The graphic and its caption are placed in a frame Caption Caption K Fi
512. tors toolbar If the type of connector you want is not shown click on the small black triangle in the right upper part of the Connectors toolbar Open the Connectors toolbar where you can add connectors to objects in the current slide A connector is a line that joins objects and remains attached when the objects are moved If you copy an object with a connector the connector is also copied There are four types of connector lines Standard 90 degree angle bends Line two bends e Straight e Curved When you click a connector and move your mouse pointer over a filled object or the edge of an unfilled object connection points appear A connection point is a fixed point where you can attach a connector line If you want you can add a custom connection point called a glue point to an object To draw a connector line click a connection point on an object drag to a connection point on another object and then release You can also drag to an empty part of you document and click The unattached end of the connector is locked in place until you drag the end to a different location To detach a connector drag either end of the connector line to a different location Drawing Connectors Basics When you choose a connector from the toolbar the mouse pointer changes to AS you move the cursor over an object the available connection glue points become visible To connect two shapes move the mouse cursor over a glue point cli
513. trol key while you click the names Hal FI Sheeti Sheet J Sheets EA Spreadsheet Sheets and Cells Celframe Spreadsheet works with elements called spreadsheets Spreadsheets consist of a number of individual sheets each containing a block of cells arranged in rows and columns These cells hold the individual elements text numbers formulas etc which make up the data to be displayed and manipulated Each spreadsheet can have many sheets and each sheet can have many individual cells Each sheet in Spreadsheet can have a maximum of 65 536 rows and a maximum of 245 columns A through IV This gives 16 056 320 individual cells per sheet Rows and Columns On a spreadsheet rows are numbered from 1 to 32000 and the columns are designated with the letters A through Z AA through AZ and so on the last column is labeled with the letters IV Each cell on the sheet can be uniquely referenced by row and column For example cell Al is the first cell in the upper left corner of the sheet These numbers and letters appear along the edge of the window The row header contains the row numbers and the column header names the columns Clicking on one of these areas selects the entire row or column To select the entire sheet click on the unlabeled button at the intersection of the row and column headers at the top left Enter some text in cell Al As text is typed notice that the text appears both in the cell and in the input line of the form
514. trols toolbar The Properties Date Field window opens Each line contains a property of the field Go to the Date format property This is a dropdown list with Standard short as the default setting 1 Click the default Standard short to open the list Select 2 Click the Standard long entry to select it Td Design Mode On Off Scroll down to the Dropdown property Its default setting is No v Design Mode On Off It is also a dropdown list 1 Click the default No setting to open the list Sue 2 Click Yes to select it a Form Check Box Text Box To see what the Date field will look like click the Form Mode On Off icon You can do this any time you want to see the f Formatted Field form with the changes you have made a Push Button ption Button Step 2 Shorten the width of a field List Box All of the fields whose label contains the word payment are too wide Combo Box They need shortening before the controls are moved 4 Label Field Control click the Genre field More Controls S Form Design Wizards On Orr Selecting a field a Move the cursor over the middle green handle on the right The cursor becomes a single arrow b Drag the cursor to the left until the field is 2 5 cm wide 1 inch j aun If you have the Snap to Grid and Guides when moving icons selected in the Design Format toolbar you will see how wide the field is as you shorten it Step 3 Move the controls to group them by c
515. ts the title the key or the chart graphic to select it Green resizing handles appear 3 Move the pointer over the selected element When it becomes a four headed arrow click and drag to move the element 4 Release the mouse button when the element is in the desired position Ra If your graphic is 3D round red handles appear which control the three dimensional N angle of the graphic You cannot resize or reposition the graphic while the round red handles are showing With the round red handles showing Shift Click to get the green resizing handles You can now resize and reposition your 3D chart graphic You can resize the chart graphic using its green resizing handles Shift Click then drag a corner handle to maintain the proportions However you cannot resize the title or the key Changing the chart area background 1 The chart area is the area surrounding the chart graphic including the main title andkey 2 Double click the chart so that it is enclosed by a gray border 3 Select Format gt Chart Area The Chart Area window appears 4 Choose the desired format settings Chart Area E Fed z E Fed 3 MS Red 4 GS Red 5 MS Fed E Red E Fed E Magenta 1 GS Magenta 2 E Magenta 3 SS Magenta 4 GS Magenta 5 Chart Area dialog Lines Place a border around the chart area Area Choose from a variety of background fill options Transparency Set the capacity of the background fill and g
516. ts file paths into URL notation Enable this icon by Visible Buttons command click the arrow at the toolbar end Drawing Bar The Drawing bar contains frequently used editing tools Click the arrow next to an icon to open a toolbar that contains additional commands To select an object on the current slide click the Select tool white arrow on the Drawing bar and then click the object To select more than one object hold down Shift while you click To select an object that is behind another object hold Alt and then click the object To select the next underlying object in the stacking hold Alt and then click again To return the selection to the previously selected object hold down Shift Alt and then click To add text to a selected object double click the object and type or enter your text To remove a Selection click anywhere outside the selected object or press Escape By double clicking a tool you can use it for multiple tasks If you call the tool with a single click it reverts back to the last selection after completing the task k 4 TIGA a Merl tei gt i eine ei g etre 4 Z Alri Ta t MH rhs og FL g Y N 7 a 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 1 Selection b Allows you to select objects in the current document 2 Line Draws a Straight line where you drag in the current document To constrain the line to 45 degrees hold down Shift while you drag 3 Line Ends with Ar
517. ts the display of notes if both Help Tips and Extended Tips are turned off then you won t see the contents of a note when you hold the cursor over the note Extended tips When Extended tips are active a brief description of the function of a particular icon or menu command or a field on a dialog box appears when you hold the cursor over that item Help Agent To turn off the Help Agent similar to Microsoft s Office Assistant deselect this checkbox To restore the default Help Agent behavior click Reset Help Agent Help formatting High contrast is an operating system setting that changes the system color scheme to improve readability Open Save dialog boxes To use the standard Open and Save dialog boxes for your operating system deselect the Use Celframe Office dialogs checkbox When this checkbox is selected the Open and Save dialog boxes supplied with Celframe Office will be used Document status Choose whether printing a document counts as changing the document If this option is selected then the next time you close the document after printing the print date is recorded in the document properties as a change and you will be prompted to save the document again even if you did not make any other changes Year two digits Specifies how two digit years are interpreted For example if the two digit year is set to 1999 and you enter a date of 5 5 99 or later into your document the date is interpreted as 5 5 1999 Memo
518. u commands associated with the object By default you see inactive menu items as gray items To hide the inactive menu items go to Tools gt Options gt Celframe Office gt View and disable the Inactive menu items box Menus are located across the top of the Write window The main menu selections are File Edit View Insert Format Table Tools Author s Tools AddOns Window and Help When you click one of the main menu names a list of related options is displayed 1 File Contains commands that apply to the whole document 2 Edit This menu contains commands for editing the contents of a document 3 View This menu contains commands for controlling the on screen display of the document 4 Insert This menu contains all the necessary commands for inserting new elements in your document This includes sections footnotes notes special characters graphics and objects from other applications 5 Format Contains commands for formatting the layout and the contents of your document 6 Tools Contains spelling tools a gallery of object art that you can add to your document as well as tools for configuring menus and setting program preferences 7 Table Shows all commands to insert and to edit a table in a text document 8 Author s Tools Is a set of utilities designed to help Celframe Office users perform a wide range of tasks Using Celframe Office Write s Tools you can back up documents look up and translate words and phrase
519. u item no pixels will be selected View Menu The View menu contains commands that can be used to change the way the image or workspace are presented to you oom In Cbrl Mur Foon Que Ctrl Numi Soom to Window Ctril B zoom to Selection Actual Size Chrl ShiFk 4 Grid Rulers Pixels Inches Centimeters Zoom In This zooms in closer to the image The zoom percentage is increased to the next power of two percentage e g 100 200 Zoom Out This zooms out on the image decreasing the zoom level to the next lower power of two percentage Zoom to Window When this item is selected the zoom level is maintained such that the image always fits within the Celframe Office Studio window The zoom level will not be set higher than 100 Zoom to Selection If you have an area of the image selected this menu command will fit the viewable area around the rectangle that bounds the selection Actual Size This sets the zoom level to 100 Each pixel you see on screen corresponds exactly to one pixel in the active layer Grid This allows you to show or hide the grid which is useful when you have zoomed in on an image and wish to perform precise per pixel editing The grid is only visible when the zoom level is 200 or higher Rulers This option can be used to show or hide the rulers that are available for the top and left edges of the image canvas These can help you align drawings to specific positions on the
520. u make the font size large enough to be readable Just remember that this formatting will be applied to the note of every slide using the same slide master The bottom part of the Notes window contains an example of what any of your choices looks like At the present time you cannot view your notes while you are running a slide show Notes can be included in a printed handout of the slide show 4 Outline 1 through Outline 9 These styles set the formatting for each level of text in the text boxes of the slides All of these have default values that are fairly good You would probably want to leave most if not all of these values as they are Since in a simple presentation only one slide master is used any changes made will affect all slides containing the affect style For example five Slides have text with the Outline 2 style When you change the Outline 2 font size from 20 to 18 this change will be made on all five slides to every paragraph using the Outline 2 style 5 Title and Subtitle Set these styles the same way you set the styles for Outline 1 through Outline 9 Most of these styles work very well as they are The parts that you might want to change are the Font Typeface Font size and Font color Font Effects tab 6 When you are finished making your changes use View gt Normal Or you could click Close Master View in the Master View toolbar Creating the first slide The first slide is normally the Title Page Decide which
521. u must first insert either a smooth or a symmetrical point which is then converted to a corner point by using Corner Point 4 Delete Points Use the Delete Points icon to delete one or several selected points If you wish to select several points click the appropriate points while holding down the Shift key First select the points to be deleted and then click this icon or press Del 5 Split Curve The Split Curve icon splits a curve Select the point or points where you want to split the curve then click the icon 6 Convert To Curve Converts a curve into a Straight line or converts a straight line into a curve If you select a single point the curve before the point will be converted If two points are selected the curve between both points will be converted If you select more than two points each time you click this icon a different portion of the curve will be converted If necessary round points are converted into corner points and corner points are converted into round points If a certain section of the curve is straight the end points of the line have a maximum of one control point each They cannot be modified to round points unless the straight line is converted back to a curve 7 Corner Point Converts the selected point or points into corner points Corner points have two movable control points which are independent from each other A curved line therefore does not go straight through a corner point but forms
522. uares PEE Diamond Dissolve In Flash Once Fly In Fly in Slow Peek In First select the slide element Plus and then click Add to add Random Bars an animation effect Random Effects Split Venetian Blinds Wedge Change order fF Wthool Speed Very Fast Pla Slide Show Gubomatic preview d Automatic preview b Slide Transition Slide Transitions Your first slide show should probably have the same slide transition for all slides Setting Advance slide to On mouse click is the default and a simple setting If you want each slide to be shown for a specific amount of time click Automatic after and enter the number of seconds Click Apply to all slides a Tasks View 3 p Master Pages b Layouts P Custom Animation Slide Transition E o Apply to selected slides Bio Transition Wipe Up Wipe Right Wipe Left Wipe Down Wheel Clockwise 1 Spoke Wheel Clockwise 2 Spokes Wheel Clockwise 3 Spokes Wheel Clockwise 4 Spokes Wheel Clockwise 3 Spokes Uncover Down Uncover Lett Uncover Right Z Modify transition Speed Medium np Sound eMo Sound s Advance slide On mouse click Automatically after sec Apply to All Slides Slide Show Automatic preview how The Slide transition section has a very useful choice Automatic preview Select its checkbox Bie Then when you make any changes in a slide transition the new slide
523. ula bar Continue typing to see that more text can be added than appears to fit in the cell In fact any cell can accommodate text longer than a cell The whole length of the text is displayed and printed provided the adjacent cells to the right are empty If the cell to the right is not empty a small triangle on the right hand edge of the first cell appears indicating that the cell contains more text than can be displayed Turn off these triangles by choosing Tools gt Options gt Spreadsheet gt View and unchecking the Text overflow box When a number cannot be displayed in a cell because it is too long or due to the formatting e g currency format is displayed In this case increase the column width Set the width to optimal by simply double clicking the right divider in the column header Use all the usual functions to edit text Notice however that the right and left arrow keys will replace the cell cursor if Entry mode by clicking in a cell and entering characters is enabled Double clicking or pressing the F2 key or clicking in the entry row enters the Edit mode The left and right arrow keys now replace the text cursor Upon pressing the Enter key the text in cell Al is finished and the cursor automatically moves to cell A2 The active cell is always the one with the cell cursor and that is where entries and changes are made Navigating Through Sheets Tabs gaca Use the navigation buttons to display all the sh
524. ument You may wish to make visible such items as text table and section boundaries and grid lines In addition you might prefer different colors for such items as note indicators or field shadings On the Celframe Office Appearance page you can specify which items are visible and the colors used to display various items 1 In the Options dialog box click Celframe Office gt Appearance 2 To show or hide items such as text boundaries select or deselect the checkboxes next to the names of the items 3 To change the default colors for items click the down arrow in the Co or setting column by the name of the item and select a color from the pop up box 4 To save your color changes as a color scheme type a name in the Scheme box and click Save Options Celframe Office Appearance El CelFrame Office User Daka Color scheme General Scheme Celframe Office ka Delete Memory VIEW Print Paths On User interface elements Color setting Preview Colors General Fonts Securit Document background C Automatic Custom colors Accessibility _ Text boundaries C Automatic Java Load Save Application background L Automatic Language Settings l l Celframe Office Write Object boundaries Lo Automatic Celframe Office Write web l l Celframe Office Data Access _ Table boundaries C Automatic Charts Internet Font color LC Automatic S o a H H AAA _ Unvisited links L Automatic t F ee ee ee m1 1 Sh
525. uting Text Across Columns You can distribute text across the columns in one of two ways e Evenly If you choose to distribute text evenly Celframe Office Write will fill the first line of each column followed by the second line of each column and so on Newspaper style If you choose to distribute text newspaper style Celframe Office Write will fill the columns one at a time beginning with the first column To distribute text evenly check the Evenly distribute contents to all columns check box in the Settings area Clear this check box if you want to distribute text newspaper style N This check box is not always displayed in the Settings area Formatting Column Width and Spacing To create evenly spaced columns that are all the same width check the AutoWidth check box in the Width and spacing area To customize the width and spacing of the columns follow these steps 1 In the Width and spacing area clear the AutoWidth check box 2 On the Width line enter a width for each column 3 On the Spacing line enter the amount of space that you want between each pair of columns If you specify more than three columns use the arrow keys on the Column line to scroll among the columns Formatting Separator Lines To display separator lines between the columns 1 Eighteen separator line options exist None or various lines of thicknesses which range from 0 05 to 9 pt From the Line drop down list in the Separator line area select
526. utomatically inserted blank pages are exported to the PDF This is best if you are printing the PDF double sided For example books usually have chapters set to always start on an odd numbered right hand page When the previous chapter ends on an odd page Celframe Office inserts a blank page between the two odd pages This option controls whether to export that blank page Initial View Page of PDF Options Dialog Box On the Initial View page you can choose how the PDF opens by default in a PDF viewer The selections should be self explanatory PDF Options User Interface Security O Bookmarks and page Thumbnails and page Open on page Magnification Default Fit in window Fit width D Fit visible O Zoom Factor Page lawout Default Single page O Continuous Continuous Facing initial View page of PDF Options dialog box User Interface Page of PDF Options Dialog Box On the User Interface page you can choose more settings to control how a PDF viewer displays the file Some of these choices are particularly useful when you are creating a PDF to be used as a presentation or a kiosk type display PDF Options General Initial view User Interface Security Window options d Center window on screen Open in Full screen mode Display document title User interface options Hide menubar _ Hide toolbar _ Hide window controls Transitions Use transition effects Bookmarks
527. uttons New and Delete are then deactivated Book Specifies the book to be edited The IgnoreAllList All includes all words that have been marked with Ignore during spellcheck This list is administered only for the current spellcheck in the volatile RAM Some user data will be entered in the list at program start IgnoreAllList All cannot be deleted The IgnoreAllList entry cannot be selected and cannot be deleted Only the words included as content can be deleted This happens automatically each time that Celframe Office is closed Language Assigns a new language to the current custom dictionary Word You can type a new word for inclusion in the dictionary In the list below you will see the contents of the current custom dictionary If you select a word from this list it is displayed in the text field If you type a word with an equals sign after it such as AutoComplete the word is neither automatically hyphenated nor is a hyphenation suggested Typing Auto Complete result in the word being hyphenated or a hyphenation suggested at this point Suggestion This input field is only available if you are editing an exception dictionary The field takes the alterative suggestion for the word in the Word text box New Adds the word in the Word text field to your current custom dictionary The word in the Suggestion field is also added when working with exception dictionaries Options Defines the options for the spe
528. ve number to create the next value If you select a date series the increment that you enter is added to the time unit that you specify Fill Series Direction _ Series type _ ___ J ime unit Down us Right Growth Weekday Cancel Up Date Month Left AutoFill Year Help Start value End value Increment Edit fill series Applying Filters Filters and advanced filters allow you to work on certain filtered rows records of a data range In the spreadsheets in Celframe Office there are various possibilities for applying filters FAI Form Standard Filter Subtotals dvanced Filter Validation l Remove Filter Consolidate Hide AutoFilter SML Filter Settings Group and Outline DataPilot Refresh Data Express Data filter The AutoFilter function inserts a combo box on one or more data columns that lets you select the records rows to be displayed 1 Select the columns you want to use AutoFilter on 2 Choose Data Filter AutoFilter The combo box arrows are visible in the first row of the range selected 3 Run the filter by clicking the drop down arrow in the column heading and choosing an item Only those rows whose contents meet the filter criteria are displayed The other rows are filtered You can see if rows have been filtered from the discontinuous row numbers The column that has been used for the filter
529. w Templates and Documents and from the dialog open Samples 2 Open the spreadsheet examples Now you see the spreadsheet documents that come with the program 3 Double click the document with scenario in the name What you see is a sample spreadsheet in which several scenarios have been created Areas in which the scenarios are located are surrounded by frames Select the appropriate scenario in the list box appearing at the top of every frame Scenarios can also be selected in the Navigator 1 Open the Navigator with the Navigator icon on the Standard bar 2 Click the Scenarios icon in the Navigator the icon with the question and exclamation marks In the Navigator you see the defined scenarios with the comments that were entered when the scenarios were created Creating Your Own Scenarios To create a scenario select all the cells that provide the data for the scenario 1 Select the cells that are already highlighted by the frame of the existing scenario You can also select multiple cells distributed across the table To select multiple cells hold down the Ctrl key as you click each cell 2 Choose Tools Scenarios The Create Scenario dialog appears Create Scenario Name of scenario Calculation Comment Created by on 01 05 2010 11 53 25 Settings Display border Copy back Copy entire sheet Prevent changes JK Cancel Help GS Light gray C Light gray B Light blue E Light green E Light
530. w gt Ruler To show the vertical ruler choose Tools gt Options gt Celframe Office gt View and select Vertical ruler Celframe Office Load Save Language Settings Celframe Office Write General De H Grid Basic Fonts Western Basic Fonts Asian Basic Fonts CTL Print Table Changes Compatibility AutoCapton Celframe Office Write Web Celframe Office Data Access Charts Internet H H H A Guides _ __ View C Guides while moving Horizontal scrollbar Simple handles Vertical scrollbar C Large handles Ruler Display Horizontal ruler Inch Graphics and objects Vertical ruler Inch Tables C Right aligned Drawings and controls L Smooth scroll _ Field codes Notes Turn on the vertical ruler Rulers display the dimensions of the page and the position of tabs indents borders and columns You can modify all of these on the rulers using the mouse a Setting Tabs Millimeter Centimeter Inch Point Pica On the ruler set the tabs for the current paragraph or all selected paragraphs using the mouse Initially the default tabs are shown on the horizontal ruler Once you set a tab only the default tabs to the right of the tab that you have set are available b Setting Indents Margins and Columns You can define the indents and margins for the current paragraph or for all selected paragraphs using the mouse If you split the page into colum
531. w options Formatting Aids Options The display of symbols such as paragraph ends and tabs help you when writing editing and doing page layout For example you might want to know if any blank paragraphs or tabs are included or if any tables or graphics are too wide and intrude into the margins of the page On the Celframe Office Celframe Office Write Formatting Aids page select the required checkboxes Options Celframe Office Write Formatting Aids Celframe Office Load Save Language Settings Paragraph end _ Direct cursor Celframe Office Write General Custom hyphens Insert Spaces Paragraph alignment Non breaking spaces Left paragraph margin at Fonts Western C Tabs Tabs Table Breaks Tabs and spaces Changes Display oF Direc Cursor oe _ Hidden text Cursor in protected areas utoaption eer Cealframe Office Write seb Fields Hidden text Enable Celframe Office Data Access Fields Hidden paragraphs Charts Internet ES Choosing Formatting Aids options _ Direct cursor lets you enter text images tables frames and other objects in any blank area NM in your document Celframe Office inserts blank paragraphs and tabs to position the text or objects This feature is incompatible with rigorous use of styles and can lead to many formatting oddities so it should be avoided by professional Celframe Office Writes The AutoCorrect tool automatically removes empty paragraphs tabs and sp
532. window Re Install Celframe Office 2008 There are three ways Celframe Office could have been installed on your PC 1 Installed by the computer manufacturer 2 Installed by yourself from CD ROM 3 Downloaded and installed from our web site In the case of 1 and 2 you should re install from the CD ROM Note that when a computer manufacturer provides Celframe Office pre installed they will nearly always provide a CD ROM with a setup program for Celframe Office Activate Your Celframe Office Celframe Office Activation Basically when you purchase Celframe Office we will provide you a 30 days pre activated product this is basically to provide you a grace period for activation AS some activation may need web connection we provide this grace period but after expiry of the period the software will ask you for the CD key To enter a Product Key follow these steps 1 Start any Celframe Office application Start Program Files Celframe Office 2 If the trial period has already run out you will be presented with a dialog asking you to enter a Product Key If the trial period has not yet expired then select Help About and click the Activation button 3 Confirm that the version of Celframe Office matches the one that you have purchased a product key for For example all purchases after September 2004 will be for version 4 If you have purchased version 4 and the dialog box says Celframe Office 2006 then you should download and in
533. wing tools 30 3D Effects Use the tools to change the appearance of the 3D effects object such as geometry Outline Bar In Outline View the Outline bar contains frequently used editing tools Click the arrow next to an icon to open a toolbar that contains additional commands First Level All Levels Hide Subpoinks Show Subpoinks ih Formatting On OFF Black amp white view View Show First Level Hides all of the headings of the slides in the current slide show except for the titles of the slides Hidden headings are indicated by a black line in front of a slide title To show the headings click the All Levels icon All Levels Displays the hidden headings of the slides in the current slide show To hide all of the headings in the current slide show except for the slide titles click the First Level icon Hide Subpoints Hides the subheadings of a selected heading Hidden subheadings are indicated by a black line in front of a heading To show the lower level headings click the Show Subpoints icon Show Subpoints Displays the hidden subheadings of a selected heading To hide the subheadings of a selected heading click Hiade Subpoints icon Formatting On Off Shows or hides the character formatting of the slide headings To change the character formatting of a heading open the Styles and Formatting window right click a style and then choose Modify Black and White View Shows your slides in black and white only
534. x Minutes Celframe Office Data Access Size optimization for XML format Charts Internet Always create backup copy Warn when not saving in OpenDocument or default Format Save URLs relative to File system Internet Default File Format Document type Always ave as Text document ka Microsoft Word 97 2000 P ka Mote Mot using OpenDocument as the default Format may cause Formatting or content to be lost Choosing Load and Save options Load Load user specific settings with the document When you save a document certain settings are saved with it For example your choice of how to update links is affected by the Load user specific settings option Some settings printer name data source linked to the document are always loaded with a document whether or not this checkbox is selected If you select this option these document settings are overruled by the user specific settings of the person who opens it If you deselect this option users personal settings do not overrule the settings in the document Save Edit document properties before saving When you select this option the Document Properties dialog pops up to prompt you to enter relevant information the first time you save a new document or whenever you use Save As Save AutoRecovery information every Note that AutoRecovery in Celframe Office overwrites the original file If you have also chosen Always create backup copy the original file then overwrites the bac
535. xed later It is sometimes easier to draw only one box per level copy and paste this box and then move it to the desired position You can also select one or more boxes and use Edit gt Express gt Duplicate to make copies The spacing of the duplicated objects to the original can be input in the placement fields for X and Y axes Note that positive values for X and Y are relative to the original object to the right and downwards respectively Duplicate Ss IT T a Number of copies Placement Cancel s axis 0 20 Y axis 0 20 Default ay dh ah ngle 0 degrees Enlargement width 0 00 Height 0 00 Colors Start C Blue 8 End C Blue amp In the next step add text to the boxes The text is best input as an element in the box Activate the icon on the Options toolbar and then doubleclick the box to enter text into it Alternatively select the box and press F2 You should then see a blinking cursor in the box and the Text Formatting toolbar should be visible Set the text formatting and type the text Depending on the length and formatting of the text you may need to adjust the size of the box and the spacing to neighboring boxes Adjustments can be made initially with the mouse and then fine tuned with the Position and Size dialog Now you can set up the fill colors and save the drawing The connections between the boxes are not drawn with ordinary lines but with Draw s connectors You can also use text fra
536. xis labels 4 Show Hide Axis Description s The AxesTitle On Off icon on the Formatting bar switches the labeling of all axes on or off 5 Horizontal Grid On Off The Horizontal Grid On Off icon on the Formatting bar toggles the visibility of the grid display for the X axis Note This only works if the Minor grid check boxes in Insert Grids are cleared 6 Vertical Grid On Off The Vertical Grid On Off icon on the Formatting bar toggles the visibility of the grid display for the Y axis Note This only works if the X axis Minor grid is not selected in Insert Grids 7 Chart Type Specifies a chart type from the predefined options 8 AutoFormat Opens the dialog AutoFormat Chart where you can interactively modify many properties of the chart 9 Chart Data Opens the Chart Data dialog where you can edit the chart data 10 Data in Rows Changes the arrangement of the chart data 11 Data in Columns Changes the arrangement of the chart data 12 Scale Text Rescales the text in the chart when you change the size the chart 13 Reorganize Chart Moves all chart objects to their default positions This function does not alter the chart type or any other attributes other than the position of objects Celframe Office Power Presentation 2008 Chapter 1 Introduction to Celframe Office Power Presentation Celframe Office Power Presentation lets you create professional slide shows that can include charts drawing objects text
537. xpected ways Linking Frames You can link several frames to each other even when they are on different pages of a document The contents will automatically flow from one to the next This technique is very useful when designing newsletters where articles may need to be continued on a different page To link one frame to another 1 Select the frame to be linked from 2 Click the Link Frames icon o on the frame bar 3 Click the next frame in the series which must be empty as You cannot link from a frame to more than one other frame Wrap Hyperlink Borders Background Columns Macro Name Frame l Previous link lt None gt Next link Protect d Contents d Position r gjize Properties _ Editable in read only document Print Text direction Use superordinate object settings Options page of the Frame dialog box On the Hyperlink page you can specify the file for the hyperlink to open This file can be on your machine a network or the Internet Type Options Wrap Borders Background Columns Macro Link to Mame Frame Image map d Server side image map Client side image map Hyperlink page Creating Headers and Footers Headers are portions of a document that always appear at the top of a page footers appear at the bottom of a page Typically headers display the title or chapter name of a document To insert a header right click on the document gt Page gt Header or View
538. xt Flow Insert a page or column break either before or after the table Use the Text Flow Break check box combined with the Page or Column and the Before or After buttons If you insert a page break before the table that is start the table on a new page you can also change the page style that will go with it by checking the With Page Style box and selecting a new page style As with any page break you can also reset the page numbers using the Page number box Keep a table on one page by deselecting the Allow table to split across pages and columns check box If this item is deselected the next item is not active Keep each row on one page by deselecting the Allow row to break across pages and columns check box Use the Repeat heading check box and the numbers box to select the number of table heading rows that will be repeated on each page A complicated table may need two or three heading rows to be easily read and understood Use the Text direction list to select the direction for the text in the cells The most common setting is Left to right for Western languages ji au The phrase Use superordinate object settings means use the formatting settings from the paragraph before the table e Select the vertical alignment of the text in the table or the selected cells the choices are to align with the top of the cell the center of the cell or the bottom of the cell This alignment is in addition to the Left Right alignmen
539. xt or object and applies the formatting to another text selection or object Click the Format Paintbrush icon on the Standard toolbar 16 Undo Reverses the last command or the last entry you typed To select the command that you want to reverse click the arrow next to the Undo icon on the Standard bar 17 Redo Reverses the action of the last Undo command To select the Undo step that you want to reverse click the arrow next to the Redo icon on the Standard bar 18 Chart Creates a chart in the current document 19 Spreadsheet Inserts a spreadsheet as an OLE object Enter or paste data into the cells then click outside the object to return to Power Presentation 20 Hyperlink Opens a dialog that enables you to create and edit hyperlinks 21 Display Grid Specifies whether to display the grid 22 Document Map Click the Navigator On Off icon to hide or show the Navigator 23 Zoom Reduces or enlarges the screen display of Celframe Office The current zoom factor is displayed as a percentage value on the Status bar 24 Help Opens the main page of the Celframe Office Help for the current application You can scroll through the Help pages and you can search for index terms or any text 25 What s this Enables extended help tips under the mouse pointer till the next click Load URLS Loads a document specified by an entered URL You can type a new URL or select one that is already registered Celframe Office automatically conver
540. y five degrees Tilt Up Depth Tilts the selected object upwards by five degrees Direction if Lighting Tilt Left Surface 3D Color Tilts the selected object left by five degrees Tilt Right Tilts the selected object right by five degrees Depth Opens the Extrusion Depth window Select an extrusion depth Enter an extrusion depth Direction Opens the Extrusion Direction window Select a direction Select a perspective or parallel extrusion method Lighting Opens the Extrusion Lighting window Select a lighting direction Select a lighting intensity Surface Opens the Extrusion Surface window Select a surface material or a wire frame display 3D Color Opens the Extrusion Color toolbar Fontwork The Fontwork toolbar opens when you select a Fontwork object Fontwork Gallery Fontwork Shape Fontwork Alignment Fontwork Character Spacing Fontwork Gallery Opens the Fontwork Gallery where you can select another preview Click OK to apply the new set of properties to your Fontwork object Fontwork Shape Opens the Fontwork Shape toolbar Click a shape to apply the shape to all selected Fontwork objects Fontwork Same Letter Heights Switches the letter height of the selected Fontwork objects from normal to the same height for all object Fontwork Alignment Opens the Fontwork Alignment window Click to apply the alignment to the selected Fontwork objects Fontwork Character S
541. yle Graphics W Link If Preview Insert picture dialog box At the bottom of the Insert picture dialog box are two check boxes If the Preview checkbox is checked the selected graphic file is previewed in a pane Linking a Graphic File If the Link checkbox in the Insert picture dialog box is checked Celframe Office will create a link to the file containing the graphic instead of saving a copy of the graphic in the document The result is that the figure will be displayed in the document but when the document is saved it will contain only a reference to the graphic file but not the graphic itself The document and the image remain as two separate files and they are merged together only when you open the document again Linking an image has two advantages and one disadvantage Advantage Linking can reduce the size of the document when it is saved because the image file itself is not included Advantage You can modify the image file separately without changing the document because the link to the file remains valid and the modified image will appear when you next open the document Disadvantage If you send the document to someone else you must also send the image file or the receiver will not be able to see the linked image Resizing a Graphic It is possible and quite likely that the inserted image will not fit perfectly into the document because it is too big or too small Therefore you will probably need to resi
542. yle select Modify which brings up the Page Style dialog On the Page page of the Page Style dialog box in the Layout settings section select a b c from the Format drop down list Page Style Default Organizer Page Background Header Footer Borders Columns Footnote Paper format Format Letter Width 6 50 Height 11 00 Orientation Portrait Landscape Margins Left 0 69 Right 0 53 Top Bottom ir 4 dh 4 Paper tray From printer settings Layout settings Page layout Right and left Format d Register true Changing format of page numbers Chapter 5 Working with Graphics Reference Inserting a Graphic From a File Web Component Pictures a To insert a graphic image from a file the file must be already in a directory folder on the computer Proceed as follows Diagram 1 Determine the destination for the image Text Box 2 On the main menu select Insert gt Picture gt From File RT File This displays the dialog box Object 3 Navigate to the file to be inserted E Bookmark 4 Select the file to insert and click Open ESM Hyperlink Express Insert picture bears a elephant My Recent goat Documents aeih pony raccoon tiger EI zebras zebras2 May Documents Desktop hy Computer My Network File name elicar Places Files of type lt All formats brop def emt eps gif pas Cancel St
543. ze width pixels Height pixels Resolution Jol Print size Width 1g Height 4 92 centimeters p l Bicubic will be used CI cu T aLa Depending on the type of image that you are shrinking you may want to use the Sharpen effect with a value of 1 or 2 after using the Resize command Canvas Size This command lets you enlarge or shrink the image canvas without changing the size of the image itself It works similarly to the Resize dialog but adds an Anchor selection If the image canvas is enlarged the new area will be filled with the secondary color Canvas Size Hew size 2 1 ME gt By percentage Ce By absolute size Maintain aspect ratio Pinel size Width pixels Height 450 pixels Resolution afl Print size Height 11 91 centimeters Aneho ELL Flip Horizontal and Flip Vertical These menu items allows you to flip the image horizontally or vertically Original image After being flipped horizontally Rotate These menu items gives you several commands for rotating the image by 90 degrees in either the clockwise or counter clockwise directions or by 180 degrees After being rotated 90 degrees clockwise f Layers Menu The commands in this menu only affect the currently active Layer as chosen in the Layers Window Odd Mew Layer Cbrl ShiFk hy Delete Layer Ctrl Shift Del Duplicate Layer
544. ze in the toolbar Recolor This tool is useful for replacing one color with another This tool is useful for replacing one color with another When recoloring with the left mouse button the primary color signifies the replacement color and the secondary color represents the color to replace If you use the right mouse button these roles are reversed You may left click while holding the Ctrl key to select the primary color Right clicking while holding Ctrl selects the secondary color This conveniently duplicates the Color Picker s functionality You may adjust the sensitivity for color replacement with the Tolerance setting If this is set to 0 then only exact colors will be replaced If it is set to 100 then it will behave almost exactly like the Paintbrush Tool Text This tool can be used for placing text on the image This tool allows you to type text on to the current layer While this tool is selected you may click on the canvas to place the text cursor While this cursor is blinking you may type to insert text The Text Controls in the Toolbar can be used to change what font is used the size of the font formatting and justification New Image 100 Celframe Office Studio Arial E Smooth B i KA grrr ar npa N 300 CELFRAME While you are typing you may notice the presence of a control located below and to the right of the blinking text cursor This control is a square with four arr
545. ze the image You can modify the size of a graphic in two ways Unscaled resize Scaled resize Reduce proportionally holding the shift pressed while dragging the mouse Non proportional reduction obtained just dragging the mouse without holding shift Unscaled Resize When you add a new graphic and also when you select an existing one by clicking on it it displays some square points along its perimeter these are called handles To resize the graphic 1 Move the cursor onto a point 2 Click the left mouse button 3 Drag the mouse to modify the size of the figure This basic resizing process is useful if you need to specify the size and the height independently of each other Resizing image Scanner If a scanner is connected to your computer Celframe Office can call the scanning application The scanned item will then be added into the Celframe Office document page as an image To start this procedure on the main menu Select Insert gt Picture gt Scan gt Select Source Celframe Office Gallery You can select a graphic from the Gallery and drag it into the document The Gallery icon is located in the Drawing Bar Proceed as follows 1 Click on the Gallery icon 2 Select the theme containing the image you want to insert 3 Click on the image with the left mouse button and holding the button pressed drag the image into the document 4 Release the mouse button fe Backgrounds E EARI

CELFRAME OFFICE 2008 USER MANUAL

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents